Loading...
Menu
Ebooks   ➡  Fiction  ➡  Fantasy  ➡  Paranormal  ➡  Action & suspense

The Lost Treasure Map Deluxe Book Collection (2017 Edition)

 

 

 

The Lost Treasure Map

Deluxe Book Collection

(2017 Edition)

 

V Bertolaccini

 

 

 

This edition published 2017 by CB

This is a Shakespir edition 2017

 

Copyright Victor Bertolaccini

 

ISBN: 978-1-3100-0352-3

 

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of the copyright owner. Nor can it be circulated in any form of binding or cover other than that in which it is published and without similar condition including this condition being imposed on a subsequent purchaser.

 

All characters in this publication are fictitious and any resemblance to real persons, living or dead, is coincidental.

Part I

 

Novel 1

 

The Lost Treasure Map 7

 

V Bertolaccini

Prologue

 

The Lost Transylvanian Treasure

 

Over centuries ancient Transylvanian legends told of lost treasures being buried away at the ancient Transylvanian castle, and out of the ordinary accounts of events that led to the castle’s construction and the extraordinary wars by its evil deadly occupants, and later of the dormant castle being buried away in the woods, lost in time, and it being a deadly haunted ghost castle.

Inhabitants in villages gave meticulous accounts and warnings of unexplained occurrences in its province.

Early travelers on horseback escaped deadly encounters and many found the remains of countless gypsies and other ancient travelers in the deep dark depths of the woods, surrounding the castle, with signs of many being viciously attacked and chased by deadly horrendous things.

Investigations habitually concealed and disregarded findings and claims of supernatural phenomena, and newspapers concluded it was Transylvanian superstitions, ghost stories, and the desolate region and castle’s hideous presence and evil history.

Early explorers searching for lost treasures, mentioned in old folklore, died carrying out investigations and treasure quests, and few survived, and some told of hideous occurrences and sounds of malicious demons and elementals tormenting the woods and the confines of the ancient castle.

 

 

 

II

 

The Haunted Wood

 

Eisenberg could not tell what it was and if it was the strange dark wood they had entered, altered trees and landscape, or what was there that was so strange, and he searched around him, through the trees, and searched for the vampires.

Their discovery of the wood had been lucky, and he still wondered if the paranormal investigator had got it wrong, as he claimed the wood was perfectly positioned for the vampires to hide in, for them to safely perform their attacks on New York, and the incredible thing about it was it resembled the wood in Transylvania where Dracula’s castle had been, and it was the drawings of it and finding the giant wood on the television and an occurrence there that drew their attention to it.

What they could find out about it gave little, but they had found a structure in it, and though it was old and derelict they were sure it could be where the vampires stayed at night.

Everything confused him and he started to think that just about anything could occur and realize the danger they were in, and there was no reason to believe they could not exist in the light of day, and that they were just night creatures, and as he led Kurt and the paranormal investigator through the dense undergrowth and tress he started to imagine strange dark figures behind trees, and a mysterious distant light, but everything he found was either vegetation, trees, fallen trees, but he started to realize it was starting to get dark, and the time it took to get through the wood, dense undergrowth, was impeding their progress.

Occasionally he heard distant things being violently smashed, but saw powerful wind surges blasting about, and he started to believe it was the wood itself, or the region, and it had a supernatural presence, either from the vampires or something else there, which could be why they had gone there.

What staggered him the most was how dark it would be soon, and he rushed on, and believed that they might be able to achieve their objective and that there would be an eventual conclusion to the event, and events, but the place was shrouded everywhere with increasing denser vegetation and he even started wondering if they could get through it, and in the distant he heard what he was sure were wolves, and it left him trying to contemplate what was there, and at times sounds emerged like they were coming out the ground, and from underground shafts.

 

 

 

III

 

The Vampire Hideout

 

Eisenberg thought supernatural regions existed, and that they had entered something, and when they entered the derelict building he was staggered that anyone could build and stay in such place.

It confused him, what they were doing, after all he had encountered, and now believed existed, compared with before, and he did not know what it was, and just tried to grasp how dangerous it was, and he rushed into the building before it became too dark, and to stop the vampires reviving before they found them, and he kept his eye on Kurt and the paranormal investigator.

He considered all the things he had heard of the supernatural trying to grasp what it was he was missing. He was sure they had discovered more than they realized, and he analyzed everything in a far greater degree.

At the top floor, he stopped suddenly, tiredly and startled by something, and he sensed something, and he moved on slowly, as Kurt and the paranormal investigator followed him, and he heard something somewhere.

For a long time he stared into the dimness recognizing little, as he strolled on, and gasped for a few seconds when he thought he was being watched by something in a region of darkness ahead, and was surprised something appeared there and he saw large box shapes, and kept examining them, and realized that it was tombs, and that they were in the same style as the vampire tombs back at the mansion, and realized that they were placed directly at the central region of the building.

At the tombs he heard silent sounds from something, and realized how dark it was and shifted silently up to them, searching everything everywhere, while he considered putting on his light, but he could give his presence away, if he had not been noticed.

A sudden blast, and explosion of light, left him stunned, while he crept on, and he froze, waiting to die, and die hideously for what he had done, and he stood confused, and saw what looked like a vampire illuminated in bright light standing in front of him, and he wondered what the hell it was, and after examining it closely it looked like a humanoid, and it seemed to welcome him, and he studied it and realized that it was a form of hologram.

It eventually altered, to do something, and do something to itself, and he remained trying to identify it, and he felt energy from it, and sheer power, and it reminded him of the extraterrestrial at the research center, and something about it, which he could not quite grasp.

 

 

 

IV

 

The Lost Time Pod

 

For centuries the energy formation rested trapped under the Earth, and fiercely waiting to leave its confines, and imprisonment, frequently reawakening, with deadly energy surges blasting out.

Its shape inside the energy pod had pulsated when awakened, feeling little awareness, and had found little activity, which it had no real way of checking.

Its energy capsule was molded about it, with only some functions, with little power, and with no proper observations.

It perceived little and its thoughts wandered and it occasionally recollected distorted memories that had turned incomprehensible, from what had led it to its lethal error, and it could barely realize why it had survived or had annihilated itself.

It had activated vague sensors and felt vast unstable energy explosions blast out across dimensions with such force it felt like it threatened to make space and time completely rip apart, and destroy the fabric of space and time, and it had constantly realized it could do little when it had checked if anything had been detected anywhere.

The hideous situation had left it ensnared and recalling the colossal powers it once had and firmly contemplating the dangers and its chances of survival.

Its mission had been unbelievable and it realized how deadly it had been and recalled little of why it had once contemplated there not being any danger.

Its near destruction had amazed it and it frequently realized it had no proper presence and had become a form of unknown energy/formation, altering to something that it never recognized.

It turned invisible, and translucent, and the outer universe vanished from its thoughts, and it occasionally imagined echoes of its voyager functioning and its massive energy pulsations blasting out across the whole of creation.

Its revival attempts sustained, and the Earth and mankind evolved, and it realized its mind-boggling powers were dwindling, and it realized it would one day no longer exist, and it gradually turned itself completely dormant – and for as long as a hundred years – waiting for it to be revived to complete its deadly mission.

 

 

 

I

 

The New York Treasure

Chapter 1

 

Howard Eisenberg’s Treasure

 

The lawyer of Howard Eisenberg rushed in the door and the others were left speechless, and John Eisenberg realized how much Howard Eisenberg had influenced and terrified them, and he watched his uncle’s aged lawyer and his peculiar reactions to everything trying to grasp why he was not reacting the way he should be, and he conclusively recalled him from when he was younger, when he visited his uncle.

The lawyer stopped in front of them and nervously held out a document, and Eisenberg instantly realized how valuable it was, and especially to him, and he knew it had something important.

Amusement appeared on the lawyer’s face and Eisenberg realized again he knew something he should know, and the lawyer bent his head close and opened out the document and peered at it.

When he never did anything Eisenberg glanced over at Kurt shifting out his seat to the window behind him, where he looked down the side of the giant building to the New York traffic below, and the city streets glowing in the dying rays of sunlight, and to the sun sinking into the distant skyline.

Eisenberg shivered when a cold breeze blew across the back of his neck from an open window, and he never moved and kept his eyes fixed on the room and lawyer not wishing to miss anything, and watched the room grow silent, with the suspense, and he studied the six remaining members of the Eisenberg family.

After nothing occurred again they began whispering and adjusting their seats and Eisenberg observed the lawyer anxiously leave and go and get an old video with a typed label out a box, which he showed to them, by rotating it in his hand, with a glint of surprise, followed by sadness, and he stopped in front of them, and Kurt rushed back into his seat.

“Your deceased uncle, Howard Eisenberg,” he announced to them all, “requested that you watch the video …”

He went to the door and signaled someone, who arrived with an old video player television and set it up and keenly took the video off him and gently fitted it into it.

The picture surprised Eisenberg as it was really ancient and with signs of deterioration, with the colors making it resemble an old war movie.

The camera showed his uncle in an office by himself, behind a large desk, puffing away at one of his large cigars, and Eisenberg felt sick looking at it, and shifted in his seat, and wondered how much he inhaled it, and if he would suddenly look sick.

The picture flickered to his amusement, and he studied him wondering what he missed about him as some of the things about him in the papers and the rest of media were unbelievable, and some definitely created by him for effect, and he realized he might never grasp what he was altogether like.

Howard Eisenberg sat back cheekily staring straight into their eyes from the screen and they sat silently, not budging, wondering what he intended, and what the eventual outcome would be.

He sat upright, and stared more deeply, and came to a conclusion, and grabbed a bottle of whiskey and unscrewed the cap, and Eisenberg realized how little objects in it were dated, even though the film was clearly old, and he listened to distant vehicle and voice tones absurdly mingling, and he recalled old memories, and silence seemed to engulf the room.

Howard Eisenberg seemed different somehow and doing something and he tried to grasp what, and saw strange reactions from him to things, and he stared straight at them, and as though he was staring directly at him, like he once had done.

He unhurriedly muttered, “Each one of you will get one of my personal estates … But I want the ownership of the businesses, and wealth, to go to one of you, who’ll do as I wish!”

He sat back and looked through documents on his table and Eisenberg sat staggered wondering how much he had profited, and tried to recall his estates and where he stayed, and from what he had heard, and the media, and realized he never even knew where he stayed, but knew he had lived on his own, and had not remarried, and he wondered which of them he intended his businesses and wealth to go to, and why he insisted one person should run them, and why he had never allowed any of them to be involved with them.

Eisenberg thought of his six cousins there – and who was the most experienced, and realized he had to have made a mistake.

Eisenberg realized he should have done what he once intended to do and become experienced in the businesses Howard Eisenberg had, and not just become the private detective that he had become, and he realized how lucky he was that he had actually got one of his estates, and for a few seconds wondered if they were far bigger than he imagined, and that Howard Eisenberg had given them what they wanted, and he never needed to give them the companies.

To his surprise the lawyer left the room and returned and gave each of them an envelope, with their name on it, and kept a large brown envelope.

Eisenberg quickly opened his and glanced at the documents inside and saw he got some form of country mansion, which surely was away out in some desolate rural region, and he was not so sure he had really profited.

Howard Eisenberg looked up from what he had been doing and stared straight at them again, and the others stopped discussing what they got, and Eisenberg realized two had got large city buildings, and that they might have profited far more.

“After considerable thought,” Howard Eisenberg continued nervously, “I’ve been unable to come to a conclusion on who should get the businesses …”

Eisenberg gasped and sat looking confused, wondering what he wanted, and what he wanted the person to do, and if he was given it if he could carry it out and he considered getting someone else to run it for him and he wondered why he never did that himself, and what the hell he was up to, and he sat watching him, and studying him, and saw how mysterious he was, and wondered how he had managed to accumulate his wealth, and recalled stuff about his accomplishments.

Howard Eisenberg searched through his documents and threw them over at his side, and shouted, “I’ve decided to choose the person I want with a little game I’ve come up with, giving you a little adventure … I’ll give you a clue that’ll lead to a harder one, followed by other clues, which will take you to a treasure chest, and the person who returns with the contents shall win … The first clue is: A lake I’d avoid. In a giant skull.”

 

Chapter 2

 

The Search

 

At the edge of his vision Eisenberg watched the traffic getting thicker as the taxi rushed on, and the driver give quicker glances, and he listened to the loud voices and horns mingle with engines, and he opened his laptop and watched the news.

Beside him he glanced over at Kurt as he continued checking information, and he realized how much he had changed since he had seen him in Howard Eisenberg’s lawyer’s office, and he realized that he had been working far more than he had thought and had surely been losing sleep.

It was crazy! He himself had searched everywhere he could for the answer to the clue, and every lake he could discover with anything like a skull, and had even started dreaming of finding it, just for the sensation of it. They all intended to get it somehow!

He pulled out a small flask and downed some whisky and relaxed against the back of the seat and watched cars going by.

He now could not grasp what Howard Eisenberg was talking about, even though it sounded simple, and he wondered if what was there still existed, and why it would not be damaged if it was buried outside.

He had to have checked every lake! He had even been dreaming of lakes, and he considered if the skull was something else than he thought it was, and he realized the entire search would have been useless if it was, and he recalled Howard Eisenberg liked playing games and he became sure it was his main motivation.

Although he kept realizing the first clue had been mentioned as it being easy to get, and he realized they were just not checking something. He recalled the lawyer’s reactions when he questioned him on the phone on the previous morning, and that he was actually scared of something that might occur, and he was sure he could be sacked or something for doing something.

While he shifted near the window he heard a car door open and instantaneously recognized a black car along the road. The car belonged to another private investigator he knew and he watched him wave over at him when he spotted him, and he realized why! It was surely the fact that some of the occurrences got in the news. Though it was not really about the treasure quest and about Howard Eisenberg and his death.

He had no idea what the outcome would be, and he considered using all the investigators he had ever met to get to the source of what they were looking for. He attempted to comprehend what he had suggested, from the insignificant message.

Kurt glared over at him for a moment with some urgency, and swiftly returned to what he was doing.

He had chosen to join up with Kurt for a reason, and that he could help him greatly get what he wanted.

Both had searched libraries everywhere for clues, and for unknown lakes, and anything resembling one, and he started to realize that one of the others could find it first after all, and he wondered what would happen if they found the clue first and they never got to see the next clue, and if the person who found it never got the next clue, and he was sure that if nobody found the treasure chest he had left that he had an alternative plan and he wondered if his uncle was ludicrous enough to give it away to someone else.

The whole event was unbelievable, and he could hardly get any sleep, and he could hardly believe anyone could do such a thing, with so much a stake, and realized how dangerous things could become, and he even started checking files and information on his other five relatives, checking what they were like, and if they could become dangerous, and in the end left it, as he realized the information the other investigators gathered gave little on them, and little that he never already knew.

Suddenly he spotted Kurt sitting upright with his eyes wide, staring at something on his laptop, and Eisenberg listened to something he could barely hear that Kurt was listening to, and he even tried to block out the outer sounds of loud vehicles with his hands about his ears.

He was sure he was listening to the news, about something, and rushed over beside him, and straightaway realized it was not major news and insignificant regional occurrences, and was about to return to his seat when he spotted a lake where there were birds flying about everywhere, and to his surprise were attacking people and he examined it closely trying to get what they were doing, but he could not grasp what was happening or why Kurt now insisted something was occurring that he should see.

It was incredible and he suddenly spotted Kurt’s eyes staring at a particular spot near the shore at the opposite side of the lake, where he saw a large white rock was buried away in the trees, and that it looked like a giant skull.

 

Chapter 3

 

The Mysterious Lake

 

Eisenberg shuddered as he considered the dangers that existed and his gaze went out across the small lake to a group of trees and to where the large white skull rock was buried away, searching for any disturbances and signs that the birds were about there, and even though he had seen them on the news, he could not grasp why the birds were classed as dangerous.

Television and newspaper reporters about the car park, and his sides, were leaving, and he wondered what he missed, and tried to grasp why the birds had been attacking them and where they went, and he searched everywhere about the landscape for activity, or birds and wildlife, and hidden dangers.

It was even as though they thought they needed some form of protection from something, and he considered if there were dangerous species that he had not noticed, and if predator birds were a danger if they attacked them, and he saw Kurt coming over from behind some trees behind him and was amazed to see his other relatives appear one by one and follow him, and he started to realize that they might be joining up to make an agreement, which he knew he should have predicted at the start, as if one person found the next clue they would all be out the game, as there was no way for them to move on and getting the next clue, unless they found out and followed them about.

The game was basically stupid and he wondered why he had not packed the whole thing in, and he realized that he could just follow the others around, and have them investigated, and perhaps get something out of it if any of them were successful.

The lake itself was far too small and empty to have more than a few visitors, perhaps there for its isolation, and he realized it was not classed as a lake to them, and he realized he still had not found it marked anywhere and wondered how they were supposed to have found it, if it had not been on the news, and he felt annoyed realizing it had been classed as an easy clue.

Eisenberg sat on a boulder and studied the white skull rock in the trees and wondered why they were sure it was anything, and not just their minds, and imagining it looked like it, and he followed Kurt and the others as they left and started walking around the shore to it.

On their approach to it he suddenly spotted people hidden away about the lake that seemed to be doing things and he tried to identify what they were doing and if they were connected to the media or something, and he stood and watched the others rush over to the white skull rock trying to identify anything they could and they started searching it, and anything they found.

Near the shore he watched fishermen casting lines and to his surprise he spotted large pigeons and crows all sitting on branches of nearby trees, and he started to realize how many of them there were and studied their fixed features and saw their vicious facial appearances, wondering if they were vicious or looked that way.

He wondered how much a menace they were, and if they had nests or something nearby, and if they could do something, and he gasped when he saw some attack other birds, and suddenly they all started shrieking, and started gliding up into the air, and flew straight towards the fishermen, and he wondered if he should shout over to them or something.

One of the fishermen looked up in horror and saw them, and shaded his eyes from the bright sunshine, and stood studying them, and they dived down at them, and big black crows dived-bombed him and flew straight at them, and they started waving their hands and arms about, throwing them away from them if they got near, and hundreds of them started attacking and screeching and the fishermen picked up sticks and waved them in the air, and threw objects.

Eisenberg realized they were not a real threat and some of the fishermen started to think it was hilarious and he watched others shouting and waving their fists and swearing at them.

He tried to grasp what they were actually doing and why they had not been discovered before and why they had suddenly been reported to the media.

Something he could not quite grasp that was there, and he was sure the fishermen and others had clearly visited there before and had not been confronted, and he realized it was not nests, and he watched fishermen furiously waving their fists as they left in a large swarm.

For a moment he thought they spotted him but saw the swarm head over to a couple romantically rowing along the lake’s edge, and race towards them, and he was surprised when they reached them and that they splattered them with excrement and flew away, and the man waved his fist and overturned the boat, throwing them into the water, and he heard Kurt shout from behind him that he had found something in the mouth of the large skull rock.

 

Chapter 4

 

The Ancient Mansion

 

“Where the hell’s this?” Eisenberg gulped, as he woke, looking about him, and out the taxi window, seeing nothing but blackness.

“Where you’re going to!” the driver smirked, searching the blackness ahead in the dim headlight, as the car shifted slowly along a farm lane, and Eisenberg realized he had blown it again.

He sat transfixed, and felt a sensation of happiness when the moon emerged ahead and its light probed that region of the road, and deep through the surrounding dark clouds radiating and he crouched over when he spotted a tomb shape he was sure was the mansion, and mansion Howard Eisenberg had given him, and he felt furious it was so far out in nowhere, from what he saw, and realized he would have a bad time selling the thing.

In the darkness and moonlight it looked like a haunted building.

The taxi eventually came to a slow halt at a wall and he considered returning home, as it was nothing like he expected, and he could not forgive Howard Eisenberg for giving him the thing and he sat considering what to do. He originally intended to go and see it before it got dark but he underestimated things and it got dark, and in the end he just paid the driver and jumped out the taxi with his bag and marched away along a lane going to it, watching the surrounding wood, and the taxi left and drove away into the distance, and he wondered what he would do if it was the wrong building and the owners never had a phone.

It was freezing, and the visible landscape was a mess of wild vegetation and trees.

What he saw of the dark shape of the building was heavenly and deadly and he wondered why everything was such a mess, and he realized that Howard Eisenberg could not stayed there and he wondered why he had bought such place.

At the door he knocked when he saw it never had a doorbell and eventually he removed the keys he got and tried them until he found one that fitted the lock and swiftly entered it, and realized he had finally visited the place and he started to explore what he could see in the darkness, and he realized how ancient the place was, but had new things added to it and he felt deep satisfaction to discover it actually had a light and hunted down the light switch.

Once the light was on he stood dazzled trying to get why Howard Eisenberg bought such a place, as nothing added up, and wondered if he had bought and got stuck with it many years ago, before he got his empire.

As he wandered about he swiped away webs going across corridors and doorways, and he found what looked like a living room and switched on the light and sat on an ancient form of sofa, which creaked and cracked up one side, and he sat back with a sad expression staring an ancient painting over the fireplace, covered in dust and webs, and he studied the figure in the portrait with some amazement and gasped when he saw the eyes, and gasped at the age of it and rushed over to see it up close.

It looked so ancient, and centuries old, and the person wore clothes from centuries ago, and he knew the person had to be a distinguished nobleman of wealth and power.

He studied his sword he had at his waist and saw marks he was sure were bloodstains, and sat back down considering if it was from some war.

The place looked altered from a far earlier structure and had been repaired and altered and he wondered if it had a high value to collectors, and he realized that he now wanted more than ever to discover the treasure chest Howard Eisenberg had hidden away, and he sat back contemplating everything he could, and the clue they found in the giant stone skull at the lake, which was: In The Oldest Grave.

He was sure none of them knew what the clue meant or anything, and that it was too vague, but he was sure they thought they would find it because of its simplicity and their detection methods were improving, and he was sure they were searching on their own again in an attempt to get it for themselves, and even Kurt seemed to be up to something.

He had been searching graves all over the place for days, and started to doubt he would get it again!

He decided to find somewhere to sleep in the building, even though it was not late, and he wondered what the place would be like at midnight, and decided to properly check the place out in the morning, and try and find a way of selling the place, and as he looked about he spotted an ancient staircase along the corridor and as he marched over to it he decided to try and get the lawyer to show the old video over again, as he had done earlier in his career, as a private investigator, and he would try and film the video if he could not get a copy of it, as he was sure there would be things in it that he had not noticed, and he also wanted to question the lawyer about Howard Eisenberg, and especially about what he thought he had been doing, and he was also sure he might be able to make a deal with him and get the location of the treasure chest.

 

Chapter 5

 

The Morning

 

Eisenberg woke early and left to go back to New York and was walking up the road when he turned and saw the full size of the mansion, and was staggered, as it was colossal, and he started to realize its true value, and was left confused as he had no idea of how such an ancient structure could be built like it and realized most of it had been built in more modern times and made to look like the original structure.

What fascinated him was him sleeping there thinking its size and value was far less, and it was colossal, and he was sure it had a value as a historical building. Yet he could not explain how it could be there, and be the age it seemed, and why it had been built there, and all he saw in the surrounding landscape was a river behind it, which would have been there for the occupants.

Eisenberg rubbed his hands and shoved them deep into the pockets of his thick jacket, and was sure it was colder there than it was in the city, and wondered if he could sell the thing as he could not imagine living in it, and wondered again why Howard Eisenberg wanted it and realized it had to be worth something, but why had he not sold it.

It was like some form of entity and hideous, as he walked back to it, and walked around it, and at times he was sure it had deadly things behind its black windows, and cursed Howard Eisenberg.

The sun faintly shone over it and through gaps in the thick walls, and through windows, casting long shadows from the trees over it, and he was sure it resembled some form of castle.

He studied distant clearings in the surrounding wood, in the mess of vegetation, and saw structures, and at a higher point at its side he saw there was empty land further out, and he shifted along to the nearby river, and realized he may have picked up the structures identity wrongly and that it could be a vast country mansion built for someone that wanted away from city life, where there was isolation and desolate wilderness.

Though size and amount of rooms was astonishing and he realized it must have been for a lot of people and servants at one point, and he wondered what sort of life his uncle had led and what people he had known.

What amazed him was he still did know what to do with it and what it was worth, and he returned to the front of it, and entered the trees, going through the wood surrounding it, considering it, going towards a structure he saw.

The words of the clue echoed through his mind, as it had done before he had arrived there, and he had almost done in his sleep, and he suddenly recalled a strange dream he had entered in the mansion of him dreamily going through strange graves, and as he recalled things he watched the structure he was walking to emerge across his front.

He rhythmically crunched through layers of branches and thought of it as a type of mansion pavilion and saw columns of stone going about it like a Greek temple and at the other side he spotted gravestones, and small ancient graveyard, and he walked over to the nearest graves, curious of what was written on them.

 

Chapter 6

 

The Ancient Graveyard

 

The words carved into the stone of one of the large gravestones left Eisenberg staggered and searching the surrounding landscape for signs of anyone, and he searched areas of mud and for signs humans had recently been there, and he read the words over again and realized that he had to be imagining what he thought and that it was just an amazing coincidence.

Suddenly he stepped back, and gasped, positive the words on it were certainly the clue, but he could not grasp what they were doing there, in a small graveyard out in the middle of nowhere.

The words In The Oldest Grave were the only words on the grave, and he stood hypnotized by it, and realized he was tired from marching through the vegetation, and calmed himself down, and thought what it meant and gasped when he thought of the only thing he could do was search the grave, and wondered who the hell had a grave with those words on it, without a name.

When he thought of the money and the businesses he realized he needed to check it as he could not let it go, as he would be the only one to answer it and be able to move on in the treasure hunt, and surely solve the other answers someday, which he surely would do by some means.

He had the right to do it as the property and graves belonged to him, and he wondered what the hell Howard Eisenberg had been up to, and if he had been there and supervised it being put there.

For a long time he strolled around in the morning sunshine examining other graves and words engraved on them, and proved it was the only abnormal grave there, and he checked the mansion structure through the trees, and finally returned to it with an old spade he found near it and started digging it up, while he watched strange crows watching him from the trees.

Though the words were there he could not grasp what they meant, as it clearly was not the oldest grave, and his mind was keyed into trying to decipher them as a clue, and he thought they perhaps were in a riddle only comprehensible to someone else.

What had surprised him about the graves was the amount of them for one building, and he decided to check the place out and check libraries, and as he dug away at the ground of the grave, throwing the soil in a pile nearby, where he could quickly return it back after he got what he wanted, he wondered if any of the graves belonged to his ancestors, and if not who had they been.

Who did Howard Eisenberg buy the place off and why? Why the hell did he want the place? Was it just an early business deal? Did he overestimate the value?

It was incredible as he had been sitting inside the mansion on the previous night trying to figure where it had been and how to get what he had been looking for, and it had been sitting out in the grounds of the mansion.

He realized that Howard Eisenberg must have thought he would find it eventually! He realized that the game of solving the clues and his treasure hunt was designed not to be answered in a few days, as he had made out, but over a long time, and that they were lucky in discovering the small lake, which had not even been marked down on many maps for some reason, and he was sure they had been really lucky.

The soil was hard and had surely not been put there in a long time, and he recalled how old the video of Howard Eisenberg had been, and he was sure it could have been from then.

Howard Eisenberg did everything for a reason and he could not grasp what the hell he was up to, and why he originally wanted it done, and if he changed and forgot about the video and plan.

There were things on the other graves and suggestions of war, and the civil war, and the usual things, and the grave and its strange wording was all that was different, and as he dug faster and harder into the ground he wondered if it was talking about the other graves and was mentioning a grave that was older, and perhaps not marked or known as such, which someone else knew the location of and the grave was put there to indicate its existence for some reason, or had Howard Eisenberg seen the grave and remembered it and had used it for some reason.

The graveyard was ghostly beside such a building, and he watched the building glow in the sunlight, through the trees – and watched crows sitting on branches sleepily watching.

He slowly became exhausted and thought of climbing out the hole, and was about to rest, when the shovel hit solid wood, and he immediately started cleaning muck away from it, and banged it hard with the shovel and heard it was hollow, and the grave.

While he rested he saw it was a normal old grave, and he heard a distant noise and saw a crow react and followed its gaze to a strange black shape away in the distance, and saw that it was just a dark tree.

When he removed all the muck from the coffin he started shoving the thick wooden cover off, and something stopped the lid being shoved any further, and he spotted the edge of a boulder sticking out blocking it and he gave it a quick heavy shove and pushed it away, and shifted it away, and lifted the lid off the coffin and threw it over to the side, and rested.

In its dark interior he tiredly examined an old dried out object and realized it was part of a tree trunk, and he sat back wondering what it was doing there, and thought of the trouble he would have filling the grave back in and wondered if he would end up staying another night at the mansion, and realized he had little food left, and spotted a tube of translucent plastic buried away in the coffin and grabbed it, astonished at seeing such a modern looking object there, and spotted a rolled up piece of parchment in its interior.

 

Chapter 7

 

The Third Clue

 

Eisenberg stood confounded, examining the piece of paper, which he had rolled out, from the translucent tube, with his eyes fixed on the words on it: Third Clue: The Treasure Map.

Suddenly he spotted a dark shadow over the grave and looked up startled and saw and man standing over him, looking down into the grave, just staring.

In seconds he saw a way to climb fast out the hole, and watched the man shift and hold something out, and he tried to identify it, and for a few seconds thought it was a gun.

“Well, where do you want it?” the man moaned.

He stared up at him and it and saw it was a brown box and he did not know why but he just reached up and took it, and instantly realized it was a parcel with his name on it, and the man introduced himself as his postman, and Eisenberg climbed out.

“You’re the postman?” he replied.

“You were not in, and I needed a signature and heard you over here at work …”

He signed for it and watched the postal worker march away into the trees, over to the mansion, where he saw his distant van.

What was incredible was he did not know what to be the most surprised at! The clue and finding it there, or the postman and the parcel with his name on it, and he shifted over to the old structure at the side of the graveyard and sat in a seat.

He had found the clue, and realized the man never seen it from where he was, and realized he could have recognized him from the newspapers, and their treasure hunt, and he considered the parcel with surprise, wondering what the hell it was and who knew he was there, and recalled he had not purchased anything or could think of anything that could be sent to him.

Even though he had found the third clue he realized how hard it would be solving what it was, and did not know what to do about the others as they would be searching for the third clue for the rest of their lives if he never found it and never told them of it, and he realized that Kurt would never forgive him, and he just could not realize how to solve it, as he had been lucky so far.

He tiredly looked at the box as he started filling the grave hole with the soil and when he finished he covered it over with grass and branches until it looked the same and he sat down and opened the parcel, totally confused of its origins.

 

Chapter 8

 

The Mysterious Parcel

 

Eisenberg sat in the back of the taxi cab as it returned to New York confounded at the occurrences that had occurred and sensed he was missing far more than he thought, and what was to come, and knew he would not grasp what, and continued examining the folded documents that were in the parcel the postman gave him.

He realized who had sent the parcel and that the documents were from Howard Eisenberg’s lawyer and he found a note written on one document from the lawyer explaining the documents and that they came with the mansion, and gave historical accounts and a brief history of it.

He was surprised it was built far later than he estimated, and he could hardly believe it, and discovered it was built from large sections from another far older building, and he wondered why there was nothing on the original building, and in the end realized that there could easily be nothing on it, and the era it came from, and he was delighted to find plans of the building’s interior, with vaguely drawn maps of each floor, and the rooms and corridors.

What was incredible was his thoughts of it had altered greatly from what he had found there on the previous night, and he realized the amount of land he owned, from a map and a document, and that it went out for miles about it, and he knew it was desolate, and felt happy that the mail was being delivered there, and that there was a nearby small town only a few miles along the road marked on it.

He was sure he could get Howard Eisenberg’s lawyer to show the video over again and he looked through the map of the building for where he thought he saw a phone marked on it, and examined it when he found it, and went over it searching corridors until he found how to get to it, and was staggered when he recalled the mess the place was in, and how long the place had not been used for.

He considered what to do about finding the third clue and did not want to give it away until he was positive of the outcome, and he would never forgive himself if one of the others got the answer to the clue and found the treasure and he was sure if such an occurrence was going to happen he could make some deal before giving it away.

He had to search everywhere he could first and give it to them as a last resort, and he had to get a copy of the video or get to see it again as he was sure he could find something on it, or something he had forgotten, and an explanation of what was occurring and a suggestion of why the clue was in the grave.

 

Chapter 9

 

The Video Replay

 

Eisenberg rested up against the window of Howard Eisenberg’s lawyer’s office and silently watched the New York traffic rush by below and he shivered when he felt the coldness from the window on his back, and he turned and kept his eyes fixed on the room not wishing to miss anything, as the lawyer rushed into the room.

Eisenberg eventually gasped when the lawyer stopped in front of him with a strange sad expression, and a glint of amusement emerged on his face and Eisenberg realized his uncle could have done something to them, and he watched the lawyer anxiously go and get the old video out of a box, and immediately showed it to him, rotating it, and Eisenberg rushed over into a seat when someone arrived with the video player television, and gently fitted the video into it.

The picture showed Howard Eisenberg in his office by himself, looking like a hawk lurking over his large desk, smoking a large smoking cigar, and Eisenberg convulsed recalling the last one he smoked, and started studying everything Howard Eisenberg did, in far greater detail, and when the lawyer left the room he shifted right up to the screen.

There had to be something there, and he studied everything, and what he did and the way he did it.

Some of the things he had heard about Howard Eisenberg in newspapers and the rest of the media was unbelievable, and most surely created for some effect, and he realized he might never fully grasp what he was like, but he knew he might get what he wanted elsewhere, and clues about the treasure he hid.

He sat strangely deeply staring at him, and he wondered what the hell he was up to, and what a top businessman like him thought like and would want to achieve.

He seemed different somehow and doing something else that he could not quite grasp and he looked everywhere trying to grasp it, and saw strange reactions from him to things, and he followed his eyes straight down, and nervously reacted to something, and he watched him move something not on the screen away to the side of him as though he realized he had put something in the picture that he had not noticed.

Eisenberg immediately rushed up to the screen and replayed it back until he got the best picture of it, and of a piece of paper that looked older than it should, and altered the controls of the video player trying to clear the picture up and saw it was a sort of map, and Eisenberg took a photo of it, and turned on the video again.

As Howard Eisenberg looked through documents on his table Eisenberg sat staggered and recalling what he had heard of him back then from newspapers, and wondered why he had never allowed any of them to get involved with his businesses or him.

To his surprise the lawyer rushed up behind him, and told him, “We saw you examining what was on the table on the video …”

Eisenberg wondered if he had cameras monitoring him as well.

“After considerable thought,” the lawyer explained, “I’ve decided to help you out! Which I’m sure your uncle wanted … I’ve seen a similar item you examined in documents he left in our vaults. Which rightly are yours anyway!”

Eisenberg was slightly confused, wondering what he thought he had been looking for, and what was there, and he realized there could very well be something he wanted in the vaults, and he wondered why he had not told them of it and if the person that found the treasure and got the ownership of the businesses would be given everything.

While he followed him down to the vaults, going down in the lift, he considered what he would do if he got the businesses and if he would be given someone to run it for him, who did what he wanted, and again he wondered how Howard Eisenberg had managed to accumulate so much wealth, and recalled all the stuff he had heard about his accomplishments.

In the dim vault room Eisenberg sat with the documents he was given and examined them surprised, and surprised there was so few, as he had expected to be sitting for hours, perhaps days there searching through them, and realized by what he was given that the lawyer had given him only the documents he thought he needed, and he searched through them noting information about Howard Eisenberg and his companies, which amazed him that they gave nothing about what he wanted, but at the bottom of them he found an sealed envelope, and opened it, wondering why the lawyer thought the document that he had seen on the video was there, and he found a small map inside, with writing on the top saying fourth clue.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Return to the Mansion

 

Eisenberg turned pale when the mansion appeared at the front of the taxi, seeing it emerge out of the night.

The driver smirked, when he examined his face in his mirror, and Eisenberg watched with amusement as his face changed and he gasped when he saw the mansion emerge out of the blackness ahead in his headlights, and the vehicle slowed and he shifted along the farm lane.

He was transfixed when it stopped outside, and Eisenberg wondered what the hell he was doing, and felt a sensation of sadness thinking of his uncle living at the place.

With his bags resting at his feet, he watched the taxi race away into the horizon and saw the furniture truck with the rest of his stuff appear.

He watched the speed they started removing all his furniture and gear into the building and he wondered why the hell he was moving there, and recalled he was keeping his old place, and he would surely sell the old mansion quickly after it was cleaned up, and he realized that the workmen had entered the building and never used any keys, and he wondered why the door was unlocked when he had locked it.

At the door he examined the lock and door, as the workmen rushed in and out with his stuff, giving occasional gasps at the place, and he tried to grasp why the place looked so deadly, and he had never really seen anything like it before.

When they had finished, he watched them shut the vehicle up and leave, and the moon emerge overhead and glow over the road, and deep into the surrounding clouds radiating it, and watched the vehicle as it rushed away.

He stared up at the dark mansion Howard Eisenberg had given him and wondered if it would be the end of him, and he was furious it was so far out in nowhere, and so deadly, realizing how hard it would be selling the thing.

In the darkness and moonlight it looked dangerous, and he recalled searching for all the information he could get on it, and if there had been any deaths.

In the end he decided use his idea of bringing in someone else, and Kurt, and he realized the others might surely have realized he was up to something, because he had not turned up to search with them, and he was sure that the lawyer might tell them, but he now had the map.

 

Chapter 11

 

The Historic Building

 

The following morning, after breakfast, Eisenberg explored the mansion using the plans of the building the lawyer sent him in the parcel, and he wrote in details about things on it in pencil, and realized how enormous the place was, and the size of a colossal football pitch, and as high as a high five-story building.

He could not believe the value of it, and that he owned it, and thought of different ways of fixing the problems it had, and repairing and modernizing all the ancient, weather-beaten, damage, and he thought of turning it into a known historic building as well.

He studied sections of the walls that had fallen in, and estimated the repair costs. Some of walls were made of immense square boulders, which he could not recall seeing before.

He realized he would have to learn far more on restoration.

The surroundings had many trees, and he stared out windows writing down what trees should be removed, and realized he would have to check the surrounding landscape in every direction.

At the front there was a single door, but at the back he found there were two. One at its kitchen, which had been modernized at some point, and all the equipment still worked, and just needed cleaned up, and he started cleaning everything he would use and filled the cupboards and fridge with food and drink.

Further along he checked out the other door, at the corner of the mansion, at the right side, and was surprised none of the keys fitted it, and was surprised to find the lock had been actively used, and had fresh marks on the rusted metal.

The building had corridors everywhere on every floor going all over the place and he was surprised to find himself lost even with the building plan and he wandered around exploring rooms everywhere, and entered strange eerie rooms with strange furniture and objects, and entered them like he was visiting them, as though he never belonged there and wondered what their identities were, and he tried to grasp the origins of things he found.

A small staircase was next to the kitchen, as well as the other normal one near the front, and many of the rooms and floors left him confused as he wandered about, still getting regularly lost, and many times he gave up, and was left confused how he would find his way about and identify things.

To his surprise he found a room, directly above the front door, on the top floor, which was perfectly clean and with modern furniture, which he was sure belonged to Howard Eisenberg, which he realized he had wanted to find, and had forgotten, and in the end he decided to leave the room and explore it later.

The room fascinated him and it looked as though it had recently been cleaned, and he started to believe that he had actually lived there, instead of at the other buildings he had, but in the end he realized he would have lived at many locations, and perhaps went there when he wanted to get away from the city.

 

Chapter 12

 

The Haunting

 

The place mystified Eisenberg, and he did not know what was there, and he started using a local taxi to visit the closest shops to it, for provisions, where he asked locals in a bar about the place, trying to solve something he could not quite grasp, and in the end was surprised when a taxi driver told him that he had seen Howard Eisenberg at the mansion about a year ago, and he believed he had been there alone.

Eisenberg questioned him all the way back to the mansion and was surprised that they thought the place had ghosts, and that a form of haunting took place.

Eisenberg did not know what to think, and left it open for investigation, and started searching for cleaners or a cleaning company to clean the place up, but the location was far too far out.

While rummaging around in a storeroom cupboard under the front stairs he was amazed to find a phone and that it was working, and he was able to make calls, and realized someone, surely Howard Eisenberg, had dumped the phone there from a nearby desk, where he placed it again.

He was sure Howard Eisenberg had lived there for the isolation and had perhaps got sick of the outside world and phone calls and dumped it there out the way.

He immediately phoned Kurt up and told him of his discovery of the third and fourth clue, and asked him to join him, and he realized after the call how happy he was that he would be there, and also realized that he now never thought he could solve the last clue on his own, as he had studied the treasure map many times over and had found nothing, and had no real ideas left about solving it, and he wondered if he should even try and take the lawyer into the deal, as he was sure he knew something.

He excitedly swiped away webs still over the front of the corridor and front doorways, and considered getting someone to put up a television aerial.

In what he considered was a living room he switched on the light and cleared out the dimness, and rested into the ancient form of sofa, which he had recently cleaned, which creaked and cracked when he moved, and his vision fell on the ancient painting over the fireplace, now cleaned of dust and webs, and he studied the figure in the portrait with some amazement when his imagination kicked in and he stared straight into the haunting eyes, and once again wondered when it was done.

It seemed extraordinarily ancient, and absolutely centuries old, and the person was wearing clothes from many centuries ago, and he knew the person had to be a distinguished nobleman of great wealth and power, and he was startled that it was real, and the person was painted while something tremendous was occurring.

His sword was fixed to him at his waist with blood on it, and he realized a way he might be able to trace it to a war.

 

Chapter 13

 

The Haunted Mansion

 

Something strange woke Eisenberg in the middle of the night, and he opened his eyes wide open, stunned by it, and felt something had occurred that he could not place and tried to recall if he dreamt of something and realized that he had not, and tried to recall why he had awakened and if something had influenced it, and recalled some form of sound, and when he recalled it more he realized just how strange it was, and could not grasp what it was or anything.

He had no recognition of anything or anything happening before he had gone to sleep, and rested against the bed, and tightly wrapped the blankets around him, feeling the cold. The building definitely now had a deep coldness from something and he tried to trace any winds getting through and felt some sort of breeze gently blowing against his face from somewhere, and he jumped out of bed and started searching the window for any gaps.

At the window he moved his hand about the edges feeling for anything, searching the hideous dark wood about the front, and suddenly realized the cold air was blowing against his neck, and he swiftly turned as though there was something there and slowly followed it over to the door where he felt it coming through gaps in the door.

In the outer corridor he felt it coming from inside the building somewhere and followed it, in the darkness, confused as it was not where anything was, and he wondered if it was an open window.

The coldness he felt there surprised him as it was far more intense than it should be, and it had not been there before, or had been marked on the weather forecast, and further along the corridor he looked in a room and saw nothing, and grew determined to trace the source and what was behind it.

He recalled a dream he had and it was strange and he believed that it and his other dreams were influenced by the mansion and its surroundings, and they were mainly incomprehensible and he kept wondering why they had occurred! They never made sense and were with freakish things, and he never did anything in them.

There were rooms all about his front that were on the left and right side of the corridor and he came to the stairs on one side, where he felt a more powerful breeze, and where the wind was coming from.

He noted the air was far colder and fresher and with a scent of vegetation from outside, and as he went down the stairs he remembered himself earlier and being in a huddled posture with his blankets tightly wrapped about him, and reacting to the cold.

At the bottom floor he walked along and watched the dark sky outside through a window near the door and the darkness and he tried to detect where the now vague breeze was coming from and realized it was not coming from there and was coming from behind him, and from further along the lower corridor, where he came to a torch he had, and walked along slowly behind its beam of light, and realized how peculiar the place was, compared to what he normally had, and he realized that he even liked it, and liked exploring it, even at night, and all the unexplored rooms and corridors and hidden mysteries, and its historical and unknown past and thoughts of the discoveries that could be there, and the fact that he had found one of the clues at the cemetery outside in the grounds.

He realized he had never known so much isolation and emptiness and had spent all his life in city regions, and it was mysterious and unexplored and great untouched things existed.

In his normal life things he encountered were too repetitive and he relished finding abnormal things to do and explore, especially when they had new outcomes and findings, and he wondered if it was why his uncle had bought the place, as he must have been stuck in congested cities and places packed with people.

He moved into a side corridor, going sideways, where the breeze came from, where he had not been before, and he soon realized nobody had been in a very long time, where there were ancient webs covering it everywhere, from one side to the other, and ancient dust covering the carpet that was untouched.

He came to a room and switched off his light and went up to the window and stared out into the darkness and ancient wood, with shivers running through him, from the breeze and cold, and thoughts of the cold outside, and the deadly things that he could encounter, and he spotted the small graveyard hidden away in the trees, and saw the moon appear through clouds and illuminate it.

It was like another world to him! It was also like he was put there to explore there, and it was like a world thousands of light years away and he wondered what existed out in the grounds and realized he should explore there soon as he had found the grave there and there could be more.

An array of loud door knocks made him jump and realize he was not alone there and he gasped and wondered who it could be, and he stood staggered with his mouth open, and considered if he should ignore it, and realized it had to be the front door, and that he should try to see who was there and as he shifted away he realized where the breeze was coming from and that the window had been recently partially opened and not closed properly, and he saw that it could not be used to enter there, as it never opened completely out.

He shifted back along the corridor, to the front door, and when the knock appeared again, but more loudly, he came to a standstill, staggered, as he was starting to think it was just one of the strange sounds the place generated, and it left him confused at its identity.

The floorboards creaked and cracked far further than he noticed and he was reminded of the age of the place, and he wondered again who had constructed it and had done it to such an extent.

He shifted along and right up to the door, examining it, and unlocked the door and yanked open the thick heavy wooden door, which had been crafted by hand, and he stood staring out into the darkness, seeing nothing but consistent blackness, and slowly spotted a black figure standing glaring at him from the darkness at the side of the door.

Eisenberg stood silently, as he thought he saw a gunman with a gun in his jacket pocket pointed at him, about to shoot, and stood waiting to be killed, and then wondered who the hell was there, and for a few seconds thought it was an apparition.

“What’s up?” a voice spoke, and he recognized it straightaway and removed his light from his pocket and lit it and confirmed it was Kurt, standing there looking strange, studying him in an entirely different light, and Eisenberg wondered what the hell he was doing.

“Well, are you going to invite me in?” Kurt moaned, marching in the door, and he watched him turn on the inside light.

“How the hell did you get there?” he asked, curiously.

“Taxi! I had a lot of work, and left late … You got food supplies? If not I’ll get them tomorrow …”

Eisenberg examined him in the brighter interior light, and he seemed somehow different, and he just nodded and took him away over to the kitchen.

 

Chapter 14

 

The Disturbance

 

When Eisenberg flicked open his eyes he never even recognized where he was! He had little memory of what had happened before he went to bed, and felt really tired, and examined his room for anything, and he sat upright and turned on the light, and wondered if it was caused by his lack of sleep or lack of food.

In the distance he suddenly heard strange sounds that confused him, and he could not place what it was or where it was coming from, and he recalled a dream he had and was sure it had been in his dream.

He recalled more of the dream with surprise and realized how incomprehensible it had been and he wondered if he had imagined it, and if it was caused by the occurrences and strange mansion. It made little sense and had been made up of freakish things.

He liked how well preserved the room was, for such an era it was from.

Kurt was in the room next to his and he heard him shifting about doing something.

He mildly amused him, as he tried to recall a similar situation, as he looked different and as though he had done something dangerous or something, and he could not believe it was a reaction to him arriving late and surprising him as he had, and he realized he could have done something but started to think it could be something to do with his other relatives searching for the treasure.

He recalled him reacting to heat in the kitchen as though he had been in intense cold for a long time, and he was surprised the haunted look of the mansion had little affect on him.

He was peculiar now and liked it more than he should, and he especially liked it when he had given him information on his search for the treasure, and especially the outcomes and findings, which he had not fully done before, and it was as though he had something and was seeking the conclusion.

He jumped out of bed and switched on the light and went over to the window and put his face up against it to see into the darkness and ancient wood, and a shiver ran through him, from the cold, thoughts of the cold, and the deadly things that they could encounter there.

An array of knocks made him jump and he saw the door shift about, on its old hinges, reminding him of the age of the door and place, and he wondered again why it had more advanced stuff for a structure if its age, and he realized again that the people who had reconstructed it had done it.

He marched over and yanked open the thick wooden door, which he saw had been clearly crafted by hand, and he watched Kurt standing glaring at him from the darkness in the corridor, and he watched him point and suggest something was along the corridor, and Eisenberg just nodded and left the room and closed the door behind him and followed him along the corridor.

He wondered why he suddenly liked being up in the middle of the night, and what Kurt was taking him to see, and he heard the distant sounds he had heard earlier but he could not grasp what was up ahead, and what Kurt thought was there.

While they slowly approached the region of the corridor where they heard sounds and were at their loudest he became even more confused and started to recall if there was some sort of heating system, water pipes, or anything that could cause it and it seemed as if it had different states to it and regularly altered.

At the region it was at its loudest he gasped and suddenly realized that he could hear sounds emerging from somewhere else, and the sounds seemed to be magnified or something and even blared out at one point.

It mildly amused him for a moment when he saw Kurt trying to explain what was there, and Eisenberg tried to recall something like it or a similar situation and he realized that the sounds reminded him of nothing and were strange and had no real identity, and he wondered if it was because it was night and they were sleepy.

“What the hell do you think it is then?” Kurt finally moaned.

Eisenberg shrugged, and for a moment thought Kurt could believe the building was haunted, and even from something he had heard about it, and wondered what real ghostly sounds were like compared to it, and was surprised when they actually altered to authentic ones, and Kurt seemed to react like he had just proven he was right about their origins.

 

Chapter 15

 

The Map Discovery

 

In the end, when he was totally positive he needed help to locate the treasure, he showed Kurt the map, but avoided telling him everything, and only what he should know, and Kurt was staggered at the map, and that he had been searching for the treasure itself, as he was now positive that the map was to locate it, especially going by Howard Eisenberg’s video message.

Both of them sat at opposite ends of a table in the kitchen, while Kurt sat studying the map intensely, and started using a bright torch and magnifying glass to search places on it, and was amazed at it, and sometimes sat back in his seat trying to contemplate what he saw, and Eisenberg started to wonder if he had found something and if he should have kept the map a secret and found any alternative plan.

He could not quite grasp something about Kurt now and sensed he was keeping something he should know from him.

“You say it was found here, at the mansion!” Kurt moaned, realizing something.

“Yes! What do you make of it?”

“Firstly, I’m shocked he gave this place and clue to you, and do not currently know why! As he surely intended you to get it all along, and it is pretty surprising that we’ve all been searching all over New York for it in graveyards and libraries – trying solve the second clue – and searching virtually everywhere else there’s an ancient grave – and thought you’d packed it all in and were out the game, and you’ve been sitting out here with this …”

“What now?”

“What now! Well, at least I’ll not have to search another blasted graveyard or book or anything related to them …”

“So we are still using the same arrangement as before? With our search for it!”

“Of course, I’ve already agreed to that, when I came here, and when you told me of the map … Find anything in the map?”

“I’ve not found anything on it, or about it, since I found it and do not know what it is of, and cannot make out anything on it … There are no words or anything, and I have started to wonder if the map has been damaged, and aged too much, and stuff on it has vanished …”

Kurt put his head in hands and elbows on the table staring down at the map directly below him on the table considering something, and what to do.

“Have you any maps of this place?”

“There are a few of the region and roads but I have found nothing else … What do you think?”

“I think it’s pretty hard to make out … And the stuff on it is all faded and there could have been other stuff on it, and if there was it’s now too faded … Have you anything on this building itself? There must be plans of it …”

“Yes!” Eisenberg replied, digging into his bag, recalling the plans of the building the lawyer had sent him through the post in the parcel.

Kurt took the building plans from him and put them on the table, and studied them.

From the documents the lawyer gave him Eisenberg discovered that the mansion was rebuilt there in large sections from another far older building, and he had discovered there was nothing on the original building.

For a long time Eisenberg cleaned areas of the kitchen, and the ancient dirt that had accumulated over decades still covering large regions of it, and realized he would eventually have to bring in people to clean it up, with proper equipment, and suddenly realized there were food wrappers nearby and picked one and realized how new it was, and realized that his uncle had servants that must have been at the mansion.

When he looked about him at one point he saw Kurt had altered and looked as if he was doing something else, and he realized he had found something of interest and tried to grasp what.

“Find anything?” he finally asked.

“You missed something!” he replied, glancing over at him for a few seconds.

“What?” he replied, wondering if it was anything of interest.

“The treasure map is part of this building … There is an area of the top floor of the building that is identical to it!”

 

Chapter 16

 

The Top Floor

 

Eisenberg unfolded a map Kurt made of the treasure map region with a plan of the top floor around it and he stretched it out across his front on the table, and he shone his light over it and studied its details under the magnifying glass.

Eisenberg saw it made the treasure map area clearer and he examined it and was surprised when he recalled that section of the mansion and realized he had barely even entered it, and it seemed to be the only whole area he had not searched.

“So do you recognize anything?” Kurt asked, curiously.

“I’ve never searched that region.”

Eisenberg thoughts went wild and he recalled the region at the top where he had found the room he was sure Howard Eisenberg had stayed in, which had been in just about immaculate condition, and he had been surprised to find that it had been directly over his room on the second floor, at the front of the building.

It was incredible! He had known the room was there, but had not fully realized that there might be something of interest to him there, and it was as though it was haunted or something. Yet what could be at the room, and he recalled the grave in the small graveyard outside, where he found the clue, and he realized there could be something.

Kurt realized something and picked up the old treasure map and started examining it further and he was sure he thought there was more on it, and that there was something missing in what they got from it, and he went back to searching the blurred marks on it searching for something that might have been blurred.

Eisenberg tried to grasp what sort of person had made the map, and why he never thought Howard Eisenberg had made it himself, or someone with him, who had put together the treasure hunt, and he realized that it was far older, and proved it, and he was positive the material was, and that it was made to locate something, and he was sure that it could be used to locate something, and he sat back thinking of where anyone of that era would hide something.

“What the hell is this clue to do with?” Kurt moaned loudly, desperate to grasp something.

“That is what has been confusing me! Since I found the clue in the grave!”

“Have you looked out there for anything else?”

“Not really. I have not had enough time … This place needs cleaned up … I still have not found any cleaners that work away out here.”

“Or anyone to help you locate what this map is of!”

He examined it for clues to its identity, and why it was there and what it was used for.

“Lets go up and have a look about,” Eisenberg announced, looking out the window, and about outside and saw no signs of anything outside.

After a few seconds Kurt nodded, still not grasping something, and where it was, and Eisenberg took the map, and they started leaving the kitchen.

When they reached the top floor he vaguely wondered how safe the mansion was, as it looked as though it could collapse in places, where the walls had shifted out, and looked as if it had been built by ancient craftsmen with basic knowledge of large buildings. Who could have designed it to last a few years or decades at the most! Yet if it had stayed up the amount of time it had it must be strong enough not to collapse!

He was sure they could have built it to last. He had not seen anything like it crumbling away, and he had never heard of anything like it falling down. But he had heard of parts of modern structures collapsing.

Again he realized the value it could have and be more valuable than they assumed, but on the other hand it could be a future disaster. He studied it from different angles, until he started losing interest in it.

At the top floor they stood examining the main corridor, and Eisenberg removed the treasure map and compared them.

“That looks like a faded mark of something?” Kurt said, leaning over, studying it, and Eisenberg looked at it, vaguely recalling it and the first time he had seen it, and was surprised that the more he examined it the more it looked like someone had marked something with a cross, at the edge of the map.

 

Chapter 17

 

The Cross

 

While they walked along the corridor Eisenberg started notice differences all about him and expensive carpets, valuable paintings on the walls, and he took photos of them, wondering if they had great value, and some surely were from the original building, and he realized he might be able to trace the original building to where it came from, and he realized Howard Eisenberg surely would have known, and all he needed to do was find something he had about it, which surely had to be located there.

There were various things he noted that he could use to trace things he wanted to know.

He became so absorbed searching rooms and realizing where the best places to look where he stopped following Kurt and suddenly realized he had vanished and started searching the corridor and found him measuring the floor further up the corridor, outside some strange rooms, and he wondered what he was up to or had discovered and searched the place on the map, and found little and decided just to wait and see what he was looking for.

The map looked different in the powerful overhead light in the corridor and he saw things that had not been recognizable before and it slightly surprised him, and he recalled that Kurt had been examining that area on the map, and dulled lines and blemishes took more distinctions, and marks that were not entirely visible became clear, and he realized the light from the light was far less brighter than direct sunlight, and he considered finding somewhere to examine it further for anything hidden away on it.

Eisenberg glared up close, and he saw more detail and faint lines that had faded that had not been visible before, and he wondered if Kurt had seen the stuff, and he studied things on it astonished at missing them, and saw where the exact location in the corridor of a cross mark marked on the map was, even though it was so faint that it could be a badly drawn mark or correction rubbed away, and he saw it was located at the direct center of the building structure, and stood considering what it could be.

 

Chapter 18

 

The Sounds

 

While Eisenberg considered how long he had slept he examined his dark bedroom about him and wondered why he had awakened as it clearly was in the middle of the night, and he still needed more sleep and was tired.

He studied everything trying to grasp any reason for him to be awake and was about to go back to sleep when he heard something shift in the outer corridor and immediately realized he would have to investigate it, and he realized just how much he had been investigating there and that it was like he had been trying to solve things constantly for days.

Even though he was a private investigator he never normally reached more than a certain amount of hours making investigations themselves, and he wondered what the hell would be in the corridor at that time of night, and started to realize the situation again and what the place was like and jumped out of bed and rushed up to the door and stood listening at the door to find out what was there.

He gasped when he heard sounds emerging from somewhere further away, and then he heard something directly behind the thick wooden door, which silenced him, and stood considering what to do and what could be there.

Suddenly the door banged, and he heard someone banging it, and realized it was Kurt and unlocked it and yanked it open, and stood staring at Kurt and watched him listening to the distant sounds coming from the end of the corridor, and he mildly amused him, as he recalled a similar situation and his attempt to explain their existence.

Yet he realized that the sounds had somehow changed and he tried to identify the difference, and stopped as Kurt silently marched away without saying anything and he wondered why.

He eventually realized he had done the same the last time, and reacted like he was influenced by the occurrence.

Eisenberg rushed back into his room and quickly got fully dressed and raced along the corridor after him.

“What hell has happened?” he moaned, rushing up the corridor to him, attempting to get any information, after surely being awakened by him, and hearing sounds had a slight difference.

When they approached the exact region of the corridor that they heard the sounds at their loudest the last time he thought it was the wind or air currents reacting to something, even though there was no real climate conditions to create anything.

“Hear it?” Kurt gasped, confusing him.

“Hear what?” he moaned, wondering just what he thought it was, which confused him as he could not actually recall him given any real strange explanation to anything.

“Hear where it’s coming from?”

He stood listening to it for up to minute, sleepily, and walked about the region, and put his head and ear against the wall where it was, and moved into the room behind it and heard it coming from every direction about him, and proved again, like the last time, it was from the wall, and he saw how many feet thick it was, and moved over to Kurt.

“I reckon it’s the heating … There’s some form of old heating system and part of it goes through the wall!”

“That’s not what I meant! I meant do you get where it’s coming from?”

It left him confused and he listened to it up close, and shrugged his shoulders, and replied, “It has to be coming from down below. Perhaps there’s some sort of basement with it hidden away …”

“No! It’s coming down from above!”

Eisenberg put his head close and listened to the strange sounds and gasped, and wondered why it now sounded like a haunting sound he had heard in an old horror movie, and why such sounds were found in old buildings.

Most of the sounds before sounded as though they were strange plumbing and heating sounds, but the sounds there now were different, and he wandered about the wall and corridor trying to detect the exact location and in the end he traced it to coming from above, even though when it altered it sounded as though it was coming from below, and he just agreed it came from above.

Why Kurt was so interested in it coming down from above baffled him, and by the fact he refused to state why.

He watched Kurt, and replied, “We could find some workmen to check it out …There could be a chance of a future explosion from a boiler or something …”

Kurt looked at him strangely, with his hands at his side, determined to do something, and replied, “Well then we better investigating it then, before it goes away …”

 

Chapter 19

 

The Ghost Formations

 

Away in the darkness of the top floor corridor Eisenberg watched what looked like two illuminated white figures shifting about and he stood with his mouth open, and vaguely saw Kurt remove a camera and begin taking pictures, and Eisenberg watched him move away towards them, and Eisenberg looked down the stairs they had just climbed and decided to follow him, realizing he would have to investigate it anyway.

As he marched away, into blackness, he became alarmed as whatever was there and occurring was becoming more authentic the closer they got and he could not grasp the outcome.

The incredible thing was no matter how close he got or how closely he looked at the figures he could not see any features and started to believe it was something else and his mind raced through all the phenomena he could recall and was surprised that when they started getting to them they vanished.

It resembled a sort of dream in his tired sleepy state and when he reached where Kurt was he watched him checking his camera and digital pictures he had taken and wondered what he got, and if it would look like old ghost photos he use to see in ghost sighting books and he realized that even if any of them came out properly they would be absurd, and he realized that they had ruined the ghost investigations as he could not believe anyone would believe it if they found anything.

“This place is a hell of a place!” Kurt mumbled, playing around with the small pocket camera, and Eisenberg wondered why he had it with him.

“You’ve inherited one hell of place!” Kurt continued, trying to explain something, and stopped, as though he avoided saying something he should not, and he wondered if he knew something of the place he should know.

“What’s the place you got like then?” Eisenberg finally replied, as they approached the place the ghostly figures had been, and he watched Kurt ignore him and turn on his small light and he again wondered why he had been so interested in investigating the sounds, and he realized that they were over the spot below where the sounds had been.

When they reached the place the figures had been they both stood near it surprised and studied there astonished as it was the exact location Kurt had been examining earlier, and where the cross mark he had found marked on the mansion on the treasure map was, and was located at the direct center of the building structure, and they both stood considering what it could be, and Eisenberg spotted where Kurt had clearly been attempting to remove one of the giant stone slabs the floor was made of.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Ghost Hunters

 

Eisenberg watched the New York traffic speeding up and his taxi rush on, and the driver no longer glance back at him, and he listened to loud voices and engines, and he sat reading through the documents he got.

What was in the documents astounded him, and he could not believe such occurrences, and tried to grasp why the agency he used to get the material thought supernatural occurrences occurred, and realized he was either reading it all wrongly or they thought of it as something else that their clients liked, or it was equivalent to some form of strange religion.

The paranormal occurrences it claimed took place at the region of his mansion were ludicrous and he started to believe they were altered from something else, and he searched through everything looking for clues of it, and occasionally laughed out loud at stuff.

Claims of what servants witnessed there were ludicrous, which he was sure he could disprove, even though there were signs the servants had worked there, and he realized there could be an address where he could hire them for the mansion, and was surprised when he found an agency providing them and he phoned them and asked them for the same ones if they were available, and for cleaners to clean the place, and sat wondering if they would give him the ones he wanted.

What could have occurred at the mansion astonished him and left him breathless and he could not let it go and he had to investigate its existence, and he wondered what the hell Kurt thought occurred there as he could believe he thought ghosts or anything like it existed.

When the taxi arrived at its destination he was surprised to find Kurt waiting on the pavement with hippy psychic scientists, with large bags and cases full of their equipment, and he listened to them discuss their investigation of supposedly psychic activity, and he realized they were authentic investigators but thought the real stuff never existed, and by what Kurt came out with he was sure they were the only ones available.

After a while, and on the journey back to the mansion, he started to gasp and wondered what they would think of the two ghostly figurations, but started to realize that they probably would not even reappear.

The next big surprise was the documents he was reading started stating facts about the mansion that he could grasp how they knew without the people having stayed there and it left him stunned and the psychic investigators in the taxi wondering what it was he was reading, and he decided to currently leave it, and not tell them, rather than ruin getting what psychic investigators thought existed there, and he tried to evaluate what it said in the documents, and claims of paranormal sightings and sounds emerging from regions of the mansion, and he was sure they never unraveled the source.

At the edge of his vision Eisenberg watched the traffic vanish and the sky becoming dark, and buildings go, and the taxi rushed on, and he watched the news, glancing at the others, and wondered what the hell he had done and if he should start trying to get out of it as if the place was authentically possessed with evil spirits it at some point could become dangerous, and he considered if the haunting of the place was a stunt to get rid of him.

It was crazy! He could not entirely grasp what Howard Eisenberg had been up to, even though it sounded simple, and he wondered if the treasure chest still existed, and why it would not be damaged if it was cash as the treasure. Yet the will the lawyer gave clearly said that they were competing to gain control of the companies, which were far more valuable than some treasure, and he considered paying someone to find it for him but he knew that the person would not find it and that he needed to find it.

He recalled Howard Eisenberg liked playing games and he became sure it was his main motivation, and he realized he really wanted to do it and enjoyed it and liked the mansion and the desolation that existed.

He shifted nearer the window as the darkness increased and the landscape vanished out of view, and he was surprised to see a black car further behind still there and wondered if they were going to blow it somewhere else by bringing in so many people to the mansion.

He had no idea what the outcome would be and he considered using all the investigators he had met to get to the source of what they were looking for, with him controlling them all, and he tried to comprehend what they would come up with from such insignificant information.

Kurt glared over at him for a moment, with urgency, and he wondered why he wanted the treasure so much!

He had originally chosen to join up with Kurt for a reason, and that he could help him greatly get what he wanted!

Both of them had been searching everything for clues, and anything resembling anything they needed to know, and he had been surprised when Kurt had wanted to bring in the others, his relatives, and he had wondered why, and he realized he now never thought they could find the treasure on their own.

He started to recall what they were really like and their ability to uncover things and the discovery of the lake and first clue and he was sure one of the others could find it, and he thought they should just share the businesses, and there was more than enough cash, and he was sure he could make mistakes running them, and he wondered what would happen if they found it and attempted to take it for themselves and in the end just ignored it and realized the competition would help greatly and they were bound to come up with things he never thought of.

The whole episode was unbelievable and he could hardly believe what had occurred and he told Kurt just to contact them and bring them in, as the quicker they found it the better.

He sat back and listened to Kurt negotiate with them on his phone, and he realized he had timed it wrongly, as they were arguing over the situation and what to do, and in the end he convinced them that they were onto something and that they should come there as soon as possible, and he hung the phone up and told him they would arrive there the next morning, and he was that sure that they intended to bring in people to investigate the place, and with equipment, and he felt excitement at it and at getting rid of the emptiness of the mansion, and he wondered, if they never found it, if his uncle had ludicrously decided to give it away to someone else.

 

Chapter 21

 

The Paranormal Investigators

 

Eisenberg stood staggered on the top floor when he spotted the ghostly figures away along the corridor, and he watched the two paranormal investigators while they made their way up the last steps and look around and along the corridor.

At first they were more dazzled by their new surroundings and darkness they were in and stood trying to see what was there, and he was surprised when they totally dismissed there being anything there, and studied the phenomena and realized they could not properly see what was there, and he led them towards what was there, and he soon realized that they had not encountered anything, even though they had reacted to the mansion and how haunted it looked when they arrived earlier, and had been fascinated by the painting in the living room, and the haunting man with the sword.

It was incredible, and he allowed them to go along the corridor first, and he watched the darkness ahead and what looked like two illuminated white figures shifted about and for a moment one of them halted and stood studying what he could see with disbelief, and seemed to dismiss it and continue, and further along their speed slowed and he spotted their mouths wide open, and saw one remove a camera and take a picture, which he checked, and they remained silent and walked at a steady pace forward.

While he followed them, staring into blackness, searching for any reactions from the ghostly figures, he became more alarmed and saw the two psychic investigators start to hesitate, and he saw how deadly the ghostly figures were and realized they had altered, and he wondered just how dangerous they were, and realized they might be anything, and they had no proof of their identities and what they were capable of.

Surely there must be some danger from whatever they were and he realized they altered their appearance by some means but he could not grasp if it was to them or if they were doing it before they arrived, and they now seemed to not react to them, and he tried to see if they were communicating with each by some means, and wondered what the hell two ghosts would be doing there, but he could not grasp anything and again started to believe they were something else, and perhaps even something that had never been encountered and he wondered why the hell they were.

The incredible thing was no matter how closely he looked at where their facial figures should be he could not see any features and started to believe they were something else and his mind raced through all the phenomena and he realized the two psychic researchers were doing the same, and were whispering to each other about it, and he was surprised that the figures started to react when they started getting to them and they stopped and took photos and recorded information in whispers about what they saw.

What was surprising was the photos Kurt took and what they came out as and looking like old fake ghost photos he use to see, and he realized how easy it now was making ghost figures in photos, and realized the situation, and that no matter what they came up as now nobody would probably believe it, and he wondered why anyone would want to.

If anything properly came out it would probably be ludicrous, and he realized that the two ghost investigators were gradually edging their way closer.

“This place is a hell of a place!” one mumbled, watching the other consider doing something, and Eisenberg wondered what the hell the things could do, and he wondered if he should be thinking of a way of getting rid of the spirit manifestations.

“This is incredible!” the other psychic researcher announced, fascinated by what they had.

“If you need some history, I have some stuff …” Eisenberg whispered.

As they approached them, the psychic researcher gasped, “I’ve never seen anything like this place …”

They gradually approached the ghostly figures and stood near them surprised and studied their deadly features and started to wonder what the hell they were.

Eisenberg was astonished again as they were at the exact location Kurt had been examining and where the cross mark was that he had been found marked on the treasure map, and was located at the direct center of the mansion’s structure, and they watched the figures vanish and as they did he spotted them staring straight at them, reacting to them.

 

Chapter 22

 

The Treasure Quest

 

Eisenberg’s relatives arrived early the next morning and at breakfast he just told them to search where they thought it would be and gave them a copy of the treasure map and the mansion plans, and told them all to choose the rooms they wanted, and they chose the rooms near him and Kurt.

Later the servants and cleaners arrived and started cleaning the place up, and Eisenberg finally left to continue his search of the top floor with Kurt, and when they arrived there he could barely recognize the place during the day, and they looked about with the treasure map, and their reactions had changed to treating there as though something of unknown origins existed there.

Even during the day none of the others seemed to want to go into the unexplored regions, and went to the edges of them and worked their way in.

The paranormal investigations left and soon arrived back at the mansion with more equipment and a professor who was an expert on the phenomena and they arrived at the top floor and Eisenberg watched them approach the central region where the occurrence took place.

The professor kept trying to explain their reactions and was surprised at their claims that they had photographed the ghosts, and in the end left it, and went along with it, and decided to stay the night and continue their investigations.

Later when they all had a meal in the dining room near the front door he was amazed that some of relatives told the professor and the paranormal researchers of tales they had once been told of the mansion and it being haunted with mischievous demons and unearthly elementals and they were left confused, as much of it was clearly made up and unbelievable.

One claimed that when Howard Eisenberg had stayed there when they were younger the servants had told them of the place being haunted, and said the servants refused to stay anywhere near the place at night.

There was also an incident when Howard Eisenberg decided to seize the opportunity of investigating it and had people investigate what was there and they had left after encountering phenomena, and had never returned.

Eisenberg was surprised that the haunting had different forms and had actually been deadly, and that nightmare sounds viciously emerged all over the mansion and estate, and he started to realize how determined the psychic researchers and the professor were and that they phoned people to bring in extensive equipment to begin a decisive investigation.

 

Chapter 23

 

Howard Eisenberg’s Room

 

When Eisenberg entered a top floor room it felt strange and he tried to place it, and it was as though he had been in the room when he was younger, and he knew it was Howard Eisenberg’s room, but he had never been near the building before.

He moved slowly deeper into it, and it was as though Howard Eisenberg was still alive, and he realized that he now thought of him differently, and it felt like it was a form of sacred domain.

The outer corridor had to be the darkest place there for some reason, and strange dark and gloomy glows were there.

He wandered about wondering who the hell he had really been, and recalled all the things his relatives had said about him at the dinner table, and he had started wondering if they were up to something to try to get the treasure.

The place had only a few cobwebs and a little dust about it and had clearly been lived in by him.

Kurt walked in the door, with an astounded expression, and moaned, “So this is Howard’s room …”

By his face Eisenberg realized that something was happening somewhere, and he knew it had to be occurring where the psychic researchers were, and he finally asked, “What are they up to?”

“They’re positioning massive amounts of equipment all about the central region away up the corridor …”

“That’s what we wanted … It is also a good way to get rid of the problem! People will be staying in this place in the future …”

Kurt nodded and looked about, and replied, “But I believe they intend to do something … I think they are either trying to capture our visitations there or make contact with them tonight …”

Eisenberg looked up in surprise and realized that something could occur, and he wondered if the place could turn out like it was originally like, when all hauntings took place about the building and surrounding estate.

“It is too late …” Eisenberg gasped. “How can you stop them?”

“Correct! That’s another reason why I’m worried about it, and have even been considering getting out this place before something occurs …”

 

Chapter 24

 

The Manifestation

 

That night Eisenberg edged his way up the stairs to the top floor, and when he reached the top of floor he waited there, searching the darkness in the corridor and he saw nothing, and was surprised to see lights in the corridor go on and he immediately wondered what the ghost formations would do if they turned the lights on with them there.

He could not grasp what was happening, and what they would discover with all their equipment they had fitted there, and stood with his mouth wide open, and he went over what they had told him all the equipment was for, and he accepted it being there if it solved the haunting problem and even explained what was occurring, but not if it made it turn into a new state of hauntings, and deadly, and he gasped at the amount of problems there now were and wondered if things were moving in the opposite direction of solving everything.

The paranormal scientists and technicians had been rushing back and forward setting up their new equipment all around the corridor where the manifestations emerged, while testing and checking everything.

He realized their great interest in investigating the paranormal and realized that most had not actually believed in it until now, and had only vague fantasies of things, and no real thoughts of it being a real problem.

At the spot, at the center of the mansion, Eisenberg examined all the equipment about the region, with the places they would monitor everything hidden away from the manifestations spotting anything, and he wondered why they were so positive in things like them being at the same spot, and he wondered if they were about to make another mistake, and he watched all the scientists and technicians with surprise as he was sure he had seen them on the television, and that they were relatively notorious.

He was becoming sure that they had found far more than they indicated, and were keeping secrets.

He wanted to grasp what they knew and what he should know, and he strolled from place to place examining the equipment and everything else for clues, and recalled something that he had forgotten, which he had once read about some of the work that the paranormal scientists had done a few years back.

He recalled their stuff had been fairly surprising, and even alarming, which had drawn his attention at the time, and he recalled that he had dismissed it later as them using it to advertise their work.

At times he thought they were deliberately putting the psychic research there to cover their real work and discoveries! Whatever that was!

The scientists informed him that they were checking all known forms of disturbance, and energy and matter disturbances, in and around the emergence region, and they were sure that they would find something.

There was something strange, and he felt something was going to happen, but he could not grasp what, and he was sure they might not encounter it if they avoided doing certain things, and he regularly listened to them all at work and even their low level conversations.

Suddenly, in the darkness, in the outer corridor of the room he was in, where they were all hidden away from, they detected a reaction and that something was making an appearance, and the others in other place shifted positions and altered things and they all went silent and waited, and he checked his watch and realized it was late and around the same time as the last visitations, and he realized how late it was, and he watched the scientists at work, silently checking stuff on their equipment about the zone, and one whispered something desperately in another scientist’s ear, making the scientist look slightly surprised.

The scientist’s face then turned dramatic, after he considered it, making Eisenberg gasp and wonder what the hell was going to happen, and if they had put their foot in it again, and he waited for something to happen, and for a moment even regretted bringing them there, and he saw the scientists desperately do something.

He slowly started to sense something was there, and it sent a chill through him, and when he thought of what could occur, and his eyes for no reason fell upon something in the outer corridor through a gap in the door and he realized that they had not fully shut the door, and his heart leapt, and he saw its bright ghostly figure shifting about outside the room, and he watched the scientists activate stuff as they monitored the equipment.

Even though it was faint it looked like something familiar, and he watched the two strange ghostly figures on a screen silently doing something he could not see, as though they were somewhere else, and had different surroundings that were not visible to them, and they were something, and he suddenly thought he saw one had bright red eyes, and I tried to grasp what it was and was doing.

There was something strange there that he just could not grasp, and they moved and did things far differently than anyone or anything he had seen, and at times it shocked him and all the scientists and the things took a lethal appearance.

Suddenly he heard one of the women servants scream at the end of the corridor, as she must have entered the corridor from the stairs, and he was sure she had been bringing food up for some of the scientists late, and he heard her running away.

For a moment he saw a change in the ghost figures and saw two of the scientists activating something, and he tried to recall all the things that they had said they were going to do, and he sat back astounded as the ghost figures seemed to scream, and looked as though they were in great pain and unsuccessfully try to escape, and he wondered what it was, and if he had actually seen it before, and he watched all the scientists and others start to leave the rooms, and he followed them out into the corridor, and he realized that they had used a form of energy field to trap the ghost formations there, for them to study.

It astounded all of them, and most could not quite grasp what was there, and what they were dealing with, and up close, in the darkness of the corridor, and he studied a dull red radiance gleaming about them, illuminating their hideous devilish features, like demons, trying to cover their identities.

He glared at them, studying them, wondering what was there, and if all the ghost stories he had heard through his life were of real occurrences, and that they were of something else entirely.

The deep blackness about him was so vivid and things so real and unreal, and deadly, he felt shudders of horror.

For an instant one altered in form, and turn to a more demon energy formation, and they all stood back from them, wondering what it was, and what it intended to do, and how to handle it.

What amazed him the most was all of them, including the psychic researchers, could not properly recognize them, and openly admitted that they were something new.

He moved up close to one and examined its ghostly demon figuration and tried to grasp everything he could, which he could recognize, and he wondered what all the scientists about the world would think of it, and he realized all the scientists and others about him were all staring at him and it, and he realized how close he had gone, and that the others were far further back.

While he started moving away he examined it up close and saw it was like it was made up of a mass of a strange red energy being generated by something somewhere, and to his amazement it exploded into a frenzy of activity, doing things, and as he watched both of them vanish their facial features became visible and he realized that they were staring straight into his eyes, with horror and vengeance.

 

Chapter 25

 

The Cavity

 

The next morning Eisenberg could not believe the activity the place had, with the others up early searching everywhere, and he quickly had his breakfast and rushed up the stairs to the top floor determined to do something, after all the thoughts he had the night before of what existed there, and he now realized the danger of the place and that it could very well escalate into a full scale haunting.

At the top floor he got another surprise, and was left amazed as he approached the central region, where the hauntings had occurred, as Kurt and some of the others were frantically yanking up carpets and were trying lift the massive stone slabs of the floor, directly over the spot where the haunting had been, and he stood watching them, wondering what would occur and what could be buried away there, and he listened to Kurt talking of the cross mark he had found there on the treasure map.

He stood astounded, recalling what was there the night before, and he spotted some of the scientists in the surrounding rooms at work checking their equipment and findings, and wondered why the occurrence never occurred during the day, and only a specific time at night.

In the end he grabbed a seat and sat watching them removing the large slab, and felt the warm day edging in, and watched the sun blazing in at the end of the corridor.

“We will soon get this place searched properly if we all carry on like this …” Kurt moaned, and for a few seconds he wondered what he meant, and just nodded in agreement.

Eisenberg just wandered around nearby rooms that they had not entered and randomly stopped at paintings and antiques, with surprise, wondering what they were worth.

The things in Howard Eisenberg’s room had been the last things he had considered, but had found nothing of value, but he knew he was immensely wealthy and could easily have left something worth something, and something that could easily have vastly increased in value, and he studied a painting and wondered what it was worth, and he quickly phoned an old friend on his phone and sent photos of it to see if it was of value, and while he waited for a reply call he decided to keep searching everything that looked valuable.

Later he was surprised, before he hung up, to hear that the mansion and the occurrences were on the news, and it was in some of the papers, and he realized there was a danger of others appearing, and perhaps searching for the treasure.

While he searched, going off along the corridor, going into the distance, repetitive forceful hammering appeared and occasionally interrupted him enough to stop and listen and wonder why they were making so much noise.

He realized how much he liked treasure hunting and the quest and even the discovery of the paranormal occurrences and trying to figure out what would occur, and the solution to it, and realized he liked quests, the exhilaration, and the thrill of it gave him adrenalin. He was sure he would eventually find stuff all over the place and that he just did not know what he was looking for.

While he considered the place from different perspectives the sounds in the background escalated into a fury of rummaging and banging, which eventually made him come to a halt, stand alert and listen, and start making his way back.

Some of the others from below emerged at the top of the stairs, searching about, listening for where the sounds came from.

While Eisenberg approached Kurt he watched a cloud of dust come up and go everywhere, and listened to an immense bang.

He rushed up, and entered the dust cloud, coming along the corridor, while searching for what had happened, and he watched the scientists in the rooms either at the doors or shutting the doors.

“What the hell happened?” Eisenberg moaned loudly, glaring about him, cleaning the dust from his eyes, and saw Kurt and others completely covered in white dust.

Eisenberg watched them not reply and watched the dust cloud settle, and saw a massive hole in the floor, where rock slabs had gone crashing down, where there was a dense cloud of dust that mysteriously moved around, and he jumped when there was a bang from something below, and at the hole’s edge he felt shudders going through the floor, and heard sounds of boulders shifting about below him.

Kurt stood steady, while the others about him looked bewildered and glanced about them, observing everything, and Eisenberg just thanked them for the discovery, and for locating a hidden chamber he spotted below.

When the dust cleared a large black hole remained, which they were unable to penetrate with their eyes, and they stood trying to see what they could, and what they had smashed the floor away to reveal, and Eisenberg searched for a torch, and a scientist eventually walked over with one, and Eisenberg took it and bent over the hole and searched below, and wondered why it was so deep, and at the bottom all he saw was dust and rubble, with whatever was there buried below.

 

Chapter 26

 

The Lost Chamber

 

Eisenberg measured the floor with amazement and realized that he had not considered there really being anything there, and realized how the place had affected him, and realized there were places all over the building where there were places like it, and where the walls were far thicker than they should be, where there could be secret chambers and tunnels, and he wondered what they were for and why the builders had created them.

He realized that in historic times they could have thought differently and have been for ventilation and entrance points to somewhere where people might have hidden if attacked in wars, and he realized there must also be a ventilation or tunnel there going below, for the ghostly formation sounds to get below.

It was phenomenal how thick the region had been there and he had not fully noticed it, and it now looked large enough to conceal something significant away, and he wondered why someone had gone to such lengths to conceal it.

Eisenberg tied a rope around himself and got ready to follow Kurt down and started lowering himself down, and again he wondered what the hell Kurt was talking about, as he now seemed to be carrying out an alternative plan, and he watched him fiercely rush down, over the edge of the hole, and start shifting downwards to what was buried below, and Eisenberg followed him downwards, watching him go down, while watching the startled faces of the psychic researchers and scientists nearby.

When he hit the bottom, near Kurt, he was so absorbed in what was there and wondering what they thought was there that he hit the ground with a thud and fell over sideways, and over into the dust and rubble, and rushed onto his feet, and started cleaning the dirt from his clothes, and looked up and saw their startled faces looking down at him, and gasped and started to search about him.

It was hard to figure out why it was so beneficial to him to do such things, and even find the treasure, as he never entirely needed it, and he started looking for proof that it was more than just part of the structure of the building and suddenly spotted Kurt in the darkness doing something, and he suddenly saw things about him as his eyes adapted to the dimness there, and he tried to see what was there but his vision and mind could not grasp what was there.

When he removed his torch and it lit up the region across Kurt’s front all he saw was what looked like a strange wall going all the way round them, and saw something uniformly covering all the walls, accept what looked like a doorway, and he watched Kurt remove something and saw it looked like a white blanket over the wall in front of him, and he revealed shelves of books, and Eisenberg swiftly removed other sheets of material from the other walls, and shelves surrounding them, and realized it had to be a form of library, and that the door was now hidden away behind a wall, and he wondered why someone had hidden it away and gone to such lengths to build a wall over the front of the room and hide it away, and he opened the door and examined the brick wall and the bricks and realized it was really old and definitely from the original building.

Eisenberg wondered if they were making a mistake and if the place was in fact something else that they never realized existed.

Kurt examined the book in the shelves at a distance and moved gradually around them, checking everything he could, scarcely grasping the concept of why such a place had been built, and tried to recall something, and Eisenberg started removing books from the shelves randomly, trying to grasp what they were about, and what the people that lived there had been like and were doing there, but he barely grasped anything as they were all in another strange language, which he could not grasp.

Kurt started talking to the others up above, and told them what he had found, and they discussed the doorway, and they went down from above to the lower floor, to where the door was, and started examining the wall behind it.

Eisenberg spotted something and he moved in closer and realized that someone at some point had made an opening at the bottom of the wall, and a hole large enough to let someone in, and had entered there, and had filled it in afterwards, and by the materials it was made of he realized it could have been done recently, and he watched Kurt get a pick down from above and start smashing the bricks away, and he eventually left through a hole he made in it.

When Eisenberg got out he wondered why the haunting had come from there, and wondered if there was something hidden away there, or beneath the rubble, or behind one of the shelves, and he realized it might be small, and he wondered what the hell it could be.

 

Chapter 27

 

The Hideous Sounds

 

As Eisenberg awoke out a strange dream he considered how tired he was and what they were doing, and thought of other similar situations that he had done, and thought of other times he had awakened in the middle of the night, and as he recalled everything, and current state of the haunting, he gasped and suddenly realized that he could hear sounds emerging from further along the corridor and he jumped out of bed, and rushed over to the door, and gasped when he heard the sounds, and they seemed magnified, and at the door he heard them blaring out through the corridor.

It mildly amused him as he recalled who was in the rooms near the sounds, and he realized that the sounds reminded him of his dream, but he never noticed a connection.

“What hell!” he moaned, shoving his clothes on, and rushed out into the corridor, and watched Kurt and the two paranormal researchers standing nearby, wide eyed and repetitively whispering to each other.

As he approached them they moved away towards the stairs and he followed them, and gasped and realized what the haunting had been like, and what they had done there with the scientists, and he realized he wanted to know the outcome of the occurrence, and wondered why the ghost figures had returned, and he realized that if they were the real thing they would be trapped there, haunting there night after night, and he felt sorry for them and realized there could be a way to allow them to leave.

At the top floor he stood and watched Kurt and the two paranormal researchers moving along the corridor ahead towards them at the center of the mansion and as he moved along he heard the sounds at their loudest that he had heard them, wailing and screaming, and felt the vibrations going through the floor with astonishment, and he tried to grasp if they were screaming in pain or enragement, and further along he realized he could not grasp what most of the sounds were or were coming from, and he wondered what the hell they were, as none of them had given any proper explanations of anything.

The disturbance or sounds seemed as if it had different states and often altered, and he imagined it as a warp through space and time causing many different things to occur and create sporadic sounds about the place, and he wondered what the hell their supernatural actually was.

Suddenly he spotted Kurt and the two psychic investigators had stopped and he looked ahead, staring through the blackness and at lights shifting about, and he rushed up to Kurt.

In the darkness at the end of the corridor the two ghostly figures seemed to be in frenzy and shifting wildly about, and he noticed they kept being stopped leaving a particular zone, and he realized they must be furiously fighting or furiously trying to escape from there, and he wondered who or what they were, and why they were there, and he tried to recall what he seen of them when the scientists had been there.

“What the hell are those things up to?” he finally muttered, staring, bewildered, and wondering what the outcome would be.

“This place is a hell of a place!” Kurt mumbled.

“Have you any history of the place?” he asked, wondering if he or the psychic researchers had uncovered anything, as he was sure it would be recorded by someone somewhere.

He realized that he really felt like going back to bed, and that it had been a long day and the next day would even be longer, and he watched the ghosts figures furiously shifting about, as though at a hyper speed and he realized that he could not properly see the things and that they were unrecognizable to them, and that their appearance in the mansion had things missing, which he was sure were at where they were, and he realized they were something else and their appearance was entirely different from what was visible, and like seeing someone on an infrared or X-ray screen, and the sounds were absolutely absurd and unrecognizable, and he realized if they could grasp why they were there and where they were they could start solving what was occurring and how to handle the situation.

The things were shifting about absurdly and he wondered if they were in pain, and if something was torching them, and he realized if they were dead and ghosts that they might very well be in the deepest depths of hell, and he realized that they might be able to exorcise them.

 

Chapter 28

 

The Ancient Books

 

When Eisenberg entered the library with the others in the morning he examined the massive entrance hole in the roof they made, and the pile of rubble across the floor, and wondered if the ghost figures had reacted to it and the other things they had done there, including what the scientists did to them on the previous night with their equipment, and he realized if they were ghosts and had supernatural powers that they make them pay for it.

He examined under the rubble, looking for anything below, and he examined the stone floor and the rubble, and he sensed something unusual, and that it was in fact the books, and he looked about the room, and where the hole entrance into the library went, and watched the light coming in.

Something seemed different in the library and he watched the others bring in a table and chairs and put them at the central point where they had cleared, and they sat about the table in the seats, and made themselves familiar with their new surroundings, and Eisenberg went over and grabbed a pile of books and dusted them and piled them on the table.

It was incredible! All his relatives were searching the mansion everywhere for treasure and had even persuaded the servants, cleaners, and psychic researchers into joining in, and many of them entered the room.

The books he took amazed him with their age, as they were far more ancient than he had imagined.

He consistently wondered why the books had been hidden away there, and wondered if there was some law and crackdown on them for some reason, and he kept wondering why they were hidden away, and he realized that the books he got were virtually unreadable, and in another language.

He suddenly realized that the books were uneven and hanging over in places and that the last time he had seen them he was sure they had been straighter, and wondered if something had caused it.

There was something about searching for some things that he never liked, which frustrated him, when he could not find anything. There were far too many things that suggested too many things that could be anything. The mind could turn anything into what looked like something or a clue if he wanted something badly enough.

He could be following false clues that never existed there, and making major mistakes there for years! He decided to check the main books and anything that looked like a clue, and decided he would call it a day after a certain amount of time, if nothing was discovered by them.

They searched through books for anything and kept finding they were empty and in another language, which they suspected was a really early language.

As far as he was concerned successful treasure hunting normally had proper information of treasures, and not strange riddles. They found treasures and lost artifacts with knowledge and traced them with advanced technology.

If they could only properly trace the original owners and builders of the original building, which the psychic researchers and scientists had achieved the greatest results with, after using all the means available to them, but they still could not grasp who the hell the mansion owners had been, and what they had been up to, and he realized that they had to bring people in that could read the language in the books, and the others agreed, and he decided to wait for them to get them and bring them in, and they decided to look through the books for anything of interest they could find.

 

Chapter 29

 

The Second Map

 

Eisenberg sat with his mouth open when he opened a book that looked somehow different from the rest of the books and he tried to grasp why it was.

He saw that it was made different, and had a different shape, and was clearly from a later time, but what was the most curious was the fact that the dust on it was far less, for some reason, and he was sure that someone else had put it there, at a different time, and he curiously examined it and played with it and realized that it looked as if someone had put it there at an even later time than he thought, and even looked like the person added some of the dust artificially, and he sat wondering why the hell they would do it.

He started studying the contents, going through it, and started to realize that though it was the same language it was different, and had different paper, and he was amazed that there was a bump on the cover, where he felt something concealed, and he used a blade to cut it open, and pulled out a small piece of folded paper.

He sensed something and sat staring at it, while the voices of the others altered to mumbles and background sounds.

He unfolded and stretched it out, perhaps done for the first time in hundreds of years, and held it up to the light and saw its details clearer, and some of the others gathered around him, and they examined it.

“It’s an old drawing of the mansion!” Kurt replied, standing behind him, seeing something that confirmed his beliefs.

Eisenberg realized it was and proved it and wondered why someone had made it, and of part of it, and after studying he was sure that it was more than that and that it could be from an ancient plan of the top floor, from a large map, which he was sure was showing where something was, and he knew it because it was important and that the person that put it there had it hidden in the book. It had some detail to it that he studied and tried to recognize, and he proved it was accurate, and he realized the original building was basically the same in places.

His thoughts were wild and he wondered what the person had been up to. The other original mansion, moved there, had to be the most haunted hideous place in existence. And he wondered why there were so many secrets buried away about the place, and he had consistently sensed it since he had arrived at the place.

Kurt looked at it strongly for a moment and took it off the table and held it over his light, and he considered faint lines on it for a moment, and looked baffled about something.

“Could this be connected with the treasure?” he moaned, desperate for clues.

Eisenberg eventually took it and wondered what he meant, and examined it for clues to its identity, and why it was there.

It could be more valuable as assumed but on the other hand it could be anything. They both studied it from different angles, until they started losing interest.

“Doesn’t that look like your treasure map?” Kurt moaned, when he realized it, and Eisenberg looked at it and was surprised it did, and that he had not noticed it, and he removed the treasure map, which he had found in the grave in the cemetery, and thought it was a rough copy of it but after close examinations he saw it was not and he realized there were two treasure maps.

 

Chapter 30

 

The Quest

 

Eisenberg strolled about the building amazed at how far the others were going to search the place, and even saw the cleaners trying to remove a cupboard to search behind it, and he decided to talk them into it as he just wanted to complete the task, even though he discovered strangers frantically yanking up floorboards at a region on the bottom floor, and realized they were locals, and builders or something, and in the end decided to leave it as if they found anything he was sure he would hear of it.

While wandering up the stairs he heard to a repetitive forceful hammer that appeared away in the distance somewhere and he occasionally stopped to listen and wondered why someone was so determined to break through something, and where the hell was it coming from, and he eventually realized it was coming from outside of the building.

He realized how much he liked the adventure and even the strange mind-boggling paranormal occurrences and trying to find out what it was and solutions to it.

At one point he was sure there was stuff all over the place, after seeing the reactions to things by others, and the locals seemed to think there was far more.

While he considered the interior from different perspectives, and climbed higher up the stairs, the sounds in the background escalated into a fury of rummaging and thuds, which made everyone he saw look alert and listen, and wondering what was happening and what they had they missed.

It sounded as if they had found something and were trying breakthrough to something to get it.

In the end he marched down a corridor to where it was coming from, confused and wondering what was there, and met someone, and he was surprised to find out someone was on the roof and he realized that there could very well be an attic on the building, going over the center zone of the top floor.

He started to wonder why they never thought of there, and realized nothing was up there, and the mark on the map was on the top floor, and he realized that it could have been in the ceiling, and above them all along, as the person might have just put it there, and wanted to conceal its exact position.

There was little room from the ceiling to the top of the building and anything there would be really small, but he realized there could be something.

 

Chapter 31

 

The Attic

 

Eisenberg stood on the roof staring and checking the estate all around him, and he climbed into a hole in the roof they had made, and crouched down and entered the darkness of the attic.

Further along he saw light and there was a cloud of dust appearing, and heavy thuds emerged and accelerated, almost climaxing at one point, and he sensed that they might be about to uncover something, and he tried to move faster, watching he never put his feet through the floor, even though he was sure that it was wood, and planks of wood below it.

He watched the men working there, glaring down at something.

Further on he saw them crouched around a hole in the attic floor, surrounded by a cloud of dust, and he tried to work out where it was situated in the top floor and gave up, and watched one continue to smash away the floor and increase the size of the hole, and he moved nearer, as he heard and felt shudders going through the floor, roof, and air, and heard of crash down below somewhere near them.

Their looks slowly altered from bewildered glances to observing something in the darkness there, and he examined all the chunks of rock and pieces of plaster scattered everywhere across the floor about them and he wondered who the hell had put them there, and knew that it had to be one of his relatives, and surely Kurt being involved, and knew it had to be at about the center of the building.

When he reached them he saw the large black hole up close and wondered what they were doing, and investigating.

What had they discovered was concealed below the floor and he watched one eventually shine a dull torch down, and clearly never saw anything.

He measured the floor with amazement and realized the size of the hole was large and that there must be far more secret chambers all about the mansion.

He had still not fully considered the implications of it, even after measuring walls and regions all about the place. It was phenomenal how thick the walls and floors actually were, and he wondered why the occupants wanted to conceal so much, and he saw Kurt appear behind him, and heard him talking, and realized it was him behind the workmen searching there, and he started to realize how deadly the place was becoming.

 

Chapter 32

 

The New Paranormal Investigator

 

Eisenberg sat in the ancient library watching a paranormal researcher, who was searching through the books with amazement, and he could not even recall him, as there were so many there now, and realized Kurt had put him there, and he realized that he was actually reading the books, and for Kurt.

“What do think?” Kurt eventually asked the new paranormal investigator. “Tell him what you’ve found!”

The paranormal investigator looked up, and placed the book down, and replied, “It would be a shame to ruin this place …”

Eisenberg sat confused and realized how long he had been away from them, and realized it was not really long, but realized a lot of things had happened, and eventually asked, “What’s been happening since I’ve been away … Can you actually understand the writing in the books?”

“Yes! He has been …” Kurt replied.

“So what’s the stuff about?” he eagerly asked, determined to get an answer to what he had been trying to solve for hours.

“Much of it’s supernatural stuff …” the paranormal investigator replied first.

“Stuff such as witchcraft, voodoo, devil worshippers …”

“Yes! Ancient stuff!”

“What did you get?”

“They were into really heavy stuff …”

“What like?”

“They seemed to have killed large amounts of humans … We still have not found out what they were …”

“The original occupants?”

“Probably all the occupants that lived in the castle for centuries …” the paranormal researcher replied, holding up the book he had, and showing his alarm at the discoveries he had made.

“Castle? What castle?” Eisenberg asked, concerned.

“This castle! Alright the building they made this building out of when they reconstructed it here …”

“Was this a German castle?” he asked, curiously.

“This was a Transylvanian castle … These books and the library are from there and were in the original building …”

“What else?” he gasped, realizing that it was a castle.

“Well they seemed to be really eminent and mind-boggling and they seemed to have some form of science, which I’ve been trying to grasp … It was really far out … I’ve not fully grasped what they were or were doing, and what happened to them …”

“Were they some form of royalty?”

“I believe so! Or had become royalty after many wars and killings – and had ruled ruthlessly for centuries …”

“What do you think it is then?” he asked whispered, confused, not fully grasping what was there or what he was explaining the place was.

“What’s what?” he asked.

“The ghost figures and occurrences in this place?”

“That’s something else I’ve not been able to answer … These are notes I’ve taken of things I’ve found …”

Eisenberg reached over and took his notes and started reading through them carefully, ignoring many, which were connected to the paranormal researcher, and sat staggered at things, and realized how haunted and deadly the place actually had been, and might return to in the future, and realized that he had hardly read the majority of the stuff in the library, and knew there was far more.

 

Chapter 33

 

The Complete Map

 

The next morning Eisenberg studied the new paranormal researcher as he walked into the library and wondered who he was, as none of the others had heard of him, but he knew he was good and knew far more than the others, and he trusted Kurt, and was sure he had put him there for a reason.

He watched him search through the books, with amazement at the speed and amount of books he had searched.

“What do think?” Kurt asked. “Tell him what you’ve found!”

“This place is hideous …” the paranormal researcher replied, gasping at the things he had read. “They must have killed thousands … What I don’t get is their true identity … I’ve not been able to trace them to anything really … Other than some wars they fought … And even they did not know who was fighting them, and there were accounts of them massacring massive armies and there being no survivors …”

“Is there anything else on the wars in the books?”

“There’s little on and there seems to be some sort of cannibalism they carried out … They mention them feasting on the bodies of the soldiers …”

The paranormal investigator looked energetic, as though he wished to do something, and he had noticed some of the others were losing hope of finding anything new, and he watched him place a book he had down on the table.

“It would be a shame to ruin this place!” he silently moaned, and Eisenberg recalled his reply and wondered what the hell he was talking about.

“It’s incredible that this stuff is full of supernatural stuff?” he moaned, wondering what else was there.

For moment Eisenberg wondered if he was trying to get valuable books, but he doubted it, and he wanted to thank him for spending so many hours trying to solve and uncover what was buried away there.

“There is a lot of supernatural stuff … The rest is stuff by other people about other things …”

“Stuff like witchcraft …”

“Ancient stuff from Transylvanian …”

Eisenberg removed the map he had found in the library and spread it out on the table and used a magnifying glass to study it, and realized it looked different with the extra lighting now in the library, and he managed to recognize things on it with fascination, and sat wondering what it had been used for, and he knew the book it was in had nothing, as the paranormal investigator had studied it scrupulously and had found nothing.

The fact that the original map was relatively similar drew his attention to it.

“It’d also probably destroy what’s there if you used explosives to blow it …” the paranormal investigator continued, and Kurt nodded back, and Eisenberg realized that they had been talking about something, which he could not grasp.

Eisenberg sat confused and suddenly recalled where he had put the original map and got it out the bottom of his inside jacket pocket and placed it over the table.

He sat surprised, as both of the treasure maps were so similar and he could not grasp why, and he flattened them both out and was surprised that their sizes were identical, and he had thought the new one was far larger, perhaps as it had been squashed and crumpled more.

The amazing thing was they actually fitted together, and the more he flattened them and fitted them together the more he was positive they were once joined together, and he started to study them and realized they were a complete map of the original top floor of the castle, even though both looked about the same.

Yet what he could not grasp was why they were there, and why one half was hidden in a book and why the lawyer gave him the other one, and he wondered why it was not a better drawing, and he wondered if Howard Eisenberg had been more confused than he had been, as there was no suggestion of there being anything on it and he had checked the original map scrupulously with everything he could think of and it surely never held much.

Eventually Eisenberg got the plan of the top floor and compared it to the map version and tried to spot any differences, and scrupulously studied it centimeter by centimeter.

In the end, at a distance, going over it again, all he could see was what looked like an the ink mark at the center of both of them, which was on both maps, which was on the original map beside the cross mark, at where the hauntings and library were, and he studied it with a more powerful magnifying glass and was amazed that it actually had a shape, which had been smudged and altered when both parts had been separated, and he realized it might just be the library, and drawn wrongly.

It was located at the exact center of the original castle, and he eventually pushed it away from him and realized it had to be in the library after all, and he wondered where the hell someone of ancient times would hide something in the library, and he decided to search everywhere in the library they had not searched.

 

Chapter 34

 

The Real Center

 

“What the hell is this place?” Kurt moaned out loud, playing with the map, with both maps stuck together, and Eisenberg wondered why he reacted strangely.

“It’s great during the day,” he uttered back, and thought of trying to explain something, and he stopped, as though he wanted to avoid saying something, and he kept wondering if Kurt knew something about the place he never.

While they approached the center of the building, where the large cavity now was, where the deformed ghost figures still emerged at night, floating in midair, as though the floor was beneath them, they wondered what they were missing.

Eisenberg watched Kurt approach the place and wondered what the hell he was hiding away now, and if it was the same thing as before, even though he had found many things he had already been keeping to himself.

“What is it you’re looking for?” Kurt moaned, looking at the place, now with some depression, and shrugged.

“This is not the center of the building!” Eisenberg announced, and pointed at the map. “The exact center is over there!”

They both went around the hole in the floor, and Eisenberg recalled all the scientists that had been at work there and realized that they had been searching the wrong place and the place behind a wall further along at the side of the corridor was, and they came to the place where there was a large region between two rooms, and they entered one room, where they saw a small hole drilled into the wall, and they examined it.

“You’ll not be able to enter there!” Kurt moaned, shrugging.

“Why not?”

“We drilled there to send in a camera. But couldn’t get through! It’s solid! We think it’s some form of metal … That’s what we found up in the attic …”

Eisenberg recalled it and realized with surprise that they had been searching there, and probably had worked out it was the center point.

“What now?” Kurt asked, curiously.

“We can have the inside checked with something …”

“We tried everything! But for some reason nothing shows up at that zone.”

“What about sonar or something?”

“Nothing works! But we got the depth of the wall and inner solid chamber, and found it was its thinnest at the top in the attic, and about only a tenth of the thickness, and they’ve been working on getting through it …”

 

Chapter 35

 

The Chamber Shell

 

Eisenberg crouched down under the attic roof and watched the workmen drill furiously into the shell of the room below them.

Again he wondered how the hell the occupants of the castle had managed to build the chamber shell, and realized they should have removed the outer wall surrounding it and examined what it was, and he wondered how the hell they were going to enter the thing and get safely out, and if there was anything inside they would have a hard job getting out the blasted thing.

Suddenly he saw more workmen appear from the roof overhead, bringing in ropes and the way for them to descend into its confines, and he was sure they had something to lower them down and hoist them up, and he gasped and wondered what they thought existed there.

As the cloud of dust about them started to disperse he heard them trying to decide who should go down and realized none them wanted to do it, and he realized how much the place had affected them, and he for some reason wanted to do it, and he made his way over to them, crouching below the ancient roof, and he was amazed that he never even needed to say anything, and as though they were waiting for him to do it, and they immediately started attaching a harness to him and he moved into the hole going into the blackness below, and he gasped at the size of it and that he might not be able to get out of it, or get trapped going through.

It was what he had been waiting for though, and it was the climax to all their investigations, and he fitted everything he needed about him, and loosened himself up and started squeezing his legs and body through the hole, and as he went done he examined the thickness of the shell that they had drilled through with some astonishment, and wondered how the hell they had manufactured such a thing, and accepted that it might not be what it seemed, and made differently, and he shifted into the blackness below, and it engulfed him, and they started lowering him faster, and he looked down into the sheer blackness as though he was hanging over an abyss, and it went out into infinity.

Above he felt dust falling and spotted the workmen sitting around the hole on the attic floor, and he tried to work out what the hell the building had been used for and why it was so different, and wondered if it just belonged to some wealthy eccentric person.

While his speed slowed he watched the hole decrease in size and he heard and felt shudders from the rope from the drill being used on something else and he tried to work what they were doing, and he smelt the surrounding stale air, and heard surrounding shudders about him from the drill vibrations, and he felt dust and small stones come down over his head.

 

Chapter 36

 

The Hideous Chamber

 

Eisenberg stood confounded, like he had died and was standing somewhere in hell, surrounded by impenetrable blackness, waiting to be given his punishment for entering the chamber.

When he grabbed his light from his jacket and put it on its dimmest setting, and waited, and turned it on, and saw nothing at first, and barely able to see, and examined all the chunks of material and pieces of wood scattered across the ground, from the hole overhead, and he wondered who the hell had put the place there, and how the hell he had ended up doing what he was doing, and he could not fully grasp what dangers there were, and even if any really existed, and he still had not been able to prove the ghost figurations could physically affect them, and he wondered if they were actually the real thing and that the media and the era had altered them beyond recognition.

A deep thud echoed down and he looked up startled in time to see something flying through the air and land next to him, and realized one the workmen had dropped a ruler into the chamber, and he watched one gaze down at him through the hole, and he shifted position, and away from the debris, and he vaguely saw shapes about his side and stood transfixed trying to identify them.

The ebbing radiance of his light surprised him and he could not grasp why he had one with the batteries going dud and he quickly turned the brightness up to see what was there but the power of the batteries was too low, and he played about with it until he had it at its brightest, and he walked over to the objects he saw, scarcely grasping the concept of why such a place existed.

The solid walls echoed sounds of his movements that took strange tones, and he strained his eyes increasingly to see further, but there were no real features to anything.

One of the workmen suddenly shouted and a beam of light shot about the walls and down over him, and the light directly in his eyes, and he threw the light straight down to him to get, and he rushed straight over to it, and he played around with it and slowly turned around, with the light blasting straight out, and saw what he thought were giant coffins, going around in a circle, with an even larger central one, and he slowly marched over to them.

While he approached the first he realized it was a solid stone tomb, and he counted twelve of them going in a circle around a thirtieth central one, and was amazed at their perfect symmetrical positioning, and he even wondered where he was in the building, and why it was like he was somewhere else, and he tried to grasp if there was anything else, and wondered why the hell it was only tombs, and why they were so hidden away.

He examined the strange stone and it’s perfectly cut edges and wondered why it was so immaculately cut and could not accept it was cut by hand, and he felt its smoothness with his fingertips, and tried to find anything on it that gave the identity of the person, and he searched increasingly trying to grasp why they had been put there and why.

His close examinations gave little and he started going around the circle of tombs, occasionally glancing at the central one, and its immense size, wondering if it belonged to a king, and he started searching them for their names and dates.

With a piece of paper and pen he drew a vague plan of them and walked around them looking for any entrance points to them that he might have missed, positive that there had to be something, and he found nothing and they looked perfectly sealed and he wondered what the hell the structure was for, and climbed over one and into a gap between the outer tombs and the large central one, and shifted around the gap examining the other side of the tombs, and found them the same.

He suddenly spotted writing carved into the large central tomb near its base and he knelt down and examined the small writing with his torch and saw he never knew the language and carefully wrote it down on a piece of paper, and started examining the writing on the piece of paper for anything, and spotted a crack near the top of the large tomb when the torchlight went there, and hidden in dirt over it, and saw there was a stone lid over the tomb.

He placed the torch on the floor facing up at the lid and started pushing the lid up, and shoved at it until went up, and he could get his hand inside, and he pulled it sideways, and pulled it sideways until he had successfully pulled it over to the side, and away from covering the contents of the tomb, and rested on the floor with the torch, ready to reveal the contents of the tomb, and recalled the ghost figurations, and stood and shone the torch inside the tomb.

 

Chapter 37

 

The Supernatural Being

 

Scientists shifted all about the chamber adjusting and setting up equipment all over the area of the tombs, and by their descriptions Eisenberg knew their technology had gone far beyond anything that they previously had, and most of the scientists had been changed for far more advanced ones, and most were thunderstruck by the giant supernatural being resting in the central tomb.

They used new drilling equipment to tunnel through the thick metal shell behind the wall in the corridor, and created a doorway into the chamber from the corridor.

Nobody had given him any explanation of what was in the central tomb! Nobody had even touched it! The only thing that had been touched had been the treasure chest he had found buried in it, and he kept realizing repeatedly that Howard Eisenberg had been right all along, and there was treasure buried away there.

The jewels themselves were staggering as most belonged to rich kings and powerful people who had been killed in wars and by other methods, and the contents were worth incalculable millions.

He had also taken a diary he found with it, which was in a strange language, which he never grasped, but the paranormal investigator, who translated the books in the mansion library, was able to translate a few lines of, and claimed the supernatural being was Dracula.

The other tombs were full of the remains of strange women that had wooden stakes embedded in their chests, which they were sure were vampires, but the scientists and others had not bothered with them and left them for the archaeologists to investigate.

Kurt and others were astounded there was a treasure after all, and wondered what the lawyer would do, as they were all getting a share, and Eisenberg realized he never really wanted to spend his life running the companies for Howard Eisenberg.

The disturbances clearly escalated and the paranormal scientists that investigated the ghost formations appearances claimed they were two of the women vampires in two of the tombs, which had abnormal skeleton formations, and they believed that they were something else, and not human, and believed they were trapped in a form of limbo state between life and death.

Eisenberg watched scientists set up equipment at the haunted zone, where the ghost figurations emerged, over the library, as well as at the real central zone at the tombs, and he sensed an upcoming catastrophe.

Eisenberg went over what they told him of what they were doing and what all the equipment was for, and he accepted it if it solved the haunting problem and explained what was occurring, but not if it made things turn into a new state, and a highly deadly state, and he gasped at the amount of problems they had and wondered if things were going in the wrong direction from what they wanted.

The paranormal scientists and technicians rushed about setting up equipment all around the corridor and tombs, while testing and checking everything.

He realized paranormal existed and realized that they had not entirely believed it until then, and had vague fantasies of things, and no real definite thoughts it was a real problem.

He kept examining the equipment, and places they had hidden away to monitor everything, and he watched all the scientists and technicians and became positive that they had found far more than they indicated, and were keeping secrets.

When it grew late, at the time the haunting occurred, there was something strange about the occurrences and tombs that he could not quite grasp, and he sensed something was going to occur, but he could not grasp it, and he was sure that they might not do it if they avoided doing certain things.

In the corridor they detected reactions, and that they were making an appearance, and they turned off all the lights, and hid away, and silently waited, and Eisenberg checked his watch and realized it was at the same time the last visitations occurred, and he watched the scientists silently activating and checking equipment, and what was occurring about the zones, and he watched them desperately reacting and one whispered in another scientist’s ear, making the scientist look surprised.

While the ghost formations emerged he realized they somehow looked different, and their features altered, and looked confident, and as though they were about to do something, and watched a scientist’s face turn dramatic, making him wonder what the hell was going on, and if they had put their foot in it again, and he stood staggered waiting for something to happen.

He slowly sensed something there was different, and it sent a chill through him as he felt they were in great danger, and when he thought of what could occur he realized there was nothing they could do, and his eyes for no reason fell upon a brightness through a crack in the door, and he moved closer, and saw bright ghostly figures shifting about, and that they were turning solid, and he watched the scientists check stuff as they monitored everything.

He saw the two strange ghostly figures doing something and shift away along the corridor, as though they were somewhere they could not recognize, and had different surroundings, and he suddenly saw they had bright red eyes that were glowing, and tried to grasp what they were.

There was something that he just could not grasp and they moved and did things far differently than anything he had seen, and at times they shocked him and the scientists with their lethal appearance, and they could not grasp what they really were, and he sensed something far more powerful behind them, and that they were obeying something.

For a moment he saw a change in their ghost figures as they entered the chamber with the tombs, and he rushed out the room with the scientists, and watched horrified scientists in the chamber with the tombs race out the opening, and he heard them explain what happened when they removed the wooden stakes from the two vampires creatures.

When they reached the opening of the chamber with the tombs, Eisenberg watched the two ghostly vampire figures scream as they approached the large central tomb, with the supernatural being, and he watched them remove what looked like a stake or something from its heart, and leapt back, and they watched its massive shape rise out of the tomb, and he wondered what the hell it was, and felt its powers and fury, and it viciously altered its shape and its powers increased, and it shifted into a dark region at the back of the chamber.

At one point it altered into a mass of a strange red energy that exploded into a frenzy of activity, doing things, and he watched it alter into a far different formation, with horror and vengeance.

He knew it would get out the chamber, and realized there were only two entrance points to the chamber, for it to get away from its hideous confines, and Eisenberg tried to find a place to shift over to, and he wondered who the hell had managed to confine it there, and he watched it alter into a large black flying demon creature, and it shifted up into the attic, and the two vampire creatures followed it.

In the dark sky over the mansion, in the room next to the chamber, they watched them vanish into distant black clouds, and Eisenberg realized it was going in the direction of New York.

 

Epilogue

 

The King of the Vampires

 

Out of the blackness of night a vampire creature shot through the dark clouds like the Grim Reaper and swooped down and landed on a pointed mountain peak high over the world.

Amidst awesome darkness its black formation formed into a humanoid creature as it visualized its first appearance thousands of years ago, and it realized it had forgotten its supernatural origins, and it was mysterious and obscure, and it had memories of the Carpathian Mountains, where it believed something occurred.

For the first time in its existence it saw its obliteration and violently shuddered and its shape altered as it almost lost control.

The world still seemed unrecognizable and it was staggered by the hidden dangers to it and it monitored its formation and considered how recent occurrences could possibly have occurred, and the humans, which it fed on, had ways of destroying it, and they had destroyed most of its vampire creatures, and they had been turned into ashes after hideously being destroyed.

It instantaneously changed into a bat formation and leapt up into the air, and raced away towards its castle, buried away in an immense wood, hidden away from discovery, and it entered the trees at an unknown unexplored region, and it shifted into its long black shadows like a strange black ghost formation.

It contemplated the real dangers to its survival and eternal life and it began to contemplate how it could survive.

Its supernatural species was so ancient it could not believe it had a beginning.

Memories of the strange human creatures swirled through its thoughts, and their villages and armies it had destroyed in wars, and their strange folklore and rituals mystified it, and it recalled what they had altered into, and the ways they used to destroy the other vampires creatures.

It had been contacted by unknown humans by an unknown form, of supernatural origins, and it had chosen not to make contact, and it had not entirely grasped their extraordinary powers, with an unknown extraordinary technology, and it had been lucky as its castle was barely visited by them and it knew they feared it.

It had always had vague memories of it being trapped on the world, as a strange celestial object lost out in space, and it realized it had to fight to survive further than it had done before, and it wondered if it could, and it thought of escaping from the vicinity and discovering somewhere else.

The moon shifted overhead above the treetops as it formed a monster shape creature as it flew through the trees, and it watched the castle emerge through the trees ahead, and it suddenly sensed something, and it took comfort in the moon’s existence with its familiarity, and it resembled a stellar sight it never grasped.

Its strange shadows shifted about the lower trees below in the moonlight, probing out everywhere, and it studied everything in its surroundings, expecting hideous encounters, and it thought of all the ancient wars and deadly encounters it had won.

In the trees at the front of the castle it landed hard and instantly formed into the most deadly hideous supernatural monster it had ever contrived and propelled itself forward and smashed through the trees and its body adapted to its new form and formed more powerful legs and razor-sharp claws.

Something strange paralyzed it, and it could not break free, and it detected a form of energy, an energy formation it never recognized, and it felt it withdrawing energy from it, and it used the remains of its energy to alter into its human formation and saw humans appear from the castle, with a strange technology it never realized existed, and watched as they surrounded it, and it tried to look like one of them, and show it was one of them, and the wood and strange beings vanished, and it went into a dormant state.

Prologue

 

New York Dracula

 

A monster black shape shot out of the dark night over New York and shifted through black clouds like a monster Grim Reaper and swooped down and landed on top of the Empire State Building and stood balanced high over the world.

It reformed into its humanoid Dracula formation as it recalled its reawakening and ancient memories, and memories from thousands of years ago, and its supernatural origins, mysteriously lost in blackness, and yet it still had memories of the Carpathian Mountains, and what it believed could have occurred there.

It recalled its death at its Transylvanian castle and the strange humanoid beings that killed it, and its realization before it died that they were not the humans it fed on, and for the first time in its existence it had seen obliteration, and it violently shuddered and altered its shape and stood examining the colossal civilization sprawled across its front, and going below.

The world was unrecognizable now and even though it was staggered by the hidden dangers it knew it could survive and it considered how the occurrences could possibly have occurred to transform the world, and humans, which it fed on, and it thought of its vampire creatures.

It swiftly changed into a bat formation and leapt up into the air and shot away towards its hideout, buried away, hidden away from discovery, and it flew into the black clouds, and shot in and out of clouds, like a black demon.

Again it contemplated the dangers to its survival were immense and began to contemplate how it could survive.

It was of supernatural origins and so ancient it could not believe it had a beginning source.

Memories of the strange way it reawakened went through its thoughts as it tried to grasp something it had missed, and it considered how it got there, and how they had revived it, and its thoughts of the ancient villages and armies it had destroyed, and their folklore and rituals.

The world mystified it, everywhere, and left it staggered, and it wondered where the unknown humanoids had gone, and wondered what they had done with it, and it realized they had some unknown knowledge of the supernatural, and it had not entirely grasped their extraordinary powers, extraordinary technology, and it had been lucky.

Its vague ancient memories of being trapped on the world, and it being a strange celestial object lost out in space startled it, and it realized it had to fight to survive further than it had done before, and it wondered if it could, and it thought of escaping.

The moon shifted out of the clouds as it shot down into a desolate wood, and it shifted through the treetops as it altered its formation to a black flying monster creature, and it watched a structure emerge in the trees ahead, and it landed near it and instantly formed into the deadliest hideous supernatural monster it had ever contrived and propelled itself forward and it smashed its way through the trees, knocking them down and smashing them into pieces, and formed powerful legs and razor-sharp claws.

 

 

 

II

 

The Celestial Orb

 

The artifact looked deadlier than he had ever seen it, and was pulsating with energy, which looked and sounded like it was on the brink of a colossal explosion, and Eisenberg, Kurt, and the paranormal investigator timidly shifted into the Extraterrestrial Investigation Center research chamber.

At a closer investigation they stood confused as they believed something was occurring as scientists were nervously standing around it monitoring it, and they spotted vigorous activity all about the place, and they started working like crazy activating and checking things, and they realized that they had done something, and that it was the reason that they wanted them there, and they took them over to the side and seated them.

The artifact altered shape and appearance at a frenzied rate, of which there was little to indicate the outcome.

At times he thought he saw a shape of something inside it.

It looked powerful, and deadly! Perhaps unstable! By their previous investigations and what the scientists claimed he was sure they gave an energy force, and that they were feeding it energy that it used, and he realized it was perhaps the reason it could not do anything and had been dormant, and he realized the dangers of its revival, and if it exploded, and he wondered why the scientists were so confident about it.

With horror, at the side of vision, he saw a group of scientists and technicians move in with new equipment, and they started arranging it around the energy bubble, and he gasped, and wondered what they were doing and dealing with, and for a moment thought he saw something inside it shift.

Famous scientist in and rushed into places and he realized something really was going happen this time, and he watched someone film it, and what might be an incredible historic occurrence, and the discovery of it, and he realized from nearby scientists that it might prove what it was, and he watched someone else filming it, perhaps for the media, which some scientists were considering using if they wished it to be known.

The scientists occasionally gave detailed explanations of things they believed were occurring, and watched it creating magnificent optical effects, making things distort, and it looked like it could rupture the fabric of space, and played with it, with properties of altering and suspending it.

Scientists started carrying out complex experiments on it, and they showed detailed information accumulated.

Suddenly computers and equipment all over the chamber burst into life, and he spotted one go over millions of special sequences and he studied it, and he was sure they had got control of the artifact somehow and had it carry out some functions.

The sheer magnitude of it left him staggered and he expected something to occur, especially from its lethal reactions, and he could not believe it could hold so much energy and not explode.

The center turned bright and expanded, and it became louder and brighter, and the floor shook, and started knocking everything furiously around, knocking scientists about, and many fell over, and a sudden shockwave blasted through the whole building, throwing everything about, and it died away.

The chamber turned silent, and they started to recover, and he noticed some scientists dramatically activating equipment and he checked where they were staring and saw the artifact had turned solid, and was open, and saw something inside, and he tried to identify it, but could not, and saw it was alive and hideously staring out at them.

 

 

 

II

 

The Celestial Orb

Chapter 1

 

The Magnetic Phenomena

 

“They’ve discovered signals from something believed to be of unknown origins …” a scientist explained, vaguely.

Eisenberg accidentally gasped loudly, through his teeth, as he sat eating his breakfast, in the mansion dinner room, knowing they had detected something incredible, sensing something new was emerging, and he wondered what the hell could be there, and wonder if the place could become so dangerous that he would have to move out.

From what Kurt said he knew they had been using some new form of technology, and he tried to recall more of what he had said, and realized that they used the technology at different locations in an investigations, and wondered where, and what had been detected.

“Tell us of the extraordinary magnetic phenomenon found!” another scientist nearby asked the scientist.

Something about their reactions confused Eisenberg and he wondered what the outcome would be!

“A form of powerful magnetic influence, or even something of that nature, has been detected … We’re trying to check it, with what we have available …”

“So whatever it is – it has incredible power …” the second scientist answered. “At what location was it discovered?”

“We were examining one of the shafts going straight through the mansion … We were checking the lower region … To see if there is anything there – and detected it.”

“What could it be off …? There has been a lot of equipment put here …”

“Well we have not fully checked that possibility … We need more time … Whatever it is it’s really powerful!”

Eisenberg tried to grasp what could be there, with fascination, realizing someone could be doing something there now, and he tried to recall who had been near the lower region, and what the hell could produce such an effect, and realized the amount of technology that was now about and realized he would have to leave it until they investigated it further and got further information on it.

“It could be a natural occurrence of course …” the first scientist stated, and looked through some of his documents and checked findings on things.

“The magnetic field of the Earth for one thing …” the second scientist continued, making them wonder what he was suggesting.

“Even so it would beneficial to check this disturbance and record it for science!” the first scientist replied, slightly smiling, and Eisenberg spotted a sly smirk he gave, and wondered why he had done it.

He continued eating his meal and wondered what he thought was there anyway, and watched the first scientist’s eyes light up when he noticed something in the documents, and Eisenberg realized that he was unsure of what he had and that many scientists exaggerated a great deal of their findings and much of it was hard to investigate, and if they were exaggerating things.

The first scientist seemed to spot the second scientist mocking him, and replied, “Incidentally, when we increased the power of our equipment the fluctuations of energy became more powerful, and some of the equipment barely functioned …”

Eisenberg sat confused wondering what he was talking of, wondering what the hell he was trying to suggest, and recalled him from his earlier work and that he had come out with some exaggerated findings.

The scientist saw his reaction to him and began talking to the other scientist about the technology and archaeology.

Eisenberg realized he had ways of examining what was below the building, and wondered if he thought anything existed there.

“Magnetic methods of prospecting detect underground features by locating magnetic disturbances they cause …” he continued. “Forms of radar detection can be used – but also with inaccurate and little results …”

Eisenberg wondered if they could have examined inside the vampire chamber at the top floor, where the tombs were, before they had entered it, and if they could check all the hidden places around the mansion.

The second scientist in the end turned to the first scientist, and replied, “Surely sooner or later something will emerge that can scan more accurately, deeper, and faster – and from airplanes, helicopters, and drones – and far better than what’s around, and confidential stuff – which might be used by the military …”

 

Chapter 2

 

The Mysterious Shaft

 

The discovery was remarkable and Eisenberg had been unable explain anything of it – and he stepped into a large cavity – dug into and under a bottom floor central mansion wall.

He examined the equipment the scientists had fitted, and in the surrounding room, and tried to grasp what the two scientists were now talking about, determined not to let them confuse him any further with confused vague scientific descriptions.

He realized the equipment was not as advanced as they had suggested, and realized they were now speaking of bringing in new vastly more advanced equipment, from another major important project, to examine what was there, and he realized they might be connected to military scientists, who wanted to investigate it, and he wondered if it was anything to do with the vampire creatures and their rampage through the city, as things were getting out of hand, and some people who had seen their vague features and abilities believed they were some form of mutant monster creature.

The magnetic phenomenon was strange and new and incredible but he kept wondering what the hell it really was and why it was such a great find to the two scientists, and what they were keeping secret, and why they wanted it so much.

He occasionally worried about how dangerous it was, and if it was dangerous, and why they kept trying to cover up something about it and he wondered what it was worth to them, and if it was just them trying to make a major discovery, and he even wondered if it had a use as a new form of highly advanced military weapon, and he was sure they never had an account of its appearance there.

When some military scientists arrived he moved back, and watched on astonished, and tried to grasp what they were keeping confidential, and wondered if it had a military source.

What the hell could be buried away there with such power, and where the hell was it actually located, as they were unable to trace the source, and the power created to make its magnetic phenomenon had to be immense.

One of the military scientists curiously picked up some dust off the ground of the cavity, inside the shaft, in the central wall, and threw it over the floor examining it and how it fell and if it had any influence over it, and he spotted it slightly repelled it, and it fell slightly sideways to the ground. He straightaway saw it clearly could have some form of defensive powers, and perhaps even do damage at close range, but what the hell was it and why was it there, and why were they so interested in it, and for the military.

Eventually Eisenberg got curious enough to walk up to it, after they were in the room beside it, and out the way, and he went into the shaft and started touching the floor and he felt heat from the ground, and though the floor itself was warm, and he felt something heat his hand and as he withdrew it, and something slightly pushing away his hand.

If it had not had such properties he wondered if they would have properly noticed it, and he was baffled why they had such an interest, and why they were there, as they now seemed far different from the other scientists, and their original work was not properly mentioned anywhere, and he wondered if it was of supernatural origins, as the vampires were.

He considered if it could be something left by the builders, but could it be in the original castle the mansion was made out of!

Was it actually buried directly below and part of the building or perhaps somewhere else in the mansion – with something transmitting some form of energy to the spot?

It amazed him how many scientists actually arrived, and he saw the two scientists trying to keep others at the mansion away from it, and he wondered what they were not saying, and he went over their thoughts of it and it being something new, and he was sure that many of the others doubted many of the things put forward by them, as explanations, and he considered if they were just reacting to there being so little of anything out of the ordinary.

Many of the scientists in the end started heated debates on its origins and many came out with elaborate claims and showed they were unconvinced of what the two scientists claimed was there, and some openly criticized the lack of proof of what was there.

It was no surprise that their work elsewhere grew less, and they allowed them to examine it more, and they started checking the effects it had on things and made crazy attempts at giving equivalent things that it could be related to, but they never fully achieved their goal.

In the end they seemed to all accept that they had something new, which needed researching, and remained in doubt at how exaggerated some of the findings were!

 

Chapter 3

 

The Underground Disturbance

 

“There must be something recorded of this somewhere?” Kurt announced to one of the scientist critics, and both still did not know what to think.

“I’ve had people searching everywhere,” the critic scientist replied. “Without any real results! Perhaps someone in some other field can help?”

“So far I’ve not heard anything yet!” Kurt replied, confused, wondering what they were talking about, and wondering why they were going on about some magnetic influence that was not connected to what he was searching for, and again he went over the facts, and examined one of the documents on the information they got, trying to grasp something.

“We better wait,” Eisenberg continued, “before we can comment further!”

After all the findings they had gathered they were all wasting time examining an energy disturbance.

“There has to be something!” Kurt moaned loudly. “Something hidden away in some out-of-way place that can explain what it is! Massive unread scientific archives exist everywhere …”

“What were the findings from all the data that was recorded by scans of it?” Eisenberg asked firmly, as he read through the documents he got.

“There was not anything or anything worthwhile!” Kurt moaned firmly. “They had a problem with the scans though …”

The scientist who found the discovery replied, while approaching them, “Yes! The equipment mysteriously stopped functioning properly and only gave strange, almost incomprehensible, images of below … All the other attempts at scanning it also received the same output … They’ve not properly explained it, and going by the scan they eventually got, they only found some form of powerful magnetic like influence – acting upon it …”

“What could create such power? Kurt moaned, trying to get answers. “It has to have a tremendous energy source!”

“Looks can be deceiving!” Eisenberg replied. “You may be dealing with some old lost confidential technology or something … What if someone hid something here because they could not destroy it …”

“Someone could have been be experimenting with something and dumped it here?” Kurt moaned.

“We’re waiting to have many things clarified,” the scientist continued. “So if you can help we would be grateful! We’ll also make enquires to find if someone had something …”

Eisenberg wondered what they would find there to explain what was there. Would they in the end just put forward theories about it if they found nothing?

 

Chapter 4

 

The Confidential Equipment

 

Eisenberg was surprised to discover large vans driving away and passing his taxi, as he returned to the mansion, and realized the scientists working in the shaft were behind them being there.

At the mansion he found all the scientists setting up large highly advanced equipment that he had never seen before, and after not being able to recognize anything he started listening in on the conversations of the scientists and started to realize the stuff was far more than he thought, and of a highly confidential nature, and belonged to somewhere important that he could not identify, which they avoided properly saying.

He was sure an advanced department of the government or connected to the military was involved, and gasped when they took stuff out from crates, realizing the value of it, and trying to grasp the function of it, and wondering what he was getting himself into.

He was amazed later to find their scanning abilities included interdimensional scanning, and he stood trying to figure out if there was other dimensions, as he thought there were only theories of it existing, and if it did in fact check other dimensions what was there and in what did they believe they would find buried away below there.

What use did the government or military want scanning of other dimensions for, and what use could there be that made it so valuable? And he considered the military’s use of it!

It was far more advanced than any of the technology they had shown elsewhere, and he started wondering what they were up to and if should even consider stopping them.

He was sure they were getting a glimpse of something existing, and he stood back and watched them at work and wondered what the hell could be there, and wondered if the vampire creatures were connected to it, and if they were something else, and what could be there that was connected to them.

In the room next door he had his dinner, instead of in the dinning room, watching them at work, waiting for something to happen or them to reveal something.

The scientists finished setting everything up around the room and in the shaft and he suddenly spotted that they had in fact detected something, and checked if they were just testing the equipment out.

The scientists were packed together and talked over theories about it and he spotted one filming what was happening, and he considered an earlier idea he had about setting cameras up around the building to check for anything they might have missed, especially at night.

 

Chapter 5

 

The Disturbances

 

“Presumably supernatural presences will act on things and produce effects to indicate their presence,” the paranormal investigator moaned, as he entered where Eisenberg was, in the room next to the room with the scientists at work at their equipment, monitoring beneath the cavity.

“Perhaps even influencing the air, scents, sound waves, static, the light spectrum …” the paranormal investigator continued.

Eisenberg realized he could not properly grasp anything, and he knew they were keeping what they were doing and the majority of their findings confidential.

“This is highly advanced and far more than anything I’ve encountered!” the paranormal investigator gasped. “Going by what one of the scientists told me the equipment can scan and check everything that is about to a far greater degree … Presumably to find out if they are missing anything!”

“Perhaps they don’t want to say anything more because they do not actually know what it is!” Kurt announced, entering the room, “They do not like saying anything until they can prove their assumptions …”

“You believe they have something and have found something new?” Eisenberg continued, wondering if they had altered their perceptions of what was there.

“Going by what I’ve heard, I’d say if there is something there, whatever it is stopped them detecting it and they have to use interdimensional scanning technology!” the paranormal investigator continued. “Which leads us to the next question! Why whatever is there is hidden away there?”

Eisenberg realized he had been frequently hearing gasps from the scientists at the shaft, and he immediately watched them there as he considered what could be behind it, and the power of it, with it being able to create such power.

They seemed confused and considering what they had and Eisenberg considered going in and finding out.

What was he missing? What were they missing? What were they doing there? Could they be about to revive more vampire creatures or something?

“It seems to be really heavy stuff …” the paranormal investigator silently announced curiously.

“What could it be?”

“The vampires killed large amounts of humans … We still have not found their full identity …”

“The original occupants, who must surely have put whatever it is there.”

“This was a Transylvanian castle … The books and the library are from there and the original building …”

“What else?” he gasped, realizing its identity again.

“Well they seemed to be really reputed and mind-boggling and they seemed to have some form of science, even a new and ancient unknown science, which I’ve been trying to grasp … Some stuff is really far out … I’ve not fully grasped what as they give little away, and what they fully were or were doing, and what happened …”

“Which leaves me wondering what they were and doing …” he whispered, confused, not fully grasping what was about to happen.

“These are my updated notes I’ve taken of things I found …”

Eisenberg took his notes and started reading through them carefully, ignoring things that were irrelevant, and sat down staggered at some recent findings, and realized how deadly the place actually had been, and might return to in the near future.

 

Chapter 6

 

The Confidential Project

 

Eisenberg sensed something and sensed that the scientists were not saying something new, and it gave him shudders, as he sensed it was deadly, and he tried to grasp what they thought was deadly.

While he watched the equipment they had he considered what was being detected and could happen, and heard two scientists talking and realized how far they were going to avoid saying anything, and covering something up, and he realized they were also avoiding putting their foot in it by making unwanted claims.

The scientists kept grabbing his attention as they were more highly advanced, and seemed even all to be chosen for being highly advanced, and perhaps even being leading scientists in what they did.

“Is this stuff classified?” Kurt finally asked one, examining the equipment about his front.

“It’s highly classified …” he replied.

“But we’ll surely get stuff, eventually …”

“Since you’re going to get stuff anyway, you can sign our secrecy document and we’ll give you some of it … And what you should actually know …”

Kurt nodded his head, and so did Eisenberg and the paranormal scientist, and the scientist left and quickly returned with the documents, and Eisenberg read through it, surprised at some the stuff in it, and how far it went, and he, Kurt, and the paranormal scientist eventually signed the document, wondering what the hell they were up to, and how exaggerated it was.

The scientist showed them some confidently documents and Eisenberg read through them swiftly, and the scientist told them, “We don’t always deal with classified projects and most of our past projects have only helped some, and we have handled some eminent stuff …”

Eisenberg started to realize there was little, than he already knew, and he was sure they were exaggerating it, but realized they were still not saying stuff, and perhaps for other reasons, and he wondered how they originally intended doing what they intended without it becoming known, and he realized what they had discovered was an underground magnetic field or form of force, but he read on trying to get what was being hidden.

 

Chapter 7

 

The Underground Discovery

 

Eisenberg read through some of the documents with surprise wondering what the hell they were really up to.

From what he read they dealt with potential extraterrestrial encounters as well, and going as far back as the seventies, and he even questioned the scientists if they were investigating the vampires and was surprised that they never knew what they were talking of, and he questioned them about the deaths in New York done by them and they immediately stopped saying anything, and he realized they might be investigating them, and was sure they never thought they were vampires or of supernatural origins.

They seemed to be only involved in potential alien encounters, and he wondered if they had actually encountered them, and in the end was left confused, and he noticed they were trained to deal with them, and communicate with any extraterrestrials through communications, which went far beyond physical communication.

“You’ve the technology to communicate with extraterrestrials?” Kurt finally asked the scientists, who seemed to be only interested in communicating with them.

“And perhaps make a first contact situation occur …”

“With what?” he moaned back, at their lack explanations.

“We haven’t found a way to communicate with it though!”

They all stood staring at him wondering what he was talking of, and the paranormal scientists refused to say anything.

When they never said anything, the scientists continued, “It has not replied to anything we’ve done, which we have gone by the instructions we have … We’re unsure what it is …”

Eisenberg smirked and replied, “So we are trying to find a way to talk to something of extraterrestrial origins now …”

“We believe so!” he replied firmly, hoping for an answer. “What else could it be?”

Eisenberg gasped, wondering what they were investigating, and if they were trying to communicate with something of supernatural origins, and wondered if it was connected to the vampires.

“Thanks!” the paranormal investigator replied firmly. “If you want my thoughts … I’ll add that I believe that what’s active there is the equivalent to our subconscious mind, while it might be in a type of sleep or suspended state, which acts as its defense and carries out functions. I think it can be reawakened …”

Eisenberg wondered what the hell they had found, and if they thought it was something else, and was unsure what he should say.

“So we’ve to contact its subconscious?” Kurt replied, also wondering what they were talking of.

“Right!” the scientist replied. “We have tried to communicate with it telepathically, using some special equipment …”

Eisenberg wondered how it functioned, and wondered if they could have used it on the vampires, or still use it on them if the got close enough, and wondered what the hell the things would think.

“It must have a physical presence then?” the paranormal investigator asked.

“Of course!” the scientists replied, surprised, wondering who he was. “Why would it not? We’ll find it down below …”

Eisenberg sensed there was far more, and he could not grasp why it was there, whatever it was, and he knew he was still avoiding saying something, and he knew they would have to wait for them to tell them what it was, and he kept wondering if they were in danger and how dangerous it was, and realized how he had underestimated the vampires, and he wondered again if they were something else, and of what origins.

While he considered what could happen and what to do next Kurt and the scientist started consulting, and he joined in, trying to get more on it, and made an agreement with him on what to do, and he realized he had given them permission to get whatever was there, and he wondered if it could destroy the old mansion, which he was sure was now worth far more, especially with it being known as Dracula’s castle.

Chapter 8

 

The Lost Treasure Discovery

 

Eisenberg rushed in the mansion library watching the paranormal researcher, sitting silently at work, deeply engrossed in something, and exploring books piled up in front of him, and Eisenberg sensed something, and noticed that he had recently made some form of discovery, and he watched Kurt enter.

“Have you found anything new?” Kurt moaned, at the paranormal investigator. “Tell him what you found earlier!”

The paranormal investigator glanced up, and reluctantly placed the book he held down, and replied, while examining him, “This place astounds me, and these books are beyond anything I have encountered … They also seem to hold things about things I cannot grasp … They are either avoiding saying things or they do not know what …”

Eisenberg sat down and listened on confused and realized how long he had been away from them, and he realized a lot of things had not yet been uncovered, and perhaps happened, and he asked, “What’s been happening since I’ve been away …?”

Even though the ghost visitations of the mansion were no longer occurring he still sensed something was there, and some form of presence buried away somewhere, and that something might occur, and though it was Dracula’s castle, rebuilt into the immense haunted mansion, it was as though something else existed there, and as though a combination of two supernatural presences existed there, and it was as if they reacted separately, but on occasions seemed to combine in a complex combination.

“I’ve found a great deal …” the paranormal investigator eagerly answered, determined to give an answer to what he had been trying to solve for hours. “But what I want still has not emerged!”

“Much of it is supernatural stuff …” Kurt replied first.

“Stuff such as witchcraft, magic, devil worshippers …”

“Ancient stuff!” he moaned back.

Eisenberg examined the library roof overhead, and the work of the workmen, who had only recently completed repairing the library roof, where they dug through into the hidden library from the floor above, and he examined how clean the library was now, especially with all the rubble gone, and the recently completed new doorway into the outer room.

The paranormal investigator briefly examined him, with a glint of horror, and reluctantly put the book he now held back on the table, and asked, “This all astounds me, and the stuff in the books is beyond anything … I cannot grasp something … Could you tell me anything else you know of this place? Anything unknown of your uncle and this place … Any history …”

“Well, where will I begin … I’m a New York private eye and I inherited this immense ancient mansion, which I believe is built far differently than anything I’ve encountered, and I’m engrossed in exploring it, for many obvious reasons – especially after the discovery of that ancient treasure map, and I’m still exploring all its strange rooms, and all the occurrences, and legends, trying to solve what actually is here, and our encounters with the strange unidentified hauntings, as well as the extraordinary ghostly energy formations of the vampires, and Dracula, and think that we still have not explained the strange hauntings the vampires made, and it is unheard of, and does not fall into what is known of them …”

“So that’s why we are here!” he moaned back. “The leading paranormal scientists and investigators still at work here, searching for something they do not quite grasp …”

“Correct! Some still do not think anything supernatural has occurred, and their explanations are startling …”

“They go to any length to discover proper proof of the existence of what they really believe is here – with the foremost in technology and equipment to investigate everything properly, and regularly investigate the recordings and information from the encounters – and the strange extraordinary ghostly formations, and the source in the lost chamber, where Dracula’s lost tomb was uncovered, and they accidentally revived it …”

Eisenberg still could not believe that his uncle, Howard Eisenberg, had them chasing after Dracula’s treasure all along – as it never added up – and he believed that the real treasure was somewhere else – and he still attempted to locate it!

The whole affair seemed a jumbled mess, and even the media reports of what was there was astonishing, as they never believed anything of the occurrences.

He intended to one day solve everything, and what Howard Eisenberg had hidden away, as the treasure chest he had buried away was said to contain something else, which was part of the treasure quest competition he had given them, and he could not believe the outcome.

Howard Eisenberg, the fanatical billionaire, the vast business owner, had died and had gathered them, him and his six cousins at his New York lawyer’s office, where his lawyer had played an old video Howard Eisenberg had made many years before, and he had given them all one of his mansions, and he, John Eisenberg, had inherited the immense haunted mansion, and Howard Eisenberg had given them a treasure hunt competition with it, which the winner was to inherit all his businesses from, and they were given a clue, which led them to another clue, which they found at a lake, which led to other clues that led to his haunted mansion, and the last clue had been a treasure map – of the top floor.

The paranormal investigator lifted his book up again, and asked, “So you’ve still not heard anything new on your uncle, Howard Eisenberg?”

“Correct! His lawyer has given nothing on who is to get to run his businesses, and the others are confused by the events, and the lawyer refuses to say anything or reply to any communications …”

“Maybe I can help you …” Kurt replied, and picked up his phone and walked out into the outer room, and had a silent conversation with someone, and eventually marched back in.

“Howard Eisenberg is still alive!” Kurt announced, and Eisenberg gasped and looked up startled.

Eisenberg was astonished but never fully believed it and thought he might be up to something, as he was reacting peculiarly, and he decided to find out what it was.

“How do you know?” the paranormal investigator asked, after nobody said anything.

“I was talking to him on the phone …”

Eisenberg sat shocked, as he had not seen him reply as authentically to anything without it being true, but he had been at Howard Eisenberg’s funeral and his lawyer would surely know.

After a long time, the paranormal investigator asked, “Where is he then?”

“He’s in his office, running his businesses …”

Eisenberg knew it was true and gasped out loud, and then at all the things that had happened, and he wondered if the mansion he had inherited would be given back to him, and he realized that it might even be a good idea as it would solve many future problems.

“Where was he then?” Eisenberg finally asked.

“Hiding! I’d guess …”

“Hiding from what?” he gasped, studying Kurt’s face, and he wondered what the hell he was talking of.

“Mainly us and the media …”

“You think he was …?”

“He was …”

“Well, I think you should explain, if you can – and what is happening …”

“He faked his death … Did it legally … I think! One reason I believe he did it was to get us to do what he wanted …”

“Which was …?”

“Other than a few major business things he was finally doing it for, I think he wanted to find the treasure or whatever it was, and perhaps sort out his death before it occurred. He told me we still own the mansions he gave us, and has now worked out what to do with his businesses after his death … And who to have run them, and what who should own …”

“And his lawyer knew of it all along …” Eisenberg gasped, realizing that he had known he had been alive.

“Yes! He knew, and gave his word not to ruin his plan … As I did, after he told me everything …”

“You mean that you knew all along he was still around?”

Eisenberg sat with his mouth open thinking of all the occurrences that had occurred.

He started to recall all the strange occurrences and considered if he had been behind them, and asked Kurt, “Did he have anything to do with the birds at the lake – where we found the first clue – and the media coverage …”

“He did! The birds were put there, and the clue … I gave him the information he needed … He wanted you to have the mansion to investigate it, as you’re a private eye, and with sources …”

Eisenberg realized that the other clue, and grave with the oldest grave marked on it, was put there by him, and the postal worker with the parcel who had arrived.

“So he must have had me watched …”

“Correct! That was what I was also to do … We were basically to find the lost Transylvanian treasure … Dracula’s lost treasure … He originally found out about this place when he was younger … He had always wanted to solve the mysteries … What was really here! This castle had fascinated him, and he had studied its history, and everything he could find about out about it … He had later bought it and had intended to solve all the mysteries but had not been able to … He had come up with the basic plan of getting us to get it, and had put many of the people that were investigating it here, and he exceedingly wanted to find out what was haunting it … He had been working on the project and getting the solution as we explored it for him …”

“Who put this castle here …?” Eisenberg asked, curiously.

“There is far more history to it than you think … It was owned by rich and famous people … The rooms and place was once full of people, and activity, and the grounds regularly had parties, full of people … Yet most avoided the top floor at night …”

Eisenberg did not know whether to be happy with the situation or not, and wondered what else he was missing.

“So was Howard Eisenberg happy with the treasure discovery?”

“Yes! It was him that we got the cash for the treasure from … He bought it off us!”

“Were you searching here for it before I arrived here?”

“I once checked … We watched you here, and were before I arrived here at night – when you were wandering around the corridors, and it was us who left the window open – you discovered the draft coming from …”

Eisenberg realized he might be missing something, and that they wanted something else, and he went over everything and wondered what it was.

“What does Howard Eisenberg want now?” he finally asked.

Kurt smiled, and thought of what to say, and replied, “He wants you to investigate something else …”

Eisenberg sat back and wondered what the hell else he could want, and why he was not content with what he had.

“What else does he need?” he moaned.

“There’s another map …”

“Another map! Of what?”

“I don’t know! I believe it’s another treasure! Howard Eisenberg believes it exists … He claims it belonged to an old Red Indian that located some form of treasure …”

Eisenberg knew he knew more, and replied, “Tell me more or I’ll not bother …”

“What I heard was ancient Red Indians passed on accounts and stuff in folklore of lot treasure and supernatural occurrences and many searched for the source, though little exists to prove anything, and what is behind it is vague and confused …”

“Go on, tell me more.”

“Old folklore has descriptions of lost treasures and strange accounts and explorers searching for what was behind it, and out of the ordinary accounts of supernatural findings and of an old Red Indian that was once believed to have encountered something, and treasure, and drew an old parchment treasure map.”

“What is known of it?”

“Many fundamental facts are missing that would allow anything to be located – and nothing is known to answer the queries of the treasure hunters, who have risked their lives in deadly attempts to discover it.”

“So why do you believe we can find anything then?”

“The region it is in is clearly thought to be a dangerous place, which accounts for why it was time and again told of, and people were believed to have been killed by something.”

“Something!” the paranormal researcher moaned.

“Accounts have little, especially later on, and might prove what was killing them no longer existed, and strange claims of supernatural phenomena are told, and some newspapers conclude it was ancient superstitions of the region and tribes, and ghost stories, even invented to scare travelers away by natives, and due to the desolation of the region.”

“Sounds as though there’s something …” the paranormal researcher continued.

“Early colonists and travelers exploring and traveling through or settling in the region mentioned old myths and accounts of deaths of people, and some mention hideous occurrences …”

Eisenberg wondered where the hell the place was, and sat confused, and tried to recall anything like it.

Eisenberg watched the paranormal investigator stop what he was doing, and put the book he had on the table again, as Kurt put his hand in his inner pocket and removed an old piece of crumpled parchment, which was ripped and worn all over, and barely held together, and he sensed it had some importance, and Kurt placed it in front of Eisenberg, and flattened it across the table, and Eisenberg looked at the condition of it with horror, realizing he would have to work out what it was, and could barely see anything on it other than vague lines, drawings of ancient and vague things, but he saw it was a map of some place with small hills and trees.

 

Chapter 9

 

The Treasure Investigation

 

What confused Eisenberg the most was why Howard Eisenberg had given them the old Indian treasure map, which he got a photocopy of, and he now wondered what the hell he was up to.

Kurt, and Howard Eisenberg, seemed to be insisting that there was something at the mansion that could solve the mystery, and his observations of Kurt confirmed it could be in the library.

The only thing he could think of was getting accurate maps of the whole region, and perhaps old ones, where there might be trees marked on them, and the only reason there could be anything in the library was someone that built the mansion out of the old castle, or later, had put something there, and he was left confused, and wondering why they were so sure anything existed as there was nothing that indicated anything was there.

Eisenberg recalled some of the recent findings the paranormal researcher had come up with, and of the kings Dracula had taken vast treasures from, and he was sure there was far more, and he was sure Howard Eisenberg might think so, and he sat considering where it would be, and wondered if it was in the mansion and if Howard Eisenberg had come up with a plan to get it, and wondered what the hell the new map was for, and realized there would be more to follow if it was.

It was astounding what they had done but he was sure they were missing many things and about Dracula and the vampires, and he still had vivid memories of Dracula and his two vampire creatures flying away into the dark night, flying towards New York, and them wondering what the hell they had released on he world.

He was sure it was their biggest mistake, and he and the others searched for an answer to the problem, and he was sure it was now the main motivation of the paranormal investigator, and finding a way to destroy it.

Its first killings had been strange deaths marked in small news stories, and the investigations of it showed it could be some sort of creature, and they had tried to identify it.

Yet the killings about New York became worse, and dark sightings of Dracula had been witnessed, and many thought it was the devil itself, or some monster out the depths of hell.

There were now deaths from it occurring all over the city, and now almost every night, and the deaths and occurrences were now clearly being covered up, and some police who witnessed it had been unable to describe what it was, and what could be behind it.

What was incredible was it seemed to be carrying out an ancient plan and like it had done things like it in ancient times, and some accounts mentioned in the mansion library were similar, out of the ordinary accounts of events at the original castle, and they were now unable to fully grasp what the vampire wars had been like, and what had been occurring.

He believed they could eventually return to the castle, and desolate estate, to get it back, and he had been considering different plans to handle the situation, and escaping.

What was incredible was, when he spotted Kurt’s newspaper, and asked to see it, he knew there was something in it that he never wanted to see, but had to, and he studied the front page staggered at the coverage of the vampire attacks, and wondered if Kurt had deliberately bought the newspaper for it, and that the other newspapers might not have much, and he read through it staggered at their plans of capturing it, and that they gave detailed accounts of groups of people being attacked and others being killed by them, and he realized they were becoming far more powerful, and he knew they would return.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Tunnel

 

Eisenberg was blinded by a black abyss rapidly surrounding him, when he was lowered down through the tunnel, and examined the sides of the tunnel above him, in the little light there, and saw where it had been drilled.

He gripped the rope and harness on him hard as he spun round, and fixed his boot against the tunnel wall to stop it, and looked up to the top of the tunnel and through the hole there, and listened to two archeologists over him conferring and arguing on what way to lower him.

He could not believe the events of the past days, and the way they had introduced the workmen and drillers, and proceeded wreck the region around the shaft, removing walls and drilling deep into the foundations of the castle.

It still amazed him the way they still never fully knew or said what they thought was below, and why they were going to such an extent to do it, but he realized it had to be something, and what the scientist told them, and of alien origins.

The actual depth surprised him and them, and why it took so long to get to what was there, and he wondered why they never thought it could be destroyed by the powerful drill blasting through the ground.

They had found little there so far and it had taken a long time arranging the exploration of it, and he had been unchallenged with his insistence in going down, and the archeologists agreed to help him and to follow him down later.

It was incredible that they never had any working lights, with after all their technology, and he was waiting to get one, and he wondered what else they could have missed.

He heard someone appear above, and watched Kurt emerge, and his light beam down and illuminate him, and he wondered why they never just waited until the morning, as most of them were too sleepy, especially after a long day working there, and could make mistakes, and they would do things better.

He grabbed the light off him when he lowered it down to him on a rope, and realized it had already turned dim, and gasped realizing it could go out at the wrong time, and he checked his communicator and spoke to one of the scientists in the room beside the shaft and checked it was safe to go down, and was surprised his attitude had altered and was reacting more, and considered why, and he just started lowering himself down, and followed the scientist’s instructions.

It was an ultimate discovery and exploration and he wanted it to be done right, and to give the discovery everything it deserved. Yet he was utterly confused at what was actually being discovered and would happen, especially after finding so much there already.

 

Chapter 11

 

The Celestial Discovery

 

A deep thud echoed down from overhead as the scientists at the top of the tunnel gathered there to look down and he wondered why he was carrying out such a task.

He recalled how secretive the scientists were and knew they intended to cover up what was there and he wanted to see it and find out what he could from it, and he pointed his light directly down for the first time, and quickly landed at the bottom, and was surprised to see something artificial buried beneath solid and crumbled mud, and he bent down and started wiping away the dirt and dust at an area the object was the most visible.

The low radiance of the light was no longer enough to allow him to see much, and he realized how tired they all had become and that they had not even bothered getting someone to get a proper light.

Some dust entered his throat making him gasp, but he ignored it, and speeded up and shifted away large heaps of muck around the area, and felt the rope shift, from above, and he inhaled more air, and detected it was more stale.

What was the outcome? Would they even find anything? What the hell could it be, and be doing there?

Strange echoes from overhead came down entering the strange silence and he bent over and examined what he had revealed of the artifact and was surprised it had a strange surface and felt rubbery and he felt a strange current, and was surprised its surface altered, and changed color, and when he put pressure on it his hand sank into it, and examined it considering if it was some form substance.

Yet its surface hardened and he felt it was an artifact again, and realized the scans of it showed it was.

He realized he had no real explanation of what it was, and was sure it was unknown, and he was surprised it became so hard he thought they could not penetrate it.

He wished he had forced the scientists into giving him the scans of it they were hiding, as they insisted it was, and he sat down and rested on an area of muck.

He suddenly recalled the incredible magnetic field or powerful force detected from it and realized how powerful it was, but he was sure they explained why it was not dangerous, and he realized from what they told him earlier that they would not fully know, and he realized why they never went down the tunnel, and realized how highly advanced the scientists had become.

 

Chapter 12

 

The Artifact

 

Eisenberg was amazed when one of the archeologists started declaring to having found something unusual, and Eisenberg went back down the tunnel to investigate it.

The archeologist had started removing debris from the artifact, and pointed at the black surface it now had, and Eisenberg checked the cavity they had drilled and dug out, going around the entire artifact’s now circular shape, and going down around its sides, and he watched the other archeologists digging deeper around the sides to get below it, and examined one of the scientists staggered face as he studied the object with profound fear and confusion.

He spotted an archeologist touching it for the first time and quickly pull his hand away from it, and look staggered and confused, feeling the extraordinary energy pulsations now going through it, which they sensed had far more magnitude than they had encountered, which confused them.

Its identity left them staggered and trying to realize what it was, and he watched them occasionally considering it, and in the end ignore it, and continue to clear away the dirt from it.

Eventually more scientists came down from above and started examining it, and some joined in and helped clear the dirt and clean it, and help hoist the rubble up in buckets, while trying to get a close look at it, and examine it up close, which mostly left them confused, and eventually Eisenberg realized the artifact was slowly being removed from beneath the ground, and would be soon hoisted up the now giant tunnel, they had dug wider, and the main problem was what weight it actual was, as its altering states also changed its density, and weight.

What staggered him the most was the scientists and just about everyone with them did not believe it had any supernatural origins or powers, and was surely entirely of alien origins, and he could not believe that anything of such a nature at the haunted mansion could not be, and it staggered him.

At the top of the tunnel the other scientists were in the room monitoring it and what was occurring there, and any reactions from it, and he discovered they were receiving better views of it, and were seeing its perfectly symmetrical shape.

 

Chapter 13

 

The Alien Code

 

Eisenberg looked down the tunnel at the empty chamber beneath the mansion, still glowing in bright light, beaming out from spotlights below, and he spotted some equipment the scientists had left behind in the excitement, and he shifted away from the top of the tunnel, and away from the shaft.

He checked how much damage they had done to the historical building, as he moved away to the lounge, where they had taken the artifact, and gasped when he saw it resting in the middle of the large lounge room, and spotted one of the scientists through a door, along a corridor, and realized how late it was, and realized the amount of action there would be there in the morning, when they brought in their new equipment and began their proper investigations of it.

For some reason its energy seemed to have died down and he walked around its giant shape wondering why, and why it had altered into a giant black solid object.

He shifted back and watched it in the dim room light with amazement, astonished that the fifteen-foot perfect symmetrical black object even looked like a strange black flying saucer, and he wondered if it had taken the shape for a reason or there was another reason for it, and it was perhaps its real shape, and he wondered what the hell it was, and how it got the power it had.

It could have powers that lasted centuries or it could get it from some other source.

“So do you think they have the technology to communicate with it?” Kurt asked, swiftly entering the room from a corridor.

“I don’t know if they have the means to revive it … But if they do they may be able to create a first contact situation …”

“So what’s happening?” the paranormal scientist asked, coming in behind Kurt, anxiously examining it for the first time in amazement, waiting for a reply.

“They might not have found a way to communicate with it!” Kurt replied first. “It has not replied to anything! They have also gone by all their instructions …”

“So they are still trying to find a way to talk to it …” Eisenberg replied, showing confusion.

“Correct!” Kurt replied firmly.

“Incredible!” the paranormal scientist replied. “I’ll add if what’s active is the equivalent to our subconscious mind, while it is in a type of sleep or dormant state, and it carries out various functions, I think it might even be here for a reason, especially by it being buried away there! But why was it there? I think it might fully activate by physical contact by some means …”

Eisenberg was confused, and started to examine the problem in more depth and wondered what would happen if they could not activate it.

“I think we should try to enter it!” Kurt announced, to their amazement.

“How’ll we go about doing that?” Eisenberg moaned, confused, and tired. “The thing could be indestructible! They could not damage it and it instantly fixes anything done to it …”

“They found a region on its top central region that has markings near it, which they believe is sensitive to reactions from something, and I believe that it’s to open it …”

“We could use different things on it …” the paranormal scientist announced.

He started getting something out his bag and wrote ideas down, and started work on opening it.

Eisenberg watched one of the scientists suddenly come in from another room and he whispered something in Kurt’s ear and he suddenly reacted to it, and looked aware of something, and he eagerly agreed with the scientist about something and they left to do something in another room.

The scientist returned with Kurt with boxes and they started setting up equipment at the region on the top with the markings, and when they finished bringing in equipment and setting it up, they activated the equipment, and a laser beam blasted out at the region beside the markings, and started firing thousands of coded laser sequences.

“What’s it doing?” Eisenberg asked the scientist, wondering if he had found something somewhere.

“The procedure we use has advanced far further than you think! We analyzed the region near the markings and believe that it is activated by a laser sequence code!”

 

Chapter 14

 

Dracula’s Return

 

The moonshine shifted over the dark clouds as Dracula shot down into a desolate wood from the sky, and shifted through the trees as it altered its formation to a monster creature, and it watched the mansion emerge in the trees ahead, and it instantly formed into the deadliest hideous supernatural monster it could contrive and it smashed its way through the trees, knocking some down and smashing others into pieces.

Though as it approached the mansion, and was about to smash its way in, the mansion’s shape became familiar, and it stopped, staggered, and tried to recall something, but it could not recall what its familiarity was, and it altered its formation back to its normal formation, and reformed into its humanoid formation, and recalled its reawakening, and ancient memories, and memories from thousands of years in the past, and its supernatural origins, mysteriously lost in blackness, and the structure looked familiar, but its memories damaged, and yet it still had memories of the Carpathian Mountains, and it studied the mansion in the trees.

It shifted on, nearing the mansion, and it recalled its death in the woods at its Transylvanian castle and the strange humanoid beings who destroyed it, and it violently shuddered and altered its shape more, and stood examining the colossal mansion sprawled across its front, near its small graveyard, as the moonlight beamed down illuminating the gravestones.

The world was so unrecognizable now it could recognize little, and the hidden dangers to it seemed immense, but it believed it could survive and it considered how the world could possibly have transformed so much, and the humans had altered into something else, and it thought of ways of destroying it, as it thought of its vampire creatures.

It rapidly altered into a colossal bat formation and leapt up into the air and flew away back towards its hideout, buried away, hidden away from discovery, and it flew up into the black clouds, and shot in and out of clouds, like a monster flying demon.

It contemplated dangers to its survival, and contemplated how it should survive.

Vague memories of its hideous death continuously went through its thoughts and it tried to recall something it had missed, and over and over it considered how it became existent again, and it wondered how the humans, whoever they were, at the mansion had revived it from death, and it tried to recall everything that had occurred at the mansion and realized it would have to find away to investigate them, and would have to avoid destroying them.

The world left it staggered, and it wondered if it could find a way to detect the unknown humanoids that had captured and destroyed it, and realized that it might be able to detect and trace their supernatural powers.

 

Chapter 15

 

The Artifact Investigation

 

Eisenberg watched Kurt enter the library absorbed in some problem, and sat in his seat, and he watched the paranormal researcher at work again, searching through a book with amazement, and Eisenberg could not even recall Kurt so troubled looking by so little, and realized I had to be something.

“What do think?” Eisenberg asked him. “Do you think they will open the artifact?”

“I don’t have a clue!” he moaned back, sitting back in his seat, and checking what the paranormal researcher was doing.

“Has it altered again?”

“Yes! And this time it does not even resemble an artifact, and the scientists look like they’re back at the start again, investigating it over again, and what it really is …”

“What’s it like?”

“It looks like a blob of translucent jelly …”

“What’s wrong with it …”

“It is completely empty inside … And no longer gives anything … No magnetic type field … And has barely any gravity … And it sometimes floats …”

“Perhaps if it has intelligence … It could be trying to cover up its identity … It’s been attacked by lasers and everything else they have thrown at it …”

“You’ve a point there!” the paranormal investigator replied, looking up from his book. “I think it has intelligence … What I don’t get is why it’s here … Was it with the original castle or was it put there by the mansion builders? And why is it there?

“We might never know!” Kurt moaned.

“How are the scientists taking it?” Eisenberg asked.

“I do believe, if they remove it from here, to where they want to investigate it, and if they don’t get anything from it, and it is perhaps damaged, or unable to properly function, that they might be investigating the thing for decades …”

It was incredible! He had ruined the outcome of the events, and he considered how they would handle the situation, and considered it from different perspectives.

The paranormal investigator eventually answered, “I think they’re waiting for it to do something … And that it will alter again, and perhaps enter different phases, and perhaps finally make an appearance.”

“It could be investigating us,” Kurt replied. “Without being noticed, and intends to go dormant and into hiding if it discovers or discovered we are a danger to it …”

 

Chapter 16

 

The Treasure Map Discovery

 

Eisenberg sat examining the old Indian treasure map wondering why nothing had turned up of where it was.

What confused him was why Howard Eisenberg gave them it, and why he was avoiding meeting them, and according one of the others he was expecting them to trace where it was, and he wondered what the hell he was up to now.

He seemed to insist that there was something at the mansion that could solve the mystery, and the library seemed to be the only logical place where there could be anything, and again he wondered who the Indians were that made it and why.

The only thing he had thought of was getting accurate maps of the whole region, and Kurt had got them, and he had finally got them off him when he had given up searching.

At first he studied them blankly, and realized there was few, and they had little detail of the region, and he showed them to the paranormal investigator and he admitted they showed little, and if it was there they would probably not be able to find anything with them, and he sat considering where a proper map might be available, and again checked internet maps and found little.

He decided he should hire an airplane to photograph the region, and considered the height the map was from the ground, and what it would come up with.

The only reason there could be anything in the library was someone that built the mansion had put something there, and he was left confused, wondering why there was anything as there was nothing that indicated anything.

He again recalled the findings the paranormal researcher had come up with, and of the kings Dracula had taken vast treasures from, and he was sure there was far more, and he was sure Howard Eisenberg might think so, and he sat considering where it would be, and wondered if it was in the mansion and then wondered what the hell the new map was for, and realized there would be more to follow and it might be the first clue.

It was astounding what they had done, and he was sure they were still missing things about Dracula, and he still had vivid memories of Dracula and his two vampire creatures going away into the dark night, flying out towards New York, and them wondering what the hell they had released on the world, and him realizing it was becoming true, and he realized that the police had not captured or even clarified what it was, which was astounding, and their views of what was there were far different from what was occurring, and he realized they might be hiding what they believed it was, and something else, and perhaps even someone using a disguise to confuse them.

The paranormal investigator looked up, and finally put down the book he held, and moaned, “It’s incredible that this stuff is packed with supernatural stuff! Why?”

Eisenberg recalled that he now was also searching for valuable books there as well, but he doubted if he now fully thought there was, and realized it could be a fantasy that he liked, and he realized he wanted to thank him for his work on solving what was buried away there, and realized he should get a share if he found it and that he might perhaps come up with something, and just did it, and he started searching more.

“There is really a lot of stuff here …” The paranormal investigator announced, looking everywhere, looking where to begin, and started going through what he found.

“What do you think?” Eisenberg replied.

“This stuff is mind-boggling … But much of it’s is really hard to grasp … It’s about another place and time – where they did things differently …”

“Ancient books from Transylvanian …”

Eisenberg removed the map again and spread it out on the table and used a magnifying glass to study it, checking everything now, and even marks on marks, and realized it looked different, and tried to grasp where it was, and why it was there, and he was surprised when he managed to recognize something he had not seen before, and sat studying it with fascination.

Once again he realized it to be in the vicinity of the mansion, as all the information given to him came from Howard Eisenberg and he was sure he was indicating it was at the mansion, and he believed he might have originally bought the mansion to get it, and he went over the trees and realized they would be different, and looked for permanent landmarks such as hills, and tried to recall what he had seen in the region.

When he told the paranormal investigator it and again showed it to him he was surprised that he studied it and recognized it this time and told him where the hills on it were, about the mansion, and he left Eisenberg wondering how he knew as he had not traveled about it, and the paranormal investigator pulled out an old book he had with regional maps, and showed him one of there, and an old photo of it on the opposite page, and showed him the landmarks on it and that they were on the map.

 

Chapter 17

 

The Two Treasures

 

Eisenberg sensed Kurt knew something, and noticed that he had recently made some form of discovery, and he watched Kurt enter.

In the end he just asked him, and sat watching Kurt at the library table as he considered it.

The paranormal investigator glanced over, and continued reading the book he held.

Even though the visible haunting of the mansion was no longer occurring Eisenberg still sensed something was there, and some form of presence, and that something might occur, and it was Dracula’s castle, and as though something else existed there, and as though a combination of two supernatural presences also existed there, from the vampire castle and the artifact combined, and he tried to figure out what it could create, and realized the forces it had.

The whole affair seemed muddled, and even the media reports of what was there was astonishing and they never really believed anything was there.

He intended to one day solve everything if he could, and what Howard Eisenberg wanted, and Kurt kept suggesting he knew something new, from Howard Eisenberg, and the treasure.

It was incredible! The old Indian map was of there and the only place there was the mansion, and it surely had to be hidden at the mansion, which was staggering, as it meant that there had been two treasures there all along, and he realized if it was buried by the old Indian that it had in the ground, and under the building, which left him confused, and he realized why it was not found.

“Going by everything told by the Indians …” the paranormal investigator announced, watching him. “What is there is dormant … All the stories show it’s deadly … If it’s the artifact all along, them reviving it could be deadly beyond our imaginations …”

“It also means the treasure is buried near it!” Kurt replied.

Eisenberg was surprised and realized that it must have gone dormant, or gone less dangerous and from a powerful state, from before the mansion was built on top of it, and he removed the map again and began going over the hills on it and comparing them to the map, and found all the hills on it were there, with a few small ones missing, and he examined the mansion position on the map and was surprised to find a vague dim hill on the map there, and as he examined it more and more he saw it had more significance than he had noticed.

It never looked like the other hills and it was a circle, like someone had marked something there, and it also looked like someone had tried to rub it off, and he carefully measured the position of it and other objects on the map and worked out its position was near the center of the mansion and where the artifact was uncovered.

 

Chapter 18

 

The Treasure in the Well

 

Eisenberg could hardly believe everything that had occurred and it was as if he was in one of his strange dreams and it was shocking that he was hunting another treasure feet away from the tunnel where the artifact had been.

They had worked out the exact position of the circle on the treasure map, and its position had been away over to the side of it, and their metal detectors had detected it under the ground, and they had found a small old water well there, under the floor, and under the ground.

He entered the well with a harness and rope on him and he lowered himself down, and wondered why it was in a well, and realized someone had actually dug a well beside the thing, and wondered how they had survived, and realized it activated and went dormant, going by what he had heard, and he realized that the Indians might well have attempted to dig up what was buried away there, and had got the wrong position of it, for some reason.

He removed muck from him, and ignored it, and studied the well with one of the torches he found, and swiftly fixed the harness more firmly around him, getting ready to go down to the bottom, and heard a vehicle outside the building.

It was an incredible situation, and he could not realize what the full outcome would be! The thing was far deadlier than they realized, and even the main scientists were starting to realize it.

He was determined to discover what was there and he swiftly lowered himself into the well.

He tried to realize what the place was like before the building was there, and it covered over the well, and he listened to his breathing in the silence, silently going through the shaft, and no matter how much he tried to contemplate the artifact’s reactions and dangers he could not.

Clouds of powdered dirt consistently came down on top of him and he kept trying to cover his face, and he watched the swirling clouds of dust going through beams of light, as he slowly edged himself down the thin crumbling well, realizing the dangers it had this time, as the other tunnel had been professionally drilled, and it was an ancient Indian well.

Even though he had never been in a well before the well was strange and looked as if it had never had water in it, but most of it was not visible yet, and he swiftly checked its walls to make sure he had not made a mistake and realized the water must have been below, and he started to see signs of water once having come down from overhead.

He recalled all the faint lines on the treasure map, and scribbling, and again was sure it was a map drawn quickly, and was almost incomprehensive, but actually accurately done!

He had considered having the map dated, and having it compared with any Indian maps and drawings.

When he reached the bottom he never saw it and landed on the ground without looking and immediately removed the harness off him and removed a can of beer from his side pocket and started drinking, and started examining the surrounding well, and the ground and lower wall going around him, and examined it in more detail, and recognized part of something covered in a thick layer of dried out muck.

He rushed over and he pulled chunks of muck away, but all he found was a black slab of rock embedded in the dried muck, and that it looked like some form of black stone, but it interested him, and he wondered where the hell the treasure could be, and realized he had not realized how far he had to hunt for it.

While he dug up the muck below him, near the wall, he realized there was no water below, and in it anymore.

For fifteen minutes he patiently dug away at it and removed boulders, and he successfully reached where the bottom had been, and heard Kurt arrive at the top of the well and shout down, and he shouted back that he was still searching.

Clouds of powdered dirt came rushing down the walls and swirled about through the well in the torchlight and he searched above to see if he was coming down.

When Kurt never appeared he raced to find it, and tried to imagine where it would have been put, and he dug down in the exact central region and straightaway started to find pieces of pottery – and was sure it proved that there had been something there – and he wondered what the outcome of it would be, and with astonishment he slowly wrenched up a long slab of stone and started revealing incredible valuable large glittering diamonds and jewels and gold statues.

 

Chapter 19

 

The Museum

 

The Museum captivated Eisenberg as he entered its confines, and he strolled about, and he wondered why he had just unsuccessfully tried to meet Howard Eisenberg, and he wondered why he would not meet him, and wondered if they wanted him to believe he was alive for some reason.

He strolled through the exhibitions eating, and I thought of staying longer to see the other exhibitions, and was surprised when he spotted the artifact exhibition in the distance and nearly choked on his meal, with its glowing shape under the bright lights staggering him, and the people standing around it were speechless, and he was left confused wondering what they thought it was, and realized the dangers of it.

He realized the treasure might be worth more as Indian treasure than what its normal value was, and again realized how much Dracula’s treasure could be worth someday.

While he slowly made his way over to the artifact exhibition he removed the newspapers he bought that morning and read the headlines with amazement and of vampire and zombie sightings and realized that they would have to get rid of it.

He was sure they could find a better museum for the artifact exhibition, and realized again why he had gone through with the idea, as well as to get the thing out the mansion before it did something, as he was sure it was deadly, and they had still not been able to activate or open it, and he again wondered what the hell it was.

While he approached it he saw how much it had altered and tried to detect the difference, and why it was there, and realized it looked incredible, and at it he stood glaring at it in amazement, and studied it repeatedly trying to grasp some vague unseen detail to it, and he saw its incredible characteristics and features as he viewed it at angles.

Again it surprised him that the scientists that discovered it under the mansion, with its immense powers, and it surprised him that the scientists had less interest in it now, especially after they had checked it with everything they now had, but he was left confused, and he was sure they would have far more future experiments and investigations to carry out.

While he walked around its glass exhibition case, with his mouth open, he wondered why the hell it was there, as he never fully intended it to go into such an exhibition, but perhaps to some famous research place, and he observed its strange, perfectly symmetrical, black shape glowing in the museum’s hall, and he realized the last look it had, and realized its alterations and it altering its appearance could ruin the exhibition.

It was as though it had some form of energy they had not detected, and he wondered why it was there, and it was more of a danger to the public than he had realized, and he realized the mistake they had made, and realized that now it had been discovered, and observed by the public and media, that he should remove it and find a place for it where it was not a danger to the public, and he stood observing it influencing the tourists as they approached it.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Museum Conference

 

When Eisenberg returned to the museum he was left baffled at what was occurring, as nobody had told him anything, and at first he thought it was to do with him removing the artifact from the museum exhibitions.

The scientists were on a stage in a museum hall and were going to show the artifact exhibition to a large audience and were giving some of the latest findings by the scientists.

It confused Kurt and the paranormal investigator as the scientists never really gave anything new and had not come out with anything new for weeks and they believed that they would have discovered virtually everything of importance; but they realized they had something important.

The audience baffled Eisenberg when he noticed their astonished behavior and vague accounts of the discovery; which they never gave anything directly of anything.

At the side of the stage he spotted scientists shifting something in, which was covered over, and they gradually shifted it into the center of the stage, in front of the audience, which he realized was the artifact; which most of the audience seemed to be watching.

Eisenberg started spotting scientists and famous people everywhere he looked, and the atmosphere was turning unbelievable, and as though something unbelievable and dangerous could occur.

One of the scientists led Eisenberg, Kurt, and the paranormal investigator away and up the central aisle to front seats, and he felt a shiver run through him as he sensed something could occur there, and he could not grasp why, and he slowly noticed the appearance of the artifact under the cover.

The thing seemed deadly now and he sensed its pulsating energy, and he sensed more, and he wondered what the hell they had done to it, and he heard silent sounds from it, which sounded like it was on the brink of something.

He sat examining everything he could, considering what had happened, and perhaps why they had not mentioned anything of the alterations.

When they removed the cover off the artifact the whole hall turned silent and he studied the artifact’s deadly appearance staggered, trying to grasp what had happened to it, and saw it looked like it had also turned vaguely translucent and he thought he saw the shape of something inside it, and gasped, and considered what the hell it could be, and wondered if it had turned into its true state, or was turning into it, and after long carefully examinations he thought he saw a life form, in some form of rest.

It looked powerful, deadly, and he swiftly tried to grasp why!

He glared into it trying to grasp a clue about it and he heard some of the scientists and realized that they wanted everyone to get everything about it from the scientists that were going to appear on stage, and he wondered why they were no longer keeping it a secret, and wondered if it was an extraterrestrial, but if it was something else what the hell was it and why the hell did they want the media there, further along from him, to know of it, and he realized the scientists only wanted the media not to get any information until they gave it.

It looked like a form of weird exhibition when they put colored lights over it, and he realized that Kurt and the paranormal scientist only vaguely knew what was being revealed.

On stage, a few scientists shifted over to the artifact, and one gasped when he glanced sideways at the artifact, in its new state, and he ignored it and rushed over to the microphone and started giving detailed descriptions of what they had detected from the artifact, and their detection methods.

Eisenberg saw a group of scientists bringing in equipment, and watched them arranging it around the artifact, and he gasped and wondered what the hell they were doing, and dealing with, and for a moment thought he saw something inside it shift.

He wondered what the scientists were doing with it, and what was happening, and what their confidential research of it had revealed – and them trying to make contact with what was there, and if there was anything there.

The scientists gave vague information on what they had found and their discovery of it, and scientific accounts.

New leading scientists arrived and were allowed to investigate it on the stage and they crowded around it loudly discussing it.

Most of the audience silently watched on in wonder, and many watched on wondering what the hell it was, and why they never properly gave any detailed accounts of what it was, as it was far more different than anything seen, and what was mentioned, and Eisenberg realized that he had not heard anything that could properly explain anything, and he studied the main scientists hoping to pick something up.

Many of the scientists that had been working on it showed detailed information that had been accumulated, and Eisenberg saw that they had been keeping most of their work confidential, and wondered what else they had.

 

Chapter 21

 

The Monster Returns

 

Eisenberg sat down in the mansion library staggered at what he had just found along the corridor, and the Dracula monster in the chamber they had found the vampires in, and had seen its black shape shifting about the tombs.

Its shape was a humanoid formation and he realized how it had altered itself, and just how fast and deadly it now was, and he wondered how they would rid the world of it.

It had been killed before in its Transylvanian castle and he violently shuddered as he recalled it altering its shape and he realized it might have detected him where he was hidden, and for some reason it ignored him, and he wondered why.

He had watched it silently and it alter into a large black flying demon creature, and had shifted up into the hole in the chamber roof, over the tombs, and up into the attic.

In the room next to the chamber he had watched it fly away into distant black clouds, going back to New York.

Eisenberg was staggered at the occurrences, and how easily the vampires could kill, and realized he had not heard them using objects that protected them from vampires.

He tried to solve what the outcome would be, and wondered what the hell the artifact was, as he and the others had not classified it as far as he was concerned, and it had altered into something else, and going by what the scientists had he knew they never, and only had theories, and he could not grasp how perilous it was, and he did believe it could be if it was fully activated.

He picked up a newspaper and spread it across his front, and watched Kurt and the paranormal investigator investigating books, and realized from the newspaper that the artifact had been moved out the museum and over to a special facility, for them to investigate it as an extraterrestrial object, and he wondered if they might even take it to Area 51.

It was amazing the paranormal researcher was still searching through the books with amazement, and he wondered what he was up to, as they had solved most of the mysteries.

It was incredible that Howard Eisenberg had actually arrived at the mansion, and he had met him after so many years, and he had been amazed at their discovery of the Red Indian treasure, and that it had been buried close to where he had eaten his meals in the mansion, and he was surprised at the artifact, and had been unable to identify it, and was having people investigate what they were doing with it.

 

Chapter 22

 

The Other Universe

 

Eisenberg studied the paranormal researcher, and his partially opened mouth, and saw he had found something in the book he was translating, and he waited, and wondered what the hell it was.

He was surprised when Kurt walked in the library and he wondered what he had been doing.

He saw him notice the paranormal researcher and his reactions.

“What?” Kurt asked. “What’ve you found?”

“This place is dreadful …” the paranormal researcher gasped, reacting to things he read. “I think I’m getting their true identity … I’ve not been able to trace anything up until now … Many of the people they fought did not know who they were fighting, and there are accounts of them massacring massive armies and there being no survivors …”

Kurt just shrugged, wondering what he was talking of.

“There’s some form of cannibalism they carried out … I think … They mention them feasting on the bodies of the soldiers … Them being vampires!”

The paranormal investigator looked energetic, and he watched him finally place the book on the table, staggered.

“I think they were some form of extraterrestrial … Yet from either another universe or dimension … A supernatural universe … Yet with similarities to this universe … I think they got trapped here or something …”

“Dracula might have been altered from being in this universe or something …”

Eisenberg wondered what he had found and sat wondering what it had been written for, and he saw the book was different from the rest, and he saw how the paranormal investigator studied it scrupulously, and he knew it could be a conclusion to something.

Eisenberg recalled when all of the scientists had entered the chamber with the vampire tombs and had set up all their equipment all over the area of the tombs, and that their descriptions of what they had found there went far beyond anything that they previously had found, and most of the scientists working there had been replaced by far more advanced ones, and most were thunderstruck by the giant supernatural being resting in the central tomb, Dracula in his tomb, and what they found out about it.

“What else is there?” Eisenberg gasped, seeking a conclusion.

“There’s more … I think this book was written by one of them … A different form of them or something … Who arrived afterwards … I think they were trapped here, and that they traced them and followed them to this castle in Transylvanian by some means … I believe it was them that captured Dracula and put him in the tomb!”

 

Chapter 23

 

The Extraterrestrial Investigation Center

 

Eisenberg, the paranormal investigator, and Kurt swiftly followed the scientists, who investigated the artifact at the mansion and the museum, through a building and into a massive chamber that was the confidential research area of the Extraterrestrial Investigation Center, and stood staggered at the colossal amount of equipment and scientists, and the inconceivable technology.

Eisenberg was staggered at it all, and began to realize how far they had gone, and how much had been hidden from the public, and stood wondering why they were carrying out so much work, and he realized how deadly the universe could be.

Kurt spotted the artifact first, with groups of scientists surrounding it, with equipment everywhere, and they watched them monitoring its powerful forces, and Eisenberg saw that the artifact itself had altered dramatically since it had been in the museum, and he stood trying to see if he could notice anything.

When they arrived at it, he spotted them making it make movements, by some means, and that they were carrying out a series of experiments.

A scientist walked over and handed them documents, and he studied them with interest.

One document gave some history of the site and that it had been originally established in the search for extraterrestrials, and basically from research carried out in the last century, and had advanced searching for extraterrestrial civilizations, with help from many countries, NASA, SETI institute, and many others, and had superseded the others in the race to detect extraterrestrial intelligence on other worlds.

They had helped develop many new forms of confidential and known detection methods and at an inconceivable rate and had searched far deeper and with more accuracy into the depths of deep space, and expanded knowledge of the cosmos, and anticipated many future breakthroughs.

They had repetitively advanced technology to detect inhabited exoplanets, with highly advanced extraterrestrial life, and explored worlds in the depths of newly discovered solar systems, and sent out messages with new highly advanced technology, and into the invisible black depths of space where hidden worlds could exist.

What surprised Eisenberg was they insisted a signal had been detected from a nearby star and they had analyzed it under the assumption it was an unidentified phenomenon, as well as an extraterrestrial phenomenon, and its highly advanced symmetrical pulsations had been documented and they established its properties and significance, with its pulsations beating out through the depths of space.

Yet it never actually showed any extraterrestrial encounters, flying saucer landings, but he knew they had, and sensed it, and that it was little, and he saw their fascination in the artifact, and its existence was unbelievable, and they constantly worked on trying to discover its origins.

 

Chapter 24

 

The Extraterrestrial

 

The artifact looked deadlier than he had ever seen it, and was pulsating with energy, which looked and sounded like it was on the brink of a colossal explosion, and Eisenberg, Kurt, and the paranormal investigator timidly shifted into the Extraterrestrial Investigation Center research chamber.

At a closer investigation they stood confused as they believed something was occurring as scientists were nervously standing around it monitoring it, and they spotted vigorous activity all about the place, and they started working like crazy activating and checking things, and they realized that they had done something, and that it was the reason that they wanted them there, and they took them over to the side and seated them.

The artifact altered shape and appearance at a frenzied rate, of which there was little to indicate the outcome.

At times he thought he saw a shape of something inside it.

It looked powerful, and deadly! And perhaps unstable! By their previous investigations and what the scientists claimed he was sure they gave an energy force, and that they were feeding it energy that it used, and he realized it was perhaps the reason it could not do anything and had been dormant, and he realized the dangers of its revival, and if it exploded, and he wondered why the scientists were so confident about it.

With horror, at the side of vision, he saw a group of scientists and technicians move in with new equipment, and they started arranging it around the energy bubble, and he gasped, and wondered what they were doing and dealing with, and for a moment thought he saw something inside it shift.

Famous scientist in and rushed into places and he realized something really was going happen this time, and he watched someone film it, and what might be an incredible historic occurrence, and the discovery of it, and he realized from nearby scientists that it might prove what it was, and he watched someone else filming it, perhaps for the media, which some scientists were considering using if they wished it to be known.

The scientists occasionally gave detailed explanations of things they believed were occurring, and watched it creating magnificent optical effects, making things distort, and it looked like it could rupture the fabric of space, and played with it, with properties of altering and suspending it.

Scientists started carrying out complex experiments on it, and they showed detailed information accumulated.

Suddenly computers and equipment all over the chamber burst into life, and he spotted one go over millions of special sequences and he studied it, and he was sure they had got control of the artifact somehow and had it carry out some functions.

The sheer magnitude of it left him staggered and he expected something to occur, especially from its lethal reactions, and he could not believe it could hold so much energy and not explode.

The center turned bright and expanded, and it became louder and brighter, and the floor shook, and started knocking everything furiously around, knocking scientists about, and many fell over, and a sudden shockwave blasted through the whole building, throwing everything about, and it died away.

The chamber turned silent, and they started to recover, and he noticed some scientists dramatically activating equipment and he checked where they were staring and saw the artifact had turned solid, and was open, and saw something inside, and he tried to identify it, but could not, and saw it was alive and hideously staring out at them.

 

Chapter 25

 

The First Contact Situation

 

While it shifted out Eisenberg stood horrified and tried to move, and to examine its celestial formation, wondering what it was, and what they had made contact with, realizing it was not solid and was some form of energy formation, and he wondered why it was so different and powerful, and gasped when he thought he saw it had demon features.

Its glowing, altering, hideous shape stopped at the edge of its sphere, which had been the artifact, and he felt energy surges from it and stood trying to grasp what it was doing, and he realized it had to be made of some form of energy, and he considered if it was actually keeping itself alive, and in existence, almost consistently stopping itself vanishing, and he wondered if it could properly exist in the universe, and wondered if it would just vanish into nothing, and they moved back when it altered its formation, and he wondered how the hell they were going to communicate with it, and if it even used language.

Suddenly he spotted the others react and saw visions emerge all around them, and he saw they were star formations, and flashing about, and he realized it was communicating with them and showing regions of space, and he wondered how the scientists could record the visions, and if they would show up in the film footage being taken, and saw a scientist confirm it, and he wondered if any of the scientists identified the stars.

He was sure it was an exploration of the vast depths of the universe, and he spotted a massive sphere of light glowing and expanding, and wondered what the hell it was, and wondered how it propelled itself across the blackness of space, and if it could even travel without a starship, and floated and shot through space like a ghost going through the stars.

They watched stunning suns shoot by and them increasing in density, and accuracy, and he was sure it was showing them a region of space it existed in, and he saw its powers increase, while it transformed itself, and further from its original state.

Space and time seemed unrecognizable, and mysterious, and he felt he would never fully understanding it, and it seemed to search for a solution to something and suddenly all the visions vanished, and it altered further, and he wondered if they could provide it with energy or something to complete its transformation, and if they should treat it as dangerous.

Suddenly all their technology, and mainly computers, burst into life, and the scientists looked up surprised, as it took control of them, and started giving them information, and taking and searching for information, and he watched it make a gesture and enter the center region of the energy sphere.

The sphere became far more powerful, and its appearance became lethal, and he realized the sphere’s original activation was far less, and they stood staggered when its center turned almost blinding and exploded out, and a sudden shockwave blasted out, knocking everything over, and it died away, as it vanished.

 

Chapter 26

 

The Time Traveler

 

Eisenberg sat in the library still staggered at the outcome at what occurred at the Extraterrestrial Investigation Center and still vastly confused at what they knew, and he even believed he was far more in the dark at what it was, and it was doing there.

Once the paranormal investigator arrived, after questioning one of the scientists on the phone, he knew he had something.

“What did they tell you?” Kurt asked the paranormal investigator, as he picked up a book. “Tell us what you found!”

The paranormal investigator glanced up, and reluctantly placed the book he held down, and replied, “This astounds me, and I am still staggered how both events are connected … The artifact could be the only alien arrival this world has had … Those vampires are also astounding …”

“What was the scientists explanation of the artifact and all the information it gave them on their computers, before it left?”

“They are positive! They’re positive it was a time machine pod from the future …”

“It traveled through space and time …”

“From what they got I say it traveled back from Earth’s future … They believe it was some form of mission … They believe that time travel does not properly work … That it experimented with it … Though they can send energy forms, they could not properly send anything physical … They believe it was converted into some form of energy or something – of colossal degrees – and perhaps even virtually forced itself back through time – and that it never properly worked and it surely never arrived where it should, and far further back in time than it should, and with not enough energy to return, or even alter to this place …”

“It was a trapped extraterrestrial time traveler of the future …”

“They found out some other things … Which I believe … They believe it arrived on this world in the future from somewhere … And – going by what they claimed it found – they found the remains of our civilization on the world … They believe they destroyed themselves in some form catastrophe … That there was barely anything left … I believe it left to find out what we were like, and were doing here, and perhaps to make contact with us, and find out why it happened …”

Eisenberg sat back thinking it over, astounded at such a thing could be hidden in such a place, and influence so much, and realized that proper time travel might be impossible, and be far too dangerous if they did manage to recreate it …

He imagined it trapped there as an entity, not existing and existing, through centuries, perhaps thousands of years, unable to leave its confines, perhaps imprisoned for all eternity.

 

Chapter 27

 

The Haunted Wood

 

Eisenberg could not tell what it was and if it was the strange dark wood they had entered, altered trees and landscape, or what was there that was so strange, and he searched around him, through the trees, and searched for the vampires.

Their discovery of the wood had been lucky, and he still wondered if the paranormal investigator had got it wrong, as he claimed the wood was perfectly positioned for the vampires to hide in, for them to safely perform their attacks on New York, and the incredible thing about it was it resembled the wood in Transylvania where Dracula’s castle had been, and it was the drawings of it and finding the giant wood on the television and an occurrence there that drew their attention to it.

What they could find out about it gave little, but they had found a structure in it, and though it was old and derelict they were sure it could be where the vampires stayed at night.

Everything confused him and he started to think that just about anything could occur and realize the danger they were in, and there was no reason to believe they could not exist in the light of day, and that they were just night creatures, and as he led Kurt and the paranormal investigator through the dense undergrowth and tress he started to imagine strange dark figures behind trees, and a mysterious distant light, but everything he found was either vegetation, trees, fallen trees, but he started to realize it was starting to get dark, and the time it took to get through the wood, dense undergrowth, was impeding their progress.

Occasionally he heard distant things being violently smashed, but saw powerful wind surges blasting about, and he started to believe it was the wood itself, or the region, and it had a supernatural presence, either from the vampires or something else there, which could be why they had gone there.

What staggered him the most was how dark it would be soon, and he rushed on, and believed that they might be able to achieve their objective and that there would be an eventual conclusion to the event, and events, but the place was shrouded everywhere with increasing denser vegetation and he even started wondering if they could get through it, and in the distant he heard what he was sure were wolves, and it left him trying to contemplate what was there, and at times sounds emerged like they were coming out the ground, and from underground shafts.

 

Chapter 28

 

The Vampire Hideout

 

Eisenberg thought supernatural regions existed, and that they had entered something, and when they entered the derelict building he was staggered that anyone could build and stay in such place.

It confused him, what they were doing, after all he had encountered, and now believed existed, compared with before, and he did not know what it was, and just tried to grasp how dangerous it was, and he rushed into the building before it became too dark, and to stop the vampires reviving before they found them, and he kept his eye on Kurt and the paranormal investigator.

He considered all the things he had heard of the supernatural trying to grasp what it was he was missing. He was sure they had discovered more than they realized, and he analyzed everything in a far greater degree.

At the top floor, he stopped suddenly, tiredly and startled by something, and he sensed something, and he moved on slowly, as Kurt and the paranormal investigator followed him, and he heard something somewhere.

For a long time he stared into the dimness recognizing little, as he strolled on, and gasped for a few seconds when he thought he was being watched by something in a region of darkness ahead, and was surprised something appeared there and he saw large box shapes, and kept examining them, and realized that it was tombs, and that they were in the same style as the vampire tombs back at the mansion, and realized that they were placed directly at the central region of the building.

At the tombs he heard silent sounds from something, and realized how dark it was and shifted silently up to them, searching everything everywhere, while he considered putting on his light, but he could give his presence away, if he had not been noticed.

A sudden blast, and explosion of light, left him stunned, while he crept on, and he froze, waiting to die, and die hideously for what he had done, and he stood confused, and saw what looked like a vampire illuminated in bright light standing in front of him, and he wondered what the hell it was, and after examining it closely it looked like a humanoid, and it seemed to welcome him, and he studied it and realized that it was a form of hologram.

It eventually altered, to do something, and do something to itself, and he remained trying to identify it, and he felt energy from it, and sheer power, and it reminded him of the extraterrestrial at the research center, and something about it, which he could not quite grasp.

 

Chapter 29

 

The Supernatural Universe

 

Behind the glowing entity Eisenberg saw a hideous slithering black devilish shape emerge from the blackness, out of a tomb, and he froze, and recognized it was Dracula, as it shifted slowly towards them.

While it crept up he watched it somehow alter, and it froze, unable to move, and the glowing extraterrestrial stood staring at it.

Suddenly he saw visions of star formations, and suddenly realized the glowing extraterrestrial was making contact with them, and showing them regions of space.

He felt energy surges from it and realized he was picking up telepathic messages from it, and it explained it was made of some form of energy, and existed in the past, and he realized it was a time traveler, like the extraterrestrial in the artifact.

Suddenly it altered his thoughts and he realized it was not a time traveler and that time travel could not properly be used in the universe, and only in its own universe, and he realized it was in a supernatural universe, and it had transmitted itself as a form of hologram, from the past.

It told him of an eminent scientist that once existed in its universe, who carried out experiments on transferring things into other universes, and in the end experimented on itself, and altered itself to exist in the universe, but its experiments altered it, and altered it into a monster being, trapping it in the universe, and unable to return to its universe, and its name had been Dracula.

They had found a way to transfer themselves, as a form of energy/hologram, energy formations, and took the form of humanoids, and tried to rid the world of his vampires, and it had been them that had trapped Dracula in the wood at the front of his castle, when he had returned, and they had left him dormant in the tomb, in the mansion/castle, as they had been unable to repair the damage he had done to himself.

They had searched for a method, and had searched the future of the world, and had eventually found a way, and they had someone move the castle to New York, and had placed over the artifact, before its discovery.

Eisenberg realized that the only way they could help Dracula was with the highly advanced extraterrestrial technology from the artifact, and they wanted Eisenberg to take Dracula, now dormant, to the Extraterrestrial Investigation Center research chamber, and with the knowledge they got from the extraterrestrial and artifact, and equipment they now had, to use it to repair and alter Dracula and transfer him back to his own universe, where they would return him to his own time.

 

Epilogue

 

The Lost Time Pod

 

For centuries the energy formation rested trapped under the Earth, and fiercely waiting to leave its confines, and imprisonment, frequently reawakening, with deadly energy surges blasting out.

Its shape inside the energy pod had pulsated when awakened, feeling little awareness, and had found little activity, which it had no real way of checking.

Its energy capsule was molded about it, with only some functions, with little power, and with no proper observations.

It perceived little and its thoughts wandered and it occasionally recollected distorted memories that had turned incomprehensible, from what had led it to its lethal error, and it could barely realize why it had survived or had annihilated itself.

It had activated vague sensors and felt vast unstable energy explosions blast out across dimensions with such force it felt like it threatened to make space and time completely rip apart, and destroy the fabric of space and time, and it had constantly realized it could do little when it had checked if anything had been detected anywhere.

The hideous situation had left it ensnared and recalling the colossal powers it once had and firmly contemplating the dangers and its chances of survival.

Its mission had been unbelievable and it realized how deadly it had been and recalled little of why it had once contemplated there not being any danger.

Its near destruction had amazed it and it frequently realized it had no proper presence and had become a form of unknown energy/formation, altering to something that it never recognized.

It turned invisible, and translucent, and the outer universe vanished from its thoughts, and it occasionally imagined echoes of its voyager functioning and its massive energy pulsations blasting out across the whole of creation.

Its revival attempts sustained, and the Earth and mankind evolved, and it realized its mind-boggling powers were dwindling, and it realized it would one day no longer exist, and it gradually turned itself completely dormant – and for as long as a hundred years – waiting for it to be revived to complete its deadly mission.

Part II

 

Novel 2

 

The Lost Treasure Map 6

 

V Bertolaccini

Prologue

 

The Treasure Investigation

 

The streets and lanes glowed in the last rays of sunlight, surrounding the headquarters of Reality Investigations, and it looked as though it was altering into a form of modern ghost town.

Pale golden shadows swept out from city structures, in gigantic shapes, probing out into the skyline.

Marple grabbed a bottle of whisky and poured me and him glasses full of whisky, and he firmly screwed the cap back on the bottle and put it away, and we sat back at the fireplace, and listened to a distant vehicle and vocal tones absurdly mingle and I realized Marple had something.

A few minutes later the phone’s ring disturbed him, and put him off what he was doing, and it had him going through the clients that he might have overlooked, but it eluded him, and he rushed over and answered it.

He listened and agreed with the caller and put the phone down and sat back in his seat, drinking his whisky, listening to crackles from the fire, and I discussed our past adventures, and he promised me more.

About an hour later I heard someone enter the building below, and his secretary announced an arrival through an intercom.

Marple put out his pipe and briskly considered the case, from different perspectives, and I spotted he was confused over what we were dealing with, and he eventually laughed, confusedly, and eventually just relaxed into his seat.

Outside the traffic and voices seemed to vanish, like into mist, and I sat in deep thought, and it became more intriguing!

His secretary rushed up the stairs and swiftly let the man in the room, without knocking, and I was staggered when I looked around and saw Dr Barrymore, as he shifted wearily forward, and I realized straightaway he was dreadfully ill and he could now hardly even walk, and clearly had serious medical conditions.

I examined him quickly wondering why he had gone to such lengths to get there, and it made me gasp, and I considered the war once again, and the dangers ahead, and wondered if the current events and intense bombings had helped his demise.

Dr Barrymore rushed into a seat, rested, exhausted, trying to recover, but not properly, and I noticed he had some documents he held firmly in his fist.

He observed us sitting around the table drinking and removed chewing tobacco and chewed off a lump, placing the remainder in his interior pocket.

Marple rushed over and got a drink for him, and returned, and placed it in front of him.

“What’s happened?” Marple asked. “What have you?”

“It’s that eighteenth century document and treasure!” he announced, and we looked up, from staring in the fire.

He rested, and continued, “The information on the artifact I’ve been looking for comes from accumulated sources, only known by me, and the individual sources, which have been proven to have occurred in 1568 …”

I was still surprised in what he said, and as I had forgotten of what he had told me at our last meeting, and Marple seemed to come to and recall what transpired.

“According what I’ve found,” Dr Barrymore continued, “Valuable jewels were left near where it was concealed!”

“Near the artifact?” Marple instantly asked, confused. “Was that some form of clue?”

“Perhaps! For centuries the lost jewels have been thought to exist by a few explorers, who have carried out searches.”

“So you still want us to help you find it?”

“I’ve recently located a form of map!” he gasped, trying to rest.

“What do you want us to do?” I asked, curiously.

“I discovered something of significant importance that could be of great interest to mankind! Yes! I will need your help!”

“Mankind!” Marple gasped, and sat back examining him, and silently gulped, and lit his pipe.

“According to legends some people have been found dead after searching for it …”

“They’re just legends?” I joked, smiling.

He nodded, and examined me a little more closely.

For a moment I considered there being a danger and wondered why it would still exist, and doubted the value of the objects, as all the archaeology and museum discoveries were currently usually worthless, except to historians like him.

I knew that he had been given a major clue to its location, and I watched him open the document and remove something from its interior, and hand it over to Marple, and I sat next to Marple, examining the ancient tattered piece of parchment, where there were lines and words scribbled over it, as though the person had been doing something and was in a great rush to finish it!

“What date do you make it?” I asked, amazed at its age.

Before Dr Barrymore replied Marple replied, “Around 1568!”

“So it’s a 1568 map?” I asked Dr Barrymore, and he agreed.

I thought about it but still did not know what it meant, and I wondered what he wanted us to do!

Marple finally finished examining it and placed it on the table, and looked over and asked, “So you want us to find the place on the map? With our experienced investigators …”

“Yes! Marple! I’d really like that! I also want you to search for it when you do, and phone me for any information, which I may be able to provide! I’m sure the treasure is still there, and I’d really just like it to be found!”

What I could not understand was why he was so confident with so little clues, and I wondered if he had been checking such things and proving their authentication, and it occurred to me that if everything he said was true then the accounts of its deadliness could also be true!

 

 

 

 

I

 

The Ancient Discovery

 

 

Chapter 1

 

Reality Investigations

 

The headquarters of Reality Investigations detective agency, beside the river Clyde, was where I disembarked, from directions John Marple, the founder, owner, and chief investigator, had given me on the phone, as he needed me as his assistant investigator.

At the time I never even suspected even in my wildest fantasies that we would find what we did, and also lost historical treasure, after major clues to its location were uncovered by Dr Barrymore.

Marple had investigators in all major worldwide cities and he was one of the most advanced and knowledgeable investigators I have met, who was known to me for many years before I joined him there, as assistant chief investigator, and his experience was vast, and entered new dimensions, in all sorts of ways, in science and technology, in extraordinary occurrences, and he handled cases and activities beyond any other agencies I have encountered, and even in current times, and especially at that time, as the Second World War began.

On my entrance of the building he arrived to welcome me, and rushed me up to his office, and meeting room, where all the action occurred, and I was introduced, as Mike Malone, the news reporter, to other investigators, and given a seat.

I felt painful bruises all about body where earlier that week I had slipped and fallen down a staircase, after trying to get an interview with a leading politician on the war, who had swiftly escaped, and I knew that there was trouble ahead, and I also realized I wanted a new career.

Marple held a meeting with his investigators discussing the onslaught of the war, to my surprise, and of its deadliness dawning, becoming apparent across the nation, and it was then that he introduced what must be one of the most distinctive and strangest investigations in scientific history, and what must surely be the greatest scientific discovery mankind has ever encountered, since the dawn of time.

He bestowed the case at the end of the meeting with little knowledge of what it was about, and asked me to handle it, as my first case, and to see what I would come up with, and left me in unadulterated confusion, as he gave me little, and I was sure we should not have taken the case at all, and I was surprised by Marple’s last silent mention of it, to another investigator, and that a desperate frightened woman on the phone had practically forced him into accepting the case.

Furthermore, before I undertook it, another bizarre occurrence took place, which later incredibly became part of the case, and a new eccentric client phoned Marple and arranged a meeting with him, with another strange case, and I stayed to see what the man was so desperate to do, and why Marple had suddenly become excitedly interested, and I knew money was involved.

I sat with Marple drinking whisky at the fireplace, and we discussed our past adventures together, and he promised me more, just as we heard the man enter the bottom floor, and Marple’s secretary announced his arrival through an intercom, and Marple ignited his pipe and smoked it briskly considering the case from diverse perspectives, and I saw he was confused over aspects of it.

The room slowly grew silent, and the outside traffic seemed to vanish into the distance, and I sat deep into my seat, and felt the suspense Marple was reacting to, but I could not quite grasp all of it, but realized he had to have something and tried to identify what his reactions were to, from the past.

It was intriguing and baffling! What could make such a guy react in such excitement, with such intrigue?

His secretary was clearly affected, which was also noticeable in her knock, and was silent and impeded, and Marple withheld from rushing up and over, and I was staggered when she brought in an aged man, she announced was Dr Barrymore, and he shifted forward, with some pain, and I realized he could hardly walk properly and had serious medical conditions.

I examined him wondering why he was even there, and realized he could be a politician or with the government, and it made me gasp as I considered the war again and I realized they could be looking for our help.

Dr Barrymore stopped in front of us and removed an envelope, which had the top ripped off.

He observed us sitting at a small table, between us and the fireplace, where our drinks and Marple’s pipe and ashtray were resting, and he anxiously shuffled over to a seat next to Marple.

He showed us a typed label on the envelope with his fingertips, with a glint of humor, followed by happiness, and he cheerfully rolled the envelope into a ball and threw it into the fireplace and removed chewing tobacco and chewed off a lump, placed the remainder in his interior pocket, and chewed off a chunk from the chunk in his mouth and spat the piece into the fire in the fireplace and started hungrily chewing the remainder.

Marple rushed over and got a drink, and returned, and placed it in front of him.

He removed something ancient looking from the envelope and started playing with it in front of our faces, considering what to say, as I watched the sun go down into the horizon at a side window, and golden shades beam over city buildings.

“What’s that?” I conclusively asked him, slightly annoyed at him not doing anything for so long, unable to maintain waiting.

“It’s an eighteenth century document!” Marple announced, and made Dr Barrymore look up, startled.

He stared annoyed at it, and Marple continued, “I’ve some experience of dating documents!”

“The origins of the artifact I am looking for come from the majority of accumulated sources, which have been proven to be from around 1568 …”

“1568?” Marple replied, looking slightly surprised, and sat back considering it.

“Yes!” Dr Barrymore continued. “According to accounts and legends! Valuable treasure was left near where it was concealed!”

“Near where what was concealed?” Marple swiftly gasped, looking confused.

“The artifact!”

Marple looked at him calmly, and looked deep into the fire, and listened to what he had to say.

“For centuries it has been thought to exist by a few scholars and explorers, who have carried out meticulous investigations and searches, of which none have been lucky enough …”

“What you’re saying is there is treasure somewhere?” I replied, unable to hold back my surprise and enthusiasm.

“Of course!” he shouted. “That’s what I said on the phone!”

“What do you want us to do?” I replied, cautiously.

“Help me find it!” he moaned. “I’ve recently come into some new information that could allow me to locate it!”

I could not grasp if it actually existed, and sat considering it, and everything he said.

“According to myths,” he continued, “some people have been found dead searching for it! There could be something of great danger nearby, where it’s been concealed!”

I sat thinking it over wondering what could be of great danger, and from that century, and was left baffled, and spotted Marple was still confused by the case.

“What’ll we do then?” I asked, curiously.

“You’ll have to wait until I’m ready! I have a major clue to its location, and I’m sure I can discover something of significant importance! I will need your help to recover it!”

“We’ll do that!” Marple replied firmly.

I knew that he had major clues to its location and that he was confident in discovering it and that it was located somewhere in the region, but I had no idea what it actually was!

After he had left the building, and returned home, I started to doubt what he was after was of value as all the archaeology and museum discoveries found then were usually worthless, except to historians like him, for historical value, and I was sure he was just trying to get us to go out our way to get it for him, and I was sure Marple must also think so.

Though did he have a new way of discovering lost treasures, and had he partially located it as he suggested? He had not given any major clue to its location and identity, but he had given the date of what must surely have been the time of its origins.

He had been unraveling something for some considerable time and I went over it considering if he had deliberately disguised facts throughout his message, and if he was after something else.

 

Chapter 2

 

My First Investigation

 

All I had been given was that an elderly woman had witnessed something unusual in the night, while going to bed, and there seemed to me no case to investigate and no crime had been committed, and nothing seemed to suggest anything, and I went to the client confused and repeatedly going over the document I was given, which consisted of nothing but a few paragraphs about a few lines she had given the agency, and I came to the conclusion that she might have stopped an attempted burglary and wanted me to secretively handle the problem.

What could she have confronted at night in the hall of her ground floor tenement flat that could have caused her to seek such dramatic action?

The location was in the south of the city at Craigmillar Road in Langside, and when I entered I expected little. It was my first mission! And when I saw and talked to the elderly woman I realized she had recently become a widow, and was on her own there, and realized that she had encountered something that she believed was of a paranormal nature, but which was of the strangest nature that I had witnessed in all my encounters, and from everything I had ever heard of.

Surely if she had fantasized something it would be of a normal ghost, but it was far stranger, and I had to try to deduce what she meant by what she told me, and I then had her give me accurate descriptions of the visitation, or whatever she thought it was, and it gave me nothing and it left me confused.

She was not ill, or had taken anything, and had not had previous hallucinations, and still she insisted something had started to appear there, in her ground floor flat, at the same time it grew dark, and she claimed it floated over her hall floor, and its movement suggested it was doing something.

In the end I was so engrossed in discovering what would happen, and in the unusual case, I accepted her offers of staying to see it, and was given a bedroom to stay in, and was surprised that she insisted I should consider the occurrence after it happened, to give her advice, for when I met her in the morning at breakfast.

 

Chapter 3

 

The Haunting

 

For a moment I thought something of enormous danger could occur on the investigation, but I could not believe such a thing could happen on my first case for starters, and it had not occurred to any of the other investigators, and how could anything happen with such a case! It was absurd!

Yet I wanted to know what it was she was talking about, and placed a seat at the door of the bedroom and left the door partly opened, just enough to see the hallway, and entire area where she told me she had seen it, and I sat reading a book, and started to realize why she could have imagined something in the dark there, on her own, and then I started to see sense and that she might have some form of medical condition that could have caused her to observe something.

What really astonished me was the fact that she arrived near the time the occurrences had taken place and apologized to me for something, and handed me a book, to which I believed she had given me as she felt sorry for me, leaving me there doing nothing, in the dark, with her elaborate plan, whatever it was, and I considered if she intended to use the story of the occurrences for somewhere for some reason.

Then when I started to read the book I sat back staggered, as the book was full of ghost stories! They were supposedly real accounts, which had been written like they had authentically occurred, and I started to believe she had it in for me, and realized it could be part of her plan to persuade me there was something there, and I even considered helping her fabricate it at one point, as she might need it.

Though after flicking through the pages, trying to see what was there, I was left even more staggered as there were accounts of occurrences actually taking place in the same region.

There were accounts claiming ancient inhabitants of the region had seen alarming evil mysterious magical forces and transcendent things dwelling there, which I could not grasp the identity of.

It grabbed my attention that the place had not always been a city region, centuries ago, and it sent a chill through me as I thought what could be buried away there.

There was an old newspaper account that reported and warned the readers of unexplained ancient occurrences, and one of the worst of the detailed accounts told of travelers that had come upon the mutilated remains of gypsies left in pieces in the region by some hideous occurrence, with their remains scattered throughout a wood nearby, and others of people being attacked and chased by things with fearful sounds.

Upon reading it with fascination my eyes fell upon something in corridor, which I had seen but had ignored, as I was engrossed in it, and I stared at it for almost a minute trying to recognize it but was unable to form an image of what was there, and what I was looking at, as it had no real form, and the darkness and my tiredness never allowed my mind to come to a conclusion.

It was the woman’s appearance there that brought me to, and she stood behind the door, out in the hallway, and I could say little, and she quickly entered my room and closed the door, and turned on the light.

After questioning her again about it, with me this time realizing that there was something there, I asked what she had been doing before its appearance, and if she had done something that could have caused its appearance, and she considered everything and was at a loss.

I then asked her if she had done anything anywhere that she had not done before!

For a long time she thought it over and came up with something!

The only thing she had been doing, which she could recall, was she had been using a metal detector, which she had borrowed off a friend, who had given it to her as she had lost her old wedding ring, and she could not find it anywhere.

While using it, searching for it, she had found a small hole in the floor and carpet, and she had taken up the floorboards under the carpet and had used it to examine all the heaps of rubble, dirt, and building remains below for it, and she had found the ring, but the metal detector stopped working, but was working again the next day.

I asked her when the occurrences had started and she eventually told me that it had appeared there that night.

So I asked her if she still had the metal detector and she took me into her living room and removed it from a box, behind her sofa, and I examined it and I realized how expensive it was, and that it was powerful!

It was then that I was sure the thing in the hall could be affected by it, and that I could solve the case by using it on it, and perhaps get rid of it, as I was sure ghosts might be affected by such forces.

Once I found out how to use it and its controls I went out into the hall with it, and prepared myself, and waited for the woman to turn it on at the mains, and I was so fascinated with the ghost or whatever it was I marched towards it trying grasp any detail in it that I could recognize, but I could not get anything, and up close it looked like a mass of red energy being generated by something, and to my amazement it exploded into a frenzy of activity, and I realized the metal detector had been switched on, and at that point I collapsed across the floor, unconscious.

 

Chapter 4

 

The Home Guard

 

Everything seemed to look weird and somehow unbelievable, and I studied everywhere trying to grasp what, and I kept recalling the moments before I collapsed and awakened in bed in the morning, wondering what the hell happened.

I was sure it damaged my brain and I had a bad time recalling things. I could not think of what to do and if I should try to help the woman further, but it was ridicules as I had never heard of such an occurrence, and never mind what the solution was, and I wondered if I had blown my first case, and I decided to ignore it and hope the woman never asked Marple for further help.

I wanted to join the Home Guard, even though I could not recall wanting to do it before, after I saw an advert looking for part time Home Guard soldiers, and realized I could fit it into my schedule.

I had immediately gone there, and sat bored in the Home Guard office waiting room, sitting on my own, with some faint sounds behind the office door in front of me, where I assumed I was to be interviewed, and I started wondering what I was about to do and how deadly this war could become, as if the Germans invaded it would equivalent to being on the frontline, and I was also getting desperate for answers and wondering repeatedly if I had received damage to his mind, and realized that I would be checked by an army doctor at some point and realized I could have him properly check me out.

I felt different somehow and I could not grasp what and stood and started checking myself, and feeling my head for damage where I collapsed and hit the floor, and realized the woman could have covered up me hitting something when I collapsed, as she would have felt responsible for it, and I started examining my whole body, trying to see how it functioned to me doing things, and I started jumping up and down and waving my arms about, and examined my legs, and they responded, and I did a handstand and noticed my body was weak and seemed to move differently than I intended, and I partially looked upwards and saw a large shadow shift across the floor, and saw someone standing over me, in front of me.

An officer was standing staring at me crazily.

“What in the hell are you doing?” the sergeant shouted, and I collapsed over the floor.

“I’m starting to get out of shape sitting in here!” I moaned.

He stood staring insanely, and not believing anything, and clearly thinking I was someone else.

“God help us!” he shouted. “If this is all we get …”

“This is the Home Guard?” I swiftly replied, trying to look normal.

“Well it surely isn’t the boy Scouts!” he moaned. “Yes! We’re the Local Defence Volunteers!”

He ordered me into the front office, and I knew I was in the army, and I sat in a seat at the desk and waited for an officer to come. Then I wondered what the hell I was doing there!

An officer entered, looked through a form about me, which I had filled in and handed in at the entrance office.

“Captain Godfrey!” he announced. “And that’s Sergeant Clooney my deputy officer.”

Clooney sat in the seat beside me, in front of the captain’s desk, and watched us both, and the captain shuffle through his stuff.

“We’re putting together a group of soldiers because of the war and you look suitable …” he announced, examining information on him. “So you’re a private investigator?”

Clooney looked sideways in surprise, and examined me over again, differently.

Suddenly the phone blared out and the captain picked it up and instantly realized who it was and launched into an argument with the person, and shouted not to phone him there unless it was an emergency, and thumped the phone down.

He glanced over and gasped, stopped what he was doing and examined me up close and looked straight into my face as if he suddenly saw something he did not want to see and could not fully grasp, and continued studying me.

“Your face it’s familiar!” he moaned, and he started tapping his finger hard against the desk, and tried to grasp something.

“I want to ask you a few questions!” he finally asked.

I sat upright and waited.

“Why do you want to join the army, Malone?” he asked firmly, studying me with confusion, and he started sipping tea from a cup.

“I can’t remember!”

“What?” he loudly gasped, also coughing up the tea in his mouth. “What can’t you remember?”

“I have had an accident recently and have had some memory loss!” I confessed, and suddenly wondered why I had done it, and sat depressed.

The captain seemed to alter somehow, and he suddenly grew interested in me, and seemed to want me.

“Okay! You’ve had a recent misfortune! Perhaps caused by this blasted war! But surely you can make a rough guess as to why?”

Clooney stood up and went over and got a cup of tea, and sat back down, and sipped it and watched us both.

“I can’t really remember at all!” I moaned, and made Clooney gasp and cough out all the tea in his mouth, blasting it all across his front, and he instantly started cleaning it up.

When I offered to help clean it Godfrey screamed, “Leave it!”

After resting and calming himself he looked over, and he finally asked, “Why do you think people join the army?”

“To go and see the world and universe!” I replied, wondering why they did join up.

“Universe!” he moaned back. “We’re the Home Guard! You’re hardly going to see anything …”

“Or to get about and do things people normally don’t get to do!” I continued.

“Let me explain!” he moaned, staring into my face for a few seconds, staggered by something, and putting his elbow in his tea cup and making it spill over the table, in a puddle, and he swiftly grabbed an old pair of pants out his bin and started using it to clean it up.

Once he finished he calmed himself, showing his hidden depression and inner despair, by the situation and his job ahead, and start of the war.

He calmly started saying, “Once upon a time, in the old days, about a century ago or so, people joined the French Foreign Legion to forget! Problems! Things they just wanted to escape out of! Escape from weary existences! The problems of the world! Even hide away from crimes they committed!”

He suddenly stared straight into the depths of my eyes, almost trying read my thoughts, searching my consciousness.

“Well, I’m sure I’d have recalled doing that! As you said it’s just the Home Guard! Not the Foreign Legion!”

“Really!” he replied, smiling. “How do you know you never?”

“I’ve little recollection of much at the moment! So I can’t properly answer that!”

Suddenly I realized what he had replied with and it struck me that he might have been trying to suggest something to me that I should know, and I realized I could have done something and have forgotten it and that he might know of it! I sat in horror for a few moments contemplating it, and if he could have found out about it, and I gasped as I realized my mind was more blanker than I had contemplated, and I had hardly any memories of many things, and I could not grasp what!

While I sat considering this Godfrey sat making absurd strange faces, which I had not seen before, as though in pain, and he slightly bent over and held his head firmly in his hands, and relaxed there, and his shoulders quivered and slackened, and he remained like it until he recovered, and I watched him calmly return to what he normally did.

“Perhaps you should just leave!” he moaned firmly, looking sad, almost looking as though he might cry, and he turned away from me and looked away, and the situation left me confused and I realized my goal now was to find out what the hell had happened!

Later I was sure the captain and sergeant thought I was up to something, and hiding something.

“I’ve another question!” I quickly asked the captain.

“What?” he moaned back, not looking directly at me.

“What the hell will we be doing? Surely the military doesn’t need the Home Guard at the moment?”

“We’re getting ready! We’re also doing other things! At the moment we’re helping the police search for a killer! Perhaps you can help us with that?”

“Perhaps I can!” I replied, wondering why the police needed the army. “What sort of things has he done?”

“You’re a reporter! It’s classified! We don’t want the newspapers getting it! They can have the killings but not the whole story! Got it?”

“Yes!”

“The police don’t want the public panicking! There have been a large amount of killings by someone! He virtually destroys his victims …”

“Are there any witnesses to anything?”

“No! But the police have just started their investigations!”

“Perhaps this war is having more of a reaction on people than they think!”

“Well! We can help them! We can use you to investigate what’s going on, and get some information for us on what’s happening!”

A shiver ran through me, and I shuddered, and I considered the dangers, and the guy who could do such a thing!

“Why are they so sure it’s the one person?” I asked.

“I don’t know! Perhaps as that is what normally is the case, and that their investigations have not shown anyone else! So they take everything on what they prove!”

I could not grasp if it was the way he had given the case, my memory condition, or if there really was something occurring that was new, and far more deadly than they had encountered.

 

Chapter 5

 

Paranormal Investigators

 

Outside my hotel bedroom window Loch Ness stretched out in bright sunlight, and I rested against the window frame, and dreamily watched its waves shifting up its shore, and away in the distance I saw a mysterious mist shift over the surface of the loch and the castle become visible.

For a few seconds I saw its prehistoric look and I now realized some kind of monster or large creature could exist in its confines, even though it was not entirely isolated, and it never seemed big enough, but with carefully examinations I accepted it could be and it could be deep in places.

The bedroom seemed alright. The two psychic researcher’s equipment was all over it, everywhere, and they speedily had porters bring it in while they unpacked it, and examined it for breakages or other damage.

I had never seen anything like it, and most of it was new, and new technology, and I gasped again at what their profession was!

It was the occurrence at Craigmillar Road, with the metal detector, which persuaded me to take the investigation, and I persuaded Marple to give it to me, even though I never properly knew what it was and what I was to do, and in the end why I was needed to accompany two paranormal investigators, Oswald and Higgins, to the Loch Ness location, and I continuously read through the documents on the case, and my mission, and their mission, and found little, and I could barely make anything out.

The documents were virtual missing anything that said anything about anything!

It suggested the Loch Ness monster somewhere, and never said anything of what was needed, and at the time I had heard little on the subject, and was confused why the paranormal investigators were interested in it, and even though I had done a little research into them I consistently tried to grasp what they did, and were doing at Loch Ness.

I examined their carefully placed thermometers, which Oswald carefully placed about the room. It was at less than fourteen degrees centigrade, and I estimated the temperature outside.

“What are you looking for here?” I finally enquired.

“We’re just checking everything about this place!” he replied, and took out a book, which he had filled with details from their research, and I wondered what they had found! But I now knew they would not give me anything, but I was sure they might accidentally give me a clue if I kept checking.

“But why the hell have I been taken here?” I moaned. “They’ve forgotten to give me anything! There has to be something here for me to have been put here, and Marple to take the case!”

It was my best argument, and I waited for a reply, and I watched Oswald fidget and look alert and I suddenly saw Higgins shift over to him.

Before he said anything he stopped and examined me, and stood confused about something, and he examined my shoes and stood back.

I started to realize how far they were going to go to avoid giving me anything!

He whispered something in Oswald’s ear, and they both started examining me, and they took measurements of me.

Until I called out, “What is it? What have you found?”

“You look different! Your height has altered! What height are you then?”

“Let me see!” I demanded, and checked the measurements they had taken and realized that my height had increased, and I measured myself without my shoes, and realized that I was over three inches taller, and I sat down confused, and wondered what they thought it was, but they refused to say anything, and I wondered what I thought of it.

Again I wondered if we were actually there to search for the Loch Ness monster after all and again I never believed it existed, as there was nothing to back up the claim, accept strange photos, which could even have been deliberately put there to stop outsiders discovering it.

The sky darkened and looked as if night was approaching and snowflakes started floating down, and I watched Higgins react to it with disappointment, and I was sure if it remained the way it was it might ruin the whole trip and investigation, whatever it was, and later, that night, I heard their low voices in the other room, deliberately not letting me hear them, and wondered what the hell they were up to, and my thirst for knowledge grew and I knew I had to get what they were doing.

 

Chapter 6

 

Loch Ness Monster

 

After my dreams the whole account of the Loch Ness monster was inconceivable, and while I was looking out my room window, when I got up in the night, I thought I even saw the thing out in the loch, and realized that it might actually be a night creature, and be hidden away in the deepest depths of the loch or some dark cave during the night.

I thought of it being a monster, and not a friendly beast, and I could hardly believe the events of the past days and that we were now on the trail of a massive killer monster!

When the first rays of sunlight blasted out from within a small wood, while the night and darkness vanished into the other horizon, I studied my surroundings and the dark blue water, searching for the monster, and snow covered landscape, trying to explain why the snow had not been foreseen by the forecast, and I thought of what to do if it continued and snowed heavily and if it would actually ruin their investigations and experimenters, and I was not fully sure as they had not given me enough information.

While the sky grew brighter I watched the snow glowing and I suddenly saw something strange and what looked like someone’s distorted footprints near an area of the shore, and realized that they came out the water, and went back into it, and I realized the actual size of them with astonishment, and I rushed over and banged on Higgins’s room door.

I was surprised to find both paranormal scientists fully awake and carrying experiments, and I rushed in, and was amazed that they had just discovered something, and signs of a paranormal occurrence, but were unsuccessfully trying to locate it.

“I think I found something!” I announced swiftly. “Outside!”

They looked at each other in confusion, then amazement, and surprise, and grabbed some of their equipment and shoved it into bags, and I took them to the window in my room and showed them the marks.

“Do you see them?” I announced excitedly.

“See what?” Higgins moaned, searching where I was looking.

“Footprints!”

They examined them with surprise and we rushed out the door, and down the stairs, and out the building.

Once outside a bitter breeze blew across our cheeks and I wondered if we would regret our actions, and not waiting until later. But it could easily snow and cover the footprints up and if what I had seen in the loch earlier in the dark was real we might see it and prove its existence.

I had forgotten how hideous monsters were supposed to be! I also realized that nobody would probably believe us if it was and we never got any evidence.

The place had a look of having deadly ghostly things behind all its black shadows, and dark places.

The sun faintly shone through gaps in the thick clouds, edging up through distance trees, casting long black shadows, with demon shapes through falling snow dust.

I studied the shore and area with the prints repeatedly, and the paranormal scientists did the same, as we shuffled through thick areas of snow, and swiftly accelerated over thin areas, while going up and down small mounds and hills, and through thick and thin areas of vegetation.

I tried to grasp what sort animal it could be and how we should handle it, and I kept wondering what the two paranormal scientists would do if we found it.

What if it was like some form of massive lion and was hungry, and waiting to get a human alone! Our sightings clearly gave the loch ahead as the location of it!

“What’ll we do if we find the thing?” I eventually asked them, watching Higgins leading us forward faster.

“We’ll discuss that when we see what’s there,” he replied.

The brightening sunshine and white snow was blinding when the sun properly emerged, and early in the morning, and I had a hard time seeing what was in front of us.

“Over there …!” Higgins moaned, looking at part of the ground ahead, where we followed his eyes to. “Footprints are visible!”

I examined the snow all around us, keeping my eyes peeled for anything, especially behind trees.

It was incredible the prints were there, but covered in some snow, and I knew that they had to belong to something immense, and larger than anything I had seen before, and we stopped in front of them amazed, and staggered at the enormity of what it was.

We strolled about them, and the two scientists took photos and measured them, and I started to realize with disappointment that we had not actually achieved our goal and they were covered in too much snow and the photos would not be enough to prove anything, and I saw that the snow was about to come down heavily on top of them and us, and I searched where the prints went and followed them down to the shore and out into the loch, where I saw something emerge in the dark water, like a black shadow, and I saw it shift, with amazement.

 

Chapter 7

 

The Wood

 

Fifteen armed soldiers arrived, and the police, and I kept wondering why the police had not been used in the first place, but I recalled hearing the soldiers had been nearby.

There was something different about the monster that was extraordinary and vastly dangerous that I could not fully grasp! All the soldiers and police were marching in a line through the wood, and they were ready with their guns as they started searching!

One marched with his rifle pointing at the undergrowth directly ahead, while officers watched at his side, and I saw their eyes wide and how alert they were, and ready for action.

It was incredible the monster actually existed and came out the loch further along from where we had been at the loch, but distant, but we saw the size of the thing and that it was far larger than anything we had heard of, and it had vanished into the wood, which they were searching.

It was a shame if they shot the thing or even captured it! Even though it would prove it existed!

I could not grasp how such a thing could exist there, and had not been caught, and going by the others they thought the same, and it was amazing seeing the soldiers discovering its footprints, and I waited to hear gunfire from the wood.

At the time I expected some form of flying vehicle to appear, as I had heard of stuff, and that there had been a form helicopter that had been experimented with, and I watched the loch go along the wood away into the distance and realized the creature definitely belonged in the loch, and I realized it would probably reenter it further along, instead of moving back through the wood, and I wondered why there were no soldiers there, and with amazement I saw it shoot out of the wood and shift swiftly into the water away in the distance.

A deep heavy thud echoed about the place and I realized it was an altered version of a gun being fired, and for a few seconds I gasped wondering if it had entered the loch after all and if they had just killed it.

I watched the most distant soldier, away in the depths of the wood, and him using a torch and its beam shifting around everywhere, while he stood aiming his rifle.

I realized how dangerous the monster was and that it could go crazy and I expected the thing to come flying straight out the loch, and I wondered if they could accurately shoot and kill it, and if their bullets could kill it!

 

Chapter 8

 

The Search

 

The entire front page of a major newspaper covered the story, of the Loch Ness sighting, and what had happened, but they had not authenticated the discovery or produced evidence, and its species was marked as unknown.

The story was seen all over the country, and tourists, reporters, scientists, people from other groups started to turn up, and the two paranormal scientists, with some luck, saved the day, just when we were about to leave Loch Ness with no proper proof of the monster’s existence, when they brought in conventional scientists, who had the technology to scan the loch, to the deepest depths, and even into regions of the ground.

Though it was not accurate, and produced some mapping below the ground, to a certain depth, it made it possible to observe some objects with some clarity, and perhaps even a dinosaur fossil, and it worked from a plane.

The scientists were also members of an exploration association, and they had been on a scientific expedition to uncover a legendry form of dinosaur in the Amazon, and they had declared how they could help them, and they gave them an insight into their technology and how it could be used.

Though dark clouds shifted in at nightfall and the heavy snow arrived, and it even looked as if we would be snowed in and trapped in the hotel, and unable to even reach the airport, to get to the airplane, but luckily in the morning it cleared.

The roads were cleared by the evening and we got to the airport and airplane and started investigating their new technology, trying to grasp what we could from what they gave, and we left on the airplane from the airport towards Loch Ness.

The two paranormal investigators were enthralled with their setup and operating methods, and thought that it could be a major breakthrough, and in their investigations, grasping its full potential and the future possibilities that it could offer their various forms of scientific exploration.

At the same time I investigated what I could and how the technology functioned in far greater detail and what its capabilities were. It soon began to look too hard to produce and use, but my thoughts of it and the mission altered once we started investigating large regions of the loch.

How could they fail? The creature had to be around where our hotel was, and they were swiftly exploring the entire loch!

The equipment system was monitoring everything perfectly and I sensed that they could detect the monster and I considered if they had deliberately given incorrect information on the distance of the scan to hide its faults and power, as it was expensive equipment!

I later became sure from things some of the scientists on the plane had indicated that they were carrying out a more distant and less accurate scan, which I was sure could not detect it without it being close up.

At the front window I watched shades of light play with my vision in animated motions, over the bright loch, and snow covered hills and mountains, while the plane rushed through the air, and I watched the scientists at work, constantly examining their technology and readouts to discover anything, and anything to make improvements, for them to introduce, or for them to make any breakthroughs with.

The two paranormal investigators sat along from me, sitting opposite beside each other, at a table with a map stretched out across it, searching the area ahead and about us, while they discussed it.

It was strange as there never looked as though there was anything there, especially so desolate, and there was little about the plane with anything, and the region looked far colder and too far north. Yet we knew what place the monster could be, even though it could be virtually anywhere there, and I was surprised that they finally asked the pilots to fly lower, and I looked out the side window and saw that the hotel was away up ahead.

It was incredible when something occurred, and few minutes later it did, and the equipment reacted, which was unbelievable, even as I knew something could be there, and the equipment started showing more reactions and giving incredible readouts and the scientists, who had not seen the creature, could not comprehended what was there, and as it was vague, which could have been off anything, but when they shifted the airplane over to where the source was they started getting better and more comprehensible readouts, and one scientist even started suggesting something else there could be creating the disturbance.

At a screen where reactions were being displayed, and a blurred but visible image of a massive creature emerged, and they all started discussing what they thought it was, and at least one thought it was something else, as they could not comprehend what could cause it, and I saw that another was disappointed.

I realized something and gasped, and I saw the two paranormal scientists notice it and follow my eyes and surely realize what I thought and that the detected object was not in fact under the loch, and was under an area of land beside it, which was in a desolate spot near our hotel.

 

Chapter 9

 

The Science Convention

 

I was surprised to see reporters I knew and the media from throughout the globe arrive at the annual conference of the exploration association and I realized straightaway that the whole story of the Loch Ness monster and occurrences that had taken place would become well known and documented, and be on newspapers, magazines, television, and many other media sources.

All the scientists and explorers were packed together around a stage platform and some were being interviewed and filmed! Luckily the scientists with our investigation of the Loch Ness monster and the cavity avoided them and telling anything and the majority of the people never knew what had really happened either, and the media was mainly investigating things and doing news updates on the story.

I recalled everything that had happened and our explorations of the cavity we found, where the object was under the area of land beside the loch, which we used a photo of the airplane scan and of a photo of the loch from outside the airplane to find, and put it on a map of the loch.

We used divers to investigate the loch about the cavity and they found the entrance, and filmed its interior, which was startling, and had many signs of the monster having been there, and the remains of food it had eaten, including fish, sharks, and the skeleton of a large cow.

Yet, even though we found it, the mission was unsuccessfully as we were unable to capture it and get anything on the monster itself, and it never appeared there again, and it had gone into hiding, and we never had any proper proof of its existence, except vague hazy photos we collected from people there who had seen it, and one I took when the divers were in the cavity, of its black distant shape, away in the distance, watching us, and I saw it vanish away in the distance, surely never to return.

I was astonished that the exploration association was mainly unknown and that the media had not noticed the group, and its accomplishments. They had many mentions of their explorations and adventures over many years! And the large conference hall was packed solid with famous and major scientists from all over the globe that were members!

I even realized, from something someone said, that within the club there was a form of secret society, which I never fully grasped the objective of!

The two paranormal investigators, with me there, vaguely told me of some of their discoveries that could well rival major discoveries at the time, which were never reported, and which they had vast amounts of evidence and documentation of.

It had activities that gave colossal amounts of new findings, and I was astounded at the connections and potential assistance they had and provided.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Treasure Investigation

 

The streets and lanes glowed in the last rays of sunlight, surrounding the headquarters of Reality Investigations, and it looked as though it was altering into a form of modern ghost town.

Pale golden shadows swept out from city structures, in gigantic shapes, probing out into the skyline.

Marple grabbed a bottle of whisky and poured me and him glasses full of whisky, and he firmly screwed the cap back on the bottle and put it away, and we sat back at the fireplace, and listened to a distant vehicle and vocal tones absurdly mingle and I realized Marple had something.

A few minutes later the phone’s ring disturbed him, and put him off what he was doing, and it had him going through the clients that he might have overlooked, but it eluded him, and he rushed over and answered it.

He listened and agreed with the caller and put the phone down and sat back in his seat, drinking his whisky, listening to crackles from the fire, and I discussed our past adventures, and he promised me more.

About an hour later I heard someone enter the building below, and his secretary announced an arrival through an intercom.

Marple put out his pipe and briskly considered the case, from different perspectives, and I spotted he was confused over what we were dealing with, and he eventually laughed, confusedly, and eventually just relaxed into his seat.

Outside the traffic and voices seemed to vanish, like into mist, and I sat in deep thought, and it became more intriguing!

His secretary rushed up the stairs and swiftly let the man in the room, without knocking, and I was staggered when I looked around and saw Dr Barrymore, as he shifted wearily forward, and I realized straightaway he was dreadfully ill and he could now hardly even walk, and clearly had serious medical conditions.

I examined him quickly wondering why he had gone to such lengths to get there, and it made me gasp, and I considered the war once again, and the dangers ahead, and wondered if the current events and intense bombings had helped his demise.

Dr Barrymore rushed into a seat, rested, exhausted, trying to recover, but not properly, and I noticed he had some documents he held firmly in his fist.

He observed us sitting around the table drinking and removed chewing tobacco and chewed off a lump, placing the remainder in his interior pocket.

Marple rushed over and got a drink for him, and returned, and placed it in front of him.

“What’s happened?” Marple asked. “What have you?”

“It’s that eighteenth century document and treasure!” he announced, and we looked up, from staring in the fire.

He rested, and continued, “The information on the artifact I’ve been looking for comes from accumulated sources, only known by me, and the individual sources, which have been proven to have occurred in 1568 …”

I was still surprised in what he said, and as I had forgotten of what he had told me at our last meeting, and Marple seemed to come to and recall what transpired.

“According what I’ve found,” Dr Barrymore continued, “Valuable jewels were left near where it was concealed!”

“Near the artifact?” Marple instantly asked, confused. “Was that some form of clue?”

“Perhaps! For centuries the lost jewels have been thought to exist by a few explorers, who have carried out searches.”

“So you still want us to help you find it?”

“I’ve recently located a form of map!” he gasped, trying to rest.

“What do you want us to do?” I asked, curiously.

“I discovered something of significant importance that could be of great interest to mankind! Yes! I will need your help!”

“Mankind!” Marple gasped, and sat back examining him, and silently gulped, and lit his pipe.

“According to legends some people have been found dead after searching for it …”

“They’re just legends?” I joked, smiling.

He nodded, and examined me a little more closely.

For a moment I considered there being a danger and wondered why it would still exist, and doubted the value of the objects, as all the archaeology and museum discoveries were currently usually worthless, except to historians like him.

I knew that he had been given a major clue to its location, and I watched him open the document and remove something from its interior, and hand it over to Marple, and I sat next to Marple, examining the ancient tattered piece of parchment, where there were lines and words scribbled over it, as though the person had been doing something and was in a great rush to finish it!

“What date do you make it?” I asked, amazed at its age.

Before Dr Barrymore replied Marple replied, “Around 1568!”

“So it’s a 1568 map?” I asked Dr Barrymore, and he agreed.

I thought about it but still did not know what it meant, and I wondered what he wanted us to do!

Marple finally finished examining it and placed it on the table, and looked over and asked, “So you want us to find the place on the map? With our experienced investigators …”

“Yes! Marple! I’d really like that! I also want you to search for it when you do, and phone me for any information, which I may be able to provide! I’m sure the treasure is still there, and I’d really just like it to be found!”

What I could not understand was why he was so confident with so little clues, and I wondered if he had been checking such things and proving their authentication, and it occurred to me that if everything he said was true then the accounts of its deadliness could also be true!

 

Chapter 11

 

The Haunting

 

What was incredible was I realized I had not solved anything in my first case and what had happened to me at Craigmillar Road, and I could not grasp what would happen, as every puzzle and mystery seemed to be or was being solved everywhere else, by some means, and Marple forced me into taking another visit there, and ordered me to solve it as quickly as possible.

I realized he had read my report on what had happened and had entirely missed what had occurred and what I meant, and I could not explain any further anything of what had happened and he never seemed to think anything had happened to me, and I realized again that even though he had a great interest in investigating the paranormal he never believed it, and consistently explained it with logical solutions, and he believed that he could explain virtually anything, and as I made my way back to the house at Craigmillar Road I realized that I would really like to find something of that nature, and which he could not answer!

The elderly woman was delighted to see me and did everything to welcome me in and not put me off the case, and at dinner we discussed the case and she told me what had been happening since I left and she told me that the haunting had continued occurring every night at the same time, and had increased since my visit, and that neighbors in the surrounding buildings and streets had witnessed strange occurrences like it, and she showed me mentions of it in newspapers and other publications.

What could it be? I was left baffled, once again! I had considered everything, and only had the metal detector that had activated it, and it never added up to anything!

I realized that the two paranormal investigators had not even known what it was, and I realized that they should be the ones that should solve it, and they could at least witness the occurrence, and information, and I realized from the information they had given that they had not actually given me any mention of such an occurrence, and I was sure that they had not told me of anything authentic of a supernatural nature, and which they had confronted, and I was sure that they had not properly found anything as solid as it, and that their stuff was not really authentic, and going by Marple’s view of them and their work he never believed that they had discovered anything of that nature.

I left the building and got to a phone and called them up, and I explained the situation and the occurrences and Higgins was astounded, and he sounded more astounded than I had heard him, and he was deeply surprised, and was not able to explain anything to me, and he put Oswald on the phone, and he was confused, and they agreed to come and see the occurrence, and they decided to bring their best equipment, and try and help the woman.

It was amazing that I had not fully realized the idea before!

I had been too busy not wanting to go back, and had no interest in finding out what was there, and the damage I had been bad!

It was incredible that all the time I had been with them I never properly explained what had happened, and I still believe they never picked up what I meant.

I recalled how powerful it was, and that their other scientists could also help out, and I told her about them, and their experience, and she was excited at the outcome and glad to have me bring them.

So I phoned Marple and told him of what occurred and he just ignored the occurrences and told me the two paranormal scientists had become famous over the Loch Ness monster story, and he agreed that their technology had vastly improved, and that if anyone could find anything they would be the ones.

 

Chapter 12

 

The Paranormal Scientists

 

Paranormal scientists and technicians rushed back and forward setting up their new equipment all over the woman’s corridor, while Oswald and Higgins checked everything.

I watched on, and the woman in her living room relaxing, joyously listening to the scientists at work.

They gave me the impression that they might be going to do something or come to a conclusion, and that they might well have found the right location to do it.

I started to realize the implications, and recalled what had happened to me the last time, and that it might be deadly, and I realized that they might find something was there of deadly origins and be of great danger to everyone there and even in the region! Yet when I thought of it I could not realize anything that could do such a thing!

Higgins quickly told the scientists, “Investigate all these walls, the floor, and roof …”

I felt tiredness from the events of that day and wished that I could have rested.

When I examined the equipment they now had I was surprised at how advanced it had become and at its capabilities and I wondered how they could make a large enough profit to pay for it, but realized it surely was funded somewhere.

Their visit there was clearly giving them far more of an insight and knowledge of things than I had realized, and they had gained a great deal of information from their earlier questioning of the woman, who had been desperate to get them to solve the problem.

I was becoming positive that they had found far more than they had indicated, and were keeping secrets from me.

I wanted to grasp what they all knew that I should know, and I regularly strolled about examining the equipment for clues, and recalled something that I had forgotten and reading about some of the work that the two paranormal scientists had done years ago, after they had given documents on their paranormal investigations.

I recalled their stuff had been surprising, and even alarming, which had drawn my attention at the time, but I recalled that I had just dismissed it later as them using it to advertise their work!

At times I thought they were deliberately putting the psychic research there to cover their real work and discoveries! Whatever that was! They never mentioned anything on other stuff that they did, which I had found existed at occasions, and I had hardly even seen anyone even check them.

They informed me that they were checking for virtually all known forms of disturbance, energy and matter disturbances, in and around the haunted region and I was sure that they could, from what I had heard earlier from some of the other scientists, which just confused me even more later as I could not grasp what they were actually talking about at times, and I realized that so far I just never knew what was there!

Eventually I started to get sleepy and at some point I fell asleep in a chair in my room, after a long day, and I was suddenly awoken from one of the strangest dreams I have had, and thought I sensed something strange, which I could not grasp, and kept trying to awaken myself further and prove that it was the dream and my sleepy state of mind. Yet there was something strange and I felt as though there was something there, but I could not grasp what, and I was sure I had not encountered it before, and I listened to all the scientists at work and their low level conversations, and I checked them outside my door, to discover if anything had been detected.

Suddenly, in the darkness at the end of the corridor, two figures came rushing out, resembling a sort of dream view to me in my tired sleepy state, and the figures turned out to be two of the scientists, who I had thought had left the building, and I realized that they were working outside, checking stuff on their equipment about the zone, and building, and one whispered something in Higgins’s ear, making him look slightly surprised.

Higgins’s face turned dramatic, making me wonder what the hell was going to happen, and I stood staggered waiting for something, anything, anywhere, and even regretting bringing them there, and I saw he was desperate to do something, and he rushed away with the two scientists to where they had been, and outside.

“What are they up to?” Oswald muttered, staring, bewildered.

“This is a hell of a place!” I mumbled, thinking of what had happened to me there before, considering if it could kill this time, and I was glad I had hardly even mentioned the metal detector.

I decided to follow Oswald out the door to them, as I had to know what was there, and if something was going to happen.

When I rushed out the door I was surprised to look up and see drifting currents of snowflakes blow about outside, and it starting to deepen, with gusts blowing over me, and I closed my jacket up and marched after Oswald going towards where Higgins was, and we tried to see what was there but we saw little, and only them bent over something on the ground, hidden away by their figures.

It had been a very long day, and the next day could very well be far longer, and I watched Higgins rush doing something and I wondered what I was missing, and if we should slow down and observe them at a distance first, as if they collapsed like I had done on the last occasion after using the metal detector there I wanted to observe what happened to them and finally know what had happened to me.

The bright snowing sky seemed to darken over the area above them, and I pointed it out to Oswald, as heavy snow came floating down all about the area and we were amazed that it never entered a circle region about them, as though something was stopping it, which I tried to explain as a small thin faint whirlwind forming.

Yet what was it doing there? Was it caused by them causing some form of disturbance there, and within the snowstorm?

Faint tread marks of a car were below the snow on the road, under a layer of snow, and I realized how late it was, and that there were no cars or anything about and it was silent and lifeless.

“What are the thermometers for in the building?” I asked Oswald, after recalling seeing them everywhere, and for something to say, wondering what the scientists were doing with them in such conditions, and to see if I could find out anything.

He swiftly replied, as we moved closer to Higgins, “Where there have been manifestations drops in temperature have been found, discovered before and during the occurrences. Although I have never proven to myself that it happens!”

I wondered if it could actually do other things and had centered itself around where Higgins was.

“It’d be a good way to detect something near you!” I replied. “So a room should theoretically drop in temperature before and during it?”

He nodded firmly, and we marched over to Higgins and the two scientists, observing them not even noticing us and our approach, so absorbed in what was there and what they were doing, and when we got just behind them they suddenly looked up, in another direction, and they started to react strangely, and I realized it was not to us but something else there, and I waited for something to make an appearance.

 

Chapter 13

 

The Paranormal

 

Everyone seemed to grow in determination to find what was happening, and what was there, and I was left staggered, as what was there vanished when we arrived, and Higgins told us they had been monitoring the research equipment one of the two scientists had, which had discovered large power surges of some form of energy from the ground where they had been.

They were left confused without any answer to it, and I wondered what the hell had been there, and if we would be left confused by the incident, and I tried to answer it with everything.

Once back indoors they returned to what they were doing before they left, and I wondered how the two paranormal scientists would explain what had happened! If nothing else happened!

I examined all their equipment for clues, when I got near them, and wondered why the disturbance in the hall had not occurred, as the woman had told us it had continued to occur, and this startled me the most!

From some of the other scientists I heard of the work that two paranormal scientists had recently done, after they had released documents of the investigations on the paranormal investigations.

Their stuff could be surprising, and alarming in places, which drew my attention, and I kept wondering if I had missed something! At times I thought they were deliberately putting psychic research there to cover their real work and discoveries! Though they never mentioned anything of other stuff, which I found suggestions of on occasions.

I could not grasp if they were ignoring me and not giving proper answers to only avoid becoming fake ghost hunters!

Also by the way that they reacted I believed that they might not have anything that could detect anything there, and I finally went to sleep in my room and left them and their equipment to detect anything, and wake me if it did occur.

Later I was unsure and they became unsure if there was anything really there, and I wondered if anything existed that could be used to properly detect anything there, but why had we not seen the ghost formations there, and what had Higgins had found outside?

Presumable if it had emerged its presence would produce effects to indicate it being there – such as altering air currents, gravity, magnetic fields, radioactivity, scent, sound waves, static, and the light spectrum …

Their equipment was there to check everything to a degree that had not been done, and I realized that they could have chased it away, and I realized that if it had that it would prove it had intelligence, and a fear of something occurring!

 

Chapter 14

 

The Hospital

 

Marple rushed over and got a drink for me and placed it in front of me and returned to the fireplace.

It was incredible! Marple looked more baffled than I had seen him, and I knew we had problems! The serial killer was still killing people and they still never had any clues to who he was, or anything, and they wanted him to solve the case, and not only was the sum of money for solving it now incredible he would get the fame and prestige he wanted, and become a major and historical investigator, if he solved the unsolvable case, and its insolvability was a major factor that kept teasing him, and he seemed obsessed with it, and all his investigators and connections were virtually on the case, checking for anything, and any remote clues.

Eventually Marple grew tired of the lack of evidence, and thinking over it, and asked, “What happened at the house at Craigmillar Road?”

“Nothing!” I moaned.

“Not even with all the scientists and their most advanced equipment?”

“But the paranormal scientists phoned and told me of another major discovery at another nearby location. While we had been investigating there it had been occurring at a nearby hospital! There were reported encounters of something at the Victoria Infirmary and in the middle of the night!”

The two paranormal scientists checked out the hospital and its hidden history and found sightings had actually occurred there before, and before it had been built, and they had given me a folder full of all the information to prove it to me, and what fascinated me about it all was that all the major occurrences seemed to occur on the same dates, and there was hardly anything marked in between, and after going over it I noticed that there were specific reoccurrences and the same lengths of time between the occurrences.

Yet, though I confirmed it, I could not grasp what it meant! There was no sign proof of anything! Was it a new form of haunting? And if so what the hell was happening?

Even though it was the site of a large famous battle, and massacre that could have caused such an occurrence, and bodies could well be below there, or nearby, I could not grasp what was actually happening, and really wanted to.

I investigated everything I could, and all the information and history of the region, trying to grasp something, and some clue, and found the main regions of the battle, where I found the woman’s haunted flat and the hospital were at.

I wondered if it was the large amounts of deaths, and how it had been executed, or if Mary Queen of Scots had actually died there!

What was incredible was I was starting to realize and sense that what had occurred there could have been another event, which occurred far further back in the past, before what had happened there, centuries before, and it could have caused the battle itself, and that something there had caused the battle to take place.

I decided to investigate it further and find what had happened!

I watched Marple playing with something inside an envelope, and asked him, “What have you got?”

“It’s the 1568 map Dr Barrymore gave me.”

I curiously watched him play with it, and realized he was happy about something, even though it was not the discover of anything to do with the serial killer, and I sensed he might tell me what it was, and I sat considering what it could be.

“I’ve been searching through maps and I have found one source with similar maps, as Dr Barrymore’s map, which have been proven to have been made around 1568 …”

I was surprised as I realized the date 1568 had been when Mary Queen of Scots had the battle at Langside, and sat wondering why it was the exact date, and if the events were linked or if it was just luck, and I recalled what happened and the events.

“According to the history books,” I replied, “the battle at the site of the woman’s house and the hospital occurred at the same time as it!”

“Correct?” Marple instantly replied, confused. “It was a clue!”

“So have you found something?” I replied eagerly, seeking answers, and why he was so joyful.

“Perhaps! If there is lost treasure! The lost jewels could easily have been found by someone! If it exists! There are only a few accounts of it! It was thought to exist there by only a few explorers, who have carried out searches for it.”

Marple handed over an ancient map of Langside and I immediately scanned it and searched where Queen’s Park was, and the rest of the hill and wondered if someone could actually have hidden it away it the park.

“So you have found out something?” I moaned, depressed at the lack of finding anything on the map.

“I’ve recently located a form of map!” he gasped, trying to rest.

“What do you want me to do?” I asked, curiously.

“I discovered something of significant importance that could be of great interest! I will need your help!”

“Alright!” I gasped, and sat back examining him, and silently gulped, and watched him put his pipe in his mouth.

“According to Dr Barrymore and legends there have been people that have been found dead after searching for it …” he announced, silently.

“Legends?” I replied, and watched the flames ignite as Marple rolled up an old newspaper and threw it into the fire flames.

He nodded in agreement, and examined my face a little more.

For a moment I considered there being a danger in the treasure hunt, and why he wanted my assistance, and I also wondered why it would still exist, and doubted the value of the objects, and waited patiently.

What I knew was that I had been given a major clue to its location and I wondered if he wanted me to determine where it was, to see if we came to the same conclusion.

I got out a recent map of the region and studied it in detail, and he watched on with curiosity, and I watched him open the document Dr Barrymore had when he had first met us, and told us of the treasure.

He examined the ancient tattered piece of parchment with a magnify glass, where there were lines and words scribbled over it, as though the writer had been doing something and was in a great rush to finish it!

“So it’s a verified 1568 map?” I asked, and he nodded, and continued to try to grasp what it meant.

Marple finished examining it and placed it on the table, and looked over and asked, “So you want to know what’s on the map? I’ve had it rechecked and it is Langside, and the area you’ve been working in …”

I realized it was there, but it never gave the proper location, and there was only a mark of something on it, which I was sure was something that was not part of the landscape.

“The paranormal investigators phoned earlier and they asked you to join them in their investigation of the hospital.”

“You want me to join them working there and to search for it?”

“Yes! I’d like you to search for it, when you do, and to phone me with anything of interest, or for information!”

 

Chapter 15

 

The Shaft

 

I was staggered at the deadliness of it altering in magnitude or something was playing tricks with me and it was being magnified!

Sounds were unidentifiable and I realized that I was observing another form of the encounter! This time it was far different than the last. Even though I had collapsed and went unconscious at the last occurrence, when I had activated the metal detector.

What was going on! The world about me seemed to be going crazy! The war was accelerating on and the Home Guard I was in was being activated more for a potential attack. Marple was going crazy trying to capture the killer, with his ultimate challenge, and all the investigators were pursuing every lead.

The hospital seemed to be on the brink of an entrance point to the afterlife or some form of supernatural region of space, and all the paranormal scientists were working away there, every night, as occurrences were occurring everywhere, and though they were delighted in it they were not only not making any progression in what was occurring and they were accumulating a repeatedly increasing amount of unsolved mysteries, and I was investigating one of the most baffling of them.

Something was occurring down a major shaft in one of the walls, which we found hidden away in a wall at the top of the hospital, and I had entered it and was going down it, when something had activated, at precisely the same time the occurrences occurred in the hall of the house in Craigmillar Road.

I had only entered and shifted down the shaft, when the sounds emerged below me and had amplified, and as I slowly moved down, they had gone mind-bending!

They were screaming up at me through the shaft with a dangerous fury that stunned me, and no matter how I tried to shake them off and contemplate their identities I could not form stable recognitions of what was there.

I never had a clue what was there, and had never thought paranormal could be so strange, and unrecognizable.

I shifted around in complete darkness, entirely alone, with nobody at the opening above anymore, where there was darkness now, and I finally managed to find my blasted light in my backpack and tried to grab it and force it out to use it.

Clouds of powdered cement from walls swirled about all over me, going into my lungs, and I tried avoid coughing it out, while I tried to breathe in, in a way I could avoid the dust clogging my lungs up, while occasionally gasping at the sounds below blaring up at me, taunting me, threatening me about something I could not grasp, as if I was hovering over the depths of some form of hell.

Once I got the light and attached it to me I put the light on and I realized straightaway that the batteries were far more used and the small torch was virtually going out, and I realized that I might not be able to climb back up as there was nothing to grip and I would have to climb the thin rope itself, and I was sure the harness I had on stopped me doing it.

I examined the dust that swirled about me through dim barely visible beams of light and I released some rope, edging me downwards, seeking to get away from it, and I avoided touching the sides and making more of the dust blow up, and I started to consider if I should go to the bottom after all.

The others were bound to emerge eventually at the opening above and get me out but the harness and dust was choking me, and then decided that I would have to go down again anyway, and that my mission would be a failure if I never competed it and I decided then to investigate what was there, and wait at the bottom for them to arrive and help me up.

What was incredible was I did think it was dangerous, and I was in actual danger! While I was listening to the blasted sounds, another sound appeared that I felt going through the ground below and I knew it was entirely different, and was positive it was a bomb or something going off.

The Second World War was going on, and I wondered if the hospital could be bombed as it was a major structure.

For a few seconds I even considered being left trapped at the bottom of the shaft, and builders or archaeologists discovering my skeleton remains away in the future.

I groaned and dangled about on the rope, spun around and around, and grabbed hold of part of the wall to steady myself, while I glimpsed parts of the shaft all about overhead.

I really wanted to explore what was there and what was below! The last encounter had left an increasing amount of unanswered occurrences and questions and I knew I would have to answer them eventually. It was as if it was my destiny and something would have to happen.

I really wanted to do it! I wanted to explore the shaft! And I had always wanted to explore and discover something incredible and new, with perhaps value and greatness, and perhaps even be remembered in history for it.

What interested me and the others was why what was there was there and in such a place!

What was it we were dealing with anyway? Was doing some elaborate plan to do something?

Something of an unfathomable unidentifiable supernatural nature sounded as though it were below, and even waiting on me, and yet I had already confronted it, and I could not grasp why, and if it was so powerful why did it not just get me there, and trap me in some form of magnetic field or energy, and I suddenly listened to it and wondered if it was something trapped and trying to free itself from something, ultimately escaping and gain liberty, and the more I listened to its strange sounds I realized that it might actually be true, and I imagined some form of ghost trapped there for hundreds of years, perhaps in an ancient dungeon below, and I wondered if my future mission was to find a way to free it.

I went through all the things I had heard of ghosts being trapped on this world waiting for some occurrence to occur for them to be freed, and enter some afterlife.

“Have you found anything?” a voice yelled out, and hung there, and I wondering if it had overheard my thoughts, and had taken a form of human presence, and I never knew what to reply with.

I eventually shouted back, “What do you want of me?”

To my surprise a reply emerged above, and yelled, “We want you to tell us if you have found anything! And if we should pull you up or lower more rope?”

I gasped and realized it was Higgins in the blackness above, and I stared there realizing that there must be some light there and if my eyes altered to the darkness there I would see him, and once I did I instantly shouted up for him to lower more rope, as I was going to the bottom, and I realized that I now had to go through with it, and there was no turning back! Yet I had them above now, and could shout up for them to pull me upwards when I wanted.

In a combination of annoyance and confusion I started lowering myself down again, into the blackness. Annoyed at the rope only being lowered by a couple of feet and in confusion at what I was doing there.

I had the impression that the two paranormal scientists up above might be on the edge of considering doing something extreme, and beyond their customary actions, and it seemed somehow dangerous.

For a few seconds, as I lowered myself, I heard Oswald and he gave me the impression that he was waiting for something tremendous to occur, and I wondered if he thought there were paranormal life forms or something!

I realized the implications of any find and that they and I would have to check what was there!

I then realized that there might people near the location behind the thick walls in hospital beds and I wondered if they realized that I was there, and that there was something of paranormal origins buried away there.

Now it was basically the three of us, with Higgins and Oswald above, and I was sure the others had left to go to bed, leaving their equipment monitoring everything, which they believed was there.

For a few seconds I sleepily wondered what the tiny sparkles were below, and realized that I was nearly falling asleep, and my light had entirely gone out, and they were not reflection sparkles of light from above, and gasped, and realized the implications.

I felt like a worm on a fishing line, floating in the sea, and there to get what was below! I realized the two paranormal scientists might have trouble climbing down, and were slightly overweight and bulky at the moment, and they would have a hard time getting back up again!

I even considered if I would have to spend the night at the bottom or something, if I was too tired and sleepy to get back up, and if anything happened to me, and I lodged my boot into a gap between two of the boulders, to rest better.

I realized how low down I now was and must be close to the bottom, and I suddenly realized the depth down I had come and surely far more than the actual size of the building, and I wondered if I had gone underground, and how far underground I was, and how far down it went, and the blackness there looked like an abyss.

“So are we going down …?” Oswald moaned firmly, from out of the blackness above.

“You could send down a camera with a light attached?” I moaned, confusing both of the scientists.

“But you must be about on the ground?” Oswald firmly replied.

The rope started swaying and vibrating furiously, giving the impression that something was frantically doing something against it just above me and I glanced up but never saw anything, and it felt as if something had got caught on the rope just above me and was trying to free itself, and desperately tried to escape from there, like some form of bird, which baffled me, and I realized I had no rope left below me.

I was trapped over an abyss with something deadly, but the darkness was too absent of light, and it was then that I noticed a dim light come across my front, over my clothes, and I unsuccessfully tried to discover its source, and could not believe that a light could have no source, and looked everywhere, and out of the darkness downwards something emerged shining upwards, and my eyes fixed onto a strange dim orb floating upwards.

My only way to escape was to swiftly remove my harness and plunge down into the abyss below, and perhaps avoid hitting it, as it was not directly below, but the bottom could be at a great depth below, and the fate of hideously dying on the ground below and having a normal death there persuaded me to remain and handle it.

My eyes seemed to alter and see some dim light and I realized I was no longer in the shaft, and in somewhere like it.

A bright light flashed and I realized I was now not in any shafts, and dazed and confused I examined what I could of my surroundings and saw little but what seemed a whirlpool of shifting energy outlines and I studied them with my tired and dazed vision and was sure it was some form of energy formation, and I watched energy patterns transform into things I could not recognize, and I could not grasp what was there, and I started to remember what had happened to me when I activated the metal detector in the woman’s house and I went unconscious.

 

Chapter 16

 

The Body

 

Things seemed strange and utterly unbelievable and I studied everything trying to grasp what, and what had happened to me, and I kept trying to recall what had happened before I collapsed, just wondering what the hell happened.

I kept gasping as I wondered if I had received brain damage, as I was sure I had fallen down to the bottom of the shaft, and that I was lucky, and lucky to be alive as I could not have been that far over the ground. Even though I recalled I was further down than the bottom of the hospital, and I proved it, and I was left confused about it, and as I had lost so many memories, and I kept trying to recall things.

I wondered if I blew my mission as the scientists were annoyed at me for not giving them information on what had happened.

The whole event was incredible, and I could hardly believe anything had happened as I could hardly recall it, and the events of the past weeks were astounding.

They had found me asleep at the bottom of the shaft hours later, and had thought I had done something or was up to something, which I have still not grasped what, and when I climbed out the shaft I fully realized that I could have climbed up after all.

At the top I watched the first shreds of sunlight emerging in the horizon, and I wondered what I had discovered as I could barely recall a thing, and I realized that if it was not a haunting why was it occurring at night, as I could even imagine anything else.

To my surprise I was told by a nurse that I had phone call and I discovered it was from the police and that the killer had struck nearby, and they wanted me there to help them investigate it, and I was surprised that it was only a few streets away, and I sensed that the incidents were connected and wanted to discover why and I rushed out the hospital, and over to where I spotted policemen and their vehicles going, and as I did I kept trying to work out how the incidents were linked.

When I got there and glanced at the body I gasped and nearly fell over, in my weakened and tired condition, and grew annoyed and felt like screaming, as I saw Marple’s body lying on the street, surrounded by police and investigators.

I wondering who the hell had done it, and had dumped him there in a pool of muck, and thought it could have occurred because of what I had done, and disturbed what ever existed there.

I was furious and I marched over and suddenly spotted all the people there standing watching me, confused, with mouths open, watching me with staring unblinking eyes, and I went silent, and when I was only feet away from the body I spotted Marple coming out of a building with a police inspector.

It was incredible how similar the man was to him and I wondered repeatedly if the killer had thought it was him, as he was doing more than anyone to catch him, and could easily have found out about it from all the publicity it had got.

The dead man had been viciously beaten to death, and I stood wondering what the hell the killer was up to anyway.

Could it have been caused by the war or it indirectly?

What was the motive? Why had all the people been killed?

There was no connection between them!

Police inspector looked annoyed at not having the case solved, and by the fact they had virtually nothing on the killer, and it looked as if they would never do it now.

Marple swiftly handed me a sheet of paper with information about the death and deaths, and I started to read it, and studied the crumpled body as someone lifted the body, and I realized that it was a reporter from the sheet of paper, and I wondered if I knew him, and I studied his face.

I examined the complexion of the frozen body, drained of blood, and from the expressions of people behind nearby windows I realized how dangerous it made the place.

I wondered if the reporter had discovered something, and knew that Marple would be investigating him and questioning people he knew trying to find what he had been doing before his death.

I attempted to work out the exact time that it could have occurred, and where I had been, and was sure it could have occurred at night, and I wondered if I should take it as a warning from what had been at the hospital. Yet I could not be sure, as all the facts added up to it not being, and nothing actually suggested it actually was.

Locals that passed in the distance could not understand what was happening, and people nearby seemed slightly shocked, and I spotted what looked like marks on the ground where the reporter had tried to crawl away in his last seconds of life.

“Who would want to shoot him?” I asked the inspector, frustrated at not seeing anything suggesting an answer, and not being able to stay silent any longer.

“What worries me more than anything,” the inspector muttered back to Marple, with confusion, “is that I don’t have a clue!”

“They’ll find something!” Marple assured him, confidently, and I realized he had to have something, and I was surprised the inspector reacted in the same way.

 

Chapter 17

 

The Army

 

Everything seemed to be edging into disaster, especially the war, and the killer not found, and the disturbances at the hospital and house, and what had happened in the shaft, and strange occurrences emerged, and this time seemed to gain power!

At the Home Guard headquarters I was left with the other recruits and my attempt to tell them what happened failed, and most put my memory deficiency down to drink, as they drank a lot themselves, and in the end I went along with it, and Godfrey and Clooney thought it was.

While listening to the recruits having a dispute over racing horses, on which would win, I decided to show I was not drunk after all, and in the end only laughed out loud at them, and one asked me what horse I thought was better, and I just decided to try to persuade them a horse I had heard winning before was better, which I later discovered was a different horse, with a similar name, and argued that the horse was far better than the others, and in the end most stopped listening to me.

Godfrey eventually bet me it would lose, and all the other soldiers became interested in the bet, and betting against the captain, and perhaps persuaded by my confidence in the horse.

I realized all the soldiers now had a dispute with the captain, and his methods, and rigorous training, and eventually all of them bet their horse would beat his horse, and made me the originator and head of the idea.

When the captain left they persuaded me to do everything I could to get it win against the captain’s horse, and I started to realize the situation I had just put myself in, and that the horse had to win, and in the end I bet a large sum of money, and far more than I had ever bet before.

Later that day one of the other soldiers rushed over to me and went straight up to my face and stared straight in my eyes, and moaned loudly, “Malone! The captain wants you!”

I marched after the soldier to the captain’s office, where he sharply knocked on his door, and I marched in.

Again I wondered why the hell I joined the army, and could now barely recall anything of why. It was crazy! I should have remained out of it and left the job for a more experienced recruit, and someone that did the things they wanted, which were far different than I had expected.

As I stood in front of his desk I listened to two soldiers in the distance having an argument over racing horses, on which would win, and in the end I laughed at it, and Godfrey looked up at me and stared at me.

“What do you think then?” he asked.

“They’re alright!” I replied

“Sure! The horses!” he continued.

“What for?”

“To race! I could win on the horse I bet on!”

The soldier that took me there rushed in carrying out another order, and him handed him a document, and rushed out.

“Look at this one! What a beauty! What do think, Malone?”

Godfrey pushed over a pile of photos of horses, and I examined them, and just agreed.

“Can you make good money from a good horse?” I finally asked, considering if it was an easy way to make a lot of cash, and he just nodded to agree.

After examining the horses in more detail, realizing that they were basically still all the same, I wondered how they could tell a good horse, and in the end chose what looked like the fittest horse.

He was surprised and instantly agreed.

“About that horse you and all the soldiers bet on …” he finally said silently, examining me closely, and I sensed he was going to come out with something.

“What you want to change your bet to it?” I replied smiling.

“No! I want you to make the racing horse all of you are betting on lose or not run!”

“That’s ridiculous!” I replied, nearly laughing.

“No! I want you to do it! As you’re the one who did it!”

“Did what?”

“Put me in it! You’ve put me in it again, Malone! That horse better not run or it better not win!”

“How the hell can I stop a horse running?” I moaned, thinking of a way to leave.

“Shut up! Malone! You’ll find a way!”

I could not believe it, and that I had made such a mistake over with a meaningless action, and I was not even going to bet on anything.

“If my horse wins I’d split all the money I bet on it with you!”

He came to a complete stop and started shifting over to me, around his desk, and started telling me what the horse could do.

I could not believe the amount he told me he had bet on his horse, and going by some details he told me in the end I considered betting on it too! But what I could not grasp was why he thought the other horse we had chosen was going to win.

When I was about to leave, he shouted, “Sit down!”

He sat trying to contemplate something when the phone rang and he instantly grabbed at it and listened without hearing anything, and when someone spoke he launched into an argument with the person and started thumping his desk with his fist, and shouted and smashed the phone down.

He calmed and stared deep into my eyes, trying to penetrate my mind, and when I stared back he looked away, while trying to contemplate some thought.

“There’s a list of complaints received about you already!” he announced loudly, studying my face, waiting for me to react.

“About what?” I moaned, annoyed, wondering who would complain, and wondered what the complaints would be about.

“They complain everywhere and people like you keep ignoring it! Don’t you?”

Yet I wondered what he was he talking of, and if there were complaints, and why they never liked him. I realized again it could be that he was still reacting to my introduction, when I joined his army group!

“The people of this country would do better without you!” he shouted loudly.

“Yeah!” I giggled, avoiding directly looking at him. “So why do the men mostly argue with you?”

“You’re not annoyed …” he gasped, and examined me. “Did you go to the hospital?”

“What hospital?” I moaned, trying to recall what I had been doing, as I had lost a lot of memories.

“The Victoria Infirmary!”

“Yes!” I moaned, annoyed. “Why?”

“Why what?” he replied firmly.

“What do you think happened there?” I replied, and realized that something could really have happened there.

I gasped and silently waited for his reply.

“You tell me?”

I shouted, “There were hundreds of people drunk all over the hospital wards, lying all over the floors, and everywhere, vomiting, and throwing beer cans, and the nurses were having a massive drink orgy! You should have seen the place! The whole place was totally covered with people drinking and making love with each other, and there were wild orgies everywhere …”

Godfrey bent over, holding his head in his hands, and rested his head on the table, while moaning, and finally straightened.

“I was also investigating a murder nearby!” I continued.

“The whole country seems to know of you …” he groaned. “Well, this time I have you! A complaint was made to the police about you!”

Godfrey took his official pose and sat upright studying my face, as though he was a judge about to sentence me for a serious crime, which I would regret, and I realized that I had to find a way out the blasted army!

“Malone! You must stop that horse running no matter what … If you don’t I’ll kick you out the army!”

 

Chapter 18

 

The Race

 

For some reason I sensed something was not right and I kept going over everything trying to grasp what.

After I decided to stay in the army I had paid the horse rider of my horse to lose, and we had made an agreement, and if Godfrey’s horse lost he would be to blame, and there would be nobody winning the bet.

Yet something was not right, and I sensed it, and I knew I could not do anything about it!

When the starting gun blasted out I jumped and was amazed at the speed and power of the horses as they raced away and to my surprise my horse left the quickest, and I knew it had not worked, especially when I saw the jockey smile over at me.

I became positive it would win when none of the other horses got anywhere near it, and I realized how much I had lost, and I grew furious and watched Malone’s horse with amazement, as it was at the back of the race, and I watched the jockey going crazy trying to get it to move, and I spotted what looked like a glint of satisfaction on the horse’s face, and realized it was the first glint of happiness I had seen on it.

There were hundreds of people cheering my horse, and I knew the horse I had chosen was a favorite, and the other soldiers had known it, and that was why they had bet on it, but I could not grasp why Godfrey had chosen his, against such horses, and realized he was not what he made out.

The whole place exploded with celebrations and people drinking and cheering and I thought of the mess I was in, and I then thought of the incredible powers I had from the encounter with the thing in the woman’s house, after the use of the metal detector, and I tried using them to get Godfrey’s horse to win, and pleaded for it.

When I stopped I looked up in surprise and saw Godfrey’s horse speed up, and the sounds of the audience and their cheers grew less, and I watched the other soldiers about me see the horse and react to it, as a threat to their victory.

I examined Godfrey’s horse and saw its eyes had changed and were bloodthirsty, and furious, and they were on the front horse and it looked as if it was going to attack it, and it accelerated faster than any animal I have ever seen, and I stood amazed when it caught up with the horses and the front horse, and I was sure it was going to attack them viciously.

The whole audience turned silent everywhere as it raced passed the front horse and the finishing line faster than any animal I had ever seen or heard of, and it won the race!

Its colossal inner strength and powers were tremendous, and I kept watching it as it stopped, and it looked like some form of monster horse, and it furiously ran after one of the other horses, and chased it away, and it jumped up and down and managed to loosen its saddle and throw it off and it leapt crazily at one of the jockeys and chased him away!

It was incredible the horse was trying to kill other horses and I watched it accelerate away into the audience and burst into life, with its colossal inner strength, and it ran furiously into people and crazily knocked them down!

The audience ran when it attacked furiously like a wild beast, and they stampeded away in the opposite direction as it smashed everything in its path, and it charged out the racecourse and into a busy high street, charged into cars and trams, and chased people everywhere, leaping on roofs, and it jumped into a car windscreen, and through a supermarket window, and ran through it biting and smashing everything in its path, and chased people everywhere, and it leapt on shelves of food sending them crashing down over the floor, and kept going until the police arrived and shot it dead.

 

Chapter 19

 

The Bottom of the Shaft

 

At the bottom of the hospital shaft, after I had climbed down a rope ladder to the bottom, I was surprised that they had dug down below the hospital foundations and dug out a large circular cavity, where there were many scientists, examining and setting up equipment, and archeologists digging out regions, and I climbed down and examined all their equipment for clues to what was happening, and recalled reading about some of their work in a scientific magazine, and I watched Oswald and Higgins at work, and sensed they had recently made a major discovery.

The determination of the two paranormal scientists was now unbelievable and they had proven the occurrences in the hospital were all centered around the bottom of the shaft, and they had brought in all the scientists, and members of the exploration association, and I realized it was their biggest discovery, and that it was perhaps their only real and proven one.

Although what disappointed me was they never received the reaction I received from what was there, and they only detected reactions and not major disturbances, and as far as I knew nobody else had collapsed and had gained the powers I had, and I had a hard time covering the power I had from the scientists, as I foreseen something might occur, and I found it was starting to weaken and I wished it to just go away, and it never really did what I wanted and was a danger.

Even though the stuff they said they had done was now surprising, and even alarming in places, which kept drawing my attention, I just dismissed it later as them advertising their work! At times I had even thought they were deliberately putting the psychic research there to cover their real work and discoveries!

I was not really bothered anyway, whatever it was, and I was happy now.

Even though newspapers had stories of horse story and it even on some front pages, to my surprise, and some believed something else had been involved, and that the horse story was a cover up, and I was also surprised that it was even put in front of stories of the war and the serial killer.

I had also received a letter that morning directly from the Home Guard and another from Godfrey throwing me out the army, and I was ecstatic, and I vowed never to go near it again, and it was incredible, and Godfrey’s horse was disqualified and he lost the bet to all the soldiers, and I discovered later he had bet more on it than he had told.

I realized the Loch Ness monster find and other occurrences could have been created or influenced by the powers I had!

I realized straightaway that the whole world could end up knowing of them if I was not carefully as the scientists there were determined to get action and doing something, and getting some form of conclusion.

They were all packed together around equipment and some were filming everywhere, and I realized that they expected some major occurrence to occur soon, and I listened to them intensely, and even questioned them, but found little! They either did not want me or outsiders to know or they wanted to show it occurring.

The two paranormal scientists informed me that they were checking for virtually all known forms of energy and matter disturbances that they could find in and about the area.

By some of the reactions of some of the scientist I got they might have something that could detect some form of alien, and I wondered what they were talking about, as the paranormal scientist had not even accepted anything could occur there.

I was unsure of what was there, and Marple refused accept anything supernatural or alien could exist, and insisted in explaining things as much as he could, and left it until he could find something, and I had not seen him being proven wrong so far, and I was at a loss, for explanations and finding evidence, and I was surprised by one of the scientists accounts that Marple had paid a visit there, and had questioned them and had become satisfied and had left.

I was at a loss at what he had found out, and I became possessed with finding what was there, and what the conclusion to it was, and yet what would he explain the powers I had as.

After a few hours passed I realized that they were losing confidence in finding something again, and surely put it down to not being low enough below the ground, and I realized that they would have move their equipment again and allow the archaeologists to dig far deeper below.

A leading member of the exploration association arrived at the top of the shaft and Higgins climbed up the rope ladder to meet him, and I realized they had a new plan, and started to work it out.

An hour later scientists of the exploration association left and climbed up to the top, and I listened to them, only vaguely able to hear anything, and just found out they were bringing in something of great value, which I could not grasp, and I could not work out what else they had, which they never had there, and I never realized what.

The equipment about me could presumably detect the presence and the effects of anything and indicate what was there!

The equipment was there to check everything in a degree that had not been done before, and was being tested for the first time, and they were finally getting a chance to properly investigate something of sophisticated potential.

I finally asked Oswald, when he arrived down from above, “Would this equipment detect anything at a distance?”

I wondered if the occurrence was directly there, and if not if they could detect it at a distance away, or far below, and I wondered why they were not checking it at night as that was when all the occurrence had taken place, and the paranormal occurrences occurred, and occurrences at the house, and when I first climbed down the shaft.

“It may detect things!” he replied, confused. “I am now unsure what is here! But we do have stuff here that we use to check a whole range of things to show us exactly what is occurring and what we may be missing. Information such as it is vital! We may be able to acquire some type of insight into what is happening – with the right information?”

I considered asking him if they should work there at night, and I suddenly realized the dangers and what had happened to me in the above shaft, and I realized that they had worked there at night and that they had not got the same occurrences, and I then wondered if anything would happen if I was there.

I wondered if they had deactivated it by doing something. They could have caused something to happen with their presence!

I realized once again that Oswald was avoiding telling things, as I clearly heard them mention things that he had avoided telling!

I was surprised when they eventually mentioned bringing something in and I wondered what! I knew they were avoiding saying things, and I watched Higgins final come back down the shaft carrying a large piece of equipment, which was part of something, and I examined it as he careful placed it in the cavity, and watched other scientist come down with more of it.

“What will that do?” I finally got the chance to ask him.

“Forms of radar detection can be used to examine things below the ground, but also with inaccurate results …”

“What about a powerful sonar?”

He looked up at the idea and continued working, and I realized scientists scanned the center of the Earth with forms of sonar, using high explosives.

As I watched him setting up the equipment, he replied, “The new surveying equipment on the airplane we used in Loch Ness to detect the monster! I managed to persuade them to remove it from the airplane and bring it down! As it’s the most powerful we have available …”

“They might be able to dig it out eventually if it doesn’t work!”

“You’re right! But we want to check out what’s there first! This can scan more accurately, deeper and faster, and more powerfully than anything we have, and has been vastly improved since its use at Loch Ness! The detection components are highly confidential again, and is used by the military …”

“It’s top secret!”

“It produces the most detailed mapping of beneath the ground ever seen, to a far greater depth, making it possible to observe small and large objects – of the dimensions we are interested in, and further out! As we are not sure if it is directly below! We have detected occurrences at other locations …”

I realized it could detect underground military bases and such far below the ground, perhaps hidden away in mountains, normally undetectable, and I realized why they were avoiding telling anything, and the majority of people there never knew what it was or was happening, and that they might not be allowed to use it, and that some of the scientists there were military scientists, and I wondered what they were doing there.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Discovery

 

The equipment system was functioning and ready to monitor everything around the surrounding cavity in a far greater degree, and after all their rigorous setting up of it, and taking down large powerful electric cables, and all their preparations of everything, and their highly advanced use of it I was fascinated at what it could do, and at such a close range, as the other version on the airplane was not as advanced and as powerful, and I considered if they had deliberately given a reduced and incorrect estimate of the distance of the scan to hide its true incredible powers, and it being confidential equipment!

I grasped the dangers of it as when I had only activated the metal detector at the woman’s house it had made me collapse and made me unconscious, and had a tremendous reaction, and I wondered if it could hit us all with it, and kill us!

The whole exploration seemed useless as I and most of the others surely would not profit from it, and would only get the chance to solve mysteries, and I wondered if we could get marked in history, and have future explorers recalling our achievements.

What surprised me was their firm belief that there was something there! The others barely believed anything! They had had not found anything though! Yet why were they so confident with so little? Were they keeping something secret? Had they detected something? Had they known of something before the occurrence there, and were investigating it for the first time? They had hardly come up with anything and they all were going crazy to do something, and I started to wonder what was happening, and if I would survive to see the end of the war!

The two paranormal scientists sat along from the others at a large table, in the now large cavity, sitting opposite each other, with an accurate map of the surrounding region stretched out across it, searching the area and discussing it, fascinated at the battle that had taken place, which before the event I thought had events missing from it. It was strange as there never looked as though there was anything there, especially in such a public place, and going by recent information they got from questioning locals and the woman at the house, there were no occurrences up until the woman had activated her metal detector in her house, and I felt I was missing something about the incident that we should know, but I could not grasp it.

When something did occur with the equipment, as they started activating it in stages, the reactions they gave were unbelievable, and I suddenly realized how late in the evening it had become, and discovered it was dark outside, and it was late at night!

The equipment started showing strange reactions that they could not comprehend as they never had all their equipment functioning, and they could not grasp what was there, and it was too vague, and insignificant vague reactions, which could be anything being detected, especially from the surrounding city, and hospital itself, and something nearby creating disturbances or being detected for something.

From what I heard they had a problem having not fully checked the equipment’s reactions to everything, even though the original version had been tested out for years, and they were sure that other things could create some reactions. The equipment was far more sensitive at detection than ever before, and had even been modified just before its arrival, especially for working at close range, and at distances that they had not worked at.

Suddenly one scientist jumped up startled at a reaction on the screen of his equipment and the scientists all went around him, where definite reactions were being detected, and they all started excitedly discussing what they thought of it, and what could cause such a disturbance, and I saw that some were disappointed, but thought there was definitely something there, and I waited to find out what they had and if it would be a disappointment!

Yet they realized that what they were receiving was not being detected properly as it was too close and that the equipment was not designed for such a close range, and the images were badly blurred, and they argued over what it could.

Most thought by their reactions that it would be nothing, as they had not found that much with the other equipment.

They had not had a chance of finding anything significant and they never wanted to claim they had discovered something that was not there, and was detected wrongly, but as the other scientists worked hard connecting other equipment and adjusting it they started getting increased strange reactions and findings, and they no longer checked for equipment problems, and they gradually perceived that there was something deep below and that it had similarities to an artifact, but with immense proportions!

 

Chapter 21

 

The Tunnel

 

All communications to the above outer world vanished as the archeologists dug deep into the central point of the cavity, going directly down where the above shaft was directly above, and the scientists moved their expensive and fragile equipment away from the area, and in the end stopped work to watch.

What was incredible was even with all the technology and experience of the scientists, and all their discussions, nobody knew what they had found, and the theories gave too little or were too fantastic, and too far from the truth to believe and be true, but the main discover was there was a tunnel below and the entrance was just below, and the archeologists had been close to finding it, and I for one thought someone had and for some reason never wanted it to be found.

Yet the main scientists, working at the equipment, and the most experienced, kept giving reactions and startled expressions to what was below, and I knew they could not be totally sure, as such things were not accurate, especially in dealing with the unknown.

In the end they started working away in documenting their findings and giving their theories, and my attempts at finding what were unsuccessful, as they wished them only to be found when total proof was found.

Had they found something incredible below, and they soon started influencing the archeologists into working faster, and shifting everything out the way, and they dug away at the ground at the exact point the tunnel was believed to be below, and the scientists occasionally offered them help or at the least their theories at how close they were.

It never took long for me to start to recall the occurrence that had occurred when I first came down the above shaft in the darkness, and what had happened to me, and I suddenly realized that the shaft did go under the ground, and the tunnel below was the bottom of it, which I was sure I saw, and that at some point, well before the hospital had been built, something had covered the tunnel up, and I wondered why the above shaft was built directly over it.

Had someone hidden it away under the hospital? Was it hidden away for a reason? And what could it possibly be?

Would we even survive to see what was there? Going by what had happened to me already I had to believe something was there! The strange powers I had were too powerful and deadly! The equipment and the increasing signs of there being a danger below had increased at an alarming rate, as they advanced forwards.

They examined strange alterations and erratic characterizations on the equipment, and even the paranormal scientists started reacting more strangely than I had seen them and I wondered how it would affect everyone if what had occurred to me in the above shaft occurred to everyone.

When one of the archeologists hit something solid, and revealed a solid stone slab, everyone went around the hole to see it, and watched two archeologists lift the slab and reveal a deep dark tunnel going straight down into the ground, far below, and I realized it was identical in size and shape as the above shaft, and gasped at what had happened to me when I had entered it.

 

Chapter 22

 

The Cavity

 

The archeologists sat around the entrance, occasionally giving silent whispers to each other, and avoiding giving anyone else any information on what they were doing, and everyone knew they were not keen to go down into it, and sat resting.

I realized that I was slowly being chosen, and that the paranormal scientists wanted me to go, and I knew I would, and I just could not avoid it, and in the end decided to get it over with, and made it known to them, and sat at the edge entrance.

One archeologist shone his light around the hole, and deep into the chamber, which went deep below somewhere, and seemed to discover something, and the answer to one of his queries.

“What do you reckon’s down there?” I asked him, trying to see in it as far as I could with the light, but only saw darkness.

He left and returned with a brighter torch and pointed it at a point at the edge of it, and he waited for me to reply, and I looked and I saw it, and I saw dark stone steps vanishing below, but I could not see them reach the top of the entrance, just below us, and wondered why, and I considered if there had been something there and it had either been taken away or had collapsed, which could indicated the steps could also have collapsed further down.

When Oswald came down from above with Higgins holding ropes and equipment I knew the time had come for me to get ready and enter it, which I still never knew anything about, and I swiftly got ready and they tied me to a rope and started hoisting me down, and I finally entered its confines, and realized there could be something of value below and that was the reason it was buried away, and I more keenly entered its confines, and darkness, and I turned up my light and adjusted my eyes.

When I landed on the stone stairs I was astounded by the stairs and walls, and wondered what the hell was going on, and I took off the harness and rope and quickly started to examine everything about me with amazement, and saw Oswald coming down from above, watching me, wondering what I was doing, and once he landed next to me he gasped and started doing what I was doing, as all the stairs and walls were cut to perfection, with incredible workmanship, with an accuracy I had not seen, even I know I am sure they could not do it.

The steps had not been fitted together, as stepping stones, on normal outside stone steps, and they were cut into the rock by something, and the walls were the same, and we felt the smoothness of them.

Once Higgins arrived I led them down the stairs, and watched the startled faces of the scientists and the archeologist above, staring downwards towards us, and we left on our journey, in even more confusion than we had been when we started.

The same view seemed to uniformly go off into blackness below, with the light showing the exact steps going straight down, and the two scientists copied and followed me, even looking ahead for obstacles, and I was surprised that it could be made with such accuracy and fit into such a confined space, and I examined it in detail as I crept down.

At times it was as though it belonged to someone, and was part of someone’s establishment, and I wondered what its logical function could be if it was, or if it had originally been part of the hospital or part of something that had been built there before it, and I knew that if it had been that all the information about it must have been lost or something, as it would have been discovered by us when we investigated all the information about the site.

Further down I realized I was too far out in front and I allowed Oswald to gain some distance, and I watched him going down without a light, using mine and Higgins’s light to see the steeply declining steps, and I wondered how much danger there was, as he continued following me down, and they showed no signs that they thought there was anything there.

At one point mud appeared, replacing the stone walls, and was over the steps, and it slowed us as we made sure we never slipped, as they looked more vertical now, as we were tired, and looked dangerous at times, and that they might cause an injury, when viewed in the right way, and I started wondering why they were going on and on, as why would anyone go to such a distance to build anything there, and I considered if there was something like an underground river or lake and that someone was or had been using it for some purpose.

Sounds sometimes were louder and echoed, and I heard them and voices from above, and knew that the others had entered it, and I listened to their strange tones as I tried to make out what they were talking about, and I heard a deep thud echo down and I wondered if someone had an accident, and I realized that it was a good idea to only have three of us at the front.

A feeble glow from something below swiftly caught my attention when it appeared and I wondered what it was, and if it was a reflection of the dimming light, and my eyes altered and adjusted to the darkness there as we moved faster down, I saw Higgins struggling to do something behind us, and he shouted to me to stop and he switched on a more powerful light, which he had taken out his bag, and pointed it at an area in front, and I realized the steps vanished in front of me, and I had nearly fallen, and I tiredly fell backwards, and grabbed at the stairs behind me.

It was as though sound and everything ended at that point, and vanished into darkness below, and somewhere there it vanished out of existence, and I could not hear or see anything from there, and it was a void and an abyss!

When I went close, and the lights of the paranormal scientists shone closer there, from just behind me, I stood shocked as I my eyes adjusted and I saw there was a colossal cavity below, and the steps had collapsed, down to somewhere below.

I swiftly placed myself a few steps higher and sat looking about it, trying to grasp what was there in the feeble light, and I realized that I had actually nearly walked off the lowest remaining step.

After our examinations of the last step we realized that they had not just collapsed and that they had been perfectly cut, as the rest of the tunnel and steps had been, and I wondered who the hell had done it, and I realized that it had to have fallen a long time ago, and I looked straight down and realized that distance to the bottom was not as great as I thought, and that the cavity outwards was immense, and though I could hardly see anything I tried to work out what it was.

It was incredible and had clearly been carved out accurately like the steps and tunnel, for some reason I could not grasp, and we sat on the steps discussing it and trying to work out what it was and had been used for, and I was sure it could have been to store something in, and I wondered how their paranormal fitted into it, as I listened to their voices mingle with the sounds of the others arriving and it echo about the cavity.

 

Chapter 23

 

The Artifact

 

I held the rope firmly, looked at the large cavity hole surrounding me, and started lowering myself into it, and dangled about with my legs swinging about, and moved slowly lower into dimness, as I wondered why everyone insisted I should go first, even though I wanted to, and wondered if there were similar structures to this all around the world, which had not been found or reported.

I shone my light about below trying to see something in the ground directly below, and only saw the remains of the staircase, and I tried to grasp what had happened, and what had been there, as the stairs must have gone over the cavity, before it collapsed, and there could not have been a tunnel there, as there was no sign of it in the rubble, and I kept wondering what had kept it up, and I wondered who had built such a dangerous construction.

It was my first proper look of below and all I saw was what looked like a large object at the center of the cavity, which I tried to grasp repeatedly, but I could not identify it, and looked back up above and saw a few of the others trying to properly see me.

I wondered what the outcome of it would be, and if it was just another disappointment, and I compared what had happened with what I had originally thought would happen and would be there.

For an instant the rope jerked and oscillated and I slightly spun uncontrollably and a surge of blackness engulfed me, and I wondered what the hell I was entering, as I thought of my original thoughts of what was below, and again considered what could be buried away there and wondered if they had underestimated something, and I remembered the metal detector and what had happened at the woman’s house, and looked in the direction it was, and was amazed that I was at such a depth below the region, and I wondered what they would do with it, and it mystified me!

I thought of ancient black magic worshippers concealing something below, beyond my comprehension, hidden away from mankind, and I wondered why it was the way it was if it was!

I tried straining my eyes repeatedly to see further and to spot the features of anything new, and when I landed on the ground I pulled himself upright with the help of the rope, and released the rope’s tight grip against my body, and shivered at the coldness there, and realized how much I was on my own.

I cleaned dirt off my clothes and glanced at the rubble, and wondered what the outcome of our investigations would be and I realized the others were dramatically staring down at me, in the above torchlight.

There really was only one object in the chamber that I saw and I was surprised at the actual size of it, as it had seemed far smaller above, and I strode over to it, examining it, at different angles, checking if it was connected to something, and perhaps some form of equipment, and considered if it could have something like a generator leading to it, and considered what it was used for, and I realized the chamber and it had to be there for a good reason.

Once at it I dreamily wandered about it and touched its black surface, which I was sure had to be metal, and I started examining it in detail and I was staggered to feel a form of energy pulsating through it, which I sensed had far more magnitude than it felt, and I wondered what the hell it was as it looked as though it belonged to the military, and I shined my torch up close and over it while I marched around it, and I slowly realized how much it was a perfectly symmetrical black sphere.

 

Chapter 24

 

Marple Arrives

 

I sensed there was something that they were not saying, but I knew I only needed to wait for them to tell me, but I kept wondering repeatedly if we were in danger and tried to grasp it, and what I needed to know.

I was glad to see Marple arrive later in the evening, after we had spent hours searching the cavity, and documenting everything we could, and getting some sleep.

Nobody but a few archeologists and scientists wanted to leave there and miss anything, and any discoveries, at such a crucial moment, but I was surprised that little was found after all, and could not fully believe it, and still waited.

Marple’s appearance was magnificent and I questioned him on how he had known and he told me he had not until he arrived at the top of the shaft, where the scientists there had told him.

The scientists kept consulting each other and still came up with little, as there was no proof of anything, and the black sphere object remained a mystery, and they had little on it, and what it was doing there, and they monitored it with everything they had trying to discover what it was doing, and found virtually nothing, and some thought it was being controlled from somewhere else!

With the war most thought it was some form of colossal weapon, atom bomb, or surveillance device, which might have been recently partially awoken, and made ready for use.

“It could be highly classified!” I announced to Marple and Oswald. “We’re still just playing around …”

“But if it is a bomb and is going to be used we could move it away!” Marple stated.

“Who would put a bomb under a hospital?” I replied.

“We’re best not revealing it anywhere unless we have to!” Marple replied.

Fluctuations occasional shuddered through the stone ground from it as it had some form of power surge, threatening to do something, and I imagined my remains being found days later scattered everywhere as investigators tried to fit together information and try to explain what occurred.

It surprised me that Marple was the only one that seemed to not have considered there was anything unearthly about it.

He seemed to be holding back doing something, and checking something out, and what we thought of things and I knew he had come to the hospital for some reason.

When the others were getting some rest or eating, he started examining the cavity further, in more detail, and eventually me and Oswald helped him.

“You agree that the stairs above the cavity go in a straight course forward, and the cavity cut it off, and it fell down …?” he asked me.

I nodded, wondering what he meant, and I watched his eyes go on a point directly ahead, where he briskly went to, and Oswald watched him and followed him, and I went after him.

At the place he went he carefully examined it, and a heap of stones where part of the cavity had collapsed over, and started removing rocks and throwing them away to his side, and Oswald and I eventually joined in throwing rocks and dirt away from the spot, and Marple finally found a hole, and increased the size of it.

“What’s that?” I finally asked, curiously, wondering what he wanted there.

“The above stone steps and tunnel continued in a straight line, and they must have gone somewhere, where someone removed them and created the cavity, and cut and allowed a small part of the stairs remaining there to fall …”

I tiredly thought it over, and wondered what he thought was there, and followed him in the hole with his light, and I started to see the steps and tunnel, and I wondered where they had been going to after all, and I considered if someone had put the cavity there to hide something further along, and I kept thinking it over, wondering what we were searching for.

Yet, after a long time, I still had no idea what we were going after, and I realized what we had found could be nothing compared to what was ahead!

Yet why did Marple not think there was anything dangerous, and why was he so desperate to get there, and make sure nobody else came with us.

 

Chapter 25

 

The End of the Tunnel

 

The white radiance off Marple’s torch slowly shifted to specific calculated positions, probing its way into the abyss ahead, scattering beams through clouds of silky dust our feet blew up; and occasionally stuck deep in my lungs, causing me to give short sharp convulsions, and I continued on going, inhaling enough air.

Faint echoes of our breathing could be heard in our shuffling movements and in the deep silence of the thick underground walls, and I felt the coldness of the walls and it penetrate my limbs; while uniformly marching along, into obscurity, with expectations of plunging into something.

It had been incredible when the tunnel had stopped going downwards and had gone in a straight line in another course, and Marple had told me we were going back under the hospital, far below the ground, and I sensed we never had far to go until we reached our final destination.

Glimpses of Marple’s darkened crouched figure in the illuminating light over the walls wavered rhythmically as he investigated the tunnel, and it fluctuated and Oswald reacted behind me and I followed his eyes to where Marple’s eyes had suddenly gone, and I gasped, and I once saw both of them were gasping, and I realized it was something, and then realized it was the end of our adventure and exploration, and I was left disappointed as I really thought we were going to discover something incredible.

The entire tunnel had collapsed in and we could go no further along, and we had reached our final destination and had not found out what had been there, and I realized the mystery could be left there forever without us knowing what was there.

The rubble blocking the tunnel was too deep down and giant boulders there too immense to move, and were firmly fitted together, and we stood saying nothing, and I watched Marple make some calculations, and check what he had.

By his reactions I sensed that he was up to something, and I knew we were located near the hospital, and realized that we must be deep under Battlefield Road, and I was sure that the builders of the tunnel might not have been able to build it properly in the above ground, without using wood or metal to properly hold it up, as it was surely soil.

It was strange, as we walked back up, I kept sensing Marple had a plan, or was making a plan, and was not saying anything at the moment, but I could not quite grasp what, and why the hell someone wanted what was there to be there, and had gone to such lengths to put it there.

 

Chapter 26

 

The Treasure Discovery

 

Marple rushed into his seat with a drink as I entered the headquarters of Reality Investigations and sat beside him next to the fireplace, and watched him go through a pile of documents.

It was incredible! Marple looked more confident than I had ever seen him, and he wanted me there to tell me about his search for the treasure, and I knew he had to have something! He also told me his investigation of the serial killer had progressed and could reach a conclusion soon, and he left that without any further explanation, or anything really, and he was extremely happy how things were going, and that he could solve the unsolvable case.

Marple studied me, and asked, “Has anything happened at the house at Craigmillar Road?”

“Nothing!”

“Have you been there lately?”

“Nobody has been there since the paranormal scientists found the disturbances at the hospital and moved all their equipment over there!”

“I want you to take them there again, and investigate it again!”

I looked up startled wondering what he wanted there, and I considered if they would go there, as we finished our investigations there as far as I was concerned.

“What for?” I muttered.

“I have had someone contact them and they agreed to take the exploration association scientists and their equipment there to scan the building …”

I was left confused, and wondered what would happen, as what was there had reacted to the metal detector and I wondered what it would react to the stuff they had, and I had just about lost all the powers I had after my last confrontation in the hospital shaft, and I did not like it, as I had not found any real use for it, and the powers had only created problems for me as far as I was concerned, as I had no real control of what it could do, and I was not so sure they were even mine as they seemed to do things for something else, which I was not sure I knew what.

It was incredible as the two paranormal scientists became fascinated with the occurrence at the woman’s house again and they wanted to carry out a proper investigation of what was there, and they had grown tired of their investigation of the cavity and the hospital and I was left confused as to what they had found, or thought they had found, and realized there was little that would be recorded in the history books from the occurrence after all, even though they were still investigating the black sphere in the cavity.

After all that here was no sign of proof of anything, which the public would accept. Was it a new form haunting, of paranormal? And if so what the hell was happening?

Even though the site at that region had been the site of a large famous battle, and massacre that could have caused such an occurrence, of which the bodies could well be below the region, I could not grasp what.

We investigated everything we could, and all the information and history of the region, trying to grasp something, and some clue, and the main regions of the battle that had occurred, and at Battlefield Road, where the tunnel had gone.

“What’s that?” I asked, seeing Marple play happily with documents, inside an envelope.

For a few seconds his face held a sad expression and he considered the occurrences and his investigations.

He finally replied, “The late Dr Barrymore …”

“He died!” I gasped, and wondered if it really was the end of the investigation for the treasure.

“Sadly so! I think we should find what he was looking for anyway, as he wanted it very much … His wife can have her share of it if we find it, and he will be remembered for the discovery …”

“That’s perfect!” I replied, wondering why he was so confident now, after so many people throughout history were unsuccessful.

“From my questioning of his wife I found Dr Barrymore found the treasure from an accumulation of sources, which surely grasped his imagination with the mentions of the strange magical artifact, which was mentioned like the Holy Grail …”

I gasped at what he had said and knew he never believed in such magical things, and I considered what he meant.

“He was obsessed with its magical powers …” he continued. “Which I believed he never really thought existed … He never had the map he gave us examined any further as it was too valuable to him … I did though … And I had it investigated by a friend … Who had it investigated further and managed to reveal faded landscape shapes, before it had faded … From 1568 … Which was why I was at the hospital …”

“What the treasure was marked there …?” I asked, surprised.

“I also knew the archaeologists and scientists were investigating there … I believe the person that drew the map was being chased – and being chased by soldiers – and hid it …

He grabbed his pipe off the table and began smoking.

“Who could have chased him?” I asked.

“It was dated 1568! Mary Queen of Scots had a battle there, and I believe it was her valuable jewels. The royal jewels of a famous queen! I think she was visiting someone at the site, and had even taken her jewels there, as perhaps her enemies were after her and the jewels, and she gave them to someone there … To perhaps keep for her … The person must have been a good friend, and perhaps a soldier, and had either been seen taking them or was just chased by the other soldiers there …”

“So there are incredible valuable and historical jewels hidden somewhere … Do you believe they’re under the hospital?”

“At first I thought it could be there! There were two marks!”

“What about all the tunnels and the cavity …”

“That is something else! It is far more advanced technology, and it was all recently built …”

“What happened next?”

“I think someone took the jewels off him! And he could have died! Or at a slightly later time used the map to find them and move them to another safer location nearby … Where he had intended to get them!”

“Was there another mark on the treasure map?” I gasped, and stared at him intensely.

“I think the person, surely a relative, in fear of his life, took them to the safest place he knew, and marked it on the map, with different writing, in a different style, which faded, and he hid it somewhere near the house you were investigating, with the supposed haunting …”

“As the place is marked about there?”

“Correct! Which is why I want your paranormal scientists to investigate there! You’ll need the archeologists …”

 

Chapter 27

 

The Killer

 

At a lane between two buildings we rested against a wall waiting for the killer, who was predicted to arrive by Marple, and he stood puffing away at his pipe, now tired of it, predicting the killer’s arrival, and I wondered how he knew he would arrive, and at that time, but he would not tell me, and I gasped when I saw someone pass a house window going somewhere, and thought of hiding, but Marple ignored it.

Although, a few minutes later, he jumped upright, as he spotted something, fully alert, and scrambling movements and panic-stricken curses came from the house we were monitoring, a house across a road at the end of the lane, and in the darkness of the lane we watched a dark figure rush out the building, and enter another lane beside the house, and the police came racing out of their cars and started chasing him.

As we ran after them, keen to catch and discover the identity of the killer, a man rushed out the house he had been in, shaken and holding a handgun, and saw he was gone and put it away inside.

I could not believe how accurate Marple had predicted the killer’s attack at the house, and I realized the killer might be getting away, and that we might not get the chance to catch him again, and I watched Marple and the others realize it and run after him, and I ran with them, as more and more police cars came racing in everywhere, with their sirens blaring at full blast.

The police clearly believed that they were chasing the killer, and I realized where he was heading, and towards a nearby cemetery, and I saw his dark shape in the distance rushing there, as other figures shifted towards him.

At another street Marple told a policeman getting out a police car that the killer was going to arrive a the other side of the cemetery, and he rushed back in his vehicle, and we rushed up to the vehicle and he let us in the back seat, and it raced away.

At the other side of the cemetery there were blue lights flashing everywhere and it was lighting the cemetery up, and we looked everywhere for him, and for who had been chasing him, and the vehicles that had arrived there first, and saw that they did not know where he had gone.

He surely had not entered the cemetery and had taken another route beside it, where nobody would have seen where he had gone, and their faces started to look frantic and worried, and they decided to search all the buildings, and as I followed Marple to a nearby building I suddenly recognized it, and it was the back of the Home Guard building where I was a soldier at, where I had joined up, and I was surprised to spot a light flash on inside, and I realized it was from a torch, and I knew the killer had a torch, and I told Marple.

It was worse than I had imagined, as I knew we would be confronting him indoors, instead of the police making a quick outside arrest, and I watched Marple get the police, and they all started silently rushing about outside, getting into hiding places, and two were in the cars, contacting the rest of the police.

I wondered what the motive was, and if it was valuable jewels or he had been doing something else.

My eyes stayed on the place the light had appeared, searching for him, waiting for him, to take a quick look out, or attempt to attack us or escape, and I realized that the police had entirely surrounded the building and that we had him, and I guessed he never knew where we were.

When a policeman started going to a door I decided to join him, as I knew the layout of the inside of the building, and as I approached him Marple followed me there, and I considered all the options open to us. I then realized that the policeman had something to unlock the door, and silently opened it up, and we slowly climbed in, and heard him inside a room.

The policeman removed a handgun, and we waited for the others to appear, and we stood listening to someone inside the room breathing heavily.

By their reactions I was sure that they did not have a clue what they were dealing with, and that they had not seen the place before. They were in a dark hallway, just outside the room, at night, within the grounds of an army base, and they were chasing a vicious serial killer.

At the side of my eyes I spotted traces of shoe marks from him, and his shoes were wet, and I traced them going into the room and I stood amazed as the policeman silently pushed open the door and crept in, and my face turned pale as I waited for bullets to go smashing into his body, and I looked in and the other police moved in beside me, and stood beside me with their loaded guns facing inside, into its dark interior.

I slowly faced the blackness at the corner of the room, where there was someone rolled up in ball in the corner, and we waited for him to do something, as we searched for his gun.

The policeman that had opened the door stood frozen, holding his gun out at the faintly visible black figure.

My heart rate exploded, beating faster than I had felt it beat in a long time, and I was still standing doing it when Marple removed his gun and pointed it at him, and turned the light on.

As seconds passed I watched the figure lifelessly remain there, rolled up in ball in the corner, and I was sure he had done something to himself, and he could be dead.

I spotted a trail of blood across the floor, in drips, going straight up to him.

We strolled up, not shining their torches directly at the killer, wondering who the hell it could be, and who could have had the entire police force after him for so long.

When he turned I was dumbstruck, and even wondered where the real killer had gone, and I recognized the room, and Captain Godfrey’s main office, and realized I had not noticed it because we had entered through the back of the Home Guard office, and at night, where I had not been before, and had been so obsessed with what was happening to recognize it.

It was Captain Godfrey’s office and it was Captain Godfrey on the floor in the corner, and I realized that it was not the killer, and I realized I had blown it again, and I should not have directed them over to the army base, and realized that he must have been tired after working there late and had gone to sleep in the corner, with an old blanket wrapped about his waist.

He stared at me in horror and started getting up, and shouted furiously, “You again! You’re fired! I kicked you out the army!”

All the policemen stopped pointing their guns at him, realizing that it was the wrong person, and I watched him almost fall over, and gasped, as he was holding an injury he had received from something, which he had recently received, and he attempted to grab his gun off the ground below him, and the police all pointed their guns at him, and one grabbed his gun.

 

Chapter 28

 

The Scan

 

What astonished me was after everything that had happened I had not really solved anything of what had happened to me at Craigmillar Road or in the hospital shaft, and what the black sphere was below the hospital, or what the powers I had were, and I could not grasp what would happen next, as every unsolved puzzle and mystery that had happened seemed to emerge at the one time, and Marple, who had forced me into going there, had not answered anything and had denied the existence of anything, and had phoned me and ordered me to carry out his mission.

I sensed that there was something there in the Craigmillar Road house the minute I reached the door, and it had not been anywhere as powerful as it, even at the hospital, and I was now certain of it, and I sensed that all the exploration association scientists and paranormal scientists that accompanied me there were not saying something, and it was something powerful, and something deep.

I knew I would have to wait for them to give it to me, and I kept wondering if we were in great danger, and which I had felt chasing the killer, and I allowed the scientists to set up their equipment there again, but this time with the equipment from in the hospital shaft, which had found the tunnel, and would scan below the building, as Marple had insisted, and I gasped at what the metal detector had done, and even started thinking of ways to protect myself from the forces it could generate.

I eventually relaxed on the bed in my room there, and recalled the case of the killer, and how astonished I was that it was Captain Godfrey, and I was astonished when Marple that morning had told me who he really was.

Marple had discovered that all the killer’s victims had one thing in common and that they had all fought in the First World War, and he had found out that they had all been in the same army division, and had fought together, and massive amounts of their comrades had been killed, and Marple had traced all the surviving members, and there were only two left.

Captain Godfrey had been German, and a German soldier before he had moved to Scotland, and he had entirely changed his identity, to hide his past, and other killings in Germany, and Marple had discovered that Godfrey had a brother, who had moved to Scotland too, who had served in the same division, and that he had been killed, which Godfrey had admitted to the police, and he blamed the other soldiers for his death, and believed that they had actually killed him, after their discovery of him being German, but what they never knew was he was his brother.

The war with Germany had revived what had happened, and he had used his experience and knowledge of how the police worked, and used it to destroy the soldiers.

The newspapers had the story all over the front pages, with Marple being named as a chief investigator, and the man who had solved the case, and he was receiving numerous calls and new cases, and I realized that he intended to expand the business, and increase the amount of investigators.

Everything was perfect, except this case, and what was there!

While I rested on the bed I considered what could happen next and I listened to Oswald and the other scientists consulting with each other and making an agreement, which I missed and tried to work out from what I heard!

It was incredible as I recalled things they had been saying earlier, and that I had not picked up properly at the time, and realized what they were doing, and that they were even increasing the power of the scan, and I wondered what the hell that would do, as it had been powerful enough in the hospital, and I started seeing the dangers of it again, and thought of going somewhere else, and returning after they had done it, to survive.

For some reason the scientists seemed not to want me to be involved in their discussion and what was occurring, and I believed it was to do with my earlier worries of what could happen, and I realized Oswald had said something about it to them. So I decided just to use it and stay out their way, in the background, and observe what was going on.

I could not grasp what would happen, and I did not know what was there, and what was incredible was I realized that they had read my report on the occurrence in the building with the metal detector and what had happened and they had entirely missed what had occurred, and what I had meant, and I could not explain it any further to them what had happened, and they never seemed to think anything had happened, and I realized again that I could not properly explain what was there, as I never knew what was there.

Marple had once had a great interest in investigating the paranormal, which he never believed in, and consistently explained logical solutions to everything easily, which I and the others investigators normally did, but he was far more experienced and determined, and I realized that I had to find something of that nature to prove something existed.

The elderly woman, and owner of the house, was glad to see me again, and did everything to welcome us, and not put me off the case, and at her dinner I discussed the case and she told me what had been happening since I left and she told me that the haunting had decreased occurring, especially since we started work at the hospital, and neighbors had also admitted it.

What could it be? I was still at the start of the investigation! I considered everything, and only had the metal detector that had activated it, and that never added up to much.

After I was asleep later on the bed I awakened and realized I had missed something, while I had been asleep, and I watched the paranormal scientists and technicians rushing excitedly back and forward checking their equipment all over the woman’s outer corridor, and where the source had mainly been detected, and where I had activated the metal detector, and collapsed, and wondered what was going on, and I realized that they were about to activate their equipment, and braced myself.

When nothing happened I looked up and saw Oswald look into the room, and I wondered if anything had happened.

“Are you scanning below the building?” I asked.

“Yes!” he replied.

I gasped, and tried to detect any differences in the surrounding environment, and I jumped off the bed, and stood at the room entrance, and watched all the scientists standing around waiting for something, and I wondered what, and as I approached them I realized they had all been standing waiting for me, to continue and activate the equipment and experiment, and I wondered why.

When they activated it nobody reacted and barely noticed anything. My mind wandered through all the occurrences that had led up to its discovery.

Suddenly a vast unstable energy blast, which seemed to come from somewhere else, and not below, or from anywhere in the normal universe, and like it came from another outer dimension, and emerged all about the place, with so much force it threatened to warp space, and I went back to wondering what it really was and what damage it could do, and I watched parts of the equipment burst into flames, and the scientists quickly turning it all off and going crazy trying to put out flames.

I was happy it was over and nobody had been killed, and that they could not use the equipment.

Yet I noticed Orwell and Higgins and some other scientists were not concerned, and I saw them at the equipment, and a scientist holding a sheet of paper, and I moved over.

The scientist explained that the energy blast had damaged the equipment, as they had predicted, and their swift instantaneous scan of below the building had worked, and that they had used the instantaneous rough scan below, with a fast enough speed capable of checking there, before the equipment was damaged, and he showed us the sheet of paper with the rough scan, and at first I thought it had not worked as it looked like a blur of lines, but as I examined it further in more detail I grasped a strange image in it of an unusual formation.

 

Chapter 29

 

The Exploration

 

I stood blinded by the black abyss below me, as I searched into the depths of the tunnel, as though it led into some strange region of space, outside normal space, and I saw the stone steps below, which were the same as they had been in the tunnel going under the hospital, which had been accurately made.

They were in a hole, below the woman’s hall, at the exact point the occurrences had originated, and it had been uncovered by the archeologists, with help from the scientists, who were all standing along the hall in a line, with the woman standing at the end, with them all standing with their mouths partially open, with a slight look of horror, waiting for me to descend down into its depths, and I knew I was the chosen one.

I gripped my light, and shifted down the stone steps, looking for any obstacles ahead, and moved a little faster, and watched their faces vanish behind me as I went down, and saw the two paranormal scientists enter behind me, and the others watch as the three of us descended, and left them behind, and I wondered what the hell I had done and if I would someday regret what I had done.

At a point deep below I heard scientists, which seemed magnified by the tunnel, as they conferred on what was below, after so much they had found so little so far, and they had been arranging the exploration of it for a long time, and I had been unchallenged in going down, and the scientists and archeologists had insisted, and had done everything to help.

It was strange as I thought of what was there, if I was not insane, and I realized it could be dormant, and being partially awakened, and was far different than anything else on this world, and it seemed to want to do something!

Our scan had activated something, and there were reports of ghost sightings in the region, and there were sightings of the soldiers from the battle that had taken place, and their ghostly figures marching along a region of the battle site.

A deep thud echoed came down from the top as someone at the top dropped something inside, while trying to look inside, and I and I speeded up.

It was their ultimate discovery and expedition and I wished it to be done right, and to give the full discovery everything that it deserved. Though I was mainly confused as to what had been discovered and would be found, especially after being surprised at so much in the past week, with such strange occurrences, and being given such little facts, and I believed the war had generated all the action, or perhaps something else had done it and had caused the war.

Hazy echoes off our deep breathing broke the extraordinary silence that accumulated, and we examined the walls around us with surprise as we shifted downwards, and it still mystified me, and I wondered what I was missing.

For some reason I realized that the other tunnel that we had been going through from the hospital led to what was at the bottom of this tunnel, and in its original state it had not wanted to be discovered and had later put the occurrences at the hospital to make us go there, and it had checked me out in the other tunnel, and before that in another state in the woman’s house.

I realized how ancient it was and it had been trapped on this world, waiting to leave this universe, which it had tried to do before on many occasions, and it had been buried higher above at one point.

In its current partially awakened/dormant state it was like some form of ultimate advanced living computer, in the ways it thought and existed, and in its partially altering state, still waiting to accomplish its plan, and had other forms and powers that could never exist in this universe.

Humans had once worshipped it when they had encountered it, and they had hidden its location, and Mary Queen of Scots had once been hidden away near it, before she was captured, when it had last met humans.

For some reason I knew things that I had not known, and I knew I was approaching something, and I tried straining my eyes to see further down, but there were no features of anything, and the steps vanished away into deep blackness.

When I looked backwards I saw the top of the tunnel had vanished into darkness, and I looked around and saw the paranormal scientists had vanished, and I knew it would make contact with me alone!

 

Chapter 30

 

The Lost Chamber

 

A loud screech from something strange startled me and nearly made me fall down the stone steps, and I waked on, and I stood dazzled and blinded as bright light exploded out, and I held my hands over my eyes, and my eyes slowly adjusted from the dark tunnel behind me, and I staggered down the last steps, into a twenty foot circular cavity.

I staggered straight into the blinding light, beaming from a large sphere formation, and felt its powerful energy pulsating through the floor, with some form of life, floating over the central region of the cavity, and I tried to grasp what was in front me!

Silent sounds manifested around my surroundings, as though invisible things were surrounding me, and I saw strange glowing and swirling ghostly formations, forces, and some were like spirits with shrouds, and flew about with silent wails, and I realized why people in the past reacted as they had.

The central thing resembled a magical living sphere, altering its forms of energy, and I felt its energy and powers, and knew it had no physical form, and it normally had a colossal size and powers somewhere else, and I tried to grasp what was there, and why it was there, and what Marple would explain it as!

In its blinding light I grasped little, and physically felt its powers everywhere, and saw mental images of stars exploding around me, as though I was shooting through the cosmos, some strange form of space, and I knew it was giving it to me.

Its formation seemed to have constant dramatic changes, and powerful energy surges, as though unstable, and it bordering on vanishing, and rejuvenating itself, and I watched it shift in its central region, as though trapped in some force field, and for a moment something formed in it, with some unknown form of life, and it altered as though its energy was constantly controlling itself.

In the blinding light I saw another tunnel entrance at the opposite side of the chamber and knew it led down to the tunnel that we had been going through from the hospital, and it had made it in an attempt to make contact with us, and it had made the black sphere in the cavity, under the hospital, after it had realized it would not work.

The black sphere had the capacity to communicate with us for it, but it had realized it needed to make contact differently and by itself, and it had chosen me to do it as a representative of our species, as it had checked me out, especially after my use of the metal detector.

It was from some other form of existence, and it used vast amounts of energy making contact with me, and remaining out of its normal hibernation state, and I thought of what paranormal really meant, and thought of ancient devil and black magic worshippers, and I knew it was far more and from somewhere beyond our comprehension, and had been hidden away there from mankind from the dawn of time!

At one point something had been caught in its energy field, and it fought for its life to escape, and it altered itself, and it vanished from it to survive, and I was staggered at the sheer power of it and at what had been caught in it!

It was something artificial and something alive and I had to decide what to do, and I decided to do my best to help it!

I could not allow such a life form/existence to die, and such an advanced and rare species, after being alive for so long, and with it being trapped and trying to escape from there for so long, and I decided then and there to do my best to find a way to help it, and I would get Marple to help me do it as he was known to find solutions to such problems and had solved some of the hardest most advanced cases I had heard of.

I decided to leave and was about to climb back up the steps, to the building away above, and felt sorry for it being trapped there, and perhaps for eternity, and I wondered what the scientists would make of it and I knew that they would help it, and I decided what to do, and I realized I could be famous and remembered in history for the discovery, and the first discovery of an extraterrestrial.

I was sure it agreed, with my way to proceed, and as I was going to enter the tunnel, to go to the surface, I spotted something shine over at a hidden dark region of the cavity, and after careful examinations I realized it was a large black chest, and I rushed over and crouched in front of it, and held it.

At the side of my eyes I saw something emerge in the darkness of the tunnel, where I had been, and spotted two figures appear, and saw it was the two paranormal scientists, emerging there, with their mouths open, coming to a halt, and standing staggered, looking everywhere, more astonished than I had ever seen them, as they tried to control themselves.

I pulled the treasure chest open and discovered the colossal royal jewelry, which once belonged to Mary Queen of Scots, and I played with incredible jewels, as I watched the golden and colored radiance explode out, over the walls, with bright sparkles from gigantic diamonds and rubies.

 

Prologue

 

The Ancient Visitation

 

McMurdo’s pale complexion and shaken appearance showed he had encountered something beyond his comprehension, of an immensely deadly diabolical nature, and he shook in terror, barely able to speak, and looked gravely ill.

I strained my eyes to see him in the dimness of the underground train tunnel, near London Bridge, beside the underground Roman cavity they had just uncovered in the side of the tunnel, which he had just climbed out!

“What did you see down there?” I gasped, in horror, at what he had suggested existed.

“I saw its face!” he muttered. “It’s hideous! Its existence goes back far further than humans, and far beyond! It’s trapped down there somewhere!”

I stood frigid and staggered at the danger, and started to comprehend what we were up against, and had been missing!

I wondered what could be powerful enough to trap it, and if there was even anything in existence to free it!

“Its origins go beyond humans, and the Romans who settled here, and has been dormant, waiting to be revived, and uncovered, and has remained undetected by our technology!”

He continued, biting his lower lip hard, “Our detection methods are far inferior and are mainly created and function to discover normal objects, and even normal unidentified objects, and our investigations of it are futile!”

I sat frigid, realizing the mistake we had made and what the outcome of what was occurring could be, and by trying to handle something of its nature, which could categorically kill us all!

“Some scientists found traces of it though, which were kept confidential – while they tried to locate and investigate it!”

“It must be incredible!” I answered firmly. “It must have been tremendous! What made it come to this place, in the first place?”

“Nobody knows! Perhaps there’s something here, which it came to investigate! If it was far less dormant it might have been located by some means! It is powerful!”

I was amazed that he thought it could have some form of powerful presence, and I believed it was supposed to be entirely supernatural, and was sure I was destined to discover its existence, and full potential, and believed it could be buried away below us, below the cavity, unearthed by them, working there, and I detected he had been up to something when he discovered its existence.

Deep down I thought McMurdo had barely survived, and seemed to believe he could be killed in some hideous way!

It was lucky Marple had not been able to get hold of the archaeologists to investigate his accounts of the lost treasure, and Roman map he had found, as they were working on another project, but I knew they soon would, and that we could not do anything about it, and I thanked him for warning me.

In the ground below my feet I was surprised to see an object, which I saw was a Roman coin, and I grabbed it and cleaned dirt away from it, in the dim light, and I entered further into the massive cavity in the side of the tunnel wall, and looked down into the large hole there, going deep below, and into the hideous cavity, and wondered why in the hell it was there, and why the railway company had not filled it in, but I knew they would once they had completed the rest of the railway line, and it could be buried away for future explorers to uncover.

I recalled the other incident we had investigated, at Battlefield Road, and after all the observations, research, and by leading scientists, scientists admitted that the thing found in the woman’s house we investigated had unknown origins, mainly by its appearance and tremendous unrecognized powers! Although they still had a lot of work and investigations to carry out, and had found little, and they were trying to keep it confidential!

“We have to investigate it!” McMurdo warned. “The future of the world could be at stake? If the wrong people get hold of it …”

“We should investigate it!” I agreed, recalling a newspaper article. “There may soon be many more constructions being built around here! They’re building far more constructions now … We have to get anything we can on it – and as much information on it and its origins …”

“There’s little! That’s been found! It’s mainly in ancient lost legends, which show its hideous features – and that of the devil!”

I was left confused at what information he had discovered, and stated, “If it has a physical presence we could discover something new about it – and it would be worthwhile to investigate!”

McMurdo gasped, in horror, still badly shaken from his confrontation with it, and replied, “I never thought I would live to see it and survive!”

 

 

 

II

 

From Beyond Reality

 

 

Chapter 1

 

The Investigators

 

Just before Christmas, at the end of the Second World War, I was moved to the new headquarters of Reality Investigations detective agency, at a new site on the river Thames, in London, where I was surprised to find it was virtually identical to the other.

John Marple, the founder, owner, and chief investigator, was there, and I was still his assistant investigator.

The whole account of what occurred was now astounding and I could barely believe what had happened, and what happened later.

I was staggered at the Battlefield Road discovery, and walking in and discovering the sphere formation, and its powerful energy pulsations blasting through sold rock, and witnessing some form of life existing there, which we have not seen since, which nobody grasped the true identity of!

The formation altered back to its original dormant formation later, after the paranormal scientists arrived, and I had to describe things that happened and that I seen invisible things surrounding it, which had become visible, and their strange glowing and swirling ghostly formations, forces, and some like spirits with shrouds over them.

The central formation resembled a magical living sphere, altering its formation, and its energy and powers, and I knew it had no real physical form, and it normally had a colossal size and powers somewhere else.

In the end, after intense investigations, nobody, other than the two paranormal scientists, Oswald and Higgins, who witnessed some of it, believed what I told them existed.

All the occurrences sounded so astounding afterwards I could hardly believe it myself at times, and what the outcome scenario of the incredible events had been, and it being entirely different from what I expected.

Though the treasure we found in the cavity was confirmed to belong to Mary Queen of Scots it was not confirmed officially, and it was currently being kept in a museum cellar, as they attempted to prove what it was, and it actually existed.

The dormant alien formation, even when shown, was not enough to prove anything, and it was a rare phenomenon to them, and something else entirely, and all the scientists, who had been unable to make mental or normal communications with it, were unable to prove it or prove it was not, and it basically left me the only one that had seen it and communicated with it.

I was unable to allow it to make contact with the human race, as they were unable to communicate, and it seemed to change its mind about doing it, as it had done before, but I realized it wanted to do something else, which I was unable to realize, and from my last communications with it.

In the end it was left in the museum cellar, with the treasure, where the paranormal scientists and scientists occasionally visited when they had new ideas and technology, to investigate it further.

To my surprise I once realized nobody in the museum realized what had even taken place, and was there, buried away in the depths of their building, and the scientists and paranormal scientists who investigated it no longer mentioned anything of it.

At the time I never even suspected in my wildest fantasies that what we had found was not the conclusion to the whole affair, and what we would find later, and more historical treasure.

Marple had investigators in all major worldwide cities and he was one of the most advanced and knowledgeable investigators I had met, who was known to me for many years before I joined him as assistant chief investigator, and his experience was vast, in all sorts of ways, in science and technology, in extraordinary occurrences, and he handled cases and activities beyond any other agencies I had encountered.

Upon my first entrance of the building he had me rushed up the stairs to his office, and introduced as Mike Malone, previously a news reporter, to the new investigators, and I was given a seat.

Marple held a meeting with the investigators there discussing the end of the war, and at the end of the meeting introduced me to a new distinctive/strange case, which baffled me, as I had been sure I had done everything, after the past affairs, and the alien discovery, and what must surely be the greatest scientific discovery mankind ever encountered.

He bestowed the case at the end of the meeting with little knowledge of what it was fully about, other than it was of interest to him to see how I handled it, as my first case in London, and to see if I was doing what he wanted, and to see what I would come up with, and left me in confusion, as he gave me little.

After examining the few facts I became convinced it was just someone playing a festive season drink induced prank, dressed as a department store Santa Claus, and all that was mentioned was a woman had phoned claiming a department store Santa had scared her at her home.

Although what happened reminded me of what had happened on my first case and a woman had phoned claiming to have seen ghosts, and I sensed something, and saw Marple had reacted in the same way, but I did not know why.

Furthermore, before I undertook it, something else emerged, and a new client, McMurdo, phoned Marple, with another strange case, to Marple’s surprise, and they arranged a meeting, and I stayed to see what he was so desperate to do, and I wondered what was going to happen, and what the outcome would be, and slowly detected Marple had excitedly become interested, and that money was surely involved, and I wondered if it was because it Christmas or the company opening its new headquarters.

I sat at the fireplace and watched Marple put up his Christmas tree in the corner of the room, introducing the festive season, and he poured us full glasses of his best whisky, and jumped into his seat, and I saw the last of the sunlight vanishing.

I studied buildings looking for bomb damage from the war.

As I shifted my seat closer to the fire his new secretary shoved open the door and rushed in and introduced McMurdo, and I was surprised to see him enter in his dirty dusty work clothes, from the top of the stairs, weary and exhausted, looking nervous.

He looked as if he had just finished working at a building site, and I could not grasp why he was so nervous, and what he wanted.

I considered if there was money in the building trade, now that the war was over, with all the damaged buildings, and them rebuilding the city.

I was slightly disappointed, as I expected more, and expected he would be wealthy, and I considered why Marple thought there was money involved, and spotted Marple looked disappointed for a few seconds, and he gave McMurdo a seat at the fireplace, which he gladly took and rested in, and excepted a glass of whisky.

After a while Marple asked him what he wanted, and he shoved his hand into his inner pocket, and apprehensively removed what looked like the remains of a folded up crumpled rag, which I identified as some form of ancient paper, and he nervously sat holding it while looking at it and his drink, and I suddenly spotted he had encountered something of immense danger, and I wondered what could do such a thing to such a man, and I considered the events that had occurred due to the war.

“This is a very ancient document!” he announced, and Marple looked up as he opened it up, and looked startled.

He stared at it, and Marple continued, “I’ve some experience of dating documents! Even though it looks far too old and unique for me to recognize …”

He took the ancient piece of paper and marched over and handed it over to Marple, and backed away to his seat.

Marple had a look of surprise and confusion, and asked him, “Perhaps you should tell us what happened, and why you need us – including what you told me on the phone, in more detail, and we perhaps may help you!”

“Alright I shall!” he replied, and relaxed more. “I work on the underground line … We’re extending the underground train line … We drill out the muck and rocks! With all the bomb damage and extra work we’ve been running behind schedule … So they’ve employed more workers, and we work later hours …”

“Where are you working?” I asked, curiously.

“Near London Bridge!” he replied, looking out at where the river was. “We were digging the rubble out the tunnel and increasing the size of part of the tunnel when the tunnel wall collapsed in … Revealing a large hidden cavity in the side of the tunnel … The ground inside the cavity collapsed and fell into a deep cavity below …”

He held his head, and quickly pulled himself together, and straightened up, and continued, “It was not just a cavity though … It was part of some buried away ancient construction, and we found a large cavity deep below. We were sure it had tunnels and ancient artifacts …”

“Of great value?” I replied.

He nodded his head, and I wondered what he was talking about, as why the hell would ancient underground artifacts, tunnels, and cavities be so significant, and to such a guy, at the most archeologists would be called in to explore it.

Again I wondered what he was so frightened of, and I was more confused than I had been.

I recalled underground tunnels and hideouts being in other cities, and realized that there could be some there!

To my surprise he replied, “The origins of that piece of paper was told to me to be nearly two thousand years old …”

Marple looked at it, clearly still wondering what he was after, and why he was so frightened.

McMurdo continued, “According to accounts and legends I found! Valuable treasure was concealed near where something was concealed!”

“Near where what was concealed?” I gasped, looking startled.

Marple looked at him calmly, and I looked deep into the fire, and listened.

“I found that ancient map hidden on a skeleton in the cavity! It will not be long before the cavity will be buried away, as we have to finish the repairs and railway line …”

“What do you want us to do?” I replied, cautiously.

“I’ve just come into new information that could allow you to locate it!”

I could not grasp if it actually existed, and sat considering it, and everything he said.

“According to myths,” he continued, “many people have been found dead searching for it down there! There could be something of great danger, where it’s been concealed!”

“What’ll we do then?” I asked, curiously, looking over at Marple, waiting to see if Marple said anything.

“You’ll have to wait until I’m ready!” McMurdo replied first, and stood up. “I could have a major clue to its location, and I’m sure I can discover something of significant importance! I will need your help to recover it!”

“We’ll do that!” Marple replied firmly.

When he had left the building, and returned home, I started to doubt what he was after was of value other than to archaeology and museums, for historical value, and I was sure he was just trying to get us to go out our way to get it for him, and I wondered if it was also because it was of great danger.

 

Chapter 2

 

The Santa Investigation

 

My first investigation in London seemed strange, which I could not identify, and the elderly widow client left me confused, as she claimed she had seen Santa Claus in her house in the middle of the night, and she claimed he had a strange ghostly appearance, and I could not identify why.

So I questioned her over again, and took it she had witnessed something unusual in the night, while leaving her bed, upon hearing noises below, and there seemed to me to be no case to investigate as no crime had been committed, and she said she was not bothered about him being there to my surprise, and nothing seemed to suggest he had done anything, and I wondered why she was not bothered about him being there, in her house at night, and why she had reported it, and she never replied why.

I had gone to the client confused and repeatedly going over the document I was given, which consisted of nothing but a few paragraphs with a few lines she had given the agency, and I came to the conclusion that she might have stopped an attempted burglary and wanted us to secretively handle the case.

What could she have confronted at night in her living room of her house that could have caused her to seek such dramatic action?

The location was near our headquarters, next to the Thames, and when I entered I expected little. It was my first case!

After talking with her more I established that she had recently become a widow, and was left there on her own, and I suddenly realized that she believed she had encountered something she believed was of a paranormal nature, of a strange nature, and that she must want me to identify what it was and perhaps find a way of getting rid of it.

Though what had she seen, and how was I going to get rid of it, and what if it was some form of paranormal?

After the ghost occurrences I had witnessed before I gasped at what it could be! But they were entirely different and surely could not exist there. And if she had fantasized something, half asleep, in the middle of the night, she could have hallucinated, or she could have believed it had occurred afterwards, but there was more to it, and I had to try to deduce what she meant by what she said, and I had her give me accurate descriptions of the visitation, or whatever she thought it was, but she gave me little and it left me confused, and I wondered if she was playing with me, as she might have heard of the case of the ghost sightings.

Though she insisted something had appeared there, in her living room, and that it had never appeared there before, and she claimed the Santa Claus floated inches over her floor, as though it thought it was on the floor, and its movement suggested it was doing something, with an intension, which she never identified.

The case seized my attention and I became engrossed in discovering what would happen, and in the unusual case, and I had to solve it. But it was not a matter of remaining there this time and watching for its reappearance, as it had only shown itself once, and I even wondered if it could have been from my appearance there, and the powers that I had gained from the last occurrence, but they had been different and had vanished, and I decided to check nearby and locals there, and if they had seen anything, or had heard of anything that had supposedly haunted the region.

 

Chapter 3

 

The Visitations

 

After thinking it over for too long I started wondering if it was me that was attracting such strange occurrences to materialize, as since the last one I still had not heard any other proper occurrences anywhere, and from everyone and everywhere I checked, and could not grasp how the paranormal scientists could even work, as there was nothing and they admitted it!

I sensed that it existed in this case, and started to realize it more and more as I questioned locals, but I could not identify what, as they only explained so far, and little, and none had actually seen any occurrences, and I could not grasp if they were tricking me, or hiding something, but eventually I got more information from them, and I realized there had been other sightings of the Santa Claus, and that they were passing on information from the victims.

I began to believe it could be a serial killer, who had hidden away the remains of his victims, and the people I had met only had heard rumors, and I decided to search further and discovered there had been other sightings of the Santa Claus on the same street as the elderly widow who had witnessed him.

My first investigation of another elderly widow on the same street seemed as strange as the first, and left me more confused, and gave little information on what she had witnessed, and nothing indicating it was a serial killer, and she claimed she had seen Santa Claus actually emerge in her house in the middle of the night, and she claimed it had somehow had the appearance of something ghostly, and I started to wonder if she was just copying the other woman, and wondered what they were up to.

By the way she later described it I wondered if it had been a burglar using the festive season and a Santa Claus costume to disguise him breaking in, while hiding his identity, and after talking it over she admitted others in the street had encountered it too, to my surprise, and I decided to investigate it further.

Back at Reality Investigations I met Marple and he handed me letters involved with the case, which I opened, and I sat surprised and shocked at the fireplace reading them, and even though I thought the sudden appearance of the letters had to be someone reacting to my investigations, and perhaps covering up what they were doing, I realized how authentic the letters were and how dangerous the case could be, and I was left staggered when I read one from a school boy who claimed Santa’s reindeer had eaten his brother, and left his bones under their Christmas tree, and I was left baffled, and wondered why the police had not been called, and I decided that I had better investigate it before doing anything, and had to check the bones existed, and identify a killing occurring!

I was left unsure by the way it was written, and it was strange that the young boy claimed that his brother should not have gone downstairs to see Santa, and that he had not known any better, and I wondered if he had been kidnapped or something, and had left the bones to cover it up.

He claimed his parents were away and I realized that his parents had not returned yet and that the occurrence had occurred on a previous night, and the letter finished with him asking for our help, and I realized people I had met had told him and the other letter writers of my investigations.

What the hell was there? Was it a case for paranormal investigators? I considered calling them up, but realized I would have to prove something of that nature existed, or there was something unexplained occurring.

Suddenly I discovered one letter was from a neighbor of the first elderly lady client, who started the investigation, and I began reading other letters, and it became more and more curious, and I read letters from women at the surrounding houses, and that it was not burglaries as nothing was being taken from the houses.

One claimed the Santa had used large vicious reindeers! Or had used a dangerous animal disguised as a reindeer! Which could have attacked and killed the boy, and I had to investigate it.

While going through the dates of the occurrences in the letters I discovered that he was working his way down the street ever night, and had probably done all the houses there, one every night, and that the boy’s house had been recent, and I worked out what house he would surely visit that night.

 

Chapter 4

 

The Christmas Visitation

 

I thought of telling Marple but I left it as I wanted to solve the case myself, and could not believe such a thing could happen, and on my first case, and it never occurred to the other investigators of it being anything, and how could anything happen with such a case!

It was absurd! I realized then that they could be missing major cases, and serial killers!

I wanted to know what the clients were actually talking about!

The woman in the house the Santa Claus was to arrive at welcomed me in, and told me about the things her neighbors had witnessed, and had told her, and late that night she gave me a room on the ground floor, and I placed a seat at the door of the bedroom and left the door partly opened, just enough to see into the living room and entire area where he would enter, and I sat reading a book I brought with me, and I started to see sense and wonder if they were all up something else, which I never grasped.

What surprised me was she arrived near the time the occurrences had taken place at the other houses and apologized to me for something, and before she left gave me a book to read, to which I believed she had given me as she felt sorry for me, leaving me there doing nothing, in the dark, with whatever it was, and I considered if she intended to use the story of it for somewhere for some reason.

Though when I started to read the book I sat back staggered, as the book was full of paranormal and ghost stories, which were claimed to be real accounts, which were written like they actually occurred, and I realized it could be part of their plan to persuade me something was there.

Though after reading through it, trying to see what was there, I was left staggered as there were accounts of occurrences actually taking place in the same region.

There were ancient inhabitants of the region claiming to have seen alarming evil spirits and the devil itself, dwelling there.

I realized that the place had not always been a city region as it was, many centuries ago, and it sent a chill through me as I thought what could be buried there.

There were ancient newspaper accounts of reported unexplained ancient occurrences, and one of the worst told of travelers that had come upon the remains of people left in pieces in the region by some hideous occurrence, with their remains being found scattered throughout the area, and others of people being attacked and chased by things.

I was mesmerized and my eyes for no reason fell upon something in the woman’s living room, and I recalled seeing it a few seconds earlier but had not noticed it, as I was engrossed with the accounts, and I stared at it for almost a minute trying to figure it out but was unable to form a mental image of what was there, and what I was looking at, as it had no real form, from what I saw, and in the darkness my tired unfocused eyes never allowed me to grasp what.

It was the appearance of the house that brought me to, and I stood behind the door, and I could say little, and I wondered what could happen if I revealed myself, or even turned on the light.

After going through all the things that had happened I realized that there had to be something actually there, and I realized with all the stuff I had learned I did not positively know what to do, as even with all the knowledge I had heard I did not know what it was, and I did not believe it all, and I realized my mission was to discover what was there, and proceed from there.

Going by everything that I had heard I knew it would do what it did and vanish, and I quickly glanced out, and stood staggered as it was the Santa Claus, and how I imagined him as a child, and it was startling, and also gasped in horror, as it seemed real.

I spotted a faint glowing energy around its shape, and twinkles of light, like miniature starlight, and realized it looked magical, with fantasy powers.

I was sure that I could solve the case by examining it up close!

I was sure it might be affected by things, and I could find a way of getting rid of it, and stopping it haunting the region.

I became even more fascinated, wondering what it was, as it was so realistic, and unlike any normal human I had ever seen, and as I moved closer to it I realized it detected me, and at that point I collapsed over the floor.

 

Chapter 5

 

The Deadly Encounter

 

Things seemed somehow different when I awakened, on the floor, and I studied everything about me everywhere trying to grasp what, and I watched the woman studying me sprawled across her living room floor, surprised, and she apologized, and took the blame for what had happened, and I had a bad time recalling what had happened, and strange meaningless dreams I had.

Later I recalled the moments before I collapsed repeatedly, wondering what the hell happened.

I was badly depressed all evening after it, still trying to grasp it, and not believing I had blown the end, and had not found out what it had been doing there! If only I had stayed where I had been I could have found out and have remained undiscovered, and the woman had not been able to tell me anything either.

Back at the detective agency I read through the letters again and gasped at the occurrences that had been mentioned, and still could not understand how the Santa could be mentioned as being deadly, but realized that I could have been killed if it had been.

I thought of telling Marple but I left it as I wanted to solve the case myself, and could not believe such a thing could happen on a case, as I was trapped trying to solve it and stuck with one of the strangest menaces I had heard of, and it had not occurred to any of the other investigators of it being anything, and that anything could happen with such a case! It was absurd!

I had only one thing left I could do and that was to contact the next house, next to the house, and arrange to do it over again, and this time use cameras to record it and watch it as well, and find out what the hell it did, and if it did exist to use it to contact the paranormal scientists!

I needed to give them evidence of something, as they would have to travel all the way there from Scotland.

The man in the house the Santa Claus was to arrive at welcomed me in, and told me his neighbors had told him everything, and he would allow me to set up a camera and other equipment to check it out.

Once again when it turned night I got a room on the ground floor, next to the living room, and I quickly placed a seat at the door of the bedroom and left the door partly opened, just enough to see into the living room, and entire area where I knew it would arrive, and I sat reading a book I brought with me, and I started to see sense and I wondered what it really was.

Again I realized the place had not always been a proper city region, many centuries ago, and it sent a chill through me as I thought of what could be buried away, and my eyes for no reason fell upon something in the living room, and realized it was there and I suddenly jumped back startled, and my heart leapt, and I saw its red figure shifting into the room, shifting out from nothing and the darkness of the corridor, and I activated the camera and equipment I had set up.

Even though it was dark it was identical to a Santa and I watched its strange figure move in making Santa sounds, and I realized how similar it was to a department store Santa, and I tried to grasp what it was doing!

There was something strange that I just could not grasp, and it moved and did things far differently than anyone I had seen, and I was shocked as it suddenly had a lethal appearance.

I suddenly spotted the man who owned the house on the stairs in the darkness, watching it in horror, unable to decide what to do, and I realized he could actually do something stupid and confront it, and I did not know what to do and sat stunned.

I studied its strange Santa features and tried to see if it had detected the man, and what it might do.

I watched the man realize the danger of it and become aware of its deadliness and I saw the Santa react to something, and march up to the man’s Christmas tree and remove something from its sack and place what looked like a Christmas present down.

I sensed the man would do something stupid, and he did, and he walked right up to it, and nervously stood in front of it, and gasped at what he saw there, and stood staggered with his mouth wide open, and in the darkness of the corridor what looked like two of Santa’s reindeers rushed out and attacked the man, like lions, and devoured the man and in seconds, and all that remained of him were his bones on the carpet, and the creatures rushed away, back into the darkness of the corridor and vanished, and the Santa followed, not reacting to anything, as if it was somewhere else!

 

Chapter 6

 

Paranormal Investigators

 

Outside the London hotel room, the paranormal investigators were staying in, I watched the high street below stretch out in bright sunlight into the distance, like it was in the Victorian era, and I rested against the window frame dreamily watching soldiers below looking like they were still celebrating the end of the war, and away in the distance I saw a mysterious mist shift over buildings, and saw the sun was going down.

The bedroom seemed alright. Their psychic research equipment was all over it, everywhere, and they speedily had porters bring the rest up, while they unpacked it, and examined it for breakages and other damage.

Their equipment was new and I had never seen anything like it, and new technology, and I gasped again at what their profession was, and what they could uncover if it was all authentic!

It was the occurrence at Craigmillar Road, with the metal detector, which persuaded me to have them investigate the case further, and the police had not found anything, and in all their investigations of the Santa and the killings he had committed, and nobody had been able to explain what had happened, and they were searching for a serial killer dressed as a department store Santa, which attacked people in their homes at night.

What surprised me was the Santa had not appeared after the killing and the police investigation.

It appeared all over the news, and I had to persuade Marple to keep to me on the case, but I was sure that he would change that once he had more evidence of what was happening, as the case was full of missing information, and lack of evidence, and nobody had seen the Santa enter the buildings, or had seen him outside, and there was virtually nothing on him, other than my film footage of the Santa, which had been far too dark to see properly, and had left them even more confused, and they could not work out what had happened and what had devoured the man so quickly and left only his bones.

The paranormal investigators only seemed confused about why it was a Santa, and believed it was of paranormal origins, by my description of the creatures appearance, which even Marple was left stumped, especially after he had examined the bones, as nothing on the Earth could have devoured him so fast and completely, leaving nothing but bones.

I had no idea what it was or what we were getting ourselves involved in, and what it was leading to, and in the end I started to leave the case to the paranormal scientists and the police to solve.

I had continuously read through the documents on the case, and what the police had found, and found little, and I could barely make anything out.

The documents were virtual missing everything that said anything about anything!

It suggested to the paranormal scientists that it could be something new, and they agreed that it could be, or some lost ancient thing, and I was left confused by why the paranormal investigators were so interested in it in the end, as they said little, and I still consistently tried to fully grasp what they normally did.

Again I wondered if we were actually there to search for it or something else and again I never believed it was what they claimed, and supernatural.

Everything I had encountered seemed to have been proven to have something not supernatural behind it, and I kept on going on the side of Marple, and his views, as there was nothing to back up the claim, accept something unknown, which could even have been deliberately put there to do something, and trick people and the police.

In the end I became far more interested in the case, and wanted the answer to what had happened.

The sky darkened outside and I wondered what the hell the conclusion to it would be this time.

I shivered, and I looked at the night sky approaching and snowflakes started floating down, and I watched Higgins react to it and ignore it.

I was sure if it remained the way it was it might ruin the case and investigation, as whatever it was might not turn up, and my thirst for knowledge grew and I knew I had to find something.

 

Chapter 7

 

The Scientists Convention

 

Media from all over the globe arrived at the annual conference of the exploration association in London, as we watched on, and I realized immediately the paranormal scientists, who had taken me there, had given them information of an occurrence, which left me confused, as all we had was the killer Santa investigation, which added up to little, and I wondered what they had told them.

Even though the occurrences that had already taken place had become well known and documented, and was on all the newspapers, and many other media sources, with a major police investigation.

Most of the scientists and explorers of the exploration association were packed together in the large hall.

The scientists knew me from our passed investigations of the Loch Ness monster and of the discovery under Craigmillar Road, which were surely the largest uncovered, in decades at least, and I wondered what they thought of the Santa investigation, and I found they were mainly giving updates on it and us and what we had found out.

I recalled everything that had happened and our explorations of the cavity we found, where the object was under the area of land beside the loch, and our use of divers to investigate the loch about the cavity and the entrance, and their filming of its interior, which was startling, and had many signs of the monster having been living there, and the remains of food it had eaten, including fish, sharks, and skeletons of cattle.

I soon realized they were not interested in the Loch Ness discover and were interested in what many of them had witnessed us uncovering in the cavity under Craigmillar Road, and were still waiting for the conclusion to the investigations by their scientists.

It was surprising that the exploration association was primarily unknown and the media still gave little about the group, and its accomplishments. Even though many of their scientists and explorers had their explorations and adventures in the media over decades, including many famous and foremost scientists from about the globe!

I recalled how their scientists had helped us out in our investigations, and that they had many scientists, leading scientists, and the latest and foremost in technology, and vast amounts of information, including unknown findings, and documentation, from about the globe.

 

Chapter 8

 

The Manifestation

 

I could not grasp what would happen, as everything needed to solve the case was missing, and Marple forced me into going further, and ordered me to solve it as quickly as possible.

I realized he had read my report on what had happened and had entirely missed what had occurred and what I meant, and I could not explain any further anything of what had happened and he now never seemed to think anything strange had happened, and I realized again that even though he had a great interest in investigating the paranormal he never believed it, and consistently explained it away, with logical solutions!

Though we identified another Santa appearance at a nearby street, which was in an identical street to the other street, in a line of the houses behind the houses, and it was in the same house in the street it would have visited in the other street, and I identified the house next to it as the next house it would visit.

The woman owner let the paranormal investigators set up their paranormal equipment there, with scientists and equipment from scientists from the exploration association.

The elderly woman was delighted to see so many scientists and important people, and cameras documenting it, in her house.

Paranormal scientists and technicians rushed back and forward setting up their new equipment all over the woman’s living room, and outer hall where it had emerged in the other houses, while Oswald and Higgins checked everything.

I watched on, and watched the woman leave to go to bed smiling, joyously listening to the scientists at work.

They gave me the impression that they might be going to do something tremendous or come to a conclusion, and that they might well have found the right location to do it.

I later started to realize the implications, and recalled what had happened to me the last time, and how deadly it was, and I realized that they might find something of immense deadly supernatural origins, of great danger to everyone there!

Yet I realized the scientists did realize it and intended to carry out their research safely, and they started hiding all their equipment away, so it would not be seen!

I regularly examined the equipment they now had and was surprised at how advanced it had become, and at its capabilities, and I wondered how they could make a profit to pay for it, and realized it had to be funded.

Their visit there was clearly giving them far more of an insight and knowledge of things than I realized, and they had gained a great deal of information from their earlier questioning of witnesses of the occurrences in the other houses.

I was becoming positive that they had found far more than they indicated, and were keeping secrets.

I wanted to grasp what they all knew that I should know, and I regularly strolled about examining the equipment for clues, and recalled something that I had forgotten, which I had read, about some of the work that the paranormal scientists had done years ago, after they had given facts on their paranormal investigations.

I recalled their stuff had been surprising, and even alarming, which had drawn my attention at the time, and I recalled that I had dismissed it later as them using it to advertise their work!

At times I thought they had been deliberately putting the psychic research there to cover their real work and discoveries! Whatever that was!

The scientists informed me that they were checking for virtually all known forms of disturbance, energy and matter disturbances, in and around the emergence region and they were sure that they could find something!

There was something strange, and I felt as though there was something going to happen, but I could not grasp what, and I was sure I might not have encountered it before, even though I had seen the Santa and what it did, and I listened to all the scientists at work and their low level conversations.

Suddenly, in the darkness, in their hidden away positions in an outer room, at the side of the living room, they detected a reaction and that something was making an appearance, and they all went silent, and I checked my watch and realized it was around about the same time as the last visitations, and I realized how late it was, and how sleepy I was, and watched the scientists at work, silently checking stuff on their equipment about the zone, and building, and one whispered something in Higgins’s ear, making him look slightly surprised.

Higgins’s face turned dramatic, making me wonder what the hell was going to happen, and if I had put my foot in it again, and I stood staggered waiting for something to happen, and I even regretted bringing them there, and I saw he was desperate to do something, and he rushed over to two scientists.

I decided to remain with Oswald near the door, as I had to know what was there – and if something was going to happen – and we could not get anything from the equipment.

I was surprised to see someone look out the curtains and see drifting currents of snowflakes blow about outside, and it starting to deepen, with gusts blowing about the building, and I wondered if it affected the Santa appearance or if it had affected it, and realized it surely was the timing of the appearance, and that the weather occasionally reacted at specific times, and positions of the sun, and temperature.

It had been a long day, and the next day could very well be far longer, and I watched Higgins rush about doing something and I wondered what I was missing, and if we should slow down and observe it at a greater distance first, as the occurrence would surely take place at another house, and it was surely not our last chance to get hold of something.

The bright snowing sky seemed to darken and the temperature dropped, and I pointed it out to Oswald, as heavy snow came down all about the area.

I checked a thermometer and realized that there had been accounts of drops in temperature before and during manifestations and I wondered if it had been so powerful that it had affected the weather about us.

While the others were at work I placed a seat at the door of the room and left the door slightly opened, just enough to see into the living room, and entire area where I knew it would arrive, and I wondered why it was late, and if something else could appear, of great danger to us, and I sat looking out, startled.

I slowly started to sense something was there, and it sent a chill through me as I thought of what it could do, and my eyes for no reason fell upon something in the living room and I realized it was there all along and I suddenly jumped back startled, and my heart leapt, and I saw its dark red figure shifting about in the room, and I watched a scientist activate a special camera, and equipment, which I had seen him set up earlier!

Even though it was dark it looked identical to Santa, and I watched its strange figure move making Santa sounds, and I realized it was similar to a department store Santa, and I thought I saw it had bright red eyes, and I tried to grasp what it was and was doing there!

There was something strange that I just could not grasp, and it moved and did things far differently than anyone or anything I had seen, and I was shocked at its now lethal appearance. It was like there was something there that should not be there!

Suddenly I spotted the woman who owned the house on the stairs in the darkness, glancing into the darkness of the living room, watching it in horror, unable to decide what to do, and I realized she might actually do something foolish, and confront it, and I did not know what to do and sat stunned, and thought of the death of the man the last time.

I studied its strange Santa features, and saw nothing, and tried to see if it had detected her, and what it might do.

I had to do something so I did and rushed out the door silently, and closed the door shut behind me, seeing nobody in the room had seen me leave, and entered a dark hidden area at the side of the living room, out of its view, and showed myself to her, and used gestures, and pointed, to get to her to go back up the stairs.

I watched her realize its deadliest and start to move back up the stairs, and saw the Santa react to something, and it march up to the her Christmas tree and remove something from its sack and place something there, which in the other houses we had discovered identical objects to things that were at Christmas trees, with cards with people’s names on them from the other houses, which proved it had not detected what it was copying or had bothered altering it.

For a second I visualized being out in a starless expanse of space, and wondered what it was, and if I had actually seen it, and if I was falling asleep, and its hideous Santa shape shifted, ready to do something, and a dull red radiance gleamed about it, illuminating its hideous devilish face, which I was positive was the devil itself, using it to cover its identity.

I glared at its unmoving silhouette in shock, studying it, wondering what was there, and if all the ghost stories I had heard through my life were false, and they were something else entirely.

The deep blackness about me was so vivid and things so real and unreal, and alive, I felt deep horror, and thought of what I had so far encountered and my original thoughts of it.

For an instant the thing in front of me altered in form, and I saw a demon energy formation, and stood staggered, wondering what it was, and what it intended to do, and how I should handle it!

What strange place had it come from? Did reality actually exist there? Was it actually something entirely different from anything we had encountered?

The being/entity seemed to do nothing, other than transforming itself, and I saw strange ghostly images of what could have been life forms flash through my mind.

When I examined its dark almost invisible Santa costume I saw it was not actually solid but translucent, and had only a faint shadow from it over the carpet, while its interior seemed composed of swirling currents of energy mist, and its shape was not touching the floor, and was floating over it, and I realized it was as if it was not there but somewhere else, and reacting to the surroundings somewhere else.

I was sure that I could solve the case by examining it and finding something! I was sure it might be affected by things, and I could find a way of getting rid of it, and stopping it haunting the region, and I became even more fascinated, and I moved up close to it, behind it, and examined its ghostly demon features.

I tried to grasp everything about it, which I could recognize, and wondered what all the scientists of the world would think of the thing, and would do to see and examine it.

What would the paranormal scientists consider it? I could not get anything, and up close it mainly looked like a mass of strange red energy being generated by something, from somewhere, and to my amazement it exploded into a frenzy of activity, and I realized it had detected me, and at that point I fell over unconscious.

 

Chapter 9

 

The Breakthrough

 

I could not grasp what happened, as my head was spinning, and everything I needed to solve the case was missing, and the scientists were all rushing around doing things I could not grasp, but I recognized by their reactions that they were happy with many of the results, but disappointed with some.

After the disappearance of the Santa and occurrences Oswald had gone and searched for me and had found me sprawled across the floor under the Christmas tree, and I grasped at how lucky I had been to survive what had happened, and it was incredible that they barely even realized what had happened and what I had seen.

The woman gave me cups of coffee and apologized for what had happened, and she was glad to hear from one of the scientists that it would not appear there again, and she was surprised that it had left her a Christmas gift, which confused me, as I recalled what I had seen, and the killings that had occurred.

I realized I had to report what had happened and had entirely missed what had occurred afterwards, and I realized I could say little that Marple would believe, and he would be left disappointed, and I realized that I better get facts from the scientists to give him, and so he would know what I meant, and I realized again that even though he had no beliefs in the existence of ghosts and the supernatural he had a great interest in investigating the paranormal, and liked consistently explaining it away with logical solutions!

After I finished getting what I could I was glad to finally leave the place and return to the headquarters of Reality Investigations, where Marple rushed in and got me a drink and placed it in front of me and stood at the fireplace.

It was incredible! Marple looked more baffled than I had seen him, in a long time, and I then realized we could have problems!

The serial killer Santa was still on the rampage, and all over the media, and the police wanted the culprit, and they still never had any clues to who he was, or anything about him, and they wanted Marple to solve the case, and not only was the sum of money for solving it incredible he would get the fame and prestige he wanted, in London, and at his new headquarters, and he could become a major investigator, and solve the unsolvable case, and its insolvability was a major factor that kept teasing him, and he seemed partly obsessed with it now, and all his investigators and connections were virtually on the case, checking for anything, and any remote clues.

It amazed him what had happened, when I finally told him some things, and that we had predicted its appearance and had not had the police there to capture him, and I was left staggered, and wondered what would have happened, and was at a loss of what to say, as he clearly never believed it was anything other than the serial killer, and I realized it could be a future massacre.

Eventually Marple grew tired of the lack of evidence, and eventually asked me, “What did their research uncover?”

“Not much!” I moaned.

“Even with all the scientists and all their equipment?”

“They are still accumulating their findings …”

The phone rang out and I answered it as I was the closest to it and was surprised it was the scientists still at work back at the house, who had finished their work there, and had packed away their equipment and were getting ready to leave, and the scientist on the phone put Oswald on the phone.

It staggered me what he then said, and I was surprised that they had collected large amounts of strange readings, which they were at the moment unable to grasp, and had detected a lot of energy and things that they had never heard of, and were also left baffled as paranormal scientists, and they had traced the Santa’s appearance, and emergence out of nowhere, but had found little on how it had appeared there, and its disappearance was just as strange, and was as though it had vanished off the face of the world, and they had detected strange things on its encounter with me, and it seemed to have done something, and had done some form of analyze of me, and its behavior had altered, and it had stopped what it had been doing and had left there, just after I had collapsed, and some of the scientists thought it had detected presence of their equipment at the same time.

I had been unable to explain what he had said to Marple, and asked him to explain everything to Marple instead, as his interest in what was occurring was increasing, and I handed the phone over to him, looking confused about it.

After ten minutes of listening to him and Oswald talking, and other scientists there being put on the line, he stood looking confused and put the phone down.

After sitting at the fireplace silently for a long time I finally asked what he had told him, and to see if I had missed anything.

“There seems to be far more to this case than meets the eye!” he finally moaned, and also seemed to like it, and the challenge of dealing with something new, and deadly, with such a challenge.

“What do you make of it?” I replied, curiously.

“They still seem to believe it’s of a supernatural nature!” he replied calmly, and sat back into his seat. “Well, they backed up their findings with a great deal of readings, findings, and have gone to a great deal of trouble exploring what they believe is there! And the most fascinating findings are their photographs and film footage taken of it, which they are sending someone over here with, which if I am not mistaken will give us a great deal of information on the Santa killer, and what we might be able to give to the police and media!”

I was surprised, and I sensed he was holding something back from me and asked if they had found anything else, and I recalled I had heard them give him something at the end of the conversation, which they had just discovered.

“They seem to have discovered how he entered and left the building! They detected that he left there by going under the building! By some new method, which they have not yet been able to discover …”

I was left confused, staggered, and wished I had remained on the phone, and wondered what he meant! Or they meant! And I could not grasp how it emerged and left going below the ground, and what he thought it was, as I had seen its appearance, and the reindeer creatures emergence the last time, and was positive that it had not just went under the floor, and wondered what the scientists had discovered, and in the end decided to wait and question Oswald.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Ancient Visitation

 

McMurdo’s pale complexion and shaken appearance showed he had encountered something beyond his comprehension, of an immensely deadly diabolical nature, and he shook in terror, barely able to speak, and looked gravely ill.

I strained my eyes to see him in the dimness of the underground train tunnel, near London Bridge, beside the underground Roman cavity they had just uncovered in the side of the tunnel, which he had just climbed out!

“What did you see down there?” I gasped, in horror, at what he had suggested existed.

“I saw its face!” he muttered. “It’s hideous! Its existence goes back far further than humans, and far beyond! It’s trapped down there somewhere!”

I stood frigid and staggered at the danger, and started to comprehend what we were up against, and had been missing!

I wondered what could be powerful enough to trap it, and if there was even anything in existence to free it!

“Its origins go beyond humans, and the Romans who settled here, and has been dormant, waiting to be revived, and uncovered, and has remained undetected by our technology!”

He continued, biting his lower lip hard, “Our detection methods are far inferior and are mainly created and function to discover normal objects, and even normal unidentified objects, and our investigations of it are futile!”

I sat frigid, realizing the mistake we had made and what the outcome of what was occurring could be, and by trying to handle something of its nature, which could categorically kill us all!

“Some scientists found traces of it though, which were kept confidential – while they tried to locate and investigate it!”

“It must be incredible!” I answered firmly. “It must have been tremendous! What made it come to this place, in the first place?”

“Nobody knows! Perhaps there’s something here, which it came to investigate! If it was far less dormant it might have been located by some means! It is powerful!”

I was amazed that he thought it could have some form of powerful presence, and I believed it was supposed to be entirely supernatural, and was sure I was destined to discover its existence, and full potential, and believed it could be buried away below us, below the cavity, unearthed by them, working there, and I detected he had been up to something when he discovered its existence.

Deep down I thought McMurdo had barely survived, and seemed to believe he could be killed in some hideous way!

It was lucky Marple had not been able to get hold of the archaeologists to investigate his accounts of the lost treasure, and Roman map he had found, as they were working on another project, but I knew they soon would, and that we could not do anything about it, and I thanked him for warning me.

In the ground below my feet I was surprised to see an object, which I saw was a Roman coin, and I grabbed it and cleaned dirt away from it, in the dim light, and I entered further into the massive cavity in the side of the tunnel wall, and looked down into the large hole there, going deep below, and into the hideous cavity, and wondered why in the hell it was there, and why the railway company had not filled it in, but I knew they would once they had completed the rest of the railway line, and it could be buried away for future explorers to uncover.

I recalled the other incident we had investigated, at Battlefield Road, and after all the observations, research, and by leading scientists, scientists admitted that the thing found in the woman’s house we investigated had unknown origins, mainly by its appearance and tremendous unrecognized powers! Although they still had a lot of work and investigations to carry out, and had found little, and they were trying to keep it confidential!

“We have to investigate it!” McMurdo warned. “The future of the world could be at stake? If the wrong people get hold of it …”

“We should investigate it!” I agreed, recalling a newspaper article. “There may soon be many more constructions being built around here! They’re building far more constructions now … We have to get anything we can on it – and as much information on it and its origins …”

“There’s little! That’s been found! It’s mainly in ancient lost legends, which show its hideous features – and that of the devil!”

I was left confused at what information he had discovered, and stated, “If it has a physical presence we could discover something new about it – and it would be worthwhile to investigate!”

McMurdo gasped, in horror, still badly shaken from his confrontation with it, and replied, “I never thought I would live to see it and survive!”

 

Chapter 11

 

The Lost Cavity

 

After a week the descriptions McMurdo gave were unbelievable and I could not believe I was exploring the cavity, on my own, with the scientists and archeologists above, with me on the end of a rope, daggling in hideous deep blackness.

It was too unacceptable for me to fully believe McMurdo’s accounts, and I left it at that, and believed I could survive, if I watched what I did, and believed there were great dangers lurking in the cavity below, and I recalled being surprised by him showing me an ancient almost incomprehensive account that specified that the location was the resting place of something hideously wicked, buried away there.

I conjured up vague visions of a spooky medieval haunted torture chamber and ancient dungeon below.

A distant rumble shook the surrounding area, from a distant train, releasing small debris and dust from overhead, and vibrated through the rope.

Marple arrived above and appeared over the edge of the hole, with his face examining what he could see of me, over the abyss below, and I knew he would be considering a different method of getting the archeologists, scientists, and equipment down.

In seconds the rope wildly jerked and I went downwards, and the faces above vanished into the swirling dark, as I spun uncontrollably around, and a surge of blackness engulfed me, like falling into a black hole.

When it slowed I was left in nothingness, and the hole above became a spot of light, which gave little light down to me, and I realized how deep it was, with confusion, and I gasped at what McMurdo had been through, and that he had arrived there on his own, with little knowledge of anything.

A white radiance blasted down from Marple’s torch and it shifted to specific calculated positions, illuminating a dreamy sight above me, showing the hidden cavity walls, and I gasped at its immensity and the danger of it collapsing down, and wondered how dangerous it was, and realized that at least the railway line was not over it, and it was over solid ground.

As my eyes adjusted to the dim light above I watched it probing its way about, scattering beams through clouds of silky dust; and it occasionally blew near me, and I continued on down, inhaling in enough air.

At the bottom of the shaft I was again left in darkness, and released the rope from me and dropped down onto the ground, and tried seeing about me in the dim light, and sensed something buried deep in its depths.

There seemed to be rubble everywhere, and boulders, some firmly fitted together in the ground, and I stood saying nothing, and watched Marple above checking what he had.

What the hell was the cavity? It never looked like an artificial structure, and I wondered how it was formed, and examined rocks at my feet, and I knew it had to have been something as McMurdo would not have been wrong, and I shivered seeing its deep dark regions, where anything could exist.

I wondered if McMurdo had fully reported it to the train company, as if the whole surrounding area collapsed down, and other areas like it there, they should think of filling them in.

By Marple’s frantic reactions, as he attached the rope and got ready to come down, I sensed that he might have found something, and I knew we might find something, and realized that we must be under streets I knew above the railway tunnel and I tried to work out the exact location.

It was strange as there had to be something deadly there and I could not grasp what and where, and tried going over what McMurdo had said, and I realized he had hardly said anything, and I wondered how I would get back up to the top, and I watched Marple come down and knew he had something, and was not saying anything at the moment, but I could not quite grasp what.

I wondered why someone would want to go to such lengths to build the cavity, and realized it had to be a natural cavity, and I started exploring an area nearby.

Water dripped down from somewhere overhead and I cleaned it from my face, and whished I had taken down the torch they had, but it would have left them all in darkness, but in my pocket I had matches if I needed them, and lit one to see if I could see anything, but it was too faint, and I saw a cloud of dust spraying down, and I covered my eyes.

While I walked away I listened to vague hollow surges come down from above, and I caught glimpses of people watching me in the hole above, while Marple came down below them.

At the front of me I saw the cavity wall and mechanically tried to place my hand against an area of it, trying to feel what I could not see.

I expected to find stone but all I found were thicker webs, covering something, where an area of stone had crumbled down and collapsed over the ground.

As I shifted forward a flicker of dim light overhead grabbed my attention and I felt thick cobwebs crawling over my face and hands, and I heard murmurs of archaeologists, excited about coming down, and I wondered what we were doing there.

I felt about, still unable to grasp anything, desperate to get answers, and find something, before the others got down, and I felt jagged rocks under my shoes, and further along felt rocks pile up across my front; and I blindly touched shapes, embedded in others, and felt something strange directly ahead, and jerked my hand away, realizing it was some form of deadly life form.

 

Chapter 12

 

The Hidden Chamber

 

The visitations by the Santa formation stopped after the encounter and I returned to the cavity to check how the archeologists were getting on, and what they had discovered.

While climbing down their rope ladder to the bottom I was surprised at the difference there, and the amount of archaeologists and scientists now below, and the place with so many powerful lights, and I examined the size of the cables going down below, and watched them all over the cavity animatedly working, not just doing normal work, but digging out ancient things, and examining small discoveries.

They had dug away massive chunks of the ground, deep into the ground, with powerful drills and other equipment, and I was fascinated by the dead creature and its remains I found there, which nobody had yet recognized, and I knew it was too ancient and decomposed, with little to identify it, but I knew it was something different, of unknown origins.

I knew they had to be onto something big, and tried to see what, and I then examined them for people I knew, and to see what they were doing.

Near the bottom I realized how big the cavity actually was, with some surprise, and wondered why it was not in danger of collapsing, and examined it for anything they might have used to reinforce it to prevent it occurring.

There were many scientists, of especially from the exploration association, and they were everywhere examining and setting up equipment, with archeologists excitedly excavating large and small regions, and I climbed onto the ground and examined equipment nearby for clues to what was generally happening, and I recalled reading about some of their work in a science magazine, and I watched Oswald and Higgins at work, and sensed they had recently had a discovery or major discovery.

Their determination was roaring and unbelievable and they had proven there were occurrences centered there, and they had brought in all the scientists, paranormal scientists, and members of the exploration association, and I realized it was their biggest discovery, and that it was perhaps their greatest chance to prove the existence of theories to the world, and science world.

It was incredible as when they realized they never had all the evidence they needed they withdrew telling me anything, which was a major factor of why they never told much.

What was there confused me, and when I thought of McMurdo I was left astounded, and it sent a deep chill through me, as I thought of what it could do.

I recalled our investigating the killer Santa in the woman’s living room, when they were monitoring it with their equipment, and I recalled seeing it in the living room, and realized it was there, and jumped back startled, and my heart leapt, and saw its dark red figure shifting into the room, which shifted out of nothing and the darkness of the corridor, and I watched a scientist activate cameras and equipment, he had been adjusting.

I suddenly recalled all the data they had collected, and wondered if they had found anything from it since, and asked Oswald about it and he nodded that they had.

“Did you get a proper photo of it?” I quickly asked, wondering why they had not sent a photo, for us to use to identify it, and give the police to identify it.

“Okay!” he replied, and searched through his case and looked through a group of photos, and eventually handed me one, to my surprise, and I stood with my mouth open.

The photo was unbelievable as in my recollections of it I only saw energy formations, and I wondered if I had imagined it now.

“When was this one taken?” I asked, curiously.

“Just before it left!”

“Have you any earlier ones?”

“Not any longer! I eventually threw them away! They showed little, and no face or anything could be seen! Including on all the stuff we got!”

I studied the photo again, and tried to realize what it looked like again, and held it away from me, and again realized it looked like an ancient drawing I had once seen of the devil, and gasped when I recalled what McMurdo had said.

What confused me was if it was evil, or doing something else, and why it had killed people it had visited, including the boy, and had left his bones.

Even though it was dark it looked like Santa when I had seen it, and I had watched its strange figure move and make sounds like Santa, and I realized again how similar it was to a department store Santa, and I tried to grasp what it was doing there!

There was something strange I just could not grasp, from everything it did, and how it had moved and did things far differently than anyone or anything I had seen, and I was shocked at how lethal its appearance was. It was like there was something there that should not be there!

I stared at where the scientists were at work, as a distant train rumbled away in the distance, and shook the roof slightly, and dust blew about from it.

“Did you get anything else about it?” I asked, curiously.

“Yes! As we told Marple! We discovered it was transmitted there!”

“What?” I gasped, wondering what he meant.

“We discovered something else later!” he continued, walking away. “It was transmitted there from somewhere underground!”

I was left confused, wondering what he had meant, and if they had proven what they had found.

 

Chapter 13

 

The Press Conference

 

When I arrived back there a few days later I was surprised to see reporters from a major newspaper in the train tunnel, and entering the cavity, and I saw the entrance into the cavity had been increased in size, and had been fitted with a cable elevator.

From above I saw people from the media, from all over the globe, and they were holding a press conference, and members of the exploration association and other scientists were giving them details of an important discovery, and I gasped and wondered what had happened to the deadly occurrences there, and looked about to see any signs of it, and was surprised to see Oswald looking worried about something, and knew it had to be something new!

For some reason I hesitated about going down, and wanted to see what happened from there, where I could see everything.

I realized the scientists had given them information of an occurrence, which left me moderately confused, as all we had was their investigation, and the remains of human sacrifices discovered there, and skeletons embedded in the ground all over it, and small amount of discoveries the archaeologists and scientists had made.

Even though I was sure they had been hiding stuff, and from one another, which I was sure was only temporary, until they fully uncovered all of what they discovered, which added up to little the last time I had been there.

I sat back and listened below, while I examined the elevator they had cleverly constructed, and was amazed to hear someone shouting, and I immediately looked below and saw someone grab a microphone off one of them and start shouting into it.

I examined him and realized it was McMurdo, and he was slightly disguised, and had a large jacket with a hood covering him, and removed it and showed them his identity, and they all looked at him strangely, wondering who he was, and I wondered what he believed he was doing or if he was genuinely hiding from someone, and I wondered why.

Then I realized his face still had a pale complexion and he was still badly shaken by his encounter, showing he had encountered something beyond his comprehension of an immensely deadly diabolical nature, and he shook and shuddered in terror, and was barely able to speak at times, and looking seriously ill, and the audience surrounding him was silenced by him, and stood staggered, waiting for something to happen.

It was incredible! It was building up to something, and I never had a clue what!

Suddenly I realized the lighting had dimmed, and I realized it had to be the power supply, and the dimness.

Was he now crazy? Was he doing something else now?

“Down there is something so deadly it could destroy mankind!” he shouted, and shuddered. “It’s been there from the dawn of time, waiting to be revived …”

“What did you see down there?” a reporter gasped, in horror, at what he was suggesting existed, and the deadliness of the place.

“I saw its face!” he muttered. “It’s hideous! Its existence goes back far further than the human race, and far beyond it! It’s trapped down there …!”

They stood frigid and staggered at the danger, and started to comprehend what they might have been missing, and some of them had been suggesting!

A woman screamed and shouted something, silencing everyone completely, and pointed at something, in an area of darkness.

I wondered what the hell it was, and stood staring there, and was staggered had how powerful it could be, and if they had freed it from its imprisonment!

McMurdo screamed out, “The Romans who settled here worshipped it as a god down here! It was dormant, waiting to be revived, and has remained undetected by our modern sources …”

I knelt down, realizing the mistake we could have been making, and what the outcome of what was occurring could be, and by trying to handle something of its nature, which could categorically destroy everything!

What if such things as gods and demon gods had existed, and were dormant, and could be revived!

Suddenly the ground shook violently, and boulders fell from the cavity wall, and everyone started trying to escape, and I sat watching on amazed, and was amazed it had a form of powerful presence, and I believed something was buried away below, and I detected that McMurdo had found something, which they had not, and I thought they were getting close to discovering it!

 

Chapter 14

 

The Roman Remains

 

When I arrived back there with Marple a few days later I was surprised all the archeologists were at work down in the cavity, working away as though nothing had happened, and I recalled what had happened and the whole of the media had come out with, and the story had changed to it being an earthquake.

It amused me to see a few reporters with startled appearances appear behind us, in the train tunnel, and check down in the cavity, confirming what had happened no longer existed, and leave, and we entered the elevator and went down into the cavity.

Below I saw archeologists and scientists energetically working away, and that the media had gone, and I wondered if they would dare hold a press conference there again.

Members of the exploration association and other scientists were discussing something important, directly below, and I followed Marple’s staring eyes and realized what they were up to, and I gasped and thought of the deadly occurrences there and looked about to see any signs of it and was surprised to see Oswald at the site, instructing archeologists digging out objects, and I knew it had to be something new and big!

For some reason I hesitated about it when I got out the elevator, and sensed danger, and saw damaged done by the earthquake, but I really wanted to see what would happen, and what was there, and a conclusion to everything.

McMurdo’s words went through my mind as I approached Oswald, and left Marple, who went to investigate something else.

Could the future of this world be at stake from something, and was there such things that could destroy mankind?

I realized the train company would now extend how long they could work there, when they finished the train line, as the publicity it was getting was incredible, and the archeologist dig was important.

It was fascinating as the archeologists were digging up Roman graves, and some were as perfectly preserved as they could be, and I saw all the fascinated onlookers about them, and not just because what was occurring there but because they were far better than virtually anything I had seen being discovered in London.

It was incredible when I arrived at where Oswald was I sensed I had timed it perfectly for something, and I also realized that all their communications to the outer world had vanished, as the archeologists dug deep into the central point of the cavity, and scientists moved expensive and fragile equipment into the area.

What was incredible was even with all the technology and experience of the scientists, and all their discussions, nobody knew what they had found, and the theories gave too little or were too fantastic, and too far from the truth to believe and be true, but the main discover was there was something else below, beneath the graves, and the archeologists were close to finding it, and I for one thought someone had for some reason never wanted it to be found, and it was hidden away under the graves.

It was incredible someone had put the graves over something, and I wondered why people of that era would do it, and I started seeing carved drawings of a Roman god in most of the graves.

 

Chapter 15

 

The Monster

 

We all stood staring in disbelief as an archeologist dug away the muck from what we believed was a Roman statue, and another began washing away the muck from its massive head, embedded in the ground below a grave, and the amazing lifelike features of something strange became visible.

It was the head of some strange life form, which features seemed in perfectly preserved condition, and I actually checked if it moved, as it was so lifelike, and the more muck they removed the more confused the scientists and archeologists became, and nobody had seen the likes of it before.

In the hollow silence, from the now silenced surrounding cavity, they dug it out, with archeologists trying not to damage it, and I wondered if they could, as my close examinations of its surface showed it had a far harder surface than normal, and I listened to two scientists behind me breathing gently and giving small details about it, occasionally glaring at the giant creature’s head shocked, especially after what occurred there days before.

It never seemed to have any form of mouth or eyes, and its strange blood red color shined as though it were wet.

“Is this prehistoric?” an archeologist finally asked a scientist, confused, as he finished cleaning a region, and the scientists stood staggered, and shrugged his shoulders.

“It cannot be prehistoric …?” he continued, looking about, waiting for someone to reply.

I watched everyone, and they refused to reply, and insisted in staying silent, and perhaps waiting for more evidence.

It was strange as we were expecting something like a statue, which they would have given information about, as they had with the above Roman graves, and we were standing looking down into a pit at what we would not even expect the strangest sea creature to look like, and could not identify anything, as it became more and more uncovered, and I watched the archaeologists, and them studying it, and take photographs of it at various angles, and close ups, and one removed his glove and touched it, and jumped back grasping his hand in pain.

 

Chapter 16

 

The Underground Scan

 

As I watched the scientists setting up their scanning equipment, I asked Oswald, “Is this the new surveying equipment?”

“Correct!” he moaned, at being disturbed. “We persuaded them to remove it from the airplane and bring it here! It’s the most powerful version we have available …”

“You may be able to answer many unanswered questions if it works!” I replied, assumingly.

“We can check what’s under here! Perhaps work out what caused the earthquake! It can scan more accurately, deeper and faster, and more powerfully than anything we have, and has been vastly improved since its use at Loch Ness! The detection components are still confidential, and used by the military …”

“Top secret!” I replied, wondering how confidential it was.

“It will give us the most detailed scan of beneath the ground ever seen, and to a far greater depth, making it possible to observe small and large objects just below us – of the dimensions we are interested in, and going further! As we do not know what is directly below!”

I realized again what an airplane with it could discover, and wondered if they actually had many underground military bases and weapons, and if they could detect what was in the places, and even in normal bases, and if they could search below mountains and deep under the sea, and I realized the other scientists avoided saying anything, and the majority of people with them never even knew what it was or was happening, and that some of the scientists there had been military scientists.

The equipment system was tested and functioning and ready to monitor everything below the cavity, after all the time getting the stuff down from above and all their rigorous setting up of it, and its electric cables, and all their preparations.

I considered if they were exaggerating its powers, as the times I had seen it working it had given short distant scans, and I wondered if it was actually to hide its true incredible powers as much as possible, and it being highly confidential equipment!

I realized the dangers of it being activated and what was there detecting it, and what had occurred there, and wondered if it could kill us!

The whole exploration was daunting and I wondered what we would actually gain from it at the end of the day, and most of the people there surely would not profit, and would perhaps only get the chance to witness some historic occurrence, and I wondered what we would be marked in history for.

I regularly checked the archeologists and scientists about the cavity looking for any new discoveries, and new life forms.

What surprised me was the life forms we found, and thing that had stunned one of the archeologists when he touched it with his bare hands.

All the life forms were still partially uncovered, and still remained totally unidentified, and looked like mutants of some unknown life forms, which lived in some strange environment, which nobody could identify, and I started to wonder if they were original forms of life from the original Earth or something similar.

We still had little information on them, and nobody had come up with anything, or explanation of where they had come from, and why they were below the Roman graves.

What surprised me was their firm belief that there was something there! The others barely believed it though! They had had not found anything though!

Were they keeping something secret? Had they detected something? Had they known of something before the occurrence there, and were investigating it for the first time? They had hardly come up with anything, and I believed from what I had seen that they could not remove some of the life forms for some reason, and they seemed attached to something, covering an immense area below, and all their attempts were useless, and the scan was to show what was below.

I started to wonder what was happening, and if I would survive!

Oswald and Higgins sat along from the other scientists at a large table, in center of the cavity, sitting opposite each other, with an accurate map of the surrounding region above stretched out across it sideways, and one of the cavity, and they discussed searching the cavity, and it was strange as there never looked as though there was anything there, especially under such a public and populated place, and going by recent information they got from questioning locals above, for paranormal occurrences.

I felt I was missing something and believed they did too, but could not grasp it!

Marple surprised me and refused to give any information on what he thought the life forms were, and fascinated in them, like the other scientists, especially in their perfectly preserved state, which seemed due to the energy running through them, and its source still had not been found, and they were starting to find they could dig through certain areas of the ground below them near them, and the life forms themselves seemed to be in the same state, and most believed it had preserved them, whatever it was.

When something did occur it was when they started activating the scanning equipment in stages, and the reactions they gave were unbelievable, and I realized how late in the evening it had become, and realized it was dark outside, and it would be soon night!

Their screens started showing strange reactions that they could not comprehend, as though there was something not working properly, and they could not grasp what it was, and what they received was too vague, with insignificant reactions, which could be anything being detected, and something nearby could be creating disturbances.

They had not fully checked the equipment’s reactions to everything, even though the original version had been tested out for years, and they were sure that things could create reactions. The equipment was far more sensitive at detection than ever before, and had been modified just before its arrival, especially for working there.

Suddenly one of the screens on the equipment reacted, and the scientists all went around it, and they all started excitedly discussing what they thought of it, and what could cause such a disturbance, and I saw that many were disappointed, but thought there was definitely something there, and I waited to find out what they had and if it would be a disappointment!

Yet they realized what they were receiving was scrambled images, from some interference, and the images were badly blurred, and they argued over what it could be.

They adjusted the equipment and image they got and they started getting a better image of the region below, and they no longer checked for equipment problems, and they gradually perceived there was nothing visible below, and they began their search of everything, in a greater degree than every before, as they knew something was there!

 

Chapter 17

 

The Roman Treasure

 

Marple arrived and I watched him again wondering what he was doing, and I sensed he was up to something, and when I attempted to leave with the archeologists and scientists he kept me doing things for him, and when there were only a few archeologists left, at the other side of the cavity we sat at a central table, where he removed a folder out his case.

Marple looked more confident than I had seen him in a long time and I wondered why as all our scans had showed nothing, and many of the others lost confidence in finding anything, and I sensed he wanted me there to tell me of his search for the treasure, and I confirmed it a few minutes later.

Marple studied me for a few seconds, and asked, “I am investigating McMurdo’s treasure map!”

“Where is he now?” I asked.

“He’s still working for the train company, but they have put him at another location!”

I looked up startled wondering why he suddenly wanted to search for the treasure, and I could not imagine anything like it there, and I considered if he was closing the investigation for it.

I had investigated everything I could, and had checked all the information and history of the region, trying to grasp something, and some clue, and any lost treasure.

“What’s that?” I asked, seeing Marple play happily with a document, inside his folder.

“I think we have not started the actual search for what McMurdo was looking for …”

“That’s perfect!” I replied, wondering why he was so confident.

“From my recent questioning of McMurdo he eventually told me he heard of its existence many years ago from his father, who heard it from his ancestors … He agreed that we could have equal shares of it if we find it …”

I was astounded, by the fact there was a treasure now, and he had been looking for it there all along, and that he was so confident in finding it, and that he had got me an equal share in it, and I was also happy to have a new case to investigate.

Marple continued, “I have had a few sources search for it, and from an accumulation of sources, to which led here …”

I gasped at what we might confront, and I could not grasp where, and I realized it could be in the Roman graves, of which only a few had been searched properly.

“Where was McMurdo searching before he went crazy from what we thinks is here …” I asked, curiously.

“He’s obsessed with witchcraft and demons …” he moaned. “That don’t exist … He gave me the map …”

He removed the map from his folder and showed it to me, and I realized McMurdo had been searching for something authentic!

“I have where he was searching … But I believe he chose the wrong spot! I examined there and there is nothing there! He was probably affected by this place and being here himself in the dark, and by the hideous occurrences …”

I left it, as I thought of what had happened and what the earthquake had been like.

“I investigated it further and managed to reveal faded shapes on the map. Which was what I was searching for …”

“The treasure was marked there …?” I asked, surprised.

“I knew it was here and I needed to investigate here … I believe the person that drew the map might have been chased – which might explain why it was left where it was – and hidden away …”

He grabbed his pipe off the table and began smoking.

“Who could have chased him?” I asked, confused.

“I do not know! It was too long ago! There is little history of the era! I believe it was valuable, and far too heavy to carry. Perhaps jewels of some form of ancient king!”

“So there are incredible valuable and historical jewels hidden somewhere here …”

“I think the person, in fear of his life, escaped to safety and marked it on the map, with different writing, in a different style, which faded, and that is where our investigation shall be.”

“As the place is marked in here?”

“Correct! Which is what we shall do, as the last of the archeologists and people here have left …”

 

Chapter 18

 

The Lost Treasure Tunnel

 

What was unbelievable was Marple took me to an insignificant area of the cavity wall, which I not recall, where there were small rocks and boulders piled up, and he slowly started taking away rocks, and I joined in.

Also while we did so I felt fluctuations occasionally shudder through the stone ground from something, which sounded deep below it, directly going through the rock there, from some form of power surge, as though threatening to do something, and I imagined my remains being found days later scattered everywhere as investigators tried to fit together what happened.

It surprised me Marple was the only one that seemed to not consider there was anything unearthly there, and I did not know what to believe.

When I rested I started examining the cavity further, in more detail, from there, with nobody there, and I saw it was far more perfectly shaped, and I tried to work out how it was formed.

I examined it further, and the heap of rocks, and area above where part of the cavity had collapsed, and realized it looked deliberately done by someone, and I gasped, and wondered why, and if it was to hide something valuable, or stop something escaping, and I returned to removing rocks and throwing them away to our side, with Marple, and we eventually speeded up throwing small rocks and dirt away, and Marple uncovered a hole, and we increased the size of it until it was large enough to allow us to safely enter its dark confines.

Marple grabbed his torch and shone it in and scanned its depths, and sat down and rested, and we sat getting ready to enter it, and when we entered it, and climbed through the dirt and rocks, I was surprised to see the tunnel continued in a form of straight line, doing downwards, and I wondered if it was a natural tunnel and if it was how it was formed, as I had not seen anything like it, and if it was not why had the builders gone to such lengths to build it, and as we marched into it I realized it had to have been built by the Romans, and I wondered what they had been up to.

It must go somewhere, where someone wanted to go, and I tiredly thought it over, and wondered what Marple thought was there, and I followed him into its black hole with his light and I started to see marks of humans having been there, and I kept wondering what we were going to find.

Though, after all we had been through, I had no idea what we were going after, dealing with, and I realized what we had found could be nothing compared to what was ahead!

 

Chapter 19

 

The Collapsed Tunnel

 

The torch slowly shifted to specific calculated positions, probing its way into the deep blackness ahead, and our feet threw up clouds of dust through beams of light; and some entered my lungs, causing me to give short convulsions, while inhaling stale air.

Echoes of our movements were about us and in the deep silence of the thick underground cave, and I felt the coldness of the walls, and depth below the ground, and felt it penetrate my limbs; as I marched along into obscurity, with expectations of plunging into something deadly.

When the tunnel stopped going downwards and went in a straight line I thought we never had far to go until we reached our final destination.

Glimpses of Marple’s darkened marching figure in the dim light with shadows over the walls wavered rhythmically as he calculatedly investigated the tunnel, and when it fluctuated I expected something, and I occasionally heard noises from behind us and reacted, as I wondered what could cause it, and I followed Marple’s eyes once, because he reacted differently suddenly, and I gasped, and I heard him gasp, as it was the end of our adventure and exploration, and I was left disappointed as I really thought we were going to discover something.

The complete tunnel collapsed across our front, firmly preventing us continuing, and we could go no further on, and we had reached our final destination and had not found out what had been there, and I realized the mystery of the treasure could be left there forever without us knowing what was there.

The rubble blocking the tunnel was deeply embedded giant boulders that were too immense to move, and we stood saying nothing, and I watched Marple make some calculations.

By his reactions I sensed that he was not entirely disappointed, and I knew he might have a way to shift the rocks, and I was sure it was to bring in the archeologists with their equipment, and I closely examined the tunnel wondering how it was made as there were no chisel or any tool marks, and I wondered why they had gone to such lengths to create it, and where it had led to.

On the way back I kept sensing Marple had another plan, and way to get to where he wanted, and was not saying anything.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Deep Depth Scan

 

The next day I returned to the cavity and saw something was on the brink of occurring, and saw the scientists working hard and away at their equipment and I swiftly moved there, and realized I had nearly missed something, and had luckily arrived when I had, and I watched the paranormal scientists and technicians rushing excitedly back and forward checking equipment all over the place, and tried questioning them but got little, and wondered what was going on, and I soon realized that they were about to activate their equipment to scan below the ground again, and braced myself, and watched Marple come down on the elevator.

I never knew what they were doing, as they had carried out all their scans, and they had not shown anything.

I tried to spot any differences there, and I jumped when I noticed some of the life forms the archeologists had uncovered, and had washed down with water and brushes, and stood with my mouth open trying grasp what the hell they were, and doing there, and why they were so preserved, in immaculate condition, and after examining them closely I saw nothing I recognized anywhere, and I was sure they could return to life if they did something to them.

I watched all the scientists eagerly standing around waiting for something, viewing things differently now, and I wondered what, and as I approached them I realized they might have been waiting for me, to continue, and to activate the equipment, and the experiment, and I wondered why.

When they activated it nobody reacted and barely noticed anything. My mind wandered through all the occurrences that had led up to its discovery.

Suddenly a vast unstable energy shockwave, from deep below, and somewhere else, like another dimension, emerged all about the place, with so much force it threatened to smash the cavity, and I recalled the earthquake and McMurdo’s warnings and I went back to wondering what it really was and what damage it could do, and I watched parts of the equipment explode into flames, and the scientists quickly turning it all off and putting it out.

When it was over I was glad to be alive, and that nobody had been killed, and the cavity and roof overhead had not come crashing down on top of us, and I was happy they could not use the equipment again.

Yet I noticed Orwell and Higgins and some other scientists were unconcerned, and I saw them at the equipment, searching through the recorded data, and a scientist had removed a sheet of paper, and they went around him, and I moved over to them.

From what they said I gathered that they believed something was stopping them from seeing what was really below and that their swift instantaneous scan of below had been so fast they had been able to get an unaltered view, and that they had used an instantaneous rough scan, before the equipment was damaged, and they showed us the sheet of paper with the rough scan, and in the blurred image I spotted strange images and forms of tunnels that had not been there before.

 

Chapter 21

 

The Mist Visitation

 

On our way back to Reality Investigations’s headquarters Marple surprised me by telling me that the scan had been his idea and he had asked the paranormal scientists to do it, and had done it to search for the rest of the tunnel, and if they should uncover it, and he left it there, and I realized he had a certain happiness and I knew he had something.

Later while I walked home I saw a strange look to the streets, which at first I thought was my tiredness, but I then noticed the place looked far emptier than I had seen them about that time and I wondered if something had happened, or if it was some event, and tried to recall the date and anything happening.

It was incredible I felt like I was the last person to set foot on the Earth, and watched a thin fog engulf the area, and realized it was the famous London fog, and I watched it thicken around me, and I just thought of it as part of my hazy tired vision and felt like going to sleep early that night.

It was like seeing another time in the past, and I expected to see ancient people in their ancient clothing.

Fog rapidly engulfed me and thickened up until I had barely any sight of anything left.

It was shocking how easily I lost my way there, and realized I could be stuck there for hours.

I was sure that I was somewhere else at times, and I occasionally saw through gaps in the thick fog and saw distant regions of strange places. Yet I stuck to the same route and never altered direction, and I wondered if I could get out of it by going back and remaining there until it went away, but I realized it was now everywhere.

Out of nowhere I saw a powerful light’s emergence through thinner mist and watched its radiance pulsating like an entity, magically illuminating the fog around it everywhere, and I stopped and studied it, wondering what the hell it was, and watched strange shadow formations around it, which I could not see what they were from, from things I could not see, and I just took it that it was an optical illusion and tried to work out what they were from the shadow shapes, and watched their mind-bending shapes shifting and weaving, and probed their way around.

In the distance I heard sounds like some form of animal was there, causing them, buried away deep in the fog, and I wondered if it was a real animal reacting to the sudden blinding mist.

For a short time I moved away, blindly through the fog, and stopped when I heard humans and thought I saw them shifting through thin areas of mist, and was surprised to see them, but as dark ghostly figures, and stood wondering what they were doing, as they looked strange, and like ancient people.

For one moment they looked as if they spotted me, and observing me, wondering what I was doing, and I just ignored them and moved on, and later they reappeared and their sounds were angry, and that there were people having a confrontation with someone or something, and they grew silent.

Later out of nowhere I saw people with their limbs missing or hanging from them, and wondered what had happened, and the mist seemed to separate at the same time, and I saw their features clearly and stood staggered as I realized they were zombies, and I also saw strange unearthly creatures.

The zombies turned barely human looking, and looked like something else altered to look like them, and were barely human looking, and I rushed over to one and was about to throw it on the ground to examine it closely and realized it was like the Santa that had been emerging in the houses, and scaring and killing people, and I rushed away, wondering how we could handle them.

While I moved away from them and thought more clearly about what was happening the fog thinned more and more and I recognized the route home, and moved away, and realized something deadly had been occurring there.

It was like being in someone else’s dream and I started to spot an immense shadow spread right through an area of the fog, where sounds exploded out!

I was tired and sleepy and stared blankly, at the dark shape shifting about through the mist, and I realized I still had not found any conclusions to what was occurring or was there, or back at the cavity, and was sure I was missing something, which was there but I just had not grasped, and I saw a colossal ghost demon shape float through the last of the mist, before it vanished.

 

Chapter 22

 

The Natural History Museum

 

The Natural History Museum captivated me as I made my way through the exhibitions eating a meal, and I thought of staying longer, and was surprised when I spotted the exhibition of one of the life forms from the cavity and its glowing shape under the bright lights, and people standing around it speechless.

While I had been returning to the cavity that morning I saw all the newspapers and headlines with amazement and were of ghost and zombie formations appearing all over London out of a mysterious fog cloud.

I was staggered to read of deaths occurring, and people having been found mutilated, and there was a major police and army investigation presence, and I was amazed to see the army on the streets in armed military vehicles, and wondered what the connection of the incidences were, and in one newspaper I had seen the exploration association scientists and archeologists had one of the life forms in the cavity put in the Natural History Museum, and I had rushed over to see it.

It was incredible, as it looked nothing like the prehistoric creature it was described as, and I stood glaring at it in amazement, and laughed at it, and studied it over and over trying to grasp some vague unseen detail to it, and I realized it was the only time I had properly seen it up close in proper light, and without the muck covering it, and I realized this one was of the early Earth as it did have some characteristics and features of it, but it seemed like some form of mutant, and looked like a hideous monster when viewed at angles.

How the thing even survived left me confounded, as I never seen any form of mouth or anything, and I wondered what the museum had made of it, and why they had put it there, and I recalled the influence of the members of the exploration association, and I realized that the newspaper had suggested it might only be a temporary exhibition, and I continued to march around it, before tourists and other visitors arrived, as I had to grasp something about it, and I even thought lives could be at stake as it be could of great danger, or what was in the cavity could be, and there might be a connection between them, and where they originated from, and what their origins were.

I stood, staggered, wondering what the hell it was! And what strange place had it come from!

What wonders of the universe could exist out there in space? Where had it come from?

I imagined space and mind-bending visions of worlds, and of a turquoise ocean of a world with a wild crazy rotation, and a long mass stretching out, and imagined the life form’s greenish shape darting about through the sea of chemicals.

Yet there was no proof it was from anywhere else, and there could easily have been similar strange conditions on this world very early on, when the surface of the world was turning solid.

I stood fixed there, and finally moved away from it, and watched crowds of tourists, from all across the world, approach it with astonishment. Unable to recognize what it was. Where it came from. If it was real or put there by the museum.

The atmosphere was breathtaking! Its visitors almost always tried in vain to bestow logical explanations to explain its incredible lifelike features, and I realized there that I had to solve the case, and investigate what was there.

 

Chapter 23

 

The Tunnels

 

While I was returning to the cavity I watched the army at work on the streets and tried to see what they were doing, and searching for, and in military vehicles, and wondered what they expected to discover, and if they believed the things were humans.

I strolled down the underground railway line and saw army personnel leaving there, and at the top of the cavity I entered the elevator wondering what was happening.

I was surprised to see the military below, and armed, and I wondered what happened, and I saw Marple talking to the head of the military, and wondered if they went there or they had called them in for something, and I realized it was probably both.

The whole cavity was full of activity, and things had clearly been occurring, with something new, and I realized I had nearly missed something, and had luckily arrived when I had.

At the bottom I watched the paranormal scientists and technicians rushing excitedly back and forward checking equipment all over the place, and I tried questioning them but got little, and wondered what was going on, and I soon realized that they were about to activate new equipment they had brought in to scan precise areas below the ground, and I braced myself, and watched Marple, and wondered what he thought the zombie and ghost formations were, and knew he had an explanation, and I was amazed from what the soldiers said and that there were sightings of ghost, zombie, and creatures formations there, and I realized that the Santa formations had been connected to there all along, and I realized that they had detected them appearing from there.

The military head officer talking to Marple amazed me, and his accounts of the occurrences were astonishing, and surprised Marple, and he occasionally laughed at them, and I overheard his conversation with another officer over attacks at highly confidential military bases, and the theft of large amounts of a highly confidential deadly high explosive material, and that the whole of the military was searching for its whereabouts.

It was incredible as the scientists at their laboratories at the military bases claimed the ghostly formations had been sighted and something had taken it from them, and the military officers insisted it was someone who had used it to take it.

They wished to investigate things further there, and if they had found something, and had heard of the occurrences with McMurdo and the earthquake, and wanted to solve what had happened.

Yet nobody seemed to know what was behind it, and it seemed to be the source of the occurrences, and it was getting dangerous!

I tried to detect any differences in the surrounding environment, and I silently gasped when I noticed some of the life forms the archeologists had uncovered had moved to new positions again, and looked as if they had at one point attempted to do something.

I stood with my mouth partly open trying grasp what the hell they were and if they had come alive, and how the hell they would handle it there, and it felt as if some incredible event was going to occur, or was starting to occur.

I watched all the scientists standing around waiting for something to happen, viewing things differently now, and I realized many were standing near particular places and watching some archeologists actively digging deep into the ground.

Suddenly Marple approached me and showed me the cleaned up scan they got beneath the cavity, and showed me what looked like tunnels below there.

Yet many were faint tunnels that had collapsed, and he showed where the archaeologists were digging and that there was a tunnel below, and I realized they were on to something, and trying to enter it.

I realized it went in the same direction as the tunnel we had followed, but the view of all the tunnels was muddled and I could not see where they were going, and why none of them seemed to lead anywhere, and it looked like something had been removed from it.

Suddenly a vast unstable energy shockwave, from deep below, somewhere, blasted out and vanished, with such force it threatened to smash the cavity, and some rocks fell down across the ground in areas.

I recalled the earthquake and McMurdo’s warnings and I wondered what the hell it really was, and what really was going to happen, and I watched parts of the equipment explode and burst into flames nearby, and scientists quickly turning everything that was undamaged off, while gasping at the power of it.

When it was over many looked glad to be still alive and that nobody had been killed, and that the cavity and roof overhead had not come crashing down on top of them, and most were happy that they could not use the equipment again.

The major scientists were only concerned in what they had found, and I saw them searching through the recorded data, and I moved over to see it.

From what I gathered was that they believed something was stopping them from seeing what was really below and that the new instantaneous scan still showed little that they had not previously seen, and that they had to search below themselves to find it, and I spotted strange reactions from the archaeologists who were digging down to the tunnel, and I saw them starting to break through into what was below.

 

Chapter 24

 

The Lost Ancient Tunnels

 

White radiance streaked through clouds of dust in the cave from Marple’s bright torch as I shifted down, and Oswald climbed down, and we shifted away into the tunnel, startled at what we were doing, and how far we were going.

Nobody else wanted to join us, and the people who never thought it was too dangerous had no reason to enter it, and only the three of us had firm enough objectives to check it.

It was incredible! I was glad to even see spiders and webs hanging from the rocks, and going over me, as we strolled on through, entering its dark confines, as it seemed so deadly and hideous, with demons lurking in its dark regions.

Once I thought I saw something watching us, from behind us, in the darkness, and carefully listened behind me, for anything, and the slightest clue of it being real.

It surprise me when the tunnel changed direction, and took us in the opposite directions, and I wondered why, as the people who had built surely would have built it straight lines, and we found another cave below, where its roof and our floor had caved in, and we entered the cave below.

When we entered it I sensed something strange, as though there was something else there, and that we were getting closer to where we wanted to go, and I was surprised at the new cave as it was made far better, and had clearly been made by someone else.

It was in a long straight tunnel going downwards and my dreamy sight probed into its confines, and into an abyss going deep into the ground, and I watched silky dust fall down from the roof and blow about in light beams, and the unmarked dust on the ground as we rushed on.

Faint echoes of our noises and breathing could be heard in its extraordinary silence, and I wondered where it led to, and what we were doing, and what the outcome would be.

It was incredible at one point I felt like we were the only people alive, and I was surprised to see a thin fog in an area ahead, and I watched it hover there, and could not grasp why it was there, and wondered if it was gas, and was surprised that Marple just ignored it and marched straight through it, and I realized there was no smell from it, and saw it was little.

It was like entering another time in the past, and expected to see ancient tunnel builders, in their ancient clothing!

I was confused by its length and wondered why it went so deep, and why the builders had gone there for whatever it was.

Out of nowhere I saw a powerful light appear and vanish ahead, and we stopped and studied there, and Marple wondered what it was, and we eventually ignored it.

Later I started to realize the dangers, and if what was there was the same as the killer Santa, and I realized we should not do anything, and ignore it, and I realized whatever it was it had been attempting to copy things, and it was as though it could not properly grasp what it was copying, and I recalled McMurdo’s warning, and his belief it was the devil!

 

Chapter 25

 

The End of the Tunnel

 

In dimness at the front of us, just in the light’s range, I watched dim gleams from things in the stone reflect dim light, playing with my hazy tired sight.

Faint echoes of breathing and occasional murmurs could be heard in its extraordinary silence, and by Marple’s sudden frantic reactions I sensed that he believed that something was actually ahead, and I wondered what.

I watched the light probe what was there, and it beamed out over a circular cavity ahead, which had been created using the same method as the tunnel.

The cavity was strange, when I entered it, and never seemed to fit in with what we had already seen!

The roof was at a height of twenty feet, and I caught glimpses of where things had once been, and I listened to surreal echoes of our movements, and as I entered its central region I conjured up vague visions of spooky ancient Roman ghosts in its confines.

I shifted into its fringes, treating it as an archeological find, as I rested from our journey there, and long day, and I curiously watched Marple searching, and wondered what he expected to find there anyway.

At the front an object came into my sight and I saw that a massive black boulder had fallen down behind the tunnel entrance, across the front, where the tunnel would have continued, and I wondered if it had stopped us reaching our real destination, as I and Oswald could not see anything there, and all there was there was the cavity, and yet Marple continued searching it, and looking at his treasure map.

He approached massive the black boulder blocking the entrance, and felt its smoothness with his fingertips, through thick webs and dirt, and looked up startled, and removed his hands, and started examining it, and placed his hands over its surface and traced its perfect shape, measuring it, and he stepped back, and saw something in the dirt below, and started brushing the dirt away from it.

To our surprise he gradually revealed an open-mouthed skeleton with a rusted knife embedded in its chest.

We went over to it and examined it, and discussed what age it could be, and Marple tried to get information about the person, and he searched the remains of the clothing of the man, but nothing was there except pieces of rope where he had been tied.

To me it looked like where devil worship or witchcraft could have taken place.

“Someone gave a human sacrifice here to something!” Marple stated, considering what had happened.

I moved back checking it all in more detail, and I saw its hideous agonized face more, covered in dirt – where the person had hideously died with his mouth open in pain, and had remained that way for centuries.

Marple continued brushing away thick dirt from it and about it, while some crumbling bits of gray rot fell off the skeleton.

I grasped its hideous outline, and I stepped back wondering what the place was, and why it was there, and why everything I expected now kept turning out differently.

We checked everything we could in the cavity and found little, and a large boulder against a side wall, which looked mysterious, and out of place.

Eventually we started resting, and I rested near the skeleton, after making some close examinations of it, and I realized that if the large black boulder in front of it had fallen down and blocked the tunnel ahead that something could be behind it, and I started wondering what the hell could be there, and why they had been making human sacrifices.

 

Epilogue

 

The Thing from Beyond Reality

 

Gigantic eruptions blasted out everywhere, woke us from our sleep, in unadulterated horror, with such force that with my eyes shut I thought I was in some form of early state of death.

When I opened my eyes I saw nothing but blinding light, and energy exploding out everywhere, threatening to do damage to the physical universe, and for some reason I imagined space and time going out for light years, going across vast reaches of space, and I wondered what the hell it was!

Echoes of our last conversations and occurrences, before we had gone to sleep, went through my mind as I tried to grasp what happened, and as I did my eyes altered to the unadulterated dazzling light, and I wondered where the hell the cave and cavity had gone, and I felt the ground beneath me with my feet, and I considered what could have happened, and looked about for my companion explorers, and saw their vague shapes further out.

The vast powers surrounding us were staggering and I wondered how we could escape alive, as surely we were still underground somewhere, and I started searching everywhere I could see, and saw that the cave and cavity had vanished, and all about me I realized I was surrounded by strange energy formations, energy formation, and I watched its energy in vast complex formations doing strange things, and some regions altering to other formations, as though reforming, and I watched Marple and Oswald examining it.

Away in the distance I incredibly saw a cavity wall, and I saw it going around us, which I measured it at around four miles away, going across our front, and the roof a few hundred feet above.

I realized if I was going to die that I was best being on my own, and having the others away at a distance, and I wondered if I would get what we were up against, and what we were actually investigating, and what had just happened.

After a long time I realized it had a definite state, and had been in another state, and it was close to completion, and I was surprised to see we were actually at its edge, with Marple and Oswald at two different positions at my side, and I tried to realize what it now was.

It had formed a perfect energy formation of some sort, clearly of transcendent origins, and pulsated in the center of it and the cavity, and I examined the rim of the cavity all round me and saw that it held, and never looked as though it would collapse.

I sensed something would happen and I saw it happen and an immense whirlpool of energy lines magically shifting around it, and I studied it for a long time fascinated and realized that it had no proper presence in this universe and was some form of force formation, perhaps going through many dimensions, and I saw signs of a vortex within it, and its energy patterns!

I suddenly realized the black boulder that had been blocking the cavity had been its edge, and subconscious region, in the dormant formation it had taken, and it had not actually been solid, and made of matter, and it had mixed rock atoms within it and over its edge to hide itself, and that it as the black boulder had actually stretched out for nearly four miles, under central London, and the cavity had been built in front of it, which I looked about behind me and saw, in the cavity wall there, and for some reason I realized I had actually activated it.

I was left staggered and recalled going to sleep beside it, and recalled touching it once and feeling a strange energy from it, and pulling away my hand, and I realized my touching it had done something and activated it.

I realized that I had seen it as the rock formation and a vague line in the last scan the scientists had taken in the cavity above, and that they had described it as something else.

I realized something in me had activated it, and revived it, and I sensed its communications with it, and I gasped at the vast complexity of it, and that it was exchanging information, and suddenly I realized it was in communication with the thing we had discovered under the building at Battlefield Road, which was in the basement in the museum, and I realized it had been part of it, and the lost section of it, which it had used for exploration, and it had been unable to leave the universe without it, and it had split itself into two, and the other half was far smaller than it in this universe, and it had put part of itself in me with the aim of locating it, and I realized that both parts of it had been trapped there, unable to do anything, and had been too far apart to detect each other in the state they had been in.

I also realized it had created a subconscious part of it, when it had gone dormant, and that it had created it to protect it and awaken it if it detected its other half, and it had been it that created the Santa and other formations, in its weakened state, from being activating and deactivating over vast amounts of time, and I realized it had been activated by McMurdo in the cavity at the underground railway line, and had been in its weakened state after being there for so long, and had been almost crazy, and had been protecting it, and was stopping people discovering it, and scaring them away.

In the past it attempted to discover what it needed and let people build tunnels, and it had created tunnels and cavities, and many had later been hidden or destroyed.

I realized that it had found a way to leave the universe to where it had come from, but it had never been able to go through with its plan, and I was left staggered at the sheer power and forces of it, and magnitude, and I realized it had even created humans to achieve its goal, from other species, and it had genetically altered them to advance.

It had originally been unable to even define what existed in this universe, and its first attempts at making and altering species were left in the cavity McMurdo uncovered, in suspended states, and many had been found on other worlds, in the depths of the universe, and it had determined humans would progress far enough to give it what it wanted, to complete its mission, and its subconscious state had helped humans progress.

It had detected humans creating plutonium atomic bombs and had realized they had enough power for it to leave the universe!

I recalled two of the scientists secretively talking about the atomic bombs, and the sheer power of them, and I recalled the army officer mention there had been a break in at their secret military bases, and that something had been taken, and I was sure they might have traced something to there, as its Santa entity had been detected being transmitted under the buildings, and it had later been traced to the cavity region.

I was left staggered by everything and at its real history, and that it had been trying to survive in this universe, and wanted to someday escape from its confines, and I was sure I sensed it react as it prepared itself to leave, as though it had thought of leaving, and escaping from its imprisonment and eventual destruction, and I thought of where it came from and I realized that I still never had a clue what was there and where it was.

Everything around me seemed to explode with energy and alter, reviving it, putting life back into it, and it pulsated furiously with more energy than it ever had since it arrived, and appeared on this desolate world, with its strange existence.

It was something out of a mind-bending dream, altering its formations, as it completed its mission, and I felt energy from it blast through my body, and everything transformed, and it vanished, leaving emptiness, blackness, and Marple and Oswald turned on their lights, and we stood mystified in the massive empty cavity.

I eventually looked for our exit and checked the tunnel, where we had been, where the small cavity we slept in had been, and saw something shine near it.

When I was about to enter the tunnel, with Marple and Oswald behind me, as we went silently back up to the surface, I spotted something strange hidden in the darkness there, and after careful and close examinations I realized it was large black wooden chests, heaped in a pile on top of one another, and I rushed over and crouched down in front of it, and held one, which was partly open, where I had seen the shine appear.

Again something shined in its dark interior, and I spotted Marple and Oswald approaching, and their torches shine from it, and I saw them looking startled, coming to a halt, and looking about their front, more astonished than I had seen them, with them trying to control themselves, and I knew this was the real treasure, and it belonged to us this time!

The treasure room had been buried away behind part of the cavity wall all along, and I recalled seeing a large boulder over where the entrance must have been, at the bottom of the wall.

Most of it once belonged to ancient kings, who bestowed the treasures to it, and I knew it when I threw open the chest lid, and found colossal royal crowns and jewelry, and where I had seen the shine there was an ancient gold Roman cup, embedded with large diamonds, and I watched the torches directly shine on it, and its gold radiance explode out, with bright white sparkles.

Part III

 

Novel 3

 

The Lost Treasure Map 5

 

V Bertolaccini

Prologue

 

The Martian Discovery

 

Loud explosions and blinding flashes from the crash haunted Anders as he watched the remains of his rocket vehicle burn out and vanish into the dark desolate Martian night.

The vehicle had come down to the surface of Mars too fast and the two astronauts had hardly been able to land manually in the darkness, and they had just escaped as the vehicle had started exploding, and sat at different places against piles of rocks, watching its fuel burn away furiously, and he wondered how long their oxygen would last.

He felt painful bruises covering his entire body and checked his oxygen supply again, and checked for any escaping air in his spacesuit, while watching Robertson, the scientist, repair a hole in his with a small repair kit from his suit.

He realized that they had to find another way of landing on Mars, and that it was far too dangerous! Although it had been their fault in carrying out the unscheduled ludicrous landing, in search of wealth! They had gambled and had lost!

Robertson claimed incredible diamonds of immense value were on the surface, in the unexplored region of the south pole, and they had made a great mistake in landing in the dark, as it had been their only real opportunity to carry it out without being caught, and they would not know of them being out there as they had not used any communications to the space stations and Martian ground bases, and there were no satellites overhead!

Mars was not like what he had imagined it and it now felt like he was on a world in another solar system buried away in the deep depths of the universe as he stared out into the depths of space, in the dark night sky, and at what seemed to look like the furthest stars of the universe, and he watched them wondering what horrors existed there, realizing what they had encountered there, which had also made them crash!

There were billion of light years of stars out there and he gasped just thinking what could be on the nearest stars, and they had just had an encounter on Earth’s nearest world.

The world about him seemed a flat stretch of ground full of nothing but space dust and piles of rocks, with no real atmosphere, resembling areas on Earth’s moon in the dark, and some large asteroids had clearly hit areas nearby.

He wondered if their crash remained undetected and unregistered by them if their skeletons would be found lying there by future astronauts, and he considered if such an occurrence could really happen, over a long time, and if he could end up in a museum back on the Earth, or if his ghost would be trapped there forever on the desolate lonely planet!

The last burning region of the rocket was a sphere of light floating like a ghost in the darkness, and he realized that something had been there, right there on Mars, and he had telepathically felt its presence!

A silent roar vibrated through the ground and he expected a sudden explosion, and he thought of it as a tremor from some fault line, and a blur of light swirled in the blackness from an area of the space vehicle and he realized it was the last of the fuel dwindling away.

Memories of its strange sounds and lights sent sensations through his body and he realized how close to death he had been!

The world seemed unique but there were trillions like it through the unexplored galaxy.

He recollected a full vision of what could have attacked them and he felt his blood explode through his veins, and he realized how little oxygen he had as he was starting to feel like fainting!

A dull yellow and red radiance gleamed from the remains of the rocket and illuminated his shadow casting a crimson shadow like a hideous devilish figure, with peculiar features, and he thought of it as what had attacked the vehicle.

He glared unmoving at the silhouette in shock, studying it, almost hoping it would come alive and answer what it was.

The blackness was so deep and vivid as the light and flames vanished completely, and the thing there felt so real, and alive, he felt deep horror – and he thought of it as they had first discovered it up in space – and he was surprised that he started to see something in the blackness, and he realized that he just wanted to die, and its glowing shape floated towards him, and he watched Robertson react to it.

For an instant it altered formation and he wondered what the hell it was! Where the hell had it come from? What was it doing there in such a desolate place?

It lunged over Robertson first, like the grim reaper, taking his soul, and he watched him go lifeless, fall over, and collapse, and it moved to him, with its black shadow shape shifting over the ground, and he felt its vibrations go through the rock, and he sensed its powers, and he clung to jagged black rocks and its swirling mist shifted over him, and shifting outlines magically formed about him, and he realized how painful death would be from slow oxygen starvation, and he welcomed death, and as he did he realized it was Christmas and that the star he was gazing at was really the Earth.

 

 

 

 

I

 

The Martian Discovery

 

 

Chapter 1

 

The Antarctica Encounter

 

Something startled Commander Cronenberg and he struggled to grasp what and focused on the deformed sun, as it went below the Martian horizon at the side of the shuttle, and he gasped as he watched the golden landscape below grow dark!

They had to land! Soon! Surely they should not take the risk continuing to fly to their destination at night! The shuttles were new and recently completed and they were trying it out for the first time, and testing it for the first time over Mars!

Something staggered him about the mission and he sensed something was going to occur, and had seen it approaching, edging its way towards him, which he knew he could not avoid! He had to go through with it! He believed he could survive if he did everything he could and avoided any deadly mistakes!

It was Mars! It was the new dangers there! It was exploring where nobody had been, and the great deadly environment and hidden dangers! The region they were in was the least explored!

They were approaching the south pole, the legendary Martian Antarctica, and he now sensed there was something strange there! Something he had not encountered before! Something that could only exist in such a place, in such a place, and in the depths of space, which might not be able exist on the Earth, and it gave him chilling and peculiar sensations, but he could not grasp what!

As the shuttle accelerated on he increasingly felt a presence of something, somewhere, in the chilling darkness of the alien world around them, and it started to become visible that the five other members of the crew of the shuttle.

At a distance the shuttle resembled a highly advanced early twenty-first century space shuttle, but far larger, and was designed for the exploration of worlds, especially Mars, and future explorations in the solar system.

Most of the crew, including him, were also scientists and explorers, wanting to see the universe and discover new things, and were testing and improving the space vehicle, like the other twenty space shuttles being tested on Mars, and were from Base One, the largest structure in space and on Mars and the headquarters of all the operations, bases, and space stations on or over Mars.

The commander of the base and Martian operations was Base Commander Clarke, an associate of Commander Carl Cronenberg.

All the information from the shuttles was being gathered and transmitted to the base, and studied mainly by the shuttle builders and scientists.

The other five members of the shuttle crew were Orwell the shuttle science officer, medic, and biologist/exobiologist, Stanley the shuttle pilot, and an expert shuttle pilot and navigator, and Lyndon the co-pilot, navigator, expert on most of the Martian world, landscape and locations, and expert on shuttles, like most of them, and Deputy Commander Tom Campbell head flight engineer, and an astrophysicist/planetary geologist, and Rosenberg a flight engineer, and an astrophysicist/planetary geologist, and all basically checking the performance of the shuttle and findings the new detection equipment aboard gathered, especially in the unexplored regions they were entering.

Cronenberg knew that they were finally properly exploring Mars, and they were properly filming and mapping the landscape, and entering regions never properly explored.

He had recollections of seeing the shuttle for the first time, and its abilities, and ability to fly in the almost empty Martian atmosphere, and he knew they were a breakthrough that could lead to immense discoveries and the proper exploration of the smaller but vast world.

Their explorations of the whole world had been little so far – with only probes and satellite explorations – and he grasped the chance to be a part of it, but the dangers had not been apparent until he had started their mission.

After hours of intense training, medical examinations, and every form of screening, the astronauts were finally carrying out the first mission, and future missions.

“This technology is a scientific breakthrough!” Orwell announced to Cronenberg, as he sat monitoring newly installed equipment, over at his side, which was to survey the ground, and had a clear image even in the darkened landscape.

“It’d be a mistake not to use it to its full potential for science!” he replied.

“They’ve been redoing scanning and carrying out tests for months, back on the Earth, and seem to have progressed the technology far further than we thought. The views and information received is far greater …”

Cronenberg wondered if it was good enough to detect what was there, and realized whatever it was he had sensed there might be reacting to it and he considered having it turned off.

He was starting to suspect that some of them had discovered signs of something of unknown origins somewhere, and were either not sure and leaving it until they had enough evidence or they did not want to confront what was there, and, of course, it could be both.

Finally Rosenberg muttered to him, “There’s some form of powerful magnetic influence – or something of that nature – around here somewhere!”

Cronenberg swiftly checked it to see what it was and moved away, and considered what it was, and if it belonged to Mars.

From a side window he watched shades of light play with his vision in animated motions, as the shuttle rushed on, and he watched the crew at work, constantly examining the new technology, getting use to using it.

The Antarctic had a great potential with the ice and its other features and he wondered if any of it had been there for millions of years like the Antarctic on the Earth! If Mars had seas or large lakes there could have been amphibious or even prehistoric creatures that could be buried frozen away there!

For a few seconds he watched blankly as crew members gave reactions about something unbelievable, and he reacted when he spotted the equipment showing strange reactions that he could not comprehend, and he considered if it was because things were too vague, with insignificant reactions, which could be off anything, but he was sure something nearby was creating a disturbance or being detected for some reason.

The problem was they had not fully checked everything with the equipment, and its reactions to everything, even though it had been tested back on the Earth, and they were sure that something was ahead! The equipment was more powerful and sensitive at detection than ever before, and had even been modified before the trip, for detection at distances, which they had to work at there, which would speed up future searches of the vast terrain.

The shuttle rushed on across the immense desolate landscape and the equipment gave increased strange reactions and accounts, and they checked for equipment problems, and they gradually perceived that there was definitely something ahead that had similarities to something artificial with immense proportions

 

Chapter 2

 

The Attack

 

Cronenberg never got who was the most baffled by the situation, and if they were in danger, and how they should proceed to deal with what they had! No danger to them had arisen and nothing showed they would crash but they sensed something!

They had gradually realized something was emerging, with them studying the slightest reactions created by it, while still trying to prove the new equipment had nothing wrong with it.

Nothing seemed to be visible ahead and where the disturbances had been found to be generated.

Was it a coincidence that the equipment was malfunctioning at the same time? He knew there could easily be still hidden flaws in the technology! It was valuable and might still need to be advanced further, in its new state!

He checked Deputy Commander Campbell’s map, which he claimed was the most accurate up-to-date map available, and Rosenberg helped, but they found little ahead, and the facts showed little existed there, and the region had not been explored by anything other than satellites.

Their records showed nothing had been recorded of such a disturbance, even though he was sure there had been mentioned past events discovered on the Earth, but they were too vague and too proven to be false for him to be believe.

It was then that he realized that all the communications from and to the outside world had gone and the pilots reported it to him when he asked, and he expected them to offer help or at the least their scientific theories, and they just looked confused.

They just left pilots on their own to handle all the problems themselves, with the shuttle’s flight! They were better off without them being in the way.

It was incomprehensible and crazy, and would surely be recorded as such a discovery! Investigations proved that nothing could be there!

Would they even survive to see what was there? The equipment and plane had increasing signs of being dangerous, at an alarming rate, as they advanced forwards, and they surely would have to land, and their constant attempts to turn back had failed.

Something was either wrong with the shuttle equipment or something was taking them forward, and its power was increasing as they went forward, and the pilots seemed to lose more and more control, and he kept on believing it was the new equipment, and even considered if they had deliberately invented the situation to test their ability in handling such a scenario and were also trying to test the shuttle, or someone needed the information.

Shudders and fluctuations ripped through the plane and him and the others as what seemed like strange unknown energy surges swept through the region, threatening to rip it to shreds and scatter it and them across Mars, and he imagined his remains being recovered days later half buried away in sand.

The rest of the crew also started to realize it and that they might not even see what was there, but he decided to insist in ignoring it! He gasped when he realized that they should have turned back as soon as there had been evidence something was occurring, and even because it was getting dark! Surely there was a way to change the course of the shuttle, and the new shuttle and equipment had only confused them! Perhaps it was a built in programming that had been somehow activated, which had not been known by them, and had perhaps been on an earlier version of the programming or was used for some other reason.

He considered what it could be and what would happen and how to combat the occurrence! Whatever it was it had control of controlling the shuttle!

He decided to ignore the dangers and to examine everything that was occurring to try to explain things, and fit things together and get a proper picture of what might happen, and if they could do anything. In the past he, and surely the others, had pulled themselves out of dangerous and tricky situations, and he thought that they could do it once again, even if there was a slight chance.

He examined the strange alterations, with erratic characterizations, in the equipment and realized there had been a change, and they all started examining how it was now affecting the shuttle and its performance, and he checked the pilots and saw that they had seen something in the increasing darkness ahead and wondered what the shuttle was going over, and was surprised at how fast it was getting dark and he managed to adjust his eyes and followed one of the pilot’s eyes to a location ahead.

He joined in examining there in detail. It was incredible! There was nothing visibly there but he knew there was something! He had seen nothing like it! At that distance it seemed normal though, and he was left confused as he was sure something was going to happen there, and he and the pilots started preparing for something to occur, and he decided to ignore the dangers and to handle everything he could as best as he could as it appeared.

The area was not properly charted and there was nothing shown there, and the satellite photos showed nothing but another area of Mars, and he suddenly wondered what was there and where the hell it had come from!

Areas surrounding the region had a volcanic appearance, and it was definitely old.

Campbell discussed it with Stanley the pilot and tried to get anything he could from the pilot.

“We should get someone to check out what’s there as soon as our communications return!” Stanley replied. “It seems to be where the disturbances are from!”

“That looks empty?” Orwell announced, looking into the front window with high powered binoculars, hardly able to see in the blackness there.

Campbell took the binoculars and searched where he was looking, and stood confused, and replied, “What happens now? How the hell could anything be there?”

“I think we’re going down …” Stanley shouted, and the shuttle started going downwards.

“I’ve recovered control of it!” he gasped, after a few minutes of struggling to control it.

“We’ll have to land!” Lyndon announced, checking everything about him, preparing himself.

Cronenberg gasped at the situation and rushed into his shuttle commander’s seat, one of their impact protection seats, designed for him, and the shuttle started reacting crazily and viciously shuddered, as if caught in some force, and they started descending swiftly and he realized like most of the crew that the worst outcome could become real, and he saw them reacting and preparing themselves for their worst fears.

He copied positioning himself in his seat and prepared for what was ahead, and considered using something for violent impacts.

As it hurtled downwards he spotted the last shreds of sunshine illuminating the sky on an area of the horizon, and he spotted the startled faces of the two pilots recalling emergency procedures, and others swiftly securing equipment or themselves.

He wished he had a better view at a main window of what was happening! He imagined it bursting into flames with the powerful fuel and the entrance being blocked.

The last shades of weak light pulsated, in various motions, through the front pilots window, and he considered what could happen! Would it ruin everything if the shuttle was destroyed and they survived?

Yet they had revealed something, and with incredible powers, powerful enough to take down a powerful large shuttle, with such high technology, and he wondered if they could discover what it was and save the day! If they survived to see what was there!

All they could do was wait for the outcome, and try to do everything they could, and he realized he was actually part of a real drama and occurrence, perhaps for the first time in his life!

He started realizing how professionally skilled and proficient the crew actually were, and how far they had gone out of their way to get them and carry out the Mars operation, and he realized why they had chosen him, and had realized the dangers!

Everything on the shuttle appeared in order, and it was only being influenced by something clearly below, somewhere, and he wondered if it was a natural phenomenon, and if it could be a danger to flights over that region. He was sure it was forcing them to land – or was it their imagination, and some force like gravity, and he wondered if there were disturbances like it on the Earth.

He saw that they were having a hard time controlling the speed of their descent!

How could anything take control of such a powerful shuttle, and at such a distance? What form of technology was behind it? Could they use it in warfare? Was it a form of military technology? Could they figure out a way to block and stop it?

Surely there had to be a way to obstruct it or just weaken it?

One of the crew called out, “It’s not increasing in power!”

He realized that some of them were holding back information about it, and he considered if he should try and get it!

The pilots tested and did what they could perceive and he realized that it was a more interesting trip than he had even imagined! Nothing anywhere seemed enough to understand it, and he was sure none of them had anything to properly explain it!

There had to be something irregular, visible, and solid behind it, and he wondered if he could get it if he had long enough and the right means!

“We’ve still lost all contact with the base!” Campbell confirmed loudly, as he examined his equipment.

He noticed as it got lower to the ground the crew started avoiding looking at each other, with occasional horrified glares, realizing they that they were going to land soon and they might not be any longer in control of their fate!

“I don’t get this!” one of the pilots uttered, as he looked up startled. “It is as though something kicked in there and has started landing it, and I cannot discover why and why it is going to a different destination than we were set to land!”

“Is there anything visible there?” Cronenberg asked curiously.

“Nothing visible! It seems to be carrying out some form of alternative plan – to land us!”

The shuttle shifted down low, but still at a regulated pace, almost as though it were being overwhelmed by something.

Occasionally the crew started monitoring what was happening about them as it happened, and Cronenberg realized that they liked to handle things rather than ignore them, and they were not fully confident of surviving!

Even the most professional pilots on the Earth would have a hard time finding a landing site below, and they were allowing it to land them there.

The shudders from turbulent energy surges made them jerk forwards and backwards, making them all go silent and stop silent conversations, and they started putting on their spacesuit helmets.

At times he felt as if he were drifting down to a hideous death!

It plummeted and suddenly administrated what was an almost perfect landing, but smashed hard into something, and his eyes bulged brightly, and he barely believed the destructive forces lashing out at the shuttle.

When he realized that they had avoided dieing, when it stopped, flames bursting out, and an alarm blared out, and a sudden explosion smashed it with tremendous force!

Then as he caught sight of something in the obscurity out in the distance, through a window, he heard them all trying to escape and realized that the shuttle had acquired serious structural damage and fuel was leaking out and had ignited.

 

Chapter 3

 

The Crash Site

 

After the astronauts had jumped onto the Martian soil Cronenberg and copied the others lifting out oxygen tanks and he rushed away from the crash site with them, and he had a strange sensation and thought that he was somewhere far more than an uncharted desolate region of Mars!

It was as though they were entering somewhere else, and making the first step for mankind to something!

He did not know what their next biggest problem would be!

Was it even dieing of starvation? Or was there something there after all, which had brought them there, which was getting ready to kill them all or what?

They never had any communications with the outside world and the shuttle was damaged beyond what they could repair and the last of the fuel was burning away, and they were lucky as the shuttle had been designed right and it did not have a fatal explosion, but they never knew if what had taken them there would allow them to leave, be found, and allow them to live!

The next peculiarly that they saw was the strangely tinted night sky, and nobody could recall seeing anything like it but they had not been outside the base at night that much.

Yet he was sure it had not been there when they had landed!

There was sand and rocks everywhere, unhampered by humans, and it was very dry and he watched the astronauts return and get fire distinguishers and help control and put out the flames, while others removed equipment and things they needed outside the shuttle, and he watched their speed increase, and slow when the flames started going out, and their reactions when it was annihilated, and they started moving back in the shuttle and fixed its lighting and heating.

They eventually all started resting and went to sleep to conserve energy supplies, and left everything for the morning.

Cronenberg woke early, after sleeping too long, and examined the outside world lighten up as the sun rose above the horizon, and he watched the other astronauts slowly awaken, eat, and start work checking the damage.

“There’s some form of powerful energy influence,” Rosenberg announced, after checking things, “and it’s still stopping us scanning what’s out there!”

“Just as it was on the airplane?” he replied.

“Well, it seems to have altered – and we could have found another encounter and it’s tremendous!”

“What could it be?” he moaned, confused, and wondered if he had known something of it before the shuttle had come down.

“It could be that on the shuttle we were not able to properly check anything as it was so far away and there was too much disturbances! Now that we have landed we are detecting it and it is also more powerful this close …”

“Is it near us?”

“I don’t have a clue where it is! It could be anywhere! I will try to get the information on it!”

He handed him some readouts and Cronenberg stared at them with amazement, gasping, and muttered, “What the hell could create such power? It’s colossal!”

“It’s also like someone is playing around with something out here! Has anyone got any science or military establishments or anything at all out here?”

He considered it for some time and was amazed that someone could build something like it there, but he could not grasp what or why it would be put there.

“Nobody has been near here as far as I’ve heard!”

“But it could be confidential?”

“Yes! But why would it be built out here? Why would they be using anything or experimenting on anything?”

“Perhaps they are using or creating something too dangerous to be activated in an inhabited zone!” he replied firmly.

“That would explain it being so secretive and at an uncharted region but it does not explain anything of its use!”

He kept going, curious in what the scientists would make of things if he pushed them further.

“How did they manage to hide something of its size and power though?” he moaned. “Nothing seems to add up here!”

“They surely would have to have technology beyond anything we’ve heard of!”

Cronenberg stood still, staring out at the Martian landscape through the front shuttle window, unable to grasp it!

“What could create such power and what is its use?”

“It could be someone using a natural phenomenon or something? Like someone harnessing and manipulating energy in the planet’s core or something?”

Nothing added up though, as it was only used to control the shuttle and take it there, and they could easily have hidden away, and never be found, and they would be found out eventually.

He could not realize what it was and realized that the real solution to what it was would be far more unbelievable and crazy than what they would come out with, and he wondered if he could get what it was, and it could be far too ridicules for them even to assume existed.

The night before when it had taken control of the shuttle he had detected something of unknown origins, and it had been like that when it had made a full appearance.

Yet there clearly was no evidence of anything and only someone making a ridicules mistake would add anything to what had been said, and he filled in his account of what had occurred on the flight, and going by what all the crew about him indicated it was a crazy occurrence and they never had any proper facts anything was there.

“To discover whatever is here we’ll need more reasonable and solid clues!” he finally announced, especially to Rosenberg, who seemed to be the most interested and knowledgeable on it.

They eventually left the shuttle through the airlock wearing their suits with extra oxygen tanks on them, and they started to go further out from the shuttle to a nearby small hill with a view of the surrounding view, where they blankly viewed the surrounding area, and Cronenberg looked back and down at the shuttle, which resembled an airplane brought down in a desert region like the Sahara, surrounded by bright reddish sand and rocks in bright sunlight, in a cloudless white blue sky.

The surprising thing was his spacesuit’s high temperature and the surrounding view combined to give the impression of it being incredibly hot, instead of incredible cold and at the Antarctica of the world, and he even considered if any of them were capable of making some form of mistake because of it.

The adrenalin of the crew was visibly rushing through their veins, overwhelming them, as they checked their new surroundings, and most realized where they were, and he thought he saw the Earth in the sky.

All around them they examined things like they were strange new phenomena, and he wondered what they thought they were discovering.

Even though they had been exploring areas of Mars, especially about the base, they had not been to an unexplored area like it, and they moved over to an area where it looked like a cold region like the Antarctica, and they looked for ice and water.

“Look at all this!” Campbell explained, picking up a strange rock, and none of them could recall seeing it before, and he then looked as if he recognized it.

“What do you think brought us down now?” he asked, curiously. “There’s nothing out here! Nothing can grow!”

They all discussed it and it was apparent none of them properly knew, and they started examining the landscape and giving facts and their thoughts of it, and Cronenberg and Rosenberg examined the best map they had of the region and discussed it, and they all then discussed what to do.

Rosenberg pointed at the highest hill, buried away in the landscape, in a southerly direction, in the direction of the southern pole, where they had been traveling to, and he examined why most of it was covered up and saw small sand hills in front of it, covering up most of it, and what was below.

“There’s a better chance of finding water there!” Rosenberg announced.

The more Cronenberg examined what was there the more he thought it was a good place to go and he announced that he would like to go and check there.

It looked familiar to him, as a place with something, and he was sure it was where the shuttle had been going.

“It’s as though it has formed differently, by some means, by something else …” Campbell mumbled, looking at it through his binoculars.

“Could be a fault line?” Rosenberg replied.

They all examined it and avoided replying, and Cronenberg wondered if they agreed or disagreed!

 

Chapter 4

 

The Haunted Hill

 

Cronenberg leapt onto his feet when a strange explosion shattered his sleep and he stared out into dark Martian night!

They had wrongly calculated the distance and time it took to get to the hill, and they had only been able to leave late in the evening, and it had become dark on the way and they had rested and had fallen asleep below the hill. The long day and march over small hills in the thick heavy spacesuits, marching through deep regions of sand carrying large amounts of equipment, including oxygen tanks and supplies, had tired them, and they were unable to do anything but sleep anyway.

Cronenberg was staggered when he considered what the noise was, as it had sounded like an artificial explosion, and he stood trying to explain how it could be there, and he wondered how the atmosphere could even carry the sound through it, and he realized Mars was different, and it might even be some form of volcanic disturbance from below, blasting up through a vent.

The other two astronauts, Rosenberg and Campbell, who had accompanied him either ignored it, or were asleep, or had not heard it, and he examined them through their dark helmet faceplates but could not see what they were doing.

When a second explosion blasted out he stood shocked, as he had just started to ignore the first and had considered it to be his imagination, and the powered rifle blast exploded into the empty silence staggering him, and the explosion sounded so powerful he believed it had some form of powerful explosive in the bullets!

The other two astronauts at first never reacted or even moved and he finally spotted Rosenberg opening his eyes, and watched him looking startled and realized he had also heard it and had been trying to ignore it.

“What the hell was that?” he finally asked, as he stood.

“It sounded like a gun!”

“We don’t have any guns on Mars though?”

“There’s nobody out here either!”

Rosenberg yawned, and replied, “It has to be something else!”

Rosenberg went back to where he was sleeping and tried to go back to sleep.

Whoever was there had to be crazy or up to something and he realized he might even get the answer to what had brought them down there and decided to investigate it.

He silently crept away, and tried to creep up on whoever it was to observe them and realized that if there was someone there that they surely had to have left traces of themselves, as there was sand everywhere and there had to be footprints or something.

It felt silly looking for someone there, in such a desolate place, where nobody should be! He could not realize who was there and just accepted that they might be trying to do something! Perhaps it was the shuttle they wanted, as it was priceless and its technology highly confidential on the Earth.

It had to be located in the coldest and most remote place on Mars, and its southern pole! Even in the summer the place was deadly cold without the spacesuits!

As far as he was concerned there was nothing to be there for! The hidden coldness around him at times made him cringe, and he, almost blindly, rushed on to where the sound came from, and for some reason when he reached a specific region he realized it had to be where the noise came from.

Suddenly a loud explosion blasted out and a bullet thudded somewhere nearby and he automatically switched off his light and ran through the darkness for his life!

He dared not use his light now and he could barely see, and regularly tripped up and continued!

He realized that he could have an infrared filter on is faceplate, to see in the dark, and he searched for the switch to activate it, and realized it was a different version that had it, and he just dived into a pile of sand behind some rocks, and hid himself. Surely he would not be found there, and he had not left any footprints nearby and had changed direction a few times!

Once he realized that nothing was happening he started to enjoy the rest and being free from being attacked, and he considered how to get back to the others, and if it was actually safe there. His mind raced through what had occurred! Yet he only realized that the location that he strolled into had to have something, and he started to wonder what was there.

Who would go to such lengths to kill him? What could possibly be there? What could be there in such a desolate place? Was there another space vehicle there?

Suddenly he saw something buried in a region of the darkness to his side, and he shifted behind a large boulder at his side and hid from there, and his heart leapt as he studied the dark spacesuit figure shifting lifelessly forward, and it shifted out from the darkness into where some starlight was beaming down, and he studied the figure not realizing what would happen!

He felt like moving away from the figure but he would be spotted for one, and he studied the gun and it looked like an old one, and he wondered who the hell was there and where he had got the spacesuit and gun, and noticed that the spacesuit was an old version.

There was something strange there that he could not grasp and he studied everything over and over trying to grasp something, going over everything he could think of, and it was like there was something there that should not be there, but it was there!

He studied the spacesuit faceplate and could not see through the dark shiny material, and the figure never reacted, and he wondered what would happen if he rushed towards it

He sensed he could do something stupid and he studied the faceplate of the spacesuit more and more, and stood back shocked!

He thought he saw a skeleton, and it moved away, and realized that there usually was a name on most spacesuits, even the old ones, and he tried to see it and though saw it he could not see the letters properly, and as it vanished into the darkness he thought he saw it said Anderson.

He was confused, trying to work out what they should do, and what it might do, and what could happen!

When he finally returned to where the others were he soon found the other two astronauts at exactly where they had been, but noticed that their positions had altered as though they had done something and returned to where they had been.

While he rested over the ground he wondered what the hell an astronaut, or even a ghost astronaut, was trying to shoot him, or what he was actually doing, and realized again that the shuttle was unbelievably valuable and worth it, but why had they not just taken it, as they never had guns, and he realized they might be just after its technology and he considered if they could take it without them suspecting it.

 

Chapter 5

 

The First Death

 

Once the sun rose above the horizon Cronenberg went out and explored where the other astronaut had been and was surprised that there were no marks anywhere, and found where he himself had been there and where he had been behind the boulders and found his own footsteps in the sand.

He searched everywhere and started to think he had imagined it, and he examined the hill over at his side in the sunlight and realized it would be quick to climb and decided to go up and explore the region from the top, as he had intended.

If he needed the others he would return and go back up, and he quickly climbed up and at the top stood staring at the fascinating view, with Mars stretching out into the horizon all about him, and he spotted the shuttle, and spotted a large short message beside it, written in the sand and with boulders, with a SOS message, showing their destination and they had crashed, and he was sure the satellites would spot it, and most could spot any changes in the landscape and environment and detect anything unusual and take close up photos, which would be sent back to the base – and they would be looking for it after the communications stopped!

He examined everywhere with powerful binoculars, including where the southern pole was, for anything unusual and for water if they got trapped there but never saw anything and realized they would have to be saved by the others shortly or they would die of oxygen starvation.

Yet as he was about to move away he wondered where the hell the thing that had taken them there was, if it actually existed, and he removed a device he had brought and checked for any traces of it and found nothing and wondered what the hell the outcome of it would be, if they survived, and if he would always wonder what they had encountered there.

When he arrived back where the other two astronauts were he discovered Campbell still asleep and Rosenberg gone, and he began watching Campbell strangely, and his lifeless unmoving figure, and realized that he had not moved since he had left, and he considered if it was just his spacesuit that made him not move, and he started to wonder if there was something wrong and rushed over and showed himself to him, moved up close, and examined his unmoving face and gasped when he saw his hidden mouth expression, as if he was screaming at something.

He firmly shook him, still not believing anything was wrong, and shook him hard, and he unzipped and removed his glove and felt his cold hand and arm for a pulse, and saw his cold lifeless complexion, and was amazed that there was no pulse, and that he had been dead and had not noticed anything.

He searched his spacesuit for any rips or holes, and wondered if it had been a fault in his spacesuit, and he realized that he had best record a message on their camera of the incident and gave a record of the occurrence, and checked the various functions of the spacesuit, and had its computer check him further and was surprised his death had not been oxygen starvation.

In the end he removed his helmet and whole spacesuit and sat back staggered, as large sections of his body were gone, as though something had removed them viciously, as though a wild animal had attacked him.

Suddenly he spotted marks on the ground where something had obviously happened.

Rosenberg suddenly rushed out from behind him and gasped, and crouched over the body, and he observed him examining the body, and fall back with blood covering his gloves.

 

Chapter 6

 

Anders

 

What astounded him was how deadly and vicious whatever it had been was! If it was what had taken them there!

What the hell was it? How could it be so advanced and vicious? Was it some form of alien animal that got its prey with special powers? Yet how did it manage force an entire shuttle into going there and what form of prey did it live on? The planet was virtually empty of life!

In the end he realized he could not believe it without more evidence, and whatever it was it would have to be left until they could check it out.

What also surprised him was that Rosenberg had been away, and looking about like him, since he woke up!

He was also surprised that he had found something hidden away in the distance, which he never knew the identity of, and Rosenberg took him over to a region at the other side of the hill, from where he had gone, and he showed it to him and they examined it with their binoculars, and he realized it was artificial, and that it had been there some time and partially buried in sand, and was hidden behind a small hill from where the shuttle was, and from it being observed from where he had been at the other side of the hill, and on the above hill there.

After examining it he was surprised that it was at about the same distance away as the shuttle and virtual in a straight line with it from there, and just hidden away from it, and he wondered how the hell it could have ended up so close to it. The planet had hardly anything on it and the south pole even more so.

The chances of two objects coming down there was immense, and after examining everything he wondered if it could be just space wreckage. Something from some space station or rocket had been discarded and had fallen there.

Rosenberg wanted to check it, before they returned to the shuttle, and so did he! But their main problem was their oxygen was running out, and they only had a little left, even after taking Campbell’s, and they swiftly left, and left Campbell where he was, for investigators to find him, and they saluted him, at where he was, and went away from the hill wondering what had happened.

When they finally approached the place they both started to gasp as they realized that they had lost more air than they had thought they would, and Cronenberg even thought his last tank was empty a dozen times, and felt like collapsing, and he approached the site struggling to focus on what was there, seeing a distorted form of the sun, shimmering around, and he again adjusted the hot temperature that built up in his spacesuit, and wondered what had happened to its stability and ability to control its temperature, and he realized it could be him, and his struggle to get there faster, and he sighed as his spacesuit adjusted and he felt its coolness cool his body, with ecstatic pleasure.

The site looked incredible as they staggered into the area, a miniature valley, and crater in the landscape, hidden at three sides from areas further out, and only visible from where they had seen it on the hill.

It had resemblances to volcanic desert region and Rosenberg started analyzing and taking soil samples about him, while he inspected what was there and found the wreckage of a space vehicle, and on a closer approach he saw that most of it was buried in the ground, and had structural damage from an explosion, and fire.

The heat from the explosion had had more of an effect on it than he had realized further out! Things somehow took a different perspective than the damage of a normal fire.

He asked Rosenberg for his advice, recalling Rosenberg was experienced in space vehicles, as well as being one of the flight engineers like Campbell was, and he had some experience in the old stuff.

They rushed around and investigated everything, thoroughly.

Cronenberg examined it in detail and half-heartedly observed the soil and rocks – while looking out for traces of anything within the layers of ground.

Rosenberg examined things, as swiftly as he could, clearly running out of air and trying to quickly finish the investigation so they could rush away to the shuttle.

Suddenly he yelled out and Cronenberg rushed over and found him standing next to a partially buried spacesuit, stuck in the sand, with the top part resting over boulders, and they examined the helmet faceplate and Cronenberg lifted it up and saw a skeleton inside and he followed its stare going up into the Martian sky, and he read the nameplate on the suit, and realized it his name was Anders, and he recalled his name.

“Did he not go missing?” Rosenberg gasped.

“Years ago! They never found where he went …”

He recalled reading about it when he was younger, and him thinking of becoming an astronaut.

“This place is incredible!” Rosenberg announced. “What are the chances of two space vehicles coming down here?”

He nodded back amazed and examined the rocket vehicle, and wondered what it had been like, and Rosenberg rushed away and continued his investigation of the crash site.

Cronenberg started examining the pockets and contents of the spacesuit and was surprised at how preserved the things were and that one of the items was an old map, with names and locations on it, which clearly had been used a lot by Anders, and he studied the area on it and realized it was the area they were at.

 

Chapter 7

 

The Rescue

 

While they marched swiftly back to the shuttle Cronenberg kept going over the events trying to piece them together but he could not grasp something! Something hidden or obvious! Some clue that they had not noticed!

The heat from bright sun shining straight into their faces, through the thin atmosphere, resembled the blazing sun in space, with its high radiation, and it exhausted them, especially with lower level oxygen they had altered their spacesuits to.

He thought of Anders and the way his body had been resting and his stare and he looked there now, to the location in space, and was surprised to see the Earth.

What surprised him was another large object raced passed it, and faster than it should go, and he slowed, shaded his eyes, and struggled to focus on it, covering up a distorted form of the sun, shimmering around, and he recalled where his spacesuit helmet’s polarization adjustment was and adjusted the polarized faceplate to compensate for the extra light, and started studying the object’s incredible velocity and shape, and even thought it looked like a small alien spaceship.

When Rosenberg stopped and stood dazed he knew it was something big, and when he rested he realized its true identity and that it was one of their shuttles, and they both rushed on.

Their speed increased vastly and he knew he would not die before they reached the shuttle, and knew he had to go faster, and he was surprised when they got over a hill and saw their shuttle was resting at the bottom, and they watched the other shuttle come down from the sky and land next to their shuttle, and they ran down the hill as fast as they could, not wishing to miss anything and to get a new supply of fresh air.

At the shuttle he was so out of air and suffocating that he ordered them to get him into the shuttle, where he removed his helmet and collapsed over the floor, recovering from the run, and breathed the incredible air in, and Rosenberg copied him, and he realized how wonderful it was not to have the helmet on, after sleeping in it, and he studied the amused face of Stanley sitting in at his pilot chair, and he wondered what had happened while they had been away.

He was surprised beer cans were lying over the floor, and tried to work out where they came from, and if anything had occurred.

“Did you manage to contact the base?” he panted, curiously, breathing in the sweet air, seeing the remains of the food they had been eating, and discarded food containers lying about the floor.

“So you made it …!” Stanley murmured, grinning at him, and at the state he was in, lying over the floor.

“When did you know that the shuttle was coming?”

“Just before you arrived! It was lucky! Our oxygen is starting to get real low!”

“Whose idea was the SOS message over the ground?”

“That was Orwell! He claimed he had seen it done before! And calculated the size it had to be to see from up in orbit! We all worked on making it!”

“It worked! Any food?”

The pilot jumped up and removed a container of food he knew he liked, and gave it to him, and got a drink dispenser!

He watched Cronenberg and Rosenberg sitting on the floor eating through the food hungrily.

“Where’s Campbell?”

Cronenberg gasped and nearly choked, and saw Rosenberg look startled, and watched the others look up with looks of astonishment, knowing something had happened.

“We found him dead!” Rosenberg announced. “Something here kills humans! When we woke we found his body and that he had been partly eaten!”

“What! Something ate him! And neither of you heard anything?”

“The spacesuit and the thin atmosphere don’t carry much sound, and we were heavily asleep in our spacesuits!”

They all seemed to consider what had happened astonished!

“Perhaps that’s what took us here! To eat us!” Lyndon gasped.

“What did you see over there on that hill?” Stanley asked, curiously, examining them, and the state they were in.

“I saw little!” Cronenberg confessed.

“Where you there early in the morning?” Stanley asked.

“Yes!” he replied.

“I thought I saw you! I got up early! The top part is visible from over there!”

“Find anything else? Why did you come from over there …?” Lyndon asked

“We found another space vehicle over there!”

“Where did you find it?”

“He found it!” Cronenberg pointed at Rosenberg.

Rosenberg replied, “I searched the other side of the hill! I saw it over there, hidden away … It was in a direct line with here!”

They looked at him confused, wondering what it was.

“We found a crashed space vehicle there! It was an old rocket spaceship! We found two pilots! One was called Anders!”

“I recall him!” Stanley replied first. “He vanished with another astronaut on Mars years ago!”

As Cronenberg thought of Anders he realized he had looked identical to the ghost astronaut he had seen in the night over at the hill, which he had searched for signs of in the morning before he climbed up the hill, and he wondered what the hell it meant, and he decided not to mention it unless there was more evidence of whatever it was existing.

They all looked up and watched pilots from the other shuttle enter their shuttle, and them examining everything about them, and one trying to check the damage done to the shuttle.

Cronenberg got up and watched one at work, and recalled him, and his job, and realized he was the best person for the job.

“You’re Commander Cronenberg! What happened before you landed here?” he asked, curiously.

“Something attacked the shuttle and took control of it!”

He looked up, and stared at him with surprise.

“Are there flights records that can confirm that?”

“And we can to!”

He looked confused, wondering what it could be.

“Wait until you see the other space vehicle …!” he told him, still amazed at the find.

“What other vehicle is that?”

He pointed over in the direction of it, and replied, “Did you not see it while landing? It’s away over there!”

“What could it be?”

“Anders! Remember him! It’s an old rocket vehicle …”

“I remember him! What do you think he was doing out here?”

“I don’t have a clue!” he announced, and he thought about it and realized how intrigued he was, and realized he really wanted to know, and what was there and what was going on there, and why he had seen a ghost astronaut.

Cronenberg went over to Orwell, the shuttle science officer, to see what he had.

“Did you get anything on what happened to the shuttle, and how it came down here?”

“A few things! It sure as hell was not the shuttle itself. I checked records, and also proved it could not have done what it had. There had to be something else that did it!”

It surprised him that he was also questioning what had happened had happened! He also realized Orwell knew that they were also going to have a problem explaining what had happened to them. Would they accept what they told them, and if they did not what would they do about it?

He could try to get a full investigation, as they had been nearly killed, and the highly expensive shuttle could have been destroyed, and it might cost a lot to get it properly repaired.

“There was a strange magnetic phenomenon detected …!” Orwell gasped.

“I wonder what that could be …” he asked, confused, copying one of the rescuers investigating it, to see what he replied with.

“Something of incredible magnitude created a form of powerful magnetic influence, or something of that nature!”

“What could create such power? It had to be tremendous!”

“Someone may have been playing around with something somewhere! I was thinking if it was not from around, as we have seen, then something could have created it somewhere else, by some unknown means!”

“Why would they be experimenting on something out there though? Could it be the southern pole creating a magnetic influence?”

“How could it have controlled the shuttle and carried out what it did!” he moaned, confused. “Someone may be playing around with something in this region!”

“Why would they be experimenting on something out here though?”

“Perhaps they’re creating something big to influence Mars itself!”

“In what way?”

“They could want to alter Mars!” he mumbled to himself. “If they could move it close to the sun or use it to melt all the ice here they might be able to create immense lakes of water and create an atmosphere. They might be able to colonize it one day!”

The idea surprised Cronenberg and he realized that he might even be suggesting it was a secret government or group of governments plan, and he considered why it would be so secretive.

“What are your assumptions?” Orwell uttered, breaking the deep silence, seeing him thinking it over.

“I’ve not drawn any proper conclusions!” he confessed, considering how he could check if it would work. “Whatever it is – it has incredible power! We need more reasonable clues.”

“Even with all our technology, unknown and unexplained phenomena still exists! Who knows what exists out there in the depths of space – and even unseen about us – which could very well be beyond our detection methods and comprehension.”

Some strange thought was going through Orwell’s mind and he was figuring through possibilities and Cronenberg could not fully understand why his view of things had so vastly altered and he wondered what had happened when he was away.

He also occasionally had the look of a person who somehow sensed an oncoming consequence, and was checking ways to tackle it.

Had he found something? Or had he dreamed of scientific finds far too many times?

“At any rate, there might be other mentions of such occurrences on the Earth!” Orwell continued. “Even if most are antiquated and mythological! For instance there are zones like the Bermuda Triangle! Which was reputed to cause a similar effect – before ships and planes vanished! There could be some sort of mass of something around – perhaps a mass of magnetic iron …! Our detection methods on Mars and even the Earth may be small, and far smaller than we think …The magnetic field of the globe has been found to have altered in many ways over Earth’s existence!”

Orwell searched his face, wondering what he thought, and Cronenberg was sure he was thinking of questioning and getting answers from him.

“I have not heard of it properly doing anything though!” Orwell replied. “Though not altogether investigated – it is very unlikely to have such an intensity and nature – even in northern regions …”

“Okay!” he replied firmly, determined to force Orwell into giving him something. “It’s coming from somewhere and we all know it exists … And it will be beneficial to check the disturbance – which cannot be explained by normal science – and find what we can on it.”

“I’ll attempt to find out if someone had something around here, or was using something capable of doing it!”

“Did you find anything while I was away?” he finally replied.

“I checked all the records and found one thing and just before it took control of the shuttle something appeared and flashed on and off, and was just recorded, which I think was unintentional, and I took a photo of the unusual formation, which was buried away in the blur of flickers!”

Cronenberg was surprised when he produced a photo of a complex sphere, which was clearly artificial and of a highly advanced nature, and he realized it looked of highly advanced alien origins!

 

Chapter 8

 

The Lost Library

 

Eventually, after hours of searching records, Cronenberg entered Base One library, after being given recommendations to go there, and glared at vast bookshelves, covering the library walls, as he entered, and gasped at how empty of people it was.

It amazed him that such libraries once were the source of information for the human race, and as he approached the books it became clear that it had a great deal of unidentifiable information, and he put it down to laziness that the stuff had not been added to the computers.

At first he had dismissed that there was a library, as the others had not been aware of there being a book on the entire base.

He had just grabbed some books and sat down when Orwell marched in smiling, and marched up to him and sat next to him.

“I saw you coming in here at the end of the corridor!” he laughed, and picked up a book off the table, at his side, and flickered through the pages. “What you looking for?”

“I’ve checked everything about Anders everywhere and have not found anything!” he moaned back.

“Anders!” he replied, surprised. “What do you want to know about him for?”

“Why was he there, for starters? It’s an incredible coincidence he crashed at the exact same place, in a desolate region covering such a vast region, and it was one of the only crashes on Mars!”

“You’re correct! What’s the connection though? Why do you think he was there, anyway?”

Cronenberg just shrugged back.

The furniture about him held his attention, and amused him, and was clearly used to make it look like an original Earth library, to give it authenticity, like many of the rooms and objects about the station, to give it the look of a normal place, as the astronauts had to live there for a long time, and stay indoors, without seeing a normal world.

The vast size of Base One was incredible now, and had been slowly built up over decades, with many countries helping build sections, and them wanting to increase the inhabitants on Mars, and explorations there and in space. It was as though they were on the Earth most of the time, even after being there for years! The military and police had recently been increased to compensate for increases in the inhabitants!

It was now like a small town, in a strange place, and Cronenberg kept realizing how little he knew of the inhabitants, as many he had never seen, and many left and many were new there, and he realized how little of it he had actually seen.

He still regularly returned to the Earth and visited places like where he had been born and the people he knew back there!

The library now had the look of an ancient study, and he started examining bookshelves, and he even wondered if the books were mostly all too old.

The furniture there grasped his attention as it looked expensive, and he realized that they had lowered the production costs and amount of materials used in the furniture about the base, and he was surprised at the quality of it and how far they had lowered the quality and he realized the seats and other furniture there were also far more comfortable and usable. It gave the whole room an atmosphere that was not elsewhere and he considered trying to use it in his apartment at the base and considered where he could get it and if it was still available there.

He soon started examining bookshelves searching for anything on Anders, astronauts, things of that era he was in, and he and Orwell worked away for hours searching, and started speeding their search up and he soon realized that there was nothing there, and he slowly grew depressed and started trying to consider other methods of getting what he wanted.

It was then he spotted a closed door at a hidden part of the library, which had ignored as it had looked like another entrance into the outer corridors or just a locked storeroom.

On his close approach he realized it was something else and grabbed at its stiff brass handle, and felt it had been that way for a long time, and he realized how long the place had gone unused and how aged it was, and he gave the door a hard jerk to make it budge, and it creaked open, and a black switch became faintly visible on an interior white wall and he activated the lights, which flickered and grew bright.

It took a few seconds for the sight before him to sink in, and he stood steady, glaring at shelves of books there, covering its walls, realizing that they were far more different and what he was looking for.

It was clear it was a small room of information about Mars and its history, and detailed information that was not available elsewhere and on the computers, and he found official documents about the base and bases, findings about Mars, explorations, and astronauts, and he started searching for information about Anders and Orwell joined him, and he was surprised at how interested in it Orwell became after reading it.

They started to realize most of the stuff had been classified stuff that they would not have been allowed to read, due to their low classified status, as their line of work never warranted it, and the stuff had declassified stamped on most of it and that the rest had been declassified without stamps, and they sat for hours at a table there examining the fascinating stuff they never knew existed and had occurred.

They were even to astonished at some of it to mention it to each other, and they realized the mistake they had made in leaving the material there for anyone to read, as they clearly had not fully read through it all, and it mentioned things that were still classified, and about their introduction, with them only missing out things of what their current state was, and some of it gave away stuff that had been highly illegal and deadly, of a military nature, which they surely had been breaking laws creating, and it gave away the nature of their current classified material.

He searched for anything at the region that they had crashed at and anything they worked on or had found that could have caused what had happened, and of what Anders had been doing there, as he suspected he had been doing something there.

He even thought, after reading one paper on some military research, that they had created something there!

He jolted when Orwell called out that he had found something and he dropped what he had and rushed over!

If an answer to what existed actually existed he knew that it could well be there! Even though most of it seemed to be only outdated.

What he found was about Anders and his disappearance and he collected all the material he could find on it to read afterwards, and they searched everything that they could, and he scribbled down notes about what he found, and added any interesting facts that he noticed, and he grew determined to do something and carry out his mission. If he could find out more about Anders, and what subjects he had been interested in and had been doing, and doing there, he might be able to discover what he had been like and what he had been doing when they crashed.

He started to consider that they might have something over there, at the southern pole, and that it was still highly classified, and that they might find suggestions of something from before it was created, and perhaps what had led to its introduction.

 

Chapter 9

 

The Lost Treasure

 

Cronenberg reluctantly dragged himself away from all the files he was studying, which he had been going through for many hours, for over a week, and he watched Orwell march in the library, for the first time in days.

Orwell was still fascinated at why he was so obsessed with searching the information, and only seemed to turn up occasionally answer it, and seemed be trying to answer other unanswered questions, and he believed that he wished to know what had nearly killed them and took control of the shuttle, and why, and perhaps why they survived. What had the whole episode been about? Nothing seemed to add up!

“Come over here …!” he called out to Orwell, and Cronenberg moved over to the end of the table and removed a pile of files, and returned to where he was and dumped there.

“What are they of?”

“I’ve put together everything with the information I want on the table, and all the files about Anders and things associated with him and that site, and I’m going through it all searching for the slightest clues …”

“What’s the point? You’ve searched through the main stuff though!”

Cronenberg had realized that he would have to let someone else in on what he was doing, as he could not do everything himself, and was sure that he could answer stuff he could not, and he had checked him out everywhere, and he knew him more than anyone else there.

A glance into the main library showed it was empty, and he listened to the deep silence, and he listened into the deepest depths of the base, and outer corridor, once again, and it showed him that there were still only workmen building a new ceiling in a nearby apartment, replacing an original ceiling, with modern materials.

The wires from the electrics had rot and webs over them, and had been easily broken, and were in bits on the floor, and he had studied the room and people.

He had been surprised that spiders actually existed at the base years before, and must have been in things brought to Mars.

“So what is it?” he asked Cronenberg, sitting at his side. “If you find something you’ll have to let it out eventually!”

“I think Anders was looking for valuable diamonds!”

Orwell gasped and his face showed he was startled by the final reply, and he sat thinking it over, and then looked confused, and finally asked, “What makes you think he was looking for them?”

“I’ve found various things … I still have not proven anything though! But I believe that was why he was there! And it made him the only person in history to steal a rocket vehicle, with such an expense, right under their noses!”

“Ah! He stole that vehicle, with another astronaut …”

“Who, according to this, they both managed to cover up where they went, but crashed in the end, and they even thought he got away with it, which was why they never searched here for him! They believe he could have been working for another government and had taken it and its highly advanced technology for them – as they might have not been able to get hold of anything on it!”

Cronenberg removed a document that he had marked and handed it over to him, and he started looking for another.

Orwell read it swiftly, examining things, and put it down over the table, thinking about the stuff in it, and Cronenberg handed part of an old newspaper with part of the story in it, showing where they believed the vehicle had been taken.

“What he was after must have been incredibly valuable?” he silently moaned to himself. “Are you sure it was diamonds?”

For a moment he never seemed to accept the space vehicle had been taken – not believing such a fact. But the official documents confirmed what had occurred, and he had not seen such documents and information being wrong.

“There is still a small chance it could have been something else though?” he finally confessed.

Cronenberg just nodded in agreement.

“Are you saying the diamonds are at where they crashed?”

“That’s what I’m searching for! If only we can find something on it! We need a location!”

Cronenberg never said anything of the map he had found in Anders pocket, and a mention of diamonds on it, and though he had not found the location on it he decided to try and keep it that way, if he could.

“So you think we should start looking for it?”

“If we find a more accurate location!”

 

Chapter 10

 

The Investigation

 

Cronenberg could not believe the police investigation into Campbell’s death! The strange way they had approached it was unbelievable and surreal! And it left him gasping at what would happen, as they insisted he was killed, and they believed there were no animals outside the base.

How could an animal or anything live there? He and Rosenberg had a hard time explaining what had happed to them!

There had been barely a killing in space or there, and the crime was low, and it was mainly made up of scientists and other professionals working there.

He was baffled! What the hell had killed the flight engineer, and how had it made it into his spacesuit?

There was only one explanation and it was what had taken them to the destination! Yet what the hell could be that advanced and that savage? And why had it only attacked him?

Orwell soon started asking questions, after he told him of what occurred, and he wanted his thoughts on it.

His first question was, “Who found him dead?”

“I did!”

“He managed to stay alive until the morning?”

“We were with him up until the morning! And I’m sure nothing happened while we slept …”

“When was the last response or movement you saw from him?”

“It was at night when we went to sleep! We hardly moved while sleeping in the spacesuits!”

Cronenberg avoided telling him and them about the ghost astronaut he had seen, as it was not linked to the incident, and he was now unsure if he had imagined it.

“How did he die?”

“He looked as if he had been eaten by something!”

If it had been one of the others in the shuttle, who had followed them there, and how could the person have done it? They had been in a group!

And it could only have been done while Rosenberg was away investigating the other side of the hill! He believed there was something out there, which had to be with what had taken them there or it was it itself, which he had explained to the police, and he had told Orwell and he agreed it could have been, as what had happened to the shuttle was far stranger and difficult to occur.

He realized that he only needed to explain what it had been, and he realized it might have taken samples of Campbell’s body for some reason, and he wondered why.

Had this infernal place a killer alien or not? Yet why would it want anything from him?

Still nothing about it made sense – and neither did anything else there – it was obvious it could have attacked all of them.

From the looks that he caught from the police he knew that the incident had affected them! The police were now aggressive! And he was sure that they had not found any other clues.

His killer, whatever it was, had to be ruthless and carefree to have done it in the way that it had been done it.

He wondered if something was on the southern pole that did not need proper supplies of oxygen, and had been there from when Mars had an atmosphere and water, and had adapted to survive in the harsh climate!

Fish survived with barely any oxygen in water, and lived off miniature life forms, he wondered if it had tried what they had been like as a food supply, and he wondered if it liked it!

Yet that was fantasy, and they had not found anything like it, and why had they not found anything like it and what would it have normally have consumed? Yet was a big planet and they had hardly explored the surface and there was water and life forms that froze and dried out and returned to life, including plants …

He and Orwell marched along a corridor to the library, for their regular visit and they occasionally looked into rooms with their doors open, as it interested them what people were like there.

“It’s also incredible,” Orwell muttered, “that most of the people that investigated the body thought it was some form of animal!”

They then entered the library, and he asked Cronenberg, “Have you found anything else?”

“I found a photo of a newspaper article of Anders, found in his apartment, about a scientist that found something, which I’m sure was the diamonds … I’ve been trying to trace information about him and what he was doing.”

 

Chapter 11

 

The Deaths

 

It was almost a week later when he saw Orwell again and he thought he had lost interest and was glad to see him and was surprised that he had been searching elsewhere in his spare time, and had arrived with some news.

Cronenberg search in the library had just about become exhausted when he saw him enter the outer library, marching over to him, and he studied him trying to see what he was up to.

“What you got?” he swiftly asked.

“There’s been another death!” Orwell replied, making Cronenberg gasp.

“What happened?”

“The person was found in the same condition as Campbell! Large regions of the body were eaten! And they’ve found Campbell was definitely eaten in the same way.”

Cronenberg was confused, and wondered what was going on about, as the day earlier he had found declassified material in the library showing similar attacks and deaths at the base and that they had covered it up.

“I’ve also found stuff on deaths here!” he replied, and flicked through a pile of documents he had at the end of the table, and handed him over two documents about it, which were of deaths occurring there over a decade, five years from then.

Orwell searched through it in surprise, and stood confused, staring a section of one document.

“In one case they were unable to find out if it was an animal or human!” he finally replied, and put the document down.

“We could have been followed there, by someone?”

“Or there are things of Mars that kill? They might have been covered up? They might not have declassified the stuff!”

Cronenberg nodded his head, and agreed it could be the answer and he wondered why they had not been warned by some means about there be a possibility of them being there, and he gasped when he realized that they could enter the base.

“Found anything new about the diamonds then?” Orwell finally asked, after a few minutes of stunned silence, with Cronenberg realizing he could have been the one.

“Yes!” he replied, firmly, searching through another pile of documents, and pulling documents out.

“What you go there?”

“I found stuff on the scientist that found the diamonds! It seems he was working with a new satellite, at the time, that could magnify into areas of the Earth and Mars far greater and clearer than before, and he was the first to use it on Mars! I think he found the diamonds with it!”

“From up in orbit! I never knew that could be done!”

“I reckon he knew where to look for diamonds and that he discovered them!”

“So if we managed to get the use of it we could explore the area where the shuttle went down for them …”

“Or where the diamonds may be under the ground …”

“I’ve not heard of any diamonds being found on Mars yet!”

“Exactly! And their value would be great!”

 

Chapter 12

 

The Satellite

 

Cronenberg could not believe the length Orwell went to find and get the use of the satellite, and he was sure they were now being watched by security agents, and was sure the satellite was still highly classified, even after decades, and perhaps vastly improved and used for some military purposes.

He was sure that he only gained use of it for them to get what he was up to, and he realized why they had started watching Anders, and he had also highly illegally taken an expensive classified space vehicle.

Orwell had updated himself on where to look for diamonds, and techniques used to locate them, and he searched the region where the shuttle had gone down.

Cronenberg was invited to join them and welcomed it and he became sure they had little on them other than they were trying to use the satellite for a project, and if they found the diamonds, they were an interest to science and their missions there anyhow.

They used it to search everywhere they could on and around the hill, searching there in such incredible detail that he was sure he would never think he was not being watched outside again. It was incredible and he managed to examine where the shuttle had come down, and the massive amount of footstep and vehicles marks left there, and where the shuttle had been and had been repaired and taken away, and he studied where Anders had been, and the remains of the rocket, which had been dug up and examined, with its interior searched.

He realized it was the ultimate way of searching for it, as he could search everything there, hill by hill, but realized that where the diamonds had been may now be buried deep beneath the sand, but the area looked unchanged to him, and the sand was not as deep as it seemed, and he proved that they could not be properly hidden away.

Eventually he returned to finish the last of his research in the library, and searching through the last of the documents.

What was peculiar was he somehow sensed that there was something missed out in the documents! So he was not surprised when he found it, and it was hidden away in the last of the documents, and it was a document about security services watching Anders’s wife and he was sure they believed he intended to meet her at some point, and it never happened, and he found a photographed letter from her to him, which was her last letter to him from the Earth to him on Mars, which mentioned his search for something, which he was sure was the diamonds, and that he intended to return to the Earth for good, and it mentioned the map and Anders’s belief that the scientist, who actually was the astronaut with him, had recorded the location wrongly.

Cronenberg discovered suggestions that the map, which had been made by the scientist, had more information hidden on it, and Anders thought he was up to something!

 

Chapter 13

 

The New Mission

 

For an instant Cronenberg thought he could die a hideous death, and he even considered what it would be like being a ghost trapped out there on the desolate world.

They had to land! Soon! Surely they should not take the risk continuing to fly to their destination at night! The shuttles were still new and the repairs on theirs was only recently completed and they were trying it out for the first time, and testing it for the first time over Mars, and he was sure they had hardly even tested the thing out before they had given them it back!

Loud explosions and flashes had suddenly appeared from somewhere out in the dark Martian night sky, and had sent the whole shuttle shaking about, and he realized it had to be some form of storm, created by the weak Martian atmosphere, and he heard the other astronauts talking about it and announce it was, from the information from their equipment.

The entire crew was the same except for Campbell who was replaced by Deputy Commander James Mitchell as the new head flight engineer, and who incredibly resembled Campbell, and had the same experience and was an astrophysicist/planetary geologist, and was being helped by Rosenberg the other flight engineer, and they were all basically checking the performance of the shuttle and findings the new detection equipment aboard gathered, especially in the unexplored regions they were entering.

He realized the shuttle might not be designed for the storm and it could be far different from Earth storms, and have incredible wind speeds, and he realized the shuttle could go down and again crash on the surface of Mars.

Though he could not imagine the empty atmosphere coming out with a powerful wind, even though a high speed wind could be generated, and he considered what had actually taken them down the last time.

The sky outside, over the space vehicle, was so peculiar and strangely colored that he was sure that it was no longer in the universe, and at the outer limits of the universe, floating outside it somewhere.

The problem with the mission was that they were ordered to stick to the route they were given no matter what, and he realized that if they were confronted by a storm ahead that they would go straight through it.

He recalled the shuttles were now shielded to stop anything, after being taken down at the Antarctica the last time, and they thought it would stop anything taking control of the shuttles, and he thought it might help protect them from the powerful energy disturbances in the outer storm.

He switched on a small powerful light over him, to properly see the booklet he was given with his orders and the mission described on it, and he stared out one of the windows at the surrounding darkness, and into visible stars there, and started properly examining the details in the booklet to see if he was missing anything he should know.

It was the perfect time of the year for the mission, for it to be light enough in the Artic and Antarctica, and the mission was for all twenty shuttles to go to and assemble at the Martian Antarctica, going there at their different sections, and the first sections to leave would cover the current daylight region of the world, would do their first scan, and a practice scan of Mars from the Artic to the Antarctica – as all the shuttles were to scan a section of Mars from the top to the bottom, over many months, and they would all scan an equal amount of Mars, and map it in more detail than had ever been done before, giving people the ability to study anything on the surface of the world back on the Earth, and someday people on the Earth would completely explore the whole of Mars!

They had to properly check all the shuttles were working and giving them the exact information they needed, and satellites would make sure they followed the exact routes and control them.

If successful it could be used to explore many worlds and moons, and in other solar systems, and he wondered if someday they would replace them with computers, and create the ultimate probe voyager that would scan entire worlds.

It was an incredible piece of luck for them as they were getting to scan every square foot of the world and they could use it to find the diamonds there, at whatever location they were at.

He was positive it was located at the southern pole though and he was starting to believe it could be at the pole itself, and Orwell had agreed and they had eagerly joined the new mission.

The world that they were exploring was like it had no sun, and it was like there were billions of light years of space between them and the nearest stars.

 

Chapter 14

 

The South Pole

 

Something startled Cronenberg, when he stepped out the shuttle and stepped onto the south pole, and he struggled to grasp what as he focused on the bright sun, over the Martian horizon at the side of the shuttle, and he gasped as he watched the glowing landscape.

Other shuttles were resting behind the shuttle and he saw that five were still landing, making it all twenty being there.

Something staggered him about the mission and he sensed something was going to occur, and he shivered, and examined the ice around him, and that it was hard and had been there a long time, and he realized how ancient the world was.

He saw the sun edge its way along the horizon, and he realized he could not avoid whatever he was going to encounter! He had to go through with everything! He believed he could survive if he did everything he could and avoided making any deadly mistakes!

The world about them was a flat stretch, with occasional large asteroid dents.

“What a place?” Orwell finally moaned, and tried laughing, and moved close to him, and Cronenberg watched him, wondering what he was talking about.

“There’s something not right about this mission!” Cronenberg confessed, considering if he could give him anything that he might have missed.

He realized it could be just Mars affecting them! It was the new things and hidden dangers there! It was exploring where nobody had been before, and the great deadly environment and mistakes they could make being somewhere with such an environment for so long! The region they were in was the least explored!

It was the legendary Martian Antarctica, and he still sensed there was something strange there! Something he had not encountered before! Something that could only exist in such a place, and in the depths of space, and it gave him chilling and weird sensations, but he could not grasp what, and he wondered if he was destined to die on the remote world.

As the shuttles completely turned silent he watched the rest of the crew rush about observing the whole south pole, and he increasingly felt a presence of something, somewhere, in the chilling distance of the alien world, and it was clear that the five other members of the crew said anything about it.

A silent vibration went through the ground and he expected to hear a sudden explosion sound in the distance, and he knew it was only a tremor, but it gave the world a feeling of being unstable.

All the crew slowly vanished behind the shuttle, over where the main shuttles were, and Orwell walked around its edge to see what was happening, and stood with his mouth open and Cronenberg wondered what it could be and if it was his reaction to nothing, and he went over to him, and he then stood with his mouth open.

All the astronauts from the shuttles, a hundred astronauts, were standing in a group discussing something and he suddenly realized, from their communications from their spacesuit communicators, that it was a search for the diamonds and he wondered how the hell they had heard of them and started watching Orwell and he realized he had to have been behind it.

But he then knew he had not by his reactions! But he had to have unknowingly done it!

He was surprised when two of the other shuttle commanders looked directly at him and started discussing something, and he gasped and realized his luck was vanishing.

Cronenberg marched in close and observed all their spacesuits standing about a central area, where there was a large meteorite boulder, and he anxiously started listening into their communications.

After a few minutes he showed a glint of humor, followed by some sadness, as he realized that they never had any real information about the diamonds he then realized that they could gain knowledge of what they had.

“Are you saying that you think that there’s treasure here too?” one astronaut that had not properly heard them asked with amusement and astonishment, wondering what they were really talking about.

Everyone listened, and some stopped doing things.

“There’s a page missing from this,” one of the astronauts broke in the conversation with, and Cronenberg watched him with astonishment holding a diary.

“Yes, and I found it,” one of the other shuttle commanders, called Tom Eagle, forced himself to reply, walking out of the crowd of astronauts, and he stood in front of them all, and they formed into a crowd in front of him, and Cronenberg and Orwell rushed over and stood at the side of them.

Eagle took the diary and held in up and took the missing page out of his pocket, and continued, “It was on the bottom of the bookshelf, where it was found!”

Cronenberg wondered what the hell he was talking about as he had not heard anything until then and he knew that they had something, and he could sense something was coming, and Eagle even seemed to warn him of it.

Eagle took the page and spread it out in front of him, and all their eyes seemed to go on it at once, and he muttered, “It refers to a clue that the scientist with Anders gave! It says it is on a map that Anders managed to get from him!”

 

Chapter 15

 

The Treasure Hunt

 

Now Cronenberg entirely apprehended how complicated and messed up things had really become, and that things had gone far further than before, which he had originally not been able to accept, and he started disbelieving what he had thought as fact and what was fantasy.

He did not know if he believed there were diamonds as when he read all his notes and checked documents looking for the mention of a diary by the scientist he found nothing and there was even a suggestion there was none and he started to realize that all the information showed little of if the diamonds existed, as there was barely a proven fact in them, and the scientist could easily have been wrong or up to something else, like many of the documents claimed that they wanted the rocket vehicle.

Commander Eagle seemed to have talked every astronaut there into seeking the treasure, even though most were unsure what they were going to find or were even doing, and most seemed to think he was going to take them for himself at some point.

All the shuttles in their sectors had left as the day went on, carrying out their first scan of Mars, as the sun moved over their sectors of Mars, and Cronenberg had finally left to do his, and had sat confused in his seat, examining facts over and over, and realized that Orwell had to have let out the information about the diamonds and the map out, and he could not fully realize what he had intended to do and if he had even deliberately told them to carry out some elaborate plan, but if he had was he crazy doing it or had he made a mistake in depending on Commander Eagle?

He was surprised when Orwell approached him, when the rest of the crew were occupied, and started apologizing for his mistake, and for what Eagle had done, and Cronenberg realized that he had known the shuttle commander before they had gone to Mars, and he recalled it and that they were both connected to other influential people, and at the base.

“What was your agreement?” he asked, confused at what the situation was.

“Well, he is a distant relative of mine!” he replied, surprising Cronenberg, and he watched his face and saw his resemblance.

Orwell rested against a wall, and looked at him.

“I told him only about there being diamonds and we were searching for them! I figured we would have a better chance of finding it, as for starters we only cover one small sector of the area of Mars being checked.”

“You’re correct there! We will have to search through all the stuff recorded …”

“Exactly!” he swiftly replied. “And if we’re not able to find it on the recorded stuff we’ll not get it! But now all of them are searching with their detection equipment, which can’t be used on the map, and could very well spot something …”

He realized that it was a good point and that they could all together detect something, and their chances of finding them alone were low, and he was sure the method the scientist that originally found them had used to get them with the satellite were unknown.

He thought of how long it would take to map the entire world and rested back into his seat, and he wondered what would happen, and if he had really blown it, giving the information Orwell and to every astronaut there, and he realized that Orwell could have made a mistake and that he should have had them looking for something else, and he realized that it was Eagle that had ruined it and he was sure he never realized what he was doing.

He thought over what he had said and realized that Eagle had only known the diamonds were there, and could be found, but he had found the scientist’s diary, and Cronenberg recalled that there had been other libraries at the base, but small ones and were not for the public, and he recalled what he had said and that the diary said it was on the map and he wondered what information was in the diary and wondered if it gave how the scientist had located the diamonds on the satellite.

Cronenberg had searched the map repeatedly for the clue, after he had read a mention of it on Anders’s wife’s letter and he decided to try to find it later and started searching for information on the scientist and other scientists of that time, on his computer, and how they might have hidden it away.

 

Chapter 16

 

The Missing Shuttle

 

Cronenberg was almost asleep when an urgent communication was received and he partially grasped one of the pilot’s urgent voices and he rapidly realized it was something important and started to comprehend what it was to do with!

“Our mission has been cancelled!” Lyndon, the pilot, called out.

“What?” he moaned.

“For the moment! One of the shuttles has just vanished, and they’re starting to search for it!”

“Whose shuttle?” he called back.

“Wait a minute! I’ll ask! Whose shuttle? It’s Commander Eagle’s shuttle!”

Cronenberg gasped and jumped up and saw all their faces lit up, after Eagle’s name was mentioned, and he watched Orwell slowly move over to him, and he considered what to do.

“Tell them we’ll search for it too!” he announced, and he asked them to go to the location where the shuttle was last seen.

He was amazed when he replied, “They’re at the location we went down at!”

“What at the exact location?” he gasped, considering changing the order, considering them crashing down again.

It was a dangerous mission and he just had to go there and investigate what was happening, and he wondered why the hell Eagle had chosen that route, and he realized that the diamonds could be there and hidden at some place he had not noticed.

“It’s not the exact location!” Lyndon replied, looking over at him, and searching his face. “It’s further south!”

After a few minutes considering it he noticed he knew something else, and asked, “Is there any other information, and anything unusual you can find?”

He announced, “We’ve detected the shuttle! I cannot discover if it is damaged but there is no communications from it, and no information from anyone aboard! It seems dead!”

“If you detect anything trying to take control of this shuttle turn back! We cannot afford to crash again! We can go there later!”

“They want to explore what’s there – if nothing happens – and check what’s happened!”

 

Chapter 17

 

The Second Occurrence

 

In the distance he spotted the crashed shuttle, and it rapidly expand in size, and Cronenberg saw their crash site over at their side, and watched the hill he had stood on, where Campbell had died, and he sensed something, even though there was no sign of what had brought them down, as well as Eagle’s shuttle.

When they reached Eagle’s shuttle their acceleration automatically decreased and they flew in a circle around the shuttle, and he spotted damage to the shuttle, and signs that a fire had damaged it, and he saw there were no signs of anyone, or anyone leaving it.

It looked as though it had been brought down the same way as them but had sustained more damage, and he asked Lyndon to try to contact them again, and was immediately replied with there was nothing there to contact.

He struggled to grasp what was there and saw that the whole area was just a flat area of ground, similar to a desert region, with the hill he had stood on behind them and another hill at the same distance in the opposite direction, towards the Antarctica, and where Eagle’s shuttle had come form, and he focused on the deformed sun below the window, as it went along just above the horizon, and he gasped when the pilots announced the other shuttles in their group were arriving, in the distance, and he ordered them to land!

There had to be something there! He wondered if it was the hill after all! It was exactly in the middle between Eagle’s crash site and their crash site!

He looked for the diamonds and anywhere he could see that looked like where they could be and realized he could not see anything, and even wondered if they really existed.

The shuttles were new and recently built and they were still testing them for the first time over Mars!

Something staggered him about the mission and he sensed something was going to occur, and had seen it approaching, with it edging its way towards him, and he felt he could not avoid it! He had to go through with what was going to happen! He believed he could survive if he did everything he could to avoid any serious and deadly mistakes!

He watched the pilots do a perfect landing next to the shuttle, and he put on his spacesuit, and followed Orwell out the shuttle, and marched over to the other shuttle, and he wondered if they were still alive, as it looked like they had landed to fast and hard, as the shuttle looked embedded in the soil.

 

Chapter 18

 

The Second Hill

 

What had he done? Cronenberg completely realized his mistake and gasped, and examined the dark Martian landscape about him, with some amazement, astonished he was on another world!

Out of the silent empty Martian night high-powered rifle blasts were astonishing, especially in the deep darkness engulfing him, threatening to totally blind him! The explosions were so powerful that he believed a powerful explosive was used in the bullets, and again he was staggered that he could hear anything in such a thin atmosphere!

Someone definitely was trying to kill him, and as he rushed furiously away through thick reddish Martian sand, with his legs sinking deep, deeper and deeper in regions, threatening to impede him completely, and even turn to some form of quicksand!

Why he had been so stupid as to leave the shuttle without anyone else, and without saying anything, and even without any form of communications, and he wondered why he kept doing such things on Mars, which he never did on the Earth!

He had left the two shuttles, on his own, and as it was getting dark, and he had entirely underestimated the depth of the sand there, and that there was even anything there, which had impeded his speed for a long time and by the time he reached the hill, in the southerly direction, south of the last hill he had climbed, when they had crashed there.

He had to see the hill as he was sure it was really where there was something, and he was sure it had been where Anders and the scientist had intended to land, and he had known that he would never have a chance to search there again!

More high-powered rifle shots blasted out and hit the ground behind him and he realized how deep the darkness was now, and why he had survived, especially when the person had been close!

His pale cold complexion had entirely altered now and his face was bright red! Sounds of his heavy breathing and outer sounds took strange tones as he started trying to explain what they were, and he strained his eyes trying to see in front of him, and in the darkness he spotted the mountain stone was nearby, and that he would entirely escape the sand there, where he would have to escape from the gunman behind him!

While he rushed furiously on he thought of the injured state the survivors of Eagle’s shuttle crash had been in, and their account of what had landed them there, and he thought of all the things they said, and when he had realized that something had definitely landed them there, as the they had approached from the south, and he had worked out the distance that they had claimed it had taken control of their shuttle, and then the distance it had been taken control of at the other side, as they had approached from the north, and he had worked out where the central point was, and the hill that he was going to had been directly in the middle, and he was sure it was where there was something, and that it had been only able to use its powers on both shuttles at a certain distance, at either side of it.

Though there was no sign of the diamonds being there he was sure they had to be there somewhere, and he wondered what the hell the connection was between them and what had made them crash there.

The solid ground ahead of him increased in size, as he slowly got nearer and nearer, and he considered using his light, by flashing it, to get a brief view of what was fully there, and where to run, but he decided not to as the person would see him and could easily shoot him.

He was sure it had to be someone from one of the other shuttles, as he had the same reactions, and he realized how desperate they had become to get the diamonds and he blamed it all on Eagle and his scheme to get the treasure, and have all the shuttles search and have himself go to that site, and crash.

Something staggered him about the mission and the fact that from the very start he sensed something was going to occur, and had seen something approaching, edging its way towards him, which he knew he could not avoid! He had to go through with it! And he somehow thought he could survive if he did everything he could and avoided a deadly mistake!

It was unexplored Mars! It had new dangers there! It was exploring where nobody had been before, with its great deadly environment with its hidden dangers! The region they were in was the least explored and the great Antarctica!

He could hardly believe he was at the legendary Martian Antarctica, and he still sensed there was something strange there! Something he had not encountered before! Something that could only exist at such a place, out in the depths of space, which might not be able to exist on the Earth, and it gave him an even more chilling sensation of something he could not grasp!

As he accelerated on, closing in on the dark stone of the hill, he increasingly felt a presence of something, somewhere, in the chilling darkness of the alien world around them, which he realized never existed earlier.

Whoever was after him had to be stark raving mad and out for the kill, and was stupid for going to such levels to kill him, as if they found his body, which they would surely discover, as they would find his footsteps in the sand from near the shuttles and would be able to trace him, and the other person’s prints, and there would be someone that noticed the person had not been around, and he could not realize who was there and just accepted that he was trying to kill him to get the diamonds, which might have been detected by them!

The place had to be located in the coldest place he had been in and he detected it in places all about him, and it had the look of being the most remote place! Even in the summer the place was been highly deadly to any form of life!

He could not grasp why the person was so positive that there were diamonds, and could go so far to get them!

The dangers and the coldness made him cringe and blindly rush on through the blinding blackness, almost lost, and he wondered why people took such risks and gambled so far.

A loud explosion blasted out and a bullet thudded somewhere nearby and he had to jump through the sand into the dark landscape for his life! He dared not use his light now, and he could barely see anything!

The man could be heard over to his side behind him and he realized that he could have an infrared sight and was playing with him and when he reached the stone area below the hill he just dived at it and ran as fast as he could into the darkness, going straight to an area of small hills nearby, at the bottom of the hill, and that was covered up from being seen by the gunman, and once there he rushed round a hill and rushed towards one of another five hills, which he chose randomly, and immediately rushed around, and realized he had finally got away from him, and with delight saw many more small stone hills going over to the base of the large main central hill, and randomly kept rushing through different hills, covering up any sign he was there, and made sure his footsteps were not visible and he was not being watched, and he saw the gunman had vanished behind him.

Once he realized that he had escaped he started to enjoy going slower and being free from being attacked, and he thought through what had occurred!

Why would he go to such lengths to kill him? Surely the diamonds were not worth that much? There had to be something else! What else could possibly be there? What could be there in such a desolate place?

Suddenly it was like he recognized the place and mysteriously followed routes through different hills, and was constantly surprised that he knew things were there before he arrived and went around corners, and felt he could find somewhere to hide there and when he finally found a hiding place at the hill itself, in a small tunnel in a large pile of large boulders, and he rushed into the small tunnel going through and around the boulders until he reached the hill itself and found himself surrounded by a small hidden cavity, where he hid, and faced outwards, buried away in the boulders, seeing if he could see anything, and checked for any gaps in the boulders, and when he found there were no holes or places light could escape he turned on his light and quickly checked his oxygen supply, and spare tanks, and realized he could escape in the morning, before it was light, and realized the person would eventually return to the shuttles, if he never found him, as he saw the person never had extra oxygen tanks.

He rested and started going over everything and what had happened and he wondered if something else was occurring that he never knew of, and why they had been so determined to get the diamonds as there was no real proof of the diamonds existing, anyway, and he had seen the diary Eagle had, which had belonged to the scientist, and the diary had virtually nothing in it as far as he was concerned, and he recalled Eagle mentioning that that the location was hidden away on the map and he realized that Orwell had to have told him, and convinced him there was definitely something there, but Orwell never knew of the map, and he had not told anyone, and he had been sure Eagle thought he had it, and he recalled that someone did know he had it, and it was Rosenberg, as he had seen him take it out of Anders’s spacesuit!

 

Chapter 19

 

The Light in the Night

 

Cronenberg’s dreams were strange and as though he was floating through mist, which shifted about beneath him, and he never recognized anything, and he was too tired to awaken, and he observed it all with amusement, and an annoying whispering sound that he kept listening to, from some unseen place, which sounded artificial when he firmly listened.

The events of the past days haunted him and he kept wondering where things were going, and it was incredible as he had not done anything like it in years, and even then it was nothing like it!

Lights twinkled through thick areas of mist on the horizon. A bright light suddenly appeared, deep in the vapor. It oscillated and intensified.

He tried imagining the astronaut who had chased him as he tried to realize something that he could not grasp about him and he was surprised that he appeared and how authentic he was, and he studied the perfect copy in detail, with the strange light there glowing over him.

He resembled someone! He could not grasp! He realized no face features had been visible, and the person was somehow different, and he nearly grasped it when a strange loud gurgle came from somewhere. He sensed the presence of something mysterious somewhere nearby, or existing about him, and he felt danger existed and he swiftly opened his eyes and was surprised to see a light in the cavity, and he rapidly searched the tunnel where he had come in and saw there was nothing there, and turned to where he had been facing while dreaming and adjusted his blurred eyes, and sat upright staring at it trying to see what it was, and realized it was there and was not projected there, and he wondered if it was some form of volcanic disturbance, and a crack into some form of volcano, where there was molten rock, and realized it was Mars and things were different and that molten rock might not explode out, as the lava flow was nothing like on the Earth

It was not there before he went to sleep, as he would have seen a crack there, and the crack was too new looking, and he realized that it must have appeared about when he started dreaming, and he tried to work out why and he decided that him being there, and his weight and frantic rush into the cavity might have altered the weakened rock and allowed it to break, and he realized that if it got worse it could breakthrough.

A deep thud appeared within the rock and he heard a familiar sound and realized it was the annoying whispering sound in his dream that he kept listening to, from some unseen place, which had sounded artificial, and he listened to it with his ear against the rock and he heard it was a powerful vibration from something, and when he firmly listened he was sure something was breaking through, and he checked his watch and wondered if the astronaut with the gun was still about outside, hunting him down, and he examined the crack in the rock and was surprised when he checked it lower down and his eyes adjusted and he saw a cave there and the powerful light was coming from something strange in the distance.

What amazed him was before he checked he knew he could enter the cave, and he grabbed the edge of the crack and started pulling chunks of crumbling rock away, opening the gap wider and wider, until he had a hole large enough to enter, and he stood blinded by the bright light beaming out into the dark night, and surrounding cavity, and prepared to enter it, and was surprised at the formation of the cavity and it looked almost artificial made.

As he swiftly entered the hole he was surprised that it was a very long tunnel and he cautiously marched along it, going deep into the hill.

Mind-bending sounds and echoes from what he was sure was volcanic activity increased and came through the shaft with fury and left him stunned at the dangers, and no matter how he tried to shake it off and contemplate its full identity he never formed stable recognitions of what was occurring there, and why the light was so powerful, and almost like laser light or light from the sun!

The vibration going through the rock reminded him of a fault line and he accepted it had to be some form of volcanic activity, and he slowed down and prepared himself to run if he anything came towards him, and he probed his way through the large hole in the hill, and as he went along he realized that there was some form of breeze blowing from ahead and he realized the dangers he could be in and that there could be highly explosive volcanic gases, and that if he never caused a spark it could be ignited by the volcanic activity, and he checked the walls and ground around him searching for signs of it having occurred before, and if the lava had been through there, and he saw nothing, and there was no sign of scorch marks or anything, other than it was as if something had blasted its way through it.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Alien Sphere

 

A loud screech ripped through him and he nearly leapt off the floor, and he stood dazzled by the bright light blasting into his eyes, and he had to recall what had just occurred, and that he had sleepily just staggered straight into the blinding light, in an immense cavity, situated at the center of the bottom of the hill, and he tried to grasp what was in front him!

The thing resembled a magical sphere, and he tried to grasp what was really there, and why it was there!

In the blinding light he could not grasp if it was just energy or what, and he saw a blast of stars exploding by him, as though he was shooting through space in some strange galaxy, and he gasped again, and wondered if it was causing him to imagine things.

Its formation seemed to constantly change, as though unstable, and he watched it shift around a central region, of the cavity, as though trapped in something, and some force field, and for a moment something seemed to form in it that seemed alive, and its formation kept altering, as though its energy was constantly altering and trying to control itself, and altered and whirled within occasional hideous energy surges – while it kept consistently stopping itself from vanishing.

It looked like something had been caught in some energy field there and had altered itself to survive, and he was staggered at the power the field had and what was caught in it!

It surely had to be artificial, but he could not prove it, and nothing was normal or familiar, and the cavity looked natural, but unusual, and he tried to establish if it had alien origins but could not, and he believed if it was it was of a highly advanced species of some sort.

For a few seconds he was sure something formed in it and looked out at him, and into to his very soul, and for a second recognized something, and he tried to place it and realized that it had reminded him of what had landed their shuttle, and had made them crash, and for some reason he felt it had not deliberately caused them to crash and he wondered if it was trying to communicate with him or state information like a computer.

Surely the sphere could not create such a thing!

But he was sure it was something artificial and decided to leave it until he had slept and he considered staying in the cavity, and he realized that there was air around, which could be breathed, and for some reason he unlocked his faceplate and opened it and breathed air there, which was fresh and he wondered where it had come from, but could not find anything anywhere, and he decided to leave and closed his faceplate and went back into the tunnel, and back to where he had been sleeping, considering if it was sort of entity/life form combination, trapped there, and he wondered what the scientists at the base, and the Earth, would think of it, and he realized he would be famous and remembered in history books for the discovery, and the biggest discovery ever find in outer space, and he wondered what would happen to the energy bubble – and if they could remove it what would happen? Surely they would fully check the energy bubble before it was taken to an inhabited region of the Earth!

 

Chapter 21

 

The Scientists

 

The cavity was full of scientists, technicians, and archeologists going in a circle around the energy sphere, crowded around it, in groups loudly and excitedly discussing hundreds of scientific details, not going passed a white painted line circle going around its sphere, where alterations to things had occurred, and Cronenberg went behind them and took a seat at a table beside some scientists, and with the astronauts of his shuttle, and he watched the astronauts startled faces, still recalling his arrival back at the base, and his description of it, and they had immediately sensed that it was something immense of alien origins, of a highly advanced civilization, and had only been slightly surprised that he had gone to the hill.

Who had the gunman astronaut been? Who had wanted to kill him? He even wondered if someone had known of the alien sphere, and had tried to stop them finding it for some reason!

What had astonished him was that none of the astronauts had actually left the shuttles, and they were positive of it, and he had even proven nobody had sneaked away by recordings of them on the shuttle recordings, and it had left him bewildered.

He had been told confidentially that there had been occurrences at that region of the Antarctica before their shuttles had been brought down, and they had been highly classified occurrences, and Anders crash had been recorded, but they had not found their remains and wreckage.

The events of that week were incredible and he saw the whole base react to the alien discovery, and the information had appeared all over the media there, and it had finally reached the Earth, and he had even become famous there for finding the discovery, and had returned to see it with the other astronauts, and they had told them of the occurrences that had taken the shuttles down, which the scientists believed it had been responsible for the occurrences, and they believed that the sphere had something wrong with it, which nobody fully understood, and that it had not been able to take the shuttles where it had wanted and had landed them where it was safe to land, and that the rocket vehicle Anders and the scientist had been in had been too hard to land properly, leading to its crash.

They believed it had tried to take them to where it was to have them find it, and he was positive of it now, and also going by the accounts the scientists there gave of things that had happened since they had entered the cavity, and it later enlarged the tunnel into the hill, and the appearance of strange things!

They believed it was trying to make contact with them, but nothing had been established, though it had communicated with many of them, as he had done, but they had been confused by it and had not achieved much and it revealed little, but he was surprised that the astronaut with the gun had been seen the night before and he had questioned the scientists that had seen him and they gave him a photograph of him and he had identified it as the astronaut, and they were sure it had used the generated astronaut copy to get him to go to the cavity to the discovery, which he surely would not have gone to if he had not been chased!

But he also thought it generated it to do things and they were there for some other reason, and nobody had given a full and proper explanation of why, and they never fully got the alien sphere’s actual function, or if it was just an advanced life form and what it was really like, and what it was doing there and what environment had it originated from, and what it really wanted, other than the fact it had wanted to be discovered!

The scientists were mainly involved in trying to monitor and analyze everything they could about the sphere!

 

Chapter 22

 

The Cavity

 

A panoramic spectacle view of the Martian landscape stretched out all the way around Cronenberg as he rested on the top of the hill, almost over the cavity, and he watched the fascinating rugged golden shapes of the world beaming in bright sunlight everywhere, and in the thin blue sky he studied stars, and where all the vehicles and shuttles were below, and below where the archaeologists were working away, checking if there was anything in the ground everywhere, and he heard their excited conversations, talking of the discovery, which had to their ultimate find, and perhaps the best find in centuries.

He liked archeology, especially there, and liked exploring the past and the occurrences that had taken place.

The world below now looked like it had been frozen in time, and was a fantastic surreal prehistoric times world, and he recalled why he had even wanted to be a paleontologist. It conjured up great visions of the original primitive worlds of the universe, with its astounding untouched magnitude.

While he moved over and rested against a large boulder he occasionally examined clouds of dust from the stone and debris, the archeologists sifted through, and he still listened for anything of interest to him, and he watched the sky in a place that he had not examined before and wondered what existed there and what other strange worlds there were to explore, and he started to realize he was starting to like the world more than his own, and that he would miss being there if he left, and the stars on the Earth would not be the same.

The cavity had fascinated everyone there and he watched them dig away the hill, enlarging the tunnel out, more and more, to allow them to get proper large equipment in.

An image was still in his mind! Something about the astronaut with the gun fascinated him, as if it had tried to kill him, and he wondered if it meant the alien sphere was a killer life form, and was it waiting for its chance to do something?

He could not grasp why it had not shown it intended to do harm, but he was sure it used the astronaut to get him there!

What had eaten Campbell and the other people at the base though, and yet the alien sphere could not reach the distance of the base and he began to suspect there was something else!

The entire outside of the cavity and the boulders there were destroyed and their remains removed, and everything there and further out was being checked by archeologists, as they searched for the remains of anything that could give them the slightest clue to the energy sphere’s origins or anything else.

It was incredible that with the entire incident he had forgotten about the map and the diamonds, and he was amazed that he was actually sitting on the spot where he had intended to look for them, and he still had not done it!

He looked over to where the other hill was, where he had climbed up when they had crashed there, and looked over at where the shuttles had been, where Eagle’s shuttle had crashed, and the shuttles had landed, and examined all the mess it had left.

Eagle and the other astronauts had now entirely lost interest in the treasure map, and that made him happy, and he recalled Rosenberg knowing of the map, when he saw Cronenberg taking it out Anders pocket, and he was sure it was him that had told them of it, but he had not gone near Eagle anywhere.

He spotted where Anders’s rocket vehicle had come down, and where their shuttle had been over at its side.

He removed the treasure map and studied it, and the entire region about him, sure that it had to be out there or about him somewhere, and he was surprised at how bright the map was there and how details on it became visible, which were not visible before, and he studied it with some surprise, and in an entirely new light, seeing the entire area and map properly, and as not the vague jumbled muddled scrap of paper as it had been, but as the scientist had made it, as he knew what he was like now, now that he had all the information of the scientist, and how he did things!

To his surprise he spotted a mark, like a vague small hill with a cross marked on it, and it was surely the hill he was on, and he started searching about the hill for the place, and for anything that looked like it, and went to a slightly higher point behind him and he measured the hill and mark on the map and saw the place close to him, to his surprise, and he searched where it was marked at, and spotted a bright gleam nearby and rushed over to it.

 

Chapter 23

 

The Awakening

 

Cronenberg stopped dead, confused, bewildered, and he rushed down the hill, gasping hysterically for air, thinking of the diamond in his spacesuit pocket, and in the deep silence of his spacesuit it sank in that something else was occurring simultaneously with his incredible discovery, and the discovery of the first diamond on Mars and with an immense size he had never seen before!

Saliva poured down his mouth, and he had to calm himself, and rest, to see what he was missing!

When he had rested he examined everything over at the cavity entrance and watched scientists rushing out, and falling about, and technicians and archeologists swiftly removing expensive equipment, as though something deadly of immense proportions was occurring, and he tried to recall what they had been doing.

He stood baffled with his mouth open, as he had not even seen them react anything like it before!

What the hell was going on? He did not know what to do? Would he lose what he had found?

The diamond had astounded him! It was just lying out in the open, shining in the sunlight, embedded in a strange form of Martian rock, which he used a tool to hack out.

He sat down, still exhausted, thinking of all the things he could use the cash on back on the Earth and slowly started realizing the ground was vibrating and dust and stones were shifting about him, and the intensity of it was increasing, and he started to see something unbelievably dangerous was going to happen, and large boulders at his side started rolling about the hill, and as he stood he started falling about as though in an immense earthquake, and saw and heard boulders rolling down and smashing into things on the ground, and he ran down at full speed as he saw the ground starting slide down and form a landslide.

The bottom of the hill was now being smashed with more and more large boulders, and everything was collapsing about him, and he searched everywhere until he saw a place that was free from the destruction and he swiftly took the safest route across to there, and fell over, over and over, and kept immediately rushing back on his feet.

Once on the ground he used the last of his energy to escape from the hill, but he collapsed against a pile of boulders, with his eyes still on the hill, and he grasped what the incredible force behind it was like.

To his shock he spotted all the scientists and others still running and escaping for their lives – and they were further out than him – and he rushed away on his weakened limbs and ran away from the site as fast as he had ever tried to run, and he even thought of removing the lower part of his spacesuit to get away!

When he heard the explosion he just dived straight over some boulders, to an area behind them, and covered himself by burrowing himself below the boulders, and covered his ears as the blast intensified and he felt the blast hit the other side of the boulders, and he gritted his teeth as he waited for the powerful impact to kill him!

 

Chapter 24

 

The Artifact

 

Once the dust cloud slowly vanished, with no sign of anything else occurring, they all started returning to the remains of the hill, and mainly in rubble heaps across their front.

Cronenberg watched the dead and injured being taken away in undamaged shuttles, and he wondered what was going on, and swiftly approached scientists he knew.

“What did you do?” he moaned to one, and he just laughed back, feeling his arm trying to find how damaged it was, from a rock that had hit it, as they went back to where the alien energy sphere had been.

A horrendous sensation struck him as he felt energy from something pulsating through the ground – the same energy that he had felt from the energy sphere, going through the ground, but it had far more power and energy to it. He was so startled that he was not able to exhale properly and he checked his oxygen supply, and wondered what they had done to the energy sphere.

“They never did anything!” one scientist replied, and stared at him.

“What happened then?” he replied firmly.

“Nothing! They were trying to dig it up and we were setting up equipment, and massive energy surges appeared, and the ground everywhere started shaking, and we detected something was going to occur, and we had to run out and escape as the hill started collapsing everywhere …”

When they approached where the center of the hill was they all started slowing and examining there and Cronenberg saw it was different from everywhere else, and as they moved closer saw all the rubble had been pushed away from the central region by some force, and that the energy sphere was there, hovering over a black artificial object, which had been buried away under the rock, and that it had clearly used the force to free itself from beneath the hill, and they all approached it cautiously now seeing the dangers of it, and that it had clearly taken the whole hill down on top of them, killing and injuring people there.

Though as they approached it he sensed that it had not purposely killed anyone and had done its best to avoid it!

At the edge of the energy bubble, altering wildly, gleams of light shone like bright miniature stars were being held there motionlessly, and some scientists filmed it and studied it, and started recording information about it, and he heard one of the scientists give the exact time the disturbance started and he was surprised that it was the exact time that he had removed the diamond at the top of the hill, and he realized that it had been directly above it.

 

Chapter 25

 

The Strange Black Object

 

For days he watched the archeologists at work removing the black object beneath the energy sphere, and he watched them discover it was made of something they could not recognize, and none of the scientists had any proper theories what it was, as there were no clues anywhere to anything, and the energy sphere refused to give any proper communications, and most of the things it gave were beyond their understand, and it became clear to him that every time he appeared it started to give communications, which he originally thought he was imagining, and then he thought it was the scientists doing something that they wanted to do when he was there, and then the scientists started questioning him about it!

They questioned him about everything they could and never got anything, and the only proper theory put forward, by a leading scientist, was it had connected itself to him for some reason, and perhaps because he found it and perhaps it trusted him, and it had allowed him to find it, and he was the chosen one to make communications with, even though it answered them while he was there, and they tried occasionally to discover why, without much success, and they could not grasp something.

The work continued for days, and they all accepted that there was an existing danger from it, and its form altered – and shrank to nearly fifty feet across from every side – and was suspended over the artifact, in a large cavity that was dug around it.

The entire top region was covered in equipment and scientists studying the alien object and energy bubble above, trying to find what connected them, as there had to be some form of communication between the two, but they never found anything and it was agreed that it was either undetectable to them or it connected when the object was activated in some way, and some thought that the energy sphere had to be created by the object below as nothing was found that could give its vast powers.

Detection equipment was everywhere all around it and at the end of cables entered into areas of its field, where they found it could now be entered further, and the scientist reacted immediately when they received results, and one time they found that digital numbers were frozen on an atomic clock entered into its field, and even created multidimensional forms through the air, and they studied the suspension of partially transparent layers, and saw them vanish somewhere.

Paranormal scientists were even brought in and were left staggered and bewildered at what it was, and there was in fact little that was identifiable, and even after immense amounts of experiments little was found, but vast amounts of research and recordings were done, which might be used to find a solution to its identity one day, and they were sure if they could grasp some clue about its identity that they might be able to start solving their unanswered questions.

One day Cronenberg got up early in the morning with his shuttle crew, as they were to return to the base for the first time in a long time, and he was surprised to see the scientists monitoring the equipment in large shuttles there, and had just been woken up and had started checking information on what was happening, and he was about to announce that they were due to continue their mission of mapping Mars when he spotted that they had raised the object below the alien sphere.

The size of the cavity beneath the object below the energy sphere had been increased and they had removed the giant block and raised it up over the Martian landscape.

Cronenberg and his shuttle crew stood by its side examining the object with amazement.

“It must weigh tons …” Rosenberg gasped, checking the equipment that they had used to lift it over the ground.

“Well, they’ve virtually carved the entire block out!” Mitchell continued. “It was not as deep downwards as they expected, and they’ve tunneled under and around it to get it up. It’s incredible! It resembles a black version of the flying saucers they use to claim to see years ago on the Earth!”

“What the hell is it though?” Cronenberg replied, making all of them gasp, and look above it to the energy sphere floating over it, and he felt the surface of it and felt a firm vibration from something, showing it was functioning.

“It’s like there is something missing from it!” he replied. “It’s as though it’s somewhere else at the same time – and we are only seeing this part of it …”

“That could explain why they got so little information from it!” Orwell answered firmly.

 

Chapter 26

 

The Gateway

 

Cronenberg sensed something strange that he could not grasp, when he returned to the alien energy sphere, with his shuttle crew, and he tried to get what it was but failed!

Before he had left on his mission he had returned to the energy sphere and he and the rest of the crew had immediately seen the energy sphere had altered completely, and its outer fringes had a sphere of energy accelerating around it at an incredible speed, and the ground below vibrated furiously, and he felt there was something about to happen.

He shuddered as he studied its powerful sphere shape, with no blemishes or openings, vibrating with colossal powers.

The abnormal antics of the scientists also captivated him – mystifying him with the depth of their nervousness – and their fear of something colossal! They repetitively studied their highly advanced equipment and an immense sophisticated laser, with alarm, and he realized it was all new stuff there, and that it had just been brought in from the Earth, and was of a highly confidential nature, and he and the others with him knew it was there for a reason, and whatever that reason was it surely was dangerous, and he finally talked a scientist into getting a leading scientist to come over and explain what was happening.

“We have successfully communicated with it!” the leading scientist announced. “There was a first contact scenario put together to handle first contact situations, and one of the outcomes was an alien source code, designed to communicate with any extraterrestrials through communications, which has been vastly improved, and we used it to make communication with it.

“Well, special equipment here was used and we found out a few things! Even though we never got what the energy sphere and artifact was we discovered how to activate it!”

“Activate it!” Cronenberg gasped.

He and the other astronauts stood stunned with their mouths open, realizing the true situation!

“You’ve the technology to properly communicate with it …” Cronenberg moaned. “What will activating actually do?”

“Perhaps make a first contact situation occur!” he replied, making them gasp more, and wonder what the hell they were going to contact and how dangerous it was, and Cronenberg gasped when he realized that the thing was attached to him and he might be made to make contact.

“Another classified element of it is we communicate with it telepathically!”

“So what’s happened?” he replied, anxiously waiting for a reply, and an answer to what was occurring.

“We’ve just started, and we needed you here to go further!”

They watched scientists activating equipment in front of them, with the energy sphere in front of them, and the artifact below resting over the ground.

A swift flash of light exploded out and a highly advanced strange laser beam blasted into the energy sphere – silencing all the scientists all around them.

In the blinding light, with him shading his eyes, he saw something was going to happen and he prepared himself, and watched it trigger it to unlock and open the flying saucer shaped black artifact below it and with a deafening bang he watched it split in half and the top half lift upwards into the air, until it was a certain position above the bottom half, which if the area between the top and bottom was filled in would make the whole artifact a perfect sphere, and they watched an energy field in the gap become visible.

Cronenberg with surprise watched the alien energy sphere above it shift down and enter the energy field, and fill the gap between the top of the artifact and the bottom, and it became a black central region between the top and bottom, and he knew it was complete and detected it from it, and from its central region where the energy sphere was.

It left them staggered, at what it was, could be, and the sheer power of it, and he watched the scientists communicating with it, and some rushed away to do things.

The whole artifact looked a perfectly symmetrical black sphere, and scientists and archeologists shifted a ramp over to it, which had been used to climb on the artifact, and they lowered it to where the alien energy sphere was in its central region.

What surprised him was they were now able to go right up to the energy sphere region, and they knew they could, and they started putting equipment there, and he spotted scientists removing what looked like a highly advanced probe of some sort and taking it to it and he realized that they intended to send it in and investigate what was there.

While the scientists were away Cronenberg and the shuttle crew decided to take what might be their only opportunity to check it and they marched up the ramp to examine it, and stood in front of the region the alien energy sphere was, and examined it inches away, and its now motionlessly perfect surface, and he tried to detect anything from it but could not, and realized that it had to be what had taken the shuttle down, and he recalled his original thoughts of it when he had sensed it in the shuttle going towards the Antarctica, and he realized it was it!

The echoes of things the scientists said about it in their last conversations haunted his mind.

What the hell had he done? Why had he done it? Surely he should have just left the thing in the cavity! They had no idea what it was, and it could be the end of mankind!

He watched the probe and a robotic device they were maneuvering there!

It had to be some form of ancient voyager, which could very well be billions of years old, which they had only been able to check a few basic functions of, which nobody had shown any proper awareness of the function of.

Even though they had found a way to activate it could they finally find a way of finding out what it was for?

For some reason, without thinking, he felt the diamond in his spacesuit pocket.

He tried to communicate with the alien sphere like he had done when he had first found it in the cavity at the center of the hill and tried to find out what its function was and what it wanted.

He thought of all the occurrences and facts about it, as he tried to grasp something he had missed, and he felt its powerful energy, like it went out across space and somewhere else, with so much force that it even threatened to make space and time warp or completely rip away, and he wondered what damage the Earth could be subjected to.

A sudden explosion of energy blasted out at him and the other members of the shuttle crew, from the energy sphere, and left them stunned, and by its colossal power surrounding them, and they contemplated its vast dangers and that they could not escape.

The strength of it was staggering, and they plunged into its confines, hurtling into a black abyss, where only a strange faint existence existed, and an explosion of movement, frenzy of activity, located them at different points in space and time, making vast leaps across the cosmos, emerging in vast mind-bending star regions, with a capacity inconceivable, searching for something!

 

 

 

 

II

 

The Dyson Stargate

 

 

Chapter 1

 

The Black Hole Discovery

 

The shuttle crew astronauts entered a laboratory in their Mars base in their spacesuits, entering its vacuum, and they stood staggered with their mouths wide open, wondering what the hell was going on, as they observed a pulsating black hole, inside a chamber, surrounded by heavy equipment.

Commander Cronenberg was the first to spot the equipment was creating a powerful magnetic field, concentrated in the chamber, holding the black hole firmly in place, as it attempted to escape and expand, but only gave occasional swift surges and spins, and he listened to the leading scientists carrying out a series of experiments.

The magnetic fields they had originally been using had not been powerful enough to contain explosions and the discovery of the alien energy sphere had altered their research, and their research on it had come up with new findings, and new technology to create and manipulate magnetic fields, and they had found ways to create black hole particles, in high explosion particle accelerators.

They had been able to slow the particle size black holes disappearances with new more powerful and concentrated magnetic fields, to study, and had been able to alter and increase the magnetic fields to freeze them, keeping the miniature rips in space and time in existence, and they had found ways to create vast amounts of them, combining them, creating one large black hole, which they slowly increased in size to its current state.

Ever since their shuttle had crashed on Mars incredible discoveries had been emerging all around him!

When they had been drawn into the alien energy sphere blackness had engulfed Cronenberg and the five shuttle crew members as they had hurtled out the universe, into an abyss, and they had been found lying on the ramp going up to the energy sphere screen, and none of them had properly recalled what had happened later and why they had awakened there!

Back at the base the scientists had continued to question them, and had not let it go, as they were determined to get answers, as their attempts to communicate with the alien energy sphere now failed and they were unable to send anything into it.

They were getting desperate for answers, and other scientists were getting more and more desperate to get them from them, and they had done everything they could to bring their memories back.

It was incredible, and it was incredible that they had been carrying out experiments in the secret laboratory they were now at, which he had not heard anything about, from anywhere before, and he realized just how secretive the place was, and that they had not even allowed it to be built on the Earth, as it would have been found out by someone at some point!

They had been trying to create black holes and keep them in existence but had constantly been failing, and they had even used powerful particle accelerators and powerful explosions, and he believed that they had made holes in space and time but they had been unable to keep the gateways open.

The abnormal antics of the scientists there captivated him – mystifying him with the depth of their nervousness, and fear of something! They repetitively studied everything, with alarm – preparing themselves for some unknown event!

What were they going to do? Had something else been discovered, with their new experiments?

Suddenly a swift flash of light exploded out and a flickering beam blasted into the black hole’s sphere – silencing everyone. It vanished into its depths and they monitored it with equipment, and checked results.

The black hole, trapped in the middle of its chamber, was spinning swiftly, and he wondered again why there was a vacuum there, and they all had to wear spacesuits, and he recalled it was because the chamber and black hole were not covered by anything as the black hole would have sucked the atmosphere out the room.

Scientists wheeled out a large object, with the shape of a rocket, and he followed them and the five astronauts to a white line on the floor, marking the closest region they could approach the black hole, and they watched how powerful it was there, and with its powerful vibrations blasting through the floor.

One of the astronauts decisively asked the leading scientist there what it was and he turned and examined them, and gasped!

“A black hole probe!” he swiftly replied. “We are going to send it into its confines, and it is designed to return out its confines and give us accurate data of what’s there – and we’ll perhaps be able to use it to examine the outer universe, and what’s there!”

Cronenberg was surprised that they could send something into it, as it looked so dangerous and powerful, and he was sure that it could destroy anything in its confines.

A cable was also attached to the end of the probe, to help receive information and pull it out if it never emerged outwards itself, and he watched its forces pulling it into it, and they used equipment to shift it accurately into the black hole, and it motionlessly hovered over the floor.

The probe resembled some form of highly advanced black missile, and he examined it for damage, and for any signs of the powerful forces acting upon it as it approached the black hole.

With a loud blast, the probe launched and shot straight into its central region and vanished, and approximately a minute later it reappeared, after the completion of its mission, with it having traveled out the universe, and he watched scientists celebrating their success, and they rushed to their equipment to start their long research of what it found.

Cronenberg gasped at all the technology they were using and realized that they might be able to detect a hidden universe about them – and outer dimensions.

Its lethal appearance was now astonishing, and resembled a large black bubble of pure energy of unknown origins, buzzing wildly and dangerously, ready to discharge.

While they stood waiting for the completion of the mission, and any findings, he sensed something peculiar about the black hole and he kept his eyes there, and he listened to the five astronauts and scientists further out, with their captivating facts, through his spacesuit communicator.

He recalled things about black holes and one old theory that space was full of black holes from events like the big bang!

Suddenly he realized what was different about the black hole and that the vibrations from it, going through the floor, had altered, and he saw that the black hole now had a strange look, as though it was doing something, and he knew that something must be happening to it for the reaction to occur, and its shape started visibly vibrating, as if affected by a powerful pressure.

While he carefully listened and searched everything everywhere he noticed the other astronauts noticing it, and determinedly checking it, and he tried to detect what was happening first.

At the side of his spacesuit faceplate, while he watched and listened to them, he glimpsed its hideous black shadow expand across the floor, and horrific shape coming towards them, bursting out of its magnetic field, and he stood frigid as it exploded out, and in an instant they and the black hole vanished from the laboratory, and his last memory was of the laboratory erupting into a frenzy of activity as he hurtled into blackness, and them shooting through something, as if the entire universe shot by.

 

Chapter 2

 

The Extraterrestrial Force

 

Blackness engulfed them as they hurtled out the universe, through an abyss, and stars and galaxies shot by!

Startled last cries and conversations from them and the scientists swirled through Cronenberg’s mind, and tormented him!

Had what had happened actually happened, and where were they hurtling to? He had never seen and sensed so many stars and celestial objects, and emptiness in dark regions they entered, and so many stars glowing so brightly, and for the first time in his life he realized the vast depths the universe had.

Why had they not just left in the shuttle on another mission? Why did they have to have stayed and watched the scientists activate the black hole?

At times he felt something there! Something none human! A form of intelligence, far different from any form of intelligence he had ever encountered, and even of the alien artifact energy sphere, when he had discovered it in the cavity in the Martian hill.

It was as though it was trying to become part of them, but he could not detect it doing anything!

He had even unsuccessfully tried to find out information about the diamonds he had been looking for on Mars, and his treasure map, and the diamond he had found above the alien artifact energy sphere in the hill, directly over it, and what it was doing there!

He was now sure it did something, but he could not grasp what, and tried to examine it as a vast star constellation exploded across his spacesuit faceplate, dazzling him with brilliance and dangers.

For a brief moment he had sensed that there might be diamonds somewhere else on Mars, and that their long search for them could be fulfilled, and as they were blasted through the cosmos he watched the greatest ever wonders float by and he thought through what had occurred, and his group of astronauts, and shuttle he was the commander of, and them mapping the surface of Mars, advancing and testing their new 22nd century advanced technology, and their arrival at the unexplored Martian Antarctica when something powerful and strange had been detected there.

They had crashed at the Antarctica, after the encounter with an unidentified force, which they traced to the energy sphere and the alien artifact under it, and they had been left marooned!

From the start they knew something was buried away on Mars, but he had originally believed someone had built something there of colossal power, with powers beyond anything else they had ever encountered.

When rescued, and they arrived back at their Martian base, they checked out dead astronauts, which they found the bodies of, with a map, and checked why they were there, and discovered hundreds of declassified military and security service material buried away in an old library, where they answered some of their unanswered questions, and he found out about their search for diamonds there, discovered by a scientist searching for diamonds with a new highly advanced satellite, and they had returned there to look for them and he had discovered the alien energy sphere and artifact, and later a form of diamond on the hill over it.

It was something with tremendous powers, as ancient as the universe, and he had felt it had been waiting on their arrival on Mars since the beginning of the universe.

He tried to compare it with what he detected was there, and knew they were different and could not be connected.

At times he thought it was only a faint consciousness, which he could not understand, which never even seemed to check what they were or anything, and he still could not fully grasp what it was or anything, and he continued to study what was there, with interest, and he detected something else existed, which was not there, and he detected great danger there.

Explosions of radiance of powerful stars exploded about them stunning him, and they slightly spun, and a colossal whirlpool of lines magically formed around them, and he studied it for a long time and realized he had no proper bodily presence.

He seemed to vanish out of existence and was startled and saw that he was accelerating through a form of tunnel through something at hyper speed, and realized that streaks of light shooting passed him were powerful outer suns further out, blasting their radiance through its shield!

He fell through a gateway where there were stars everywhere, and he could not guess what the place was, and he realized that they were now moving outside the transportation field and he wondered if they could get trapped there, with decreasing oxygen supplies in their spacesuits.

 

Chapter 3

 

The Lost World in the Stars

 

A spectacular world stretched out below, where they reentered the universe, in an explosion of streaking lights, and the astronauts stood staggered, at the world, at what they had encountered, and them being so close to death and emerging so near the edge of a gigantic cliff face, going straight down to the ground.

For a few seconds Cronenberg clung to part of a large boulder behind him as they fully realized the rock under them was not as firm as they had thought, and what they had landed on the top of, and that it was a flat top of a massive rock pinnacle, towering over a mind-bending world, surrounded by a sky that would have startled any life form in the universe with its stars and phenomena, covering everywhere he looked, blasting their large shapes of radiance through the light blue sky.

He glared out with the others, looking everywhere, gasping at what they were on, and staring over the edge, at the depth of it, stretching down to what must be miles below, and he realized the extraordinary low gravity of the world, which allowed it to exist.

He was sure the world was a young one and that the pole shaped tower might have fallen down a long time ago if it had been the age of the Earth or Mars.

They soon started searching the top of the pinnacle looking for anything, and why they were there, and they found little, and they all walked separately about it searching everything they could, baffled by the lack of anything.

It was Rosenberg that noticed boulders with cut stone and showed them there could be actually an artificial structure below!

Most of them liked archeology, and the thought of searching ancient structures on alien worlds, and exploring new finds, and what past races would have been like.

The world below now looked like it had been frozen in time, as the sun was going into the horizon, and it was a fantastic surreal prehistoric times type world, and it conjured up great visions of the original primitive Earth, with its untouched environment.

The structure below was fascinating to him and Orwell as for the most of their lives they had wondered what aliens and their civilizations were like and buried away below them there was an ancient alien structure they could investigate, and he had fantasies of them finding something valuable that he could use if he ever returned to the Earth.

The place was fascinating, with rugged golden mountains and hills and shades of the starlight beaming everywhere, creating immense beams of colored lights streaking everywhere, and he tried to see if there were signs of life in the darkening landscape.

The giant pinnacle was tremendous, and he kept thinking that no sane alien could have built anything on it! Anything staying in it must have been mad or determined to avoid something immensely deadly on the world below!

It was also beyond comprehension how it could have stayed up and not crashed down below long ago, and he gasped at how they must have built it.

It looked dangerous and incapable of supporting itself, and looked impossible to climb. There were no paths visible that could have been used to climb it. It was so high up that he was sure that they would not be able to breathe properly when the atmosphere altered, and that they would have to put on their spacesuit helmets, and he made sure all their spacesuits were full of air, and that they filled their oxygen tanks from the atmosphere.

It was strange being surrounded by air, as they had been on Mars with their spacesuit helmets on outdoors for so long it felt like a like mistake being out in the open without their helmets on, and he watched how the men reacted, and some surely missed being on the Earth.

While he rested against the flat edge of a massive boulder next to Orwell and Rosenberg he examined the boulder in the vanishing sunlight and saw it was actually a meteorite and he realized the dangers of a world with so many stars, and being located in such a place, which he was sure was near the central part of a galaxy, and he examined the stone and debris on the ground like an archeologists, sifting through it, looking for anything of interest, and anything artificial, and he examined the sky in places that he had not examined before, and wondered what existed there and what other strange worlds there were to explore, and he started to realize he and the others were starting to like it there, and if they returned to the Earth that he would miss it, and the stars would never be the same again, and they would be empty.

In the distance he spotted an incredible immense meteorite crater with a strange mist cloud hovering over it, only filling its dent in the surface of the world, fitting itself into its shape.

The atmosphere grew slightly thinner as it grew darker and he watched their faces alter and their breathing grow heavier.

When the night emerged, and the blue sky covering the stars vanished, they all stood staggered, examining stars covering the whole sky everywhere with their eyes wide open, from the immensity and colossal dangers facing them, and in the end they sat back in their spacesuits staring up at the incredible sky and stars everywhere, which would have had every astronomer on the Earth going crazy examining and documenting for the rest of their lives, and he wondered what the hell the most highly advanced telescopes back on the Earth would show existed in its depths, and what all the undiscovered things would be, and how it would alter the way they thought of the universe!

The sky was truly unbelievable and he spotted one of the astronauts in the distance now standing filming a section of the sky, and their eyes went on the region trying to see what he was filming, and Cronenberg spotted it, and it was tremendous, and worth being there for, and it had to be the biggest galaxy he had ever seen, and he was astonished that he could see it with his eyes.

Suddenly he heard someone shouting in the distance from a hidden area, and they recognized it was Stanley, the main shuttle pilot, calling them over to him, to what he had discovered, and they all leapt onto their feet and rushed over to him, wondering what it was, and what else could be so fascinating.

They approached him at the same time, with their mouths open, seeing all the stars blazing out everywhere around them, and some racing across the sky, and lights shifting about everywhere, and occasionally making them shudder at the power and immensity of them, and the dangers there were there.

Stanley was bent over something, buried away in darkness, and Cronenberg spotted what looked like a boulder lifted up and saw there was a massive gap going downwards where it was, and they saw what looked like a form of steps going downwards.

He did not know whether he was happy with the find and wondered if they intended to go down into it, and if he should stop them going down into at night, as the dangers of the place looked immense, and as he watched on he actually saw a large planet visibly going into a nearby large sun.

Before he said anything Orwell rushed forward, and announced, “I’m going down! Who’s going?”

Straightaway he knew he would have to go too, and yet he wanted to go down, but he was unsure if they should go at night, but he did not have any evidence that there was anything there, but it was an extraterrestrial world, far out of their region of space, and they had not even visited any other solar systems or anything like there, and they had no idea what could exist there, and if they returned to the Earth they might never get the chance again!

 

Chapter 4

 

The Alien Structure

 

It was spectacular, as the world rotated around its stars grew in immensity, as the central region of the galaxy went directly overhead, everywhere, glowing brighter, glowing all around them, blinding them in regions.

They stood at the edge of the entrance going downwards, still contemplating the dangers, and it was like standing on the top of the world, as though the world below were stretching away out into infinity all around their sides, and he wondered what kind of aliens had lived in such a place, and he realized that he might soon find out!

Nothing yet had properly showed what their civilization and technology was like, and he wondered if it was the remains of the last civilization there, and he wondered if something there had destroyed their civilization, and he gasped at the height they were above the landscape of the world as he spotted the sheer drop of the pinnacle in the dark, going off into the distance below.

The long day made them slow and sleepy and they slowly prepared themselves to enter the structure below, on their first search of an alien civilization.

A gray shade appeared at his side on the horizon and he studied it and realized that it was a large moon appearing from below the horizon, and he consistently checked the differences in it to Mars and other worlds he had seen in the solar system, and he watched in awe as a massive asteroid blazed across the sky in front of them in slow motion, and they stopped what they were doing and listened to it in the distance and watched the massive blazing ball of flames intensely light everything up about them and finally blast into a distant hill with such force it exploded apart, and a cloud of smoke go up.

Its shockwave blasted out with such force its blast went straight across the world, as they heard its distant blast, and eventually the shudder hit the pinnacle violently, and making them gasp and fall over, shaking the stones around, giving them thoughts of the whole pinnacle collapsing down, and Cronenberg finally realized that it had to be firm as it would have fallen a long time ago, especially with deep impact craters nearby.

Eventually everything calmed down and he stamped on the surface to check its safety again, and wondered what form of structure was below, and what thickness its roof was, and he decided to enter it first, before Orwell, and he eagerly explored a ramp of stone descending below, and marched down into its darkness searching the ground, and dirt there, and testing its safety and if it could withstand his weight, and as he descended further he turned his spacesuit light on, and watched Orwell and the others follow him down, into its hideous depths, wondering why they had not just left it until the morning.

They were all forms of scientists as well as astronauts, and explorers, and had been on Mars to see space and another world, and now they were living out their dreams of exploring an authentic alien world, and a highly advanced civilization, and they examined everything about them and checked the descending tunnel and how the rock had been cut, and how perfect it was, and he brushed his glove over it feeling its smoothness, and knew something had powerfully cut the hole straight into the rock.

Orwell observed the peculiar shape of the structure, and the tunnel not being perfectly square but with other shapes, and considered if had been designed for looks or there was another reason for it and noticed there were signs that something a long time ago had been there and had left vague prints buried under deep dust on the ground, and he marched downwards.

It was strange, as none of them thought anything had been there and yet they were prepared for an encounter with something else below and he wondered if it had been the energy sphere and alien artifact in the hill, what they encountered in the gateway, or was it the strangeness of the place and why they had been put there, as it was like they were put there for a reason and he sensed there was something.

After they had checked an area of rock, which looked different from any natural rock that they had seen, they marched on, and jerked when a heavy thud shook the whole pinnacle around, from another deep meteorite impact, and he continued at a slow pace considering how the thing had managed to stay up in such a place, and he recalled the meteorites on its above structure and wondered what it would be like living on such a place, and how many deaths and injuries people would have.

After a few more minutes he realized their enthusiasm had increased in discovering what was there, and it was now as though it was an ultimate treasure, and some form of treasure they were going to find, which was buried away there.

What was strange was that he had watched things moving over the surface of the stone, and had just dismissed them as insects, but he realized that they were not just insects but were alien insects on an alien world and he suddenly stopped and examined a few with Orwell, and they stood speechless, as the insects there were unknown to them, with characteristics that they had not seen anywhere. A yellow piece of flying gel hung in the air by some means they could recognize, hanging in the air, even after many close examinations they could not pinpoint how it remained in the air, and he believed it had thousands of miniature wings or something similar that allowed it to hover and propel it forward that could not be seen by them.

A distant wind occasionally howled strangely around through the top of the tunnel behind them, as it was caught by gusts.

Eventually the stone tunnel finished and they entered an artificial structure and they examined it trying to find what it was made of and found it was too hard to even scrape a sample off, and were unable to realize what it was.

The inside of the structure was incredible and it at first looked like they were encountering something from Earth’s early past, and the inside of some form of ancient pyramid and an earlier version of what the aliens had, but its look altered the further in they went and he realized that it was far more advanced, even though they had not come across any of their technology and only forms of advanced corridors and forms of rooms, and yet they had not seen anything of the aliens themselves and what they had.

For a swift instant he felt a strange feeling that something had detected them there from some further in region, where he was sure there was some highly advanced structure and technology, and he was amazed that Orwell and the others behind him had also picked it up, and were reacting simultaneously with him, and he even saw them discussing it and something, and he wondered what the hell it was, and if they should have turned back earlier, and he wondered how they could profit from such an encounter, and he spotted Orwell holding a weapon, from his spacesuit.

 

Chapter 5

 

The Astronaut

 

As they entered a large chamber Cronenberg felt shudders and deep vibrations going through the floor and walls and his eyes fell upon a large sphere object spinning with tremendous force, trapped in a form of cage, clearly using tremendous forces to keep it there, and they got to a point near it, staggered at the dangers it had, and watched the power of it, like it could destroy anything put against it, and he watched the other astronauts and started to notice their reactions to the dangers and that they were going to keep away from it, and it looked as if it had recently altered in some way, and he wondered if it had been there the amount of time he thought it had been, and where it was getting its power from, and considered if it was a new source of immense power and what it would be worth!

Gusts of wind occasionally howled about in the chamber in front of them, as air was caught by its forces, and he kept wondering if it created power, which was used by its creators as a power source, and he considered if it could be the reason it was there, and that it was so dangerous it was put there on top of the pinnacle, and had connections going below.

Yet he could sense it was more, and that they could have been put there for a reason!

The antics of the astronauts captivated him more and more – mystifying him with the depth of their unsaid thoughts! Orwell wondered around the chamber examining everything he found, repetitively looking for controls to it or something else, and he realized he might be intending to do something, at some point!

Suddenly, the reactions of the sphere altered, and he sensed something had happened and he felt a shiver run through him as he felt massive shudders of energy blasting through it, and he turned and realized that Orwell had activated something, and he slowly backed away from it, as it looked more and more deadly and pulsated with violent energy surges, and looked and sounded on the brink of something, or exploding!

None of them spoke and he considered what it really was and how it was formed and he believed that they should start leaving the chamber, but he never knew what direction to go in. Should they go back up to the top of the pinnacle or continue going down, and maybe get trapped below if there was an explosion.

He saw how big it really was, as it expanded out. Its size was huge and like a massive ball of different energies.

Suddenly Rosenberg called out, “What’s that?”

Cronenberg spotted what looked like the shape of something inside it, as though a life form was there, and after a long time of carefully examinations he realized he and the others were unable to properly see it and identify it.

It looked powerful and deadly! It also looked like some form of freak of nature!

He offered the others to give vague explanations, even if fantasies, and they occasionally gave detailed explanations of what could be occurring and Stanley finally explained that particle accelerators experiments on the Earth had now had forces that were able to accelerate particles to velocities beyond anything before, but he was unable to connect the occurrences, and Orwell finally claimed it could be a form of time warp, and could have forces like intense magnetic fields holding it.

Cronenberg realized that they never had anything like it, unless it was kept secret, and he compared it to the energy sphere and the artifact back on Mars.

At one point the thing looked entirely deadly and was pulsating with energy blasts, which looked and sounded on the brink of doing something.

At times they spotted it looked like it turned vaguely translucent and they saw the shape of something inside it, and after along time of carefully examinations and discussions they believed they saw a life form inside it, in some suspended state, in some form of rest, and they stood confused, wondering if they could be on the brink of making a proper first contact situation.

It looked powerful, and deadly! But he could recognize what it was or what it could do, and kept glaring at it trying to get a clue.

At one point Stanley moaned loudly, “What are we doing here? If this thing is as dangerous as it looks …”

His reply surprised him, and he wondered what their reply would be to it, and he allowed them to reply.

“It could be of great value to us!” Orwell replied, firmly. “We were surely put on this pinnacle for a reason … And this is all there is here! It has fascinating properties, and I believe it is not as dangerous as it seems! There would be signs of something having happened before if it had …”

Cronenberg just agreed with him, and examined it in a glance, and replied, “We have been investigating it with everything we have …!”

“The artifact may exist in other dimensions?” Mitchell, the shuttle flight engineer, replied, surprising Orwell, and Cronenberg recalled recent stuff about investigations into other dimensions on the Earth, and he tried to recall what the outcome had been, and realized it had mainly been theories about things.

They all sat down and rested against an area of the chamber wall, at a more distant position, and they started trying to get some rest and sleep, and when Cronenberg finally fell asleep he was soon awakened by Rosenberg giving a loud gasp, making him swiftly awake, and he looked into the sphere and saw a man standing near the center of the sphere and he also gave a loud gasp himself, and he kept trying to see properly what was there, and he finally went silent, and was sure it was a humanoid alien.

The being was in a central denser region, and the whole sphere was turning brighter and louder, and it started shaking everything about them, and it even started knocking them furiously about, and they fell over, and while he was considering evacuating the chamber a sudden shockwave blasted out from it and through the whole structure, throwing them over dangerously, and he heard a distant rumble of rocks falling off the outside pinnacle.

Suddenly everything turned silent and the bright light vanished, and they started to recover, and check the damage, and he noticed Orwell dramatically talking to Mitchell and Cronenberg checked where they were looking and realized that the energy bubble had returned to normal and that a being had appeared from inside it and was standing in front of them, wearing a human spacesuit, and he immediately recognized it, to his horror, and it was the astronaut that he had seen on Mars, which had chased him into the cavity in the hill with a gun, where he had found the alien energy sphere and alien artifact.

 

Chapter 6

 

Anders

 

One of the biggest surprises, after seeing the astronaut emerging, had been when the astronaut removed the spacesuit faceplate, and revealed his true identity, and Cronenberg had been staggered and stumped, as the astronaut was Anders, one of the two astronauts who had crashed and died on Mars, trying to get the diamonds!

He had seen Anders’s skeleton, lying on Mars, staring up at the stars, and when he had seen him standing in front of him he had been totally staggered and had just stood staring, and Orwell had been baffled, and Rosenberg had been dumbfound too, as he had only seen Anders’s skeleton!

For a few minutes they actually stood considering the unthinkable and that they were standing in front of a ghost!

How had he managed to appear in the places he had seen him as an astronaut in a spacesuit, and why was he the same age as he had been, and he would have been dead a long time ago, going by what year he had crashed in.

Anders finally examined them confused, and examined everything about him surprised, and finally asked them what he was doing there, and they just stood staring at him dumbfound, and considering all the possible explanations.

The whole affair seemed to be building up to it – with their space shuttle being brought down by a mysterious force, the discovery of Anders in the crashed space vehicle, right next to where they had crashed, the astronaut that had been haunting him, and the discovery of the alien energy sphere, and the eventual discovery of the alien artifact buried below, under the ground below the hill, the explosion of the whole hill, and their trip through the universe, and being found below it not knowing how they got there, and the mysterious discovery of the laboratory black hole and it exploding out and taking them there.

They were positive the black hole had connected to someone’s gateway, and that they were deliberately taken to the incredible world, and now they had found Anders there, alive and in the same state as he had been on Mars.

The place startled Anders and he had never seen anything like it, and he could recall nothing other than what he was sure was him dieing on Mars, watching the Earth in the sky, and he recalled encountered something alien and it taking him away, and he had no recollection of meeting Cronenberg or shooting at him.

Cronenberg watched him in partial horror and amazement! Astonished that he was alive! Something he had not even thought of! He had thought of him and his map many times over since finding his skeleton, and especially when he had been in the Mars base library, investigating him and where the diamonds were, and he could only watch him, examining him.

He looked slightly different, from his skeleton and photos, but he knew it was him, and he wondered if Anders could help him!

He noticed Rosenberg could hardly believe it was him and kept examining him and trying to fit things together, to explain something he could not grasp, and it surprised Anders that the scientist with him, who had found the diamonds with the satellite, was not there, and Cronenberg realized that he looked more disappointed in that fact than anything else.

Cronenberg could not grasp what had taken him away on Mars, as his descriptions of it were fascinating, and he realized it had to have been the force that had landed them and he had encountered within the energy sphere, and he realized that they had not fully contacted it, and that it could have two identities, as it had to have put Anders on Mars as a form of ghost as the astronaut with the gun, which had shot at him and nearly killed him.

He was unsure how dangerous it was, as it had done many dangerous things to them.

Anders started believing that he had been transported there through a vortex and had religious beliefs of what had occurred, to their surprise! He surely had thought he had gone into his own place in the afterlife but was unsure where the hell he was, in heaven or hell, and they watched him praying to be saved.

Yet after what they had been through there, and all that had happened everywhere, some of the crew even looked like copying him, but he thought better of it.

One of the problems that faced them now was there was hardly any food, and the stuff they had was running out, which was mainly emergency rations in special pockets in their spacesuits, and they were tired and had not slept properly!

So after they had all slept they carried out a great deal of examinations of the structure they were in, but found little, and seemed mainly to be some sort of base, and they investigated the sphere of energy as far as they could, but still found little!

None of them could explain much, as it never even fitted into any of their fantasies! They were more confused than he had ever been, as he no longer just ignored all the mysteries and he just could not explain things, with anything that he could now accept, and why they had gone through the vortex and black hole in the laboratory, which was an incredible piece of luck, and Anders did not explain anything for them either!

His secretive questioning of Anders about the map, when the others were away searching under the structure, gave little other than the fact he had believed the diamonds had been there, and had partially suspected they were elsewhere when the scientist with him kept suggesting it, which he was unsure of, but he was sure that he had been hiding things and that he had not been fully positive that they existed, and had been confused about many things! He must have been the only person in the history to have such an occurrence occur to him and find himself in such a place and have no way to return to the world after such a long time!

Anders never recognized anything there and kept wondering where the structure was, and why they all acted strangely to the outside world, and why they kept talking of the lower world, and he even surprised them by claiming he had been put there to start over again and repent, in another attempt at entering an afterlife.

Anders spent most of his time studying everything that he met with in fascination, and they confused him by their reactions and that they might be going to encounter aliens visiting there.

Their investigations of finding a way down to the ground and world below were useless, and they were convinced that they had used another means to get there and they tried finding it, but it proved useless, and they only had the energy sphere, where Anders had appeared from, and most of them believed something was there, and had put them there for a reason.

 

Chapter 7

 

The Exit

 

Golden radiances of the morning beamed straight across the top of the pinnacle, and created an immense shadow of the pinnacle’s shape stretch across the landscape below for many miles, pointing to the opposite horizon, where the nighttime darkness vanished.

The top of the pinnacle was the same except a sphere of blackness was floating in midair over the central region, which had just been found there by them, and all the shuttle crew and Anders were there, and Anders was the most curious, and strolled around it examining its shape, confused, and was staggered at the outside world he had not seen, and regularly stood with his mouth wide open watching stars of colossal size doing strange things.

The sphere had clearly recently appeared there and nobody there could account for it being there, and Rosenberg, who had found it, had thought the sphere had some form of intelligence, which they still had not proven to be not, or anything.

Cronenberg watched Anders, still amazed at him, and with horrific thoughts, realizing what was there could pull virtually anything out on them, and he was amazed that there definitely were diamonds on Mars, and Anders had confirmed it, and the diamond or crystal he had was not it, and he was now sure that the scientist, with Anders, had been going to check it, and he wondered again why Anders had been put below in the structure, and thought over what Anders had said about it.

They never knew where they were but at least they had Anders, and lots of information he had about the scientist’s discovery of them, and he wondered if they could return.

Looking at the top of the pinnacle it was clear that something had flattened it with its incredible weight, and he could not grasp if it was deliberately created or something had happened there!

Had something of immense weight, like a large solid meteorite, smashed into it?

Their search of the structure below was useless, and the sphere there did little, and they were unable to activate it again, and he was sure there were actually objects inside the pinnacle keeping the pinnacle up and stopping it falling.

Had something smashed a region off the top of the pinnacle away and had whatever was there held the rest of the tower and structure from being damaged and smashed away.

The hideous condition of the world below was now even more obvious and astounding, and had been subjected to incredible damage. He even liked being on the tower and finding its wonders, and he knew they would even miss being there, if they escaped from there, and he wondered if there was a way to create a gateway there – and some day sell holidays to there, to see the amazing world!

They were all now positive the sphere there was not from there and had appeared there for a reason, and they waited for something to happen, and when it did it surprised them with its swiftness and unexpectedness and he glided away, with the others, out of the universe, and they shot through blackness, as they left the universe, and stars shot by in streaks as they blasted through the gateway, voyaging away.

 

Chapter 8

 

The Circle of Mirrors

 

All the Astronauts gasped, when they came to, lying across the ground, looking around them, and at a circle of mirrors surrounding them.

Cronenberg leapt onto his feet first, staggered at missing what had happened, trying to recall losing consciousness, and he joined some of the others, and cleaned dust away from his spacesuit faceplate, and examined what the circular region they were in, and the mirrors evenly going around its radius, and he saw the circular ground was made of some strange alien material, and covered over in dust, and it seemed to connect the mirrors.

He examined what the strange mirrors were, from the central region, watching them go around him in a perfect circle, and felt like he was being watched, and not just from through the mirrors themselves, which he sensed and knew were far more, and he eventually moved behind the mirrors and saw that the mirrors were not visible there, and there was nothing there, and he stood considering what they were, as the entire circle was like some highly advanced device, and he even considered if magic existed and that they were magical.

Further out from the circle of mirrors he realized it was another pinnacle, and walked around its edge, and it was identical to the last one, but the colossal pinnacle was on top of a colossal mountain, and there was no way to get down, and they were trapped again.

The surrounding world and sky was also staggering and Cronenberg stood with his mouth open staring at a vast world like Saturn, with massive rings, stretching into the atmosphere of the world they were on, and the Saturn world dangerously covered most of the southern horizon and its rings went across the eastern and western horizons.

The world was either doomed to destruction or had some phenomenon holding the worlds apart!

The astronauts lifted their faceplates when they realized there was air there and Cronenberg gasped at the smell of peculiar gases, and some of the astronauts filmed the world with their spacesuit cameras, and examined the strange mirrors up close, and walked through them from behind, proving they were not there from behind, and at a close distance from the front saw they were not mirrors but something else reflecting light.

The sun of the world was the only normal thing there, except the world’s orbit of it was far faster, and it was racing into the horizon, and the sky was swiftly turning darker!

As the night sky emerged, and blue sky vanished, they watched large meteorites blasting out of space everywhere in the distance, in the southern horizon, scattering beams of bright light, and he saw that it was in fact the merging of two solar systems, being pulled together, and the world’s solar system had been damaged by it, and one of its major planets, the Saturn world, was being pulled into it, and on one of the horizons he discovered the cause, and that they were at the center of a galaxy and were being pulled into a black hole, and he started spotting more and more of the destruction it had done, and he saw the whole sky full of debris from destroyed worlds and suns.

 

Chapter 9

 

The Haunted World

 

At night the mirrors of the circle of mirrors altered into different and altering views of clusters of gateways, going back into them in lines into what looked like infinity.

In the end they chose to enter one, which left them staggered, as they walked through and shot through an infinity of gateways, going back in lines everywhere, and they were all entirely different, and they had never seen anything like it.

They entered one with more and shot into a colossal dome, the size of a solar system, full of gateways everywhere, with views of incredible places and things, and they were able to randomly choose the most interesting.

Once they emerged into it they immediately became trapped there, in a dark strange wood, with altered trees, freezing in deep snow, where they spotted strange dark figures hiding behind trees, examining them, while mysterious lights startled them, and they heard them occasionally violently smash things about them, but they had weapons in their spacesuits.

What staggered Cronenberg the most was that they never knew how to return, and as they rushed away, they held their belief that they would be saved once again and that there would be an eventual conclusion, but the snow grew thick and shrouded everything everywhere, creating a mind-bending landscape, while a massive moon swiftly emerged above, swiftly orbiting the world, and they soon became too exhausted to recognize anything.

It was shocking how lost they were, but the moonshine showed them the strange mind-bending landscape ahead!

The sounds of the life forms and other strange things hidden away there became dangerous and astonishing, and at times they came screaming out of the dark endless alien wood, and also through what sounded like shafts in the ground somewhere, and with a dangerous fury that stunned Cronenberg, and no matter how much they tried their thoughts never seemed to properly achieve stable recognitions.

For some reason he began to believe there were supernatural regions in the universe, and that they had entered one version, and he was surprised that the others in the shuttle crew mentioned it openly, as if they knew he had known it, and he tried to grasp what the place and places were for, and considered all the gateways and their destinations, trying to grasp what the place was doing there. He was sure that they had discovered far more than they realized and that it could prove the existence of colossal magical abilities and energies and he analyzed everything in a far greater degree, searching for an answer.

Out of nowhere a colossal light emerged from the undergrowth, and pulsated like a living thing, magically illuminating the deep lifeless snow and trees everywhere they looked, and seemed to silence the noises and life forms surrounding them.

The light allowed them to see everything across their front more, and they spotted what was a structure buried away in the trees, and Cronenberg realized that it was an alien form of castle, buried and hidden deep away in the landscape and wood, and he examined it astounded at its immense size and how it could be built there, and he wondered if the whole world was covered by the trees and wood and if the builders normally built their structures there, and he had a sensation that the structure had colossal power, which would eventually leave him staggered!

The deep snow and cold turned to a nightmare, and their legs sank into stinking vegetation and muck that started to resemble quicksand, and another light emerged deep in the undergrowth and pulsated like a living form, magically illuminating the snow and trees going everywhere, and they increased their speed.

The castle became the most blissful thing he could think of as he saw the dangers there and it radiating through the wood like a spellbinding castle, and they forced themselves on.

Its appearance, amidst the hell there, was staggering! It was like a dream phantom castle glowing in shining moonlight, like it was magically glowing.

Behind them the shifting lights of glowing life forms became vicious and darted about everywhere in the blackness and landscape, and Cronenberg thought he saw ghost images of intelligent humanoids doing hideous things.

 

Chapter 10

 

The Lost Castle

 

At the front of the colossal extraterrestrial castle structure, when there were no more trees, and they were about to reach its large entrance, the whole structure lit and radiated through the whole region, mass of trees and foliage, silencing what was there to their astonishment, with its colossal powers, and they examined its colossal size going out into the distance all around them and its height going away high over the trees, where a thin fog slowly got thicker and engulfed it.

Vivid streaks of colored lightning exploded all over the top cloud region, and they saw the peculiar sky surrounding the fog, surrounding the castle, and it altered like a form of atomic explosion had blasted out, and massive blinding colossal stars further out blasted out their bright light.

Entering a veil of mist, forming at its entrance, created sensations that they were being summoned there, for some hideous purpose, and they blindly entered the ghost oasis, out on the edge of reality, on the bounds of what lay beyond the universe, bordering death, near the depths of hell, with them seeking sanctuary and reality.

On their entrance, and exit from the hideous jungle, the entrance closed behind them, trapping then there, and the interior illuminated it dim light, and Cronenberg heard vicious heavy beast sounds furiously exploding out outside, clearly making last attempts at threatening to destroy them.

Somewhere over to the side of structure they heard powerful movements rapidly taking something near them, and they wondered what was protecting them, and had stopped them doing anything to them, and Cronenberg gasped and saw a faint colossal ghost shape in an area of deep blackness inside the structure, further along a corridor, and it altered to demon shape floating through the darkness, snapping massive jaws, before it vanished.

The situation was bad and Cronenberg wondered what the hell the place was doing there, and why such a place should and could even exist, without destroying itself!

What the hell had built such a place? Should they leave the place until the morning, and they had rested, before exploring anything? Was there even a morning there, as there was no sign that daylight existed? There could be great dangers there, but they could move to a region where they never existed, and survive!

They had to survive! There was air there! There was life forms and vegetation for food, and they had shelter! Something had to be giving the world heat and light as the trees existed, and by their looks he was sure that it was winter, and that they could survive, and that someday they could find an exit gateway!

 

Chapter 11

 

The Ultimate Existence

 

Cronenberg flicked his eyes open in an instant and wondered where the hell he was, and could not recall how he got there, and he recalled the last memories he could recall, which were of them going through the outer jungle, and he was left staggered, and for a few seconds, for some reason, he never knew what he was!

Was he actually a normal life form of the universe, as he had always thought, or was he a strange phenomenon?

He was sure he was being examined by one of the real inhabitants of the universe, and he gasped and jumped upwards, and checked the air supply in his spacesuit and realized it was low, and realized that he had been lying in a sort of black room with nothing else in it except a strange alien doorway and window.

He had no recognition of what was there or where he was in the castle, or even that he was in one of the rooms in the castle, and he tried to recall more of his last memories, and he started to walk over to the window in the room to see what was there, and he was staggered again and stood upright and turned on his spacesuit light and examined the strange empty room about him, wondering how the hell he got there, and wondered if it was caused by his exhaustion the night before, or his lack of proper food, or the severe cold and snow falling outside, or was something there in the castle influencing him.

He recalled surreal dreams, which had been incomprehensible and he wondered if they had actually been dreams! They never made sense, and one in particular had been made up of nothing but shimmering lights and freakish sounds and him being whirled about somewhere, similar to being in a colossal vortex, where he never thought or even did anything, and had been like he never existed and just experienced what was there.

Suddenly he recalled his first dream and he realized something had been trying to make contact with him! Something strange! Something that was not physically part of the universe! Something put there, to do something he could not grasp!

He detected it had a purpose to do something! Something he could not grasp, and he wondered if he had missed something or if it had missed out something!

He then recalled the thing in the gateway, and the thing in the energy sphere and alien artifact, and he wondered if it was the same thing! Yet he had no proof that it was or was not, and he wondered what it wanted, and he realized that he could discover what it was all about, and he went over and over it and realized it had suggested something else existed. Did it want to contact it or was it doing something?

Suddenly he recalled something and gasped and nearly fell over, and remained silent, and realized that it was warning them of something, and that something similar to itself was there and was checking them out, and was of great danger!

What could exist in the gateways and be of great danger? What was its purpose?

He gasped at what they could have encountered in supernatural gateways in the circle of mirrors, and the dangers that they were playing with, and he thought of some of the most highly advanced deadly races that they could have encountered, and he wondered how the hell they could get back to Mars without entering them.

When he looked up at the window he was amazed that the sky was now everywhere, and dark and full of strange stars, and saw that the jungle was no longer there, and he looked below and saw thick mist, and looked out into the horizon, and the mist went out into the horizon, with no sign of the jungle, and he saw that the castle was floating over clouds away over the world below, and he saw the whole galaxy arranged around the castle.

He was sure it was in another dimension and on the world below, and he noticed the stars there were entirely different from in the jungle, and noticed the castle went far higher above, and he marched out the room into a long, endless corridor, and he heard the other astronauts talking away in the distance, and he marched towards them, and he wondered how the hell he had got there and had not remembered anything, and he recalled the horrors that they had witnessed at the bottom of the castle, and he thought of the dangers.

Suddenly a flash of red flashed, out of nowhere, and he realized that an enormous blood red devil shape had shot through one of the walls in a room, like the wall was mist, and that it was furiously searching for something, with vengeance, and its speed seemed to be increasing, and the wall seemed to alter and glow in flickers after it had left, and he heard it rage on into the distance.

It surprised him as he detected it was different from everything else they had encountered, and it was strange as it was evil but seemed to be different and have a purpose, and he even sensed madness, as though it had altered from something into something else, and that its madness or something was to blame, and for no reason he realized it, or what had put it there, or what was behind its existence, and it was far more powerful than anything else there, and it had become dangerous because of some occurrence, and he was sure the thing in the gateway had been protecting them from it, and that they could be destroyed by it.

In the distance of the corridor he caught glimpses of its distant lightning materializations in flashes of red, as it shifted around, and he wondered why an ultimate existence would give such an appearance, but he realized it was somehow mad, and had even taken a red energy formation with devil features, straight out of the realms of hell, and realized that they were confronting something that could believe it was a devil, and he watched its giant demon shape glowing, altering, within hideous energy surges, while it stood further down the corridor, and stared straight at him, and he watched it consistently stop itself vanishing.

It was a freak of nature, and he wanted to handle it as he thought he had no choice, as he knew he could not escape!

In ancient times on the Earth people witnessing it would have either just freaked out and ran and escaped for their lives and later given accounts of confronting the most deadly powerful evil from the deepest depths of hell or would have perhaps have been brutally killed, and their bodies would have perhaps been found drained of blood or energy, with their remains found in hideous forms, and perhaps found so unrecognizable that they would have thought they were not human.

He rested against a wall listening to the shuttle crew in the distance discussing something he could not grasp, and sometimes he saw the thing lurking in dark shadows of the castle corridors, doing unseen hideous things, and examining the formations.

At times it seemed to detect their thoughts with curiosity and tried to understand what they were and it seemed to detect strange forms of energy or energy sources from somewhere and alter.

The thing seemed damaged to him, and perhaps mad, but it was by far the most advanced existence he had encountered, and for some reason he wondered what had created it, and was left staggered, and he studied its vast unstable energy surges, sensing they went across vast outer dimensions, and it was part of something incredible, which had so much force and powers that he was sure it could destroy space and time.

 

Chapter 12

 

The Moon Encounter

 

A moon appeared about them, going out into a distant horizon, and Cronenberg stood staggered with the shuttle crew, wondering what had happened, as he had been just about to approach the thing in the corridor, to get to the room the others were in, and he seemed to enter a gateway with them, and he felt something was playing with them, and he had a strange feeling that there would be far greater danger than there and the moon, and he checked the stars above, and how unusual they were, and that they could alter so much, and he realized that it could even be another galaxy, and that they could have instantaneously jumped from one galaxy to another, which fascinated him, with him being an astronaut!

Orwell, the shuttle science officer and medic, slowly shifted over to him, looking more disorientated and baffled than he had ever seen him, or any of the shuttle crew.

Even when they had crashed and were in front of the alien artifact discovery, or any of the occurrences, as their trip through space was so mind-bending and deadly!

“What now?” he moaned, to Cronenberg, and the others, breaking the deep intense silence between them.

Cronenberg could do little but shrug, and studied the alien sun that was just over the horizon, and they all stood staring about them confused and Cronenberg checked the stars again trying to identify anything in them, and realized how unusual they were!

He gasped as he looked over the moon surface in another direction and considered what lurked there, and he altered his faceplate’s shading of the sunlight.

Sunlight in space was blasting through blinding him with its intensity and he quickly altered it. The conditions of the moon were incredible and he never thought that he would confront anything more than Mars! And he gasped at the temperature his spacesuit recorded there!

Nothing added up now! Why had it left them at such a place? Yet were they a danger to it?

He considered why and if they were a danger to it and why! Yet he recalled there were two! But he was unsure if it was true, and what the hell they could do about invisible highly advanced aliens!

There had to be far more behind it! Surely they would profit little from what they were doing!

A sudden explosion from what seemed a fired missile made a tremendous explosion, but lacked sound, as there was no atmosphere, but the damage and blast of stone was immense and shuddered through the moon’s surface and knocked them about, and went across the ground, and Orwell leapt back on his feet from where he had sat, and rushed close to him.

“Someone seems to have fired some form of energy beam!”

It was strange as it looked as though it was a missile and that it was intended to hit or scare them and all he could do was get them to rush over to a hiding place nearby, behind a large boulder.

They were shrouded in moon dust, after they managed to cover themselves from being seen, and he realized that they might be able hide in the deep regions of moon dust, as they had oxygen supplies, and he gasped again at what would happen when they ran out, and he just rested back and left it, and he considered if some alien species would find his remains there one day, frozen and in an unaltered condition, and be their only alien discovery, like them finding aliens in spacesuits dead on the moon, and he wondered if he would end up in an alien museum.

The landscape was gray everywhere and was untouched by water or life, and was empty and hollow with no sound, and had a deep haunting silence in its environment that went further than any desolate snow landscapes. He was on another world with another star! An empty lost world lost in the depths of space, absent of life, and a dead world.

Something startled him, over at his side, as he dreamily listened to the others giving their thoughts on what had happened, and he and Orwell struggled to grasp what was there, and focus on anything, and they altered their faceplates back to normal, for normal levels of light, and he saw what looked like a sheet of blackness, which had not been there before, and he heard Orwell gasp at it.

Orwell leapt on his feet, and held his hands over his eyes, shading them, and shouted, “It’s the gateway … It has to be the only way to leave …”

They watched him rush away, attempting to run, but making vast leaps over the low gravity world, and they decided to follow him at their normal speed, and as they approached it Cronenberg was tempted to run to it but avoided it, and wondered what the hell would happen next, and gasped at what the future would be and if they could survive the encounter.

 

Chapter 13

 

The Moon Station

 

Echoes of the astronauts’s startled cries and the remains of their last conversations swirled through his mind, and he attempted to recognize what was actually occurring about him as he exploded out the universe, and he tried give himself a proper scientific account of it this time, especially if he survived!

It looked as if the gateway had followed them to the moon, but it had been there already and he could not grasp why it had left them there and returned.

He sensed again that something was chasing them, and it had not properly detected them and that it was attempting to check what they were, and he knew that something else was there was covering what they were and their presence, and he wondered if it had put them there and if it was why it had put them there, and he sensed there was a powerful reason and it might tell them.

The universe seemed to explode with energy about him and he sensed that they were the chosen ones and that something incredible would occur that was one of the greatest occurrences to occur since the beginning of the universe, and that it had been created for it, and that it would one day replace the other that was chasing them through the universe.

For some reason his mind seemed to remember it as though it had been put there to stay there, and he knew that he would always remember it, no matter what occurred.

Powerful stars exploded through colossal black tunnel shooting through the universe, stunning him with its brilliance and majestic creation, and a colossal vortex of trillions of straight lines magically blasted by, and he studied it for a long time and realized that he had no proper bodily presence, and he slowly lost consciousness, as though entering an altered sleep state.

He sensed something, and he realized he was at another destination! Something of ancient origins was there.

For a moment all six of them stood in complete darkness, trying to see what they had entered, and a vague light emerged, and Cronenberg examined Orwell and was surprised that he now looked confident, and he wondered if he had something planned and what it could be, and wondered if he had detected something that he had not and what he would do, and he had a weird sensation of something happening, and he examined himself to see if there was anything different about him now!

It was incredible! It had only been hours ago that he had been sleeping, and it was as if it was days ago, and he realized how little he remembered of things! All their minds and bodies were affected by the gateway and what they had experienced, and he even recalled losing consciousness and he could not fully recall anything after it! It felt like an incredible amount of time had passed, and he wondered if time had been altered, and if they had traveled through time, and he realized that it could have been a time effect of the gateway!

He realized that he had actually survived though, and what must be the most dangerous anything that he had undertaken, and he realized that he could have actually avoided the whole lot by doing other things, and he wondered if he would have ended up there anyway, and had even been waiting for them.

The astronauts searched everywhere about them for anything that showed why they were there, and what was there, and he searched for Orwell as he thought if anyone could find answers he was the one to do it.

The blackness about him reminded him of an empty region of space, and he examined it in awe, wondering if it was somehow representing something, to show them something, but he could not grasp anything and knew it was something else.

In a region of blackness he spotted something shift, where Orwell was, and Orwell’s eyes adjusted and Cronenberg saw a faint blue radiance, which he considered as a blue star, and that it might be a section of sky or somewhere and he made a closer examination of his surroundings by feeling around him, like Rosenberg was doing, at another region, and he immediately felt it was something artificial, and part of some form of structure, and he felt the strange floor, with his thick spacesuit boots, and he watched Orwell lift up his faceplate and slowly breathe in air there and nodded to them that it was breathable, and he slowly copied him and smelt a strange odor, and a little dizziness, and just ordered the astronauts to copy him to save their oxygen supplies.

With it off he heard a faint vibration from something and felt it running through a wall when he touched it and he tried to realize what it was, and what material it was made of, and wondered if he could get a sample of it and if it was worth anything, but he never bothered as he did not know what it was and if it did anything, and could not remove anything as it was too solid!

He returned to staring at where the faint blue radiance was as Orwell and Rosenberg shoved something into the wall and as more light came in he realized that he was actually in some form of room, and had been looking through a crack in a form of entrance to the structure.

For a second his emotions ran amok thinking of what incredible things could be there and what their voyage through the universe could give them, even if it had them on the brink of existence, but the spectacular views of the universe were worth it!

In the darkness he felt an eerie sensation that the place was stranger than he thought, and he sensed a hidden presence somewhere, as though something was nearby, and he wondered if it was what was in the gateway, and why they had not been put somewhere else, and he marched forward through the entrance as Orwell and Rosenberg watched there, and he realized by their reactions how strange it was, as they would normally have just marched in!

Strange lights blasted out at him everywhere from things he could not see, blinding him in the surrounding blackness, and he examined flashes and beams of radiance!

He staggered in and it became more and more perceptible and he saw a room full of beaming colored lights and controls and he examined how strange it was, and clearly designed for some alien creature, and that it had a strange form of claw, and he even spotted scratch marks where it had scratched the bottom of a complex control panel, and he tried to examine it in the dim light to see what it was, but nothing indicated anything and gave anything away as to what it was for.

Suddenly he spotted Orwell and Rosenberg over at something at his side and he spotted speckles in the darkness, and he moved over to them, and realized that he was glaring out at the stars of deep space, and he saw the ground below, outside the structure, and he realized where he was! He was actually on a moon station in the depths of the stars!

He searched through the blur of controls in the dim room behind him, only lighted by controls, looking for anything familiar now he knew what the structure was, wondering if they should avoid touching anything.

He realized it was actually out in the deepest depths of a group of stars! Further than any human had been before, and many galaxies away from the Earth!

“Where do you think this place is?” Rosenberg moaned, searching about the landscape outside, trying to find something that could give him a vague clue to something.

“If it is a race of aliens like humans,” Orwell replied, firmly, “I’d say that it had to be part of their civilization, on a moon, and for carrying out research!”

“There could be a planet nearby!” Cronenberg continued.

“It seems to be abandoned, left out in the depths of space, endlessly trapped in time and space.”

“We can check it and see if we find anything of value here!” Rosenberg announced.

“Value to us trapped in space?” Orwell asked. “Or value to us if we get back home!”

Rosenberg shrugged, and followed Cronenberg going back to the controls, where the other three members of the crew were standing examining them, discussing them, and they tried activating one, and they all watched strange reactions about them.

Their thirst for knowledge was increasing and they insisted in checking everything that they could for the slightest clue to what it was for and why they had been put there, and Cronenberg suddenly spotted the room that they had appeared in and realized that it was strange and he attempted to examine it in the dim light from the controls, and discovered that the entrance to the gateway had appeared there and he wondered if they should enter it, as they would eventually, and Cronenberg sensed that it had reappeared for them to reenter the gateway.

 

Chapter 14

 

The Monster

 

While the gateway shifted them through galaxies at one point it altered considerably and Cronenberg instantly started examining what was happening, and they were being shifted somewhere else, and he detected the other presence and its danger, and he realized the gateway systems stretched everywhere through the whole universe, and called the Dyson Stargate.

Even though he did not know what was happening he knew it was their only chance of survival, and, as they shot through the outskirts of a small concentrated galaxy, seeing it as a faint ghost shape of large celestial objects shooting by, he and the other members of the crew were surprised to see a cloud of energy form far behind them, and it was their first visional detection of what was there, and he looked for a central point of it. He was sure that something was there, and he looked for anything else, or if it was being projected from somewhere. Yet there was nothing anywhere that could produce anything like it!

What could exist in a gateway? What were they up against?

It never accelerated further! It hung there thickening, directly behind them, swirling around in intelligent ways, with intelligent formations, and as he watched it to see if it was being controlled or controlling itself. Yet he was sure it was a form of probe attempting to check them out!

He mentally detected it doing something, and wondered what would happen next, and he watched Orwell examine it, as they all spun through space, as mind-bending lines of stars shot by, as they accelerated faster at a hyper speed, and he was sure Orwell was going to say something. He was sure he was not fully able to fully explain its presence, and how it got there, but had an idea.

The probe shifted creepily, forming a more turbulent thickening formation, forming shapes in itself, and they checked it with horror as well as excitement.

Strange sights and silent sounds began manifesting everywhere about them – like partially visible life forms were appearing – and it was forming something around them.

Strange glows and swirls formed and reformed, while the energy around them increased and increased, as though something was manifesting, and creating itself about them, almost in a bubble formation, surrounding them.

 

Chapter 15

 

The Living Jungle

 

They woke on the ground in a strange jungle landscape, and they examined what was there with interest, wondering what was there and why it was there, and in the trees formations above Cronenberg saw a strange weird cloudless ivory sky, and he spotted an easy way to climb up, using strange formations like branches, and he realized how peaceful it was there and he rested on a boulder, and smelt a scent in the atmosphere, which he could not recall, and he suddenly detected it was an animal smell.

He knew it was not a normal jungle, for some reason, and it was not like any other jungle that they had been in, and he suddenly saw Anders climb up the tree he had been examining, which he found a way to climb up, and he realized he was taking the route up it that he saw.

The others all stood looking up at him as he reached the top, while they shaded their eyes with their hands, and Cronenberg took a good look around and saw their problem and that they could not see through the tree formations and ground vegetation further than a short distance, and it confused him and them, as they for one never knew where on the landscape of the world they were and where they should go to, and he could not grasp how they would leave there and if they should just remain there.

Anders looked out, at the top, and shouted down that the jungle region vanished at a region, away in the distance, and he pointed in the direction, and Cronenberg noted the direction, and tried using a compass he had to see if there was a magnetic pole on the world that they could use to navigate, and he found there was a weak movement at the direction Anders had pointed at, and he examined it surprised and wondered what it was, as it seemed different from the Earth’s magnetic field.

It surprised him how swift Anders was at climbing, and that he had some experience, and he realized how things had changed.

Cronenberg realized how much the place reminded him of the Earth and he allowed his spacesuit to fill its air tanks with air, as some of the other astronauts were doing, and he was amazed at the environment and how he reacted to it instinctively, realizing how much he missed being out in the open on the Earth.

He suddenly felt something hidden below was on his ankle and that he had noticed it before, and he wondered if it was one of the species of the world and he realized that he had not even heard a noise on the world or seen any form of animals and it seemed strange, and it was also strange as nobody had encountered any normal life forms on other worlds and they were now, only days from being on Mars, treating such things as normal, and he gasped at what could be there and felt something grab his ankle and he jerked, and he looked but in the dense undergrowth around his legs he saw nothing, and never felt it anymore, and ignored it.

What sort of world were they on? What did its empty silence mean? He could not hear anything away into the distance, and realized that it could be in a cold region and wintertime there and that the silence was due to it having been a deep cold winter there.

The others reacted by almost whispering to each other, and when Anders climbed down on the ground from a lower branch Cronenberg took them away in the direction where Anders had spotted the jungle ending.

As he walked away his leg became painful, and he felt something rapped around it, and tried to pull the thing off it, which looked like a plant or vine around the lower part of his knee but as he pulled it hard it grabbed him harder and it felt like an animal. It was strong and went down his leg.

He checked a front pocket of his spacesuit for something to remove it. Yet it was too close to his leg for him to use anything that would damage his spacesuit, as it would be dangerous if it was damaged. In the end he grabbed a sharp piece of rock on the ground and struggled to cut it off, and when it fell he lifted his leg up and stamped down hard on it.

“Did you see that?” Rosenberg announced, warning him of something he seemed to notice he had missed, as he moved up to his side, and he marched out in front of the group, and he looked out where he pointed, but saw nothing, and stopped and looked more firmly.

“What?” he finally asked, wondering what he was suggesting.

He suddenly saw a small tree that Rosenberg was looking at and that it was moving about at the roots, as if struggling to do something, and he examined it more, and to his surprise saw it was attempting to move itself towards them and he saw it carefully moving its large clump of roots over the ground.

On the ground near him he saw a glimmer off a rock and he picked it up and examined what it was and saw it had a shiny stone in it, and he examined it to see if it had any value, and he removed the shiny stone, from the chunk of crumbling rock, and watched Rosenberg trying to remove something from his leg.

At the side of his eyes he saw Anders pick up a similar large rock, and as he examined his rock he watched him hurl it at the small tree, which was moving faster towards them, and he watched it seeing what it would do, and watched the rock smash into its tree shape, and to his surprise it jumped at another tree close to it in Anders direction, like a life form, and the other tree fought back as it attacked it furiously and they all stood with their mouths open as the two tree life forms fought each other with all their strength, and other trees and areas of vegetation joined in, and the whole area around them seemed to react to it, and started preparing itself for something, and a massive a riot of tree shapes broke out between all the tree life forms, with the bottoms of many still embedded in the ground.

Everything around them seemed to be smashing, grabbing, and fighting in a frenzy of fighting, and fighting to the death, and he wondered how such life forms could survive so close to each other, and he started examining them trying to grasp something!

The fighting life forms spread out across their sides like a wave in a lake, with a speed they could not understand.

All the life forms at every level going down into the ground were attacking each other, and he kept trying to grasp how they were so responsive to the reactions. When they moved swiftly away to an unaffected region they felt it below them, under their feet, they seemed to sense the tension in what was below, and brace themselves, preparing for the silent wave of savagery to fully reach their place, and he was sure their main level of intelligence and brain area was below the ground.

As they attempted to move forwards all the life forms about them grabbed at their legs.

A sudden silent rustling and whipping noise came towards them as they rushed away.

When they looked back they saw the entire jungle fighting, and entire trees jumping at each other at every place visible, in an immense frenzy of activity. Even the lower areas were now wrestling and struggling with each other.

When the ground below them started vibrating furiously and underground plants and roots started becoming furious they started running fast, just avoiding hitting things, and started running at full speed for their lives, as they frantically tried to kill them!

 

Chapter 16

 

The Dark World

 

The last shreds of sunlight vanished beneath the trees behind them, swiftly going under the horizon, and a deep black winter night engulfed them, and Cronenberg studied his surroundings over and over trying to explain why the jungle had entirely altered, and in a matter of a few miles, from where they had arrived on the world, the entire jungle, landscape, and temperature had altered incredibly, and he had a hard time believing the life form trees were all gone, and replaced with normal forms of trees.

Though they were gone the place was as deadly as ever, there were deadly tremors blasting through the ground there, and the temperature was still furiously falling, and falling to the temperature on Mars, and rocks from hills regularly came crashing down, smashing into trees, and there were landslides, and tremors had even shaken them off their feet.

Yet the trees were vanishing, and the region Anders had seen from the treetop was appearing, and they still plodded on to get there to get rid of the tree life forms, which they still watched out for, and at the side of their eyes.

The whole place looked different, and he considered if there was something there that the life forms were avoiding, and he wondered if it was a far greater danger to them! Yet he was sure it was the tremors, when they were at their worst!

He regularly stopped and looked for miles fascinated, seeing endless miles of damaged smashed up landscape, and he realized it was some form of fault line, and perhaps an early Earth one, when its thickness was not great, and starting to harden, with thin areas of crust with vast and powerful tremors.

They were now like an army group, after the jungle attack and vicious tremors, who had far more experience in searching, examining, documenting, and detecting what was there, and what others might miss.

It was bringing them back to life after a long length of inactivity, and lack of anything of interest, and he could not recall ever doing anything like it before. At times he still could not believe that he was on another world, lost in space galaxies away from the solar system!

In a matter of an hour the entire place was deep in snow and it shrouded all the hills and tree formations and they could barely believe that they had landed in a jungle, and it had been like a really hot jungle location, and he realized the dangers, and he wondered what a world with its climate changes would be like living on, and what the animals would be like.

The snow landscape was untouched by any intelligent life forms, but they had only seen that location of the world, and at times it was empty of sound, and like Mars, but with a deep silence that he had only heard in thick winter snow landscapes. It reminded him of what he thought another alien world would be like! An empty desolate world, and lost away in the stars!

What was shocking was they could not even get lost as they never knew what the world or surrounding stars were like, or where anything was, and all they could do is lose their way going to where there were no trees at all, and he was unsure if they even knew accurately where that would lead to. All that they had was their faith in a gateway emerging and taking them away.

He never knew what was actually happening and what was there was doing and what its intention was, and what the eventual outcome would be.

There was nothing to recognize anywhere and he watched some of the astronauts attempt to pick up any communications with their spacesuit equipment, and eventually give up.

They all started getting too exhausted, wading and wading, through deep snow areas, and not recognizing anything, and he realized it was time they looked for shelter, and perhaps somewhere with some significant to rest and spend the night, and while he searched everywhere, and had the others searched too, and he started to notice a distant and peculiar hum, similar to a distant engine whirling, out at an unknown place, which was shadowing them, and he started trying to grasp the source.

The altered route they took, going to the hum and where there were hills and rock faces, and he was disappointed to find their legs almost becoming stuck in deep bogs of stinking vegetation, buried below the snow there, which started to resemble a form of quicksand, as it grew in depth, and he started to wonder if they could even find somewhere there where they could actually be allowed to shelter, as they were sure as hell not going to stay under the trees or vegetation anywhere, even though they had tested it out there, as there could be some of the life forms hidden away there. There was a definite look of a swamp emerging around them, but the hill became closer and closer, and the only refuge from the cold winter environment, and the depth became deeper and deeper, just as they were about to make it to safety!

A cold haze edged its way around them and the undergrowth there as well, as though something saw them being trapped there, and they started slowing and calming themselves, preparing for the worst, and allowing themselves to rest and gain energy.

The place and situation was nothing like anything any of them had seen before elsewhere!

He could not get if it was a strange environment about him, something strange existing there, or a combination of things that created reactions.

He watched strange vapor clouds shift within the mist, as if hiding within the mist, and perhaps a form of intelligent mist, always shadowing them – as if probing them, and analyzing them for some purpose.

Nobody said anything and they looked like they were wondering if it had real intelligence, and he noticed some of it around them, and them vaguely watching it linger over deep pools of slime in the mind-bending swamp.

Could it do anything other than probe them? How could it detect them? What did it use to exist? What was it doing there? Did it have some form of animal food source or was it after something else?

As a scientist, as well as many other things, he wished he could get some samples from it, but decided to wait until they had properly checked if it was dangerous.

Gusts of freezing wind blew and withdrew in opposite directions, blowing and sucking, shifting the cloud about, giving him the feeling that something else, invisible and nearby, was breathing over them or something! Something of supernatural or advanced alien origins, but with an animal nature, or something was there and the environment was reacting to its presence or its paranormal powers!

 

Chapter 17

 

The Mist Formation

 

His legs became stuck in deep bogs of freezing icy water, even through his spacesuit, and he wondered if it could damage it, and he knew that they would have to do something soon, and he waited and watched and noticed that the others were mainly waiting for something.

It was then he gasped and realized what he had missed and that the fog formed a perfect square shape right about them, with them directly at the center, and it intensified, and he realized that they were trapped.

“Where are we going …?” Anders spluttered, fighting for air, furious that he had been put in such situation.

He stopped and showed how annoyed he was at the way things were going, and started kicking the muck under his feet up and grabbed a clump of it and threw it hard into the square mist cloud and they all watched on with horror and curiosity, and Cronenberg was amazed that it bounced of it, as though repelled by some force within it, and he wondered if it could crush them if it contracted.

“Perhaps it’s a life form trying to protect something over at the hill …” Rosenberg moaned, giving glances about at them and their reactions, and Cronenberg realized that he could be right and that he had not thought of it as a normal life form.

“Where can we go?” Anders continued, wondering what they’d do next. Barely able to realize what the outcome of such a situation would be.

They all stood and examined other areas of the hill they could go to, and they went in a direction that was entirely different and away from where they had been going, and the mist there!

“What’s there?” Anders asked, vaguely confused, not seeing anything but the surrounding square mist cloud getting in the way.

Everyone watched on in horror and confusion when the square mist cloud started altering and rearranging itself, getting ready to do something, and the mist formation also altered at the hill, and it started to move to a new location!

 

Chapter 18

 

The Entrance

 

Once they set foot on the hill, out of nowhere, a light emerged in the distant mist formation, and Cronenberg stood considering if it was going to contact them or attack them, as a first contact situation or something else, but he never fully knew what to do, and if it was something entirely new.

Its radiance pulsated like a motorized life form, magically illuminating areas of the hill, stretching shadows from formations everywhere about their front as it intensified.

While he silently observed loud thuds of something he thought it was the earthquakes reoccurring but after listening to it intensely it became clear it was like something of immense weight shifting around, and he considered if it was still reacting to them or it carrying out what it normally did, and he realized that he could not tell as he had never heard anything like it.

Out of nowhere, other lights emerged through the undergrowth nearer, with their radiance pulsating like living things, magically illuminating everything far more brightly, blinding their eyes with intense beams, lighting everything about them everywhere and fully showing them their surroundings and all its detail, and they decided to scurry away to the most distant location.

While they moved away faster he silently observed deep pounds and creature sounds with immense weight coming at them, out of view, causing them to scurry away faster and faster.

They furiously moved their legs in and out of bogs and snow until the finally reached rocky regions, and they all became confused and unable fully discover what they were up against!

Had they failed, and were they to get it for visiting the hill?

They ran almost blindly over rocks and rough ground, rushing through thick tree objects and heavy snow, while heavy beast sounds furiously exploded out, and they occasionally heard smashing objects and heavy boulders tumbling away in their way, like something out of a dark nightmare.

Suddenly Anders shouted, “Look out there!”

“There’s something!” Rosenberg confirmed. “Quick! Move over there! There’s something …”

Over to their side there was a cliff front facing them, almost the only place there without any snow.

For some reason Cronenberg just knew it had to be a place of sanctuary for them, but he started wondering why as he could not see anything!

What was there? Was it just a hill and cliff? Could these things not climb or something?

A deep thud like an explosion appeared just behind them and he studied the area they were going to for anything and suddenly spotted a black region, like a black curtain in the dimness there, and he studied it, seeing them going straight to it, and he felt the ground around him shudder like an earthquake, and he watched Anders and Rosenberg jump into the black curtain and he followed them and realized it was the entrance point of a gateway, and he shot through stars, and he saw the entrance close behind them, as the last person jumped through.

 

Chapter 19

 

The Center of Space

 

Blasts of radiance exploded everywhere stunning Cronenberg, leaving him staggered, and a colossal whirlpool of shifting outlines of globes magically shifted by, and he studied them with the others for a long time and could not grasp what they were, or where he was, as the gateway had entirely altered.

It was like something was trying to find them and something was hiding them in the new gateway, and he could not realize why, and he felt like he was being played around with, by two mad eccentric life forms, playing a deadly game with their prey.

He saw that now they had no body, or proper presence, and were some form of force formation, and were swirling out into a vortex of reshaping energy patterns that replaced reality, with surreal transformations, and were gradually altering to something they could not recognize.

He was mesmerized, and wondered if he was even classified as being alive!

He gave vague gasps as reality magically spun around in patterns, while he wondered how worse the things could get!

Could they actually get trapped there, for all eternity, and was he even underestimating that?

Something grasped his attention ahead, and he studied it, and a white blur emerged in a central region of darkness ahead, as they slightly swirled around, and he grew more interested in it, and wishing it would be an exit, and he started to recognize detail to it as it grew, and they shifted into it, and once within its depths he saw magnificent giant distant stars of the universe blazing out, blending into his surroundings in brilliant magnificent colors.

Spectacular beams of light exploded out, and stars shot to and by him at incredible velocities, and he realized the tremendous speed they were accelerating at, and realized it was a different form of gateway with a far higher velocity.

Space was expanding all across his front, and they shot into it.

The stars filled his entire vision everywhere as magnificent bright white and golden lights, and like a cartoon universe.

Stars turned dazzling, and he could not recognize what forms of stars they were, and he wondered if they had actually entered another universe! Space was so condensed he could not believe the density of the stars everywhere, and he was staggered that they could exist in such a state, without being pulled together, into a colossal explosion.

At his side he spotted Orwell staggered at something and he followed his vision and back at where they had come from and saw the most colossal anything he had ever seen! A colossal black hole was stretching out everywhere, going straight across space, and he actually saw it entering other dimensions and regions beyond the universe, and he realized the true immense speed that they had been traveling at, and that they had just shot through a black hole gateway, the size of a small galaxy.

 

Chapter 20

 

The Mind-Bending Black Hole

 

For a moment Cronenberg was blinded, as a powerful dazzling radiance blinded him, and he thought he had been thrown into somewhere deadly!

The entire sky was filled with trillions upon trillions of magnificent incredible stars everywhere, turning the whole sky a magnificent white and gold, and Cronenberg stood upright with the others, and watched the colossal black hole shift across the sky above, and he realized it had to be the center of an enormous galaxy, and suddenly he realized it was more than that, and it was the central galaxy, and center of the universe, and they were on a world that was going into it, and slowly entering its confines.

The sight was fantastic, and probably the most magnificent sight he had seen, and he sensed mysterious and dangerous things existed out in space there, in the deepest depths of the universe.

Cronenberg stood examining the flat top of the massive mountain they were on, which had to be the highest on the world, and he watched it overlooking the world for immense miles in every direction, going out into distant horizons, and he watched a distant fog blanketing an entire region going into a horizon, which was glowing from some form of sun the world was orbiting.

It was incredible that they could feel the colossal gravity of the black hole from there, and he was astonished!

Its entire massive galaxy seemed to be orbiting it, and he gasped, wondering how they had managed to enter and escape from it, and he gasped at how much power what had put them there had.

For a moment they were all blinded, from a powerful dazzling radiance in space, and they shaded their eyes, and he saw it was a bright sun exploding apart in the depths of space, and he wondered how deadly it was on the world, and how protected they were, and he realized that they were on a large world, with high gravity, and he watched another dazzling radiance of another massive sun explode.

Strange multicolored streaks of starlight exploded through thin regions of fog around them, reminded him of lasers, and in the sky on the horizon massive blinding stars were appearing, as the world’s rotation showed new regions of space.

It was a truly unique world that saw no darkness, and probably would never know it, and he realized it was also a doomed world, and would be destroyed in the black hole.

Stardust fell down from space and covered everything, including their boots, and lower spacesuits, and he imagined the mind-bending landscapes out in space there, on magnificent worlds, and he watched an altering mist surrounding them, and he wondered what the hell the place was originally like.

 

Chapter 21

 

The Ancient World

 

They found parts of an ancient structure buried beneath sand and debris from the sky, from the vast mysterious galaxy surrounding the doomed world.

There had been an advanced civilization there once, and what was left of a structure was buried away in a region nearby, on the edge of a vast cliff face, going straight down for miles.

The area was now had vast nearby suns overhead, and in the brightness Cronenberg spotted the shuttle crew excavating an interesting part of a structure, and he wondered what they were up to, and started examining what they had revealed and stood back and started to see how advanced the race had been, and realized there could be something of value buried away in its interior.

The air at the incredibly high region was fresh and breathable, and he believed the mountain was not as high up as it had seemed, and that the area across their front there was an immense cavity and that the world’s normal surface was far higher.

He felt the temperature at the area increase, and his spacesuit altered to compensate, and he realized how well his spacesuit controlled its temperature.

There were no clouds, or the mist, and they were glad, as none of them wanted to enter any cloud formations if they had to.

They were lucky to be alive after everything they had been through, and they all now realized the dangers of being in such places and on such a world!

He studied the bright, now warm stars, and observed faraway sand being blown about by gusts of wind. The area was like an oasis on the world, but he was unsure what the rest of the world was like in its different regions.

Even though the world was doomed to enter the black hole and be destroyed he was sure most of the world had something wrong with it and he tried to prove it by studying the landscape in greater detail than he had, looking at places he had missed out, and he was sure it had immense earthquakes that had destroyed vast regions.

He was surprised when a creature of the world appeared and darted by, close by, examining them, looked like a miniature monster, and he examined it, looking for why it did.

A structure the others started entering looked primitive, but he was sure it was advanced, and it was the fact it was buried away like it was.

He strolled through heaps of sand entering the structure, and he wondered if the Earth would ever fall and turn into the place, and have beings like them from other worlds exploring their remains.

Gusts of air, like breezes coming in from the colossal stars, threw sand and red dried out bushes about wildly, into different directions, as if unable to decide where to go, and he wondered why there was no sign of rain, and if that was what was wrong with the world, and that all the water was nearly gone.

The temperature was now higher, and he rested and watched a small lizard-like creature rushing away, showing them it was there, and he heard others.

In the interior of a structure they entered an underground chamber and he heard underground creatures burrowing behind the walls, as they burrowed through hard ground and sand.

Under heaps of stones and debris they had uncovered a form of skeleton, looking like a fossil, with close resemblances to an upright ape creature, and he was staggered that anything there could be close to looking like a human, and he uncovered its skull, covered in sand, and finally proved it had a far more unusual shape, which disappointed some of the others, and he wondered why they wanted it to be like a human, and he realized that they might want to settle somewhere on the world or another, if they could not return, as they would eventually be killed by something, as the dangers were immense, and seemed to be increase.

He believed the skeleton was of an inhabitant that had lived in and had built the structure they were in, and it surprised him that they thought it could have been more advanced than them, and he realized that there could be far more advanced versions of humans, perhaps in city type regions there, and still alive, and they could have a highly advanced civilization and he started to realize the dangers that there were there.

 

Chapter 22

 

The Extraterrestrial Castle

 

At the edge of the cliff further along there was a structure like an ancient monastery, where they found water from a stream, and they managed to find food, which they had found the alien civilization had eaten, and they collected supplies, water supplies and they rested and tried to find the entrance to the structure, as if they were to stay there it was best that they were inside it and protected from the outer dangers.

Though they could not find any entrance and they started examining regions of the ground below it, as there could have been an area below it that was covered over, by the ground building up along its sides over decades, and they kept searching until they found the entrance was above, and it was lowered by forms of ropes, so it was better protected.

They rested below, when the sun of the world was down, even though there was far more light there from the stars blazing out.

They rested staring up at the immense wonders that existed in the sky, and he realized the speed the world was actually traveling at, and the pull of the black hole was incredible, and he was sure the world had far less time left than he had imagined and he watched the debris of old worlds come shooting through the sky faster than he had ever seen meteorites. Some appeared and hit there so fast that he never saw them and all he saw was their impact, and now and then he saw them approach in deep space.

He was sure the structure was a castle they were under, and an alien castle.

Some form of alien race had to have built it there to defend it, and perhaps had been at war!

What surprised him was the way it had been built and that it was far more different from the last structure, and he was sure the builders of it had been far different, as he could not imagine the other being that they had found the skeleton of actually building it, and it seemed a far more advanced species that built it.

It also amazed him how close to a human castle it was in places, and he realized he really wanted to get inside it, and he thought through everything he had seen there for something and recalled an old rope nearby, and rushed away and got.

He tied a loop in it and swung it around his head and threw it at where there were entrance ropes lying in a pile over the flat castle roof bricks, and kept throwing it at it and retrying, trying to throw it around it, until he got lucky and he managed to pull it down, and realized it was not the advanced way up he had imagined, and it was just a form of rope ladder.

At the top he immediately thought no sane life form could have built it, and the castle bricks were not even cemented together, and the roof, buried under layers of stardust and debris, was made of unstable planks and wood that he was sure could not properly hold his weight, and looked as though they had started rotting through!

Rosenberg and then Orwell joined him when they saw him and they climbed up, listening to all his scrabbling around sounds at the top, watching what they did on the badly made rope ladder.

Anything staying in it must have been mad or extremely determined to avoid something deadly there!

After examinations of it and the immense cliff at the other side it amazed them how it could have stayed up and not crashed down below long ago! All its giant boulder were chunks of rocks fixed together, and barely straight, and stayed up with its weight, and Cronenberg realized that there were no major earthquakes, but he was sure immense stellar objects could destroy it, especially at the velocities they traveled at.

They carefully examined around its thick gray stone walls examining it in detail, over the edges of the roof, and still they found no real way into it, even after carefully examining the whole floor. They spotted small gaps in the roof, for breathing inside, which suggested there was not enough air inside, but going by them not being human they could live on very low amounts of air.

He waded his feet through thick mud covering an area, while trying to see if there was anything below, and he stopped to view the unbelievable sky, which was tremendous there now, and he was sure the immense black hole had actually increased in size, because of the world’s incredible velocity, and it had to be one of the biggest object he had ever seen, and stretched across space like a colossal black galaxy devouring space! Its stars in its confines were all over the outer regions going straight towards it everywhere, and the whole of space seemed to being pulled into it.

He stood at the edge of the structure, over the cliff face, like he was standing on the top of the world, as though on the highest area on the world below, and he wondered if the aliens that had built it had been or were the main race of the world. Yet nothing showed their civilization and technology, and it was like the remains of a last civilization that never advanced, and he gasped again at the height that it was over the world, under his feet, and the sheer drop of it astounded him, going off into the distance.

Rosenberg stamped on the surface of the roof to check its safety, and show what his thoughts about it, and Orwell joined in